Machine Translated by Google

B1318E RE

1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The safety of work during the operation of an armored personnel carrier is ensured by solid knowledge

with the personnel of the device, the rules of operation and maintenance of the armor

transporter Safety requirements must be observed under any conditions, regardless

from the urgency of the work to be performed.

When operating an armored personnel carrier, the following requirements must be observed without
dangers:

- troubleshooting should be carried out with a proper tool only when it is turned off

rated voltage of the on-board network;

- when the crew leaves the armored personnel carrier, the battery switch will be turned off;

- install the armored personnel carrier in the parking lot so that the necessary clearances remain

and for quick withdrawal of ego in case of fire;

- when carrying out loading and unloading work related to ammunition to be observed

precautions taken during explosive and fire-hazardous work;

- monitors the correctness of electrical wiring, preventing open and short circuits;

- keep the firefighting equipment of the armored personnel carrier ready for use.

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- transports people and unsecured cargo on the body of an armored personnel carrier;

- directs the aiming mark at people with the laser rangefinder turned on;

- start the pre-start heater and the engine in rooms not equipped by you

heavy ventilation;

- use open fire inside the armored personnel carrier;

- operate an armored personnel carrier with leaking fuel and oil pipes

wires;

- stores extraneous fire-hazardous objects in the armored personnel carrier, for example, about

oily rags, covers and overalls.

In addition, during the operation of the armored personnel carrier, the crew must lead

with the instructions on safety measures set forth in the relevant sections of this document

Operating manuals.

When handling ammunition, observe the following precautions:

- do not allow ammunition to fall;

- transports and transports ammunition only in a cap or in ammunition boxes;

- store ammunition in the shade in the summer, protecting it from the effects of sunlight;

- protect ammunition from moisture;

- open boxes with ammunition only before equipping the tape.

1-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Armored personnel carrier BTR-4 (hereinafter referred to as the vehicle) is a four-axle, floating combat vehicle

a car with a wheel formula of 8x8, which has weapons, armored protection, is equipped

seats for the placement and operation of the combat squad in the composition of the vehicle commander,

the driver, the operator of the combat module and motorized riflemen (paratroopers).

The machine is intended for the transportation of personnel of mechanized pods

divided ground troops and their fire support in battle and capable of performing their functions

around the clock in warm and cold climate zones, regardless of time of year and weather,

when operating on roads with different surfaces and in off-road conditions.

The machine has high mobility and is able to follow tanks, from the movement of pre

overcome trenches, trenches and water obstacles. For conducting a combat calculation of fire from personal

weapons (machine guns and machine guns) the body of the machine is equipped with embrasures, as well as hatches in

hatch covers of the fighting compartment.

There are places in the car for storing weapons of the combat squad - submachine guns, bullets

grenades, signal pistol, cartridges for a signal pistol, hand anti-tank

grenade launcher and additional ammunition to arm the combat module.

In order to ensure external communication, a transceiver, ultra-short, is installed in the car

cowave radio station. Internal communication is provided by internal communication equipment

switching, it is possible to connect the subscriber outside the machine. Definition of

the ordinate of the location of the car is made with the help of the radio installed in the car

navigation equipment.

For camouflage in the area, reducing the possibility of aiming when detected

enemy in combat conditions, the machine is equipped with thermal smoke equipment (TDA), sy

the stem of setting the curtain, deforming coating.

The machine is equipped with devices to protect the combat crew and equipment from weather

effects of damaging factors of a nuclear explosion, poisonous substances, bacterial agents, etc

from radioactive dust when moving through the contaminated area. To extinguish the fire in front

fire-fighting equipment is viewed.

For protection against cumulative grenades of hand-held anti-tank grenade launchers of the RPG-7 type

the machine is equipped with protective lattice screens.

External lighting and road signaling devices are placed outside the car,

wave-reflecting shield, chance instrument (shovel, saw, crowbar, axe), tow ropes.

On the starboard side, in the reserved compartment, there is a cooling unit for the air conditioner. IN

in the aft part of the car body, behind the wheels of the fourth bridge, there are installed water pipes

residents The traction-coupling device and the pulley block are located on the aft sheet.

2-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Structurally, the machine consists of a combat module and a chassis. General view of the car in front
shown in Figures 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4.

1 – combat module; 2 – chassis; 3 – elements of fastening of protective lattice screens Figure 2.1
– General view of the machine without lattice screens (left front view)

Figure 2.2 – General view of the machine without lattice screens (right rear view)

2-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 2.3 – General view of the machine with lattice screens (left front view)

Figure 2.4 – General view of the machine with lattice screens (right rear view)

2-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

According to the purpose and location of mechanisms and equipment, the chassis is divided into three parts

divisions (Figure 2.5): control department, motor-transmission department, and combat department

department The control department and the combat department communicate with each other with help

passage-climbing 2, which serves for transitions between inhabited compartments and evacuation

crew and troops, as well as for carrying out work in the maintenance of engine systems.

1 – management department; 2 – passage-climb; 3 – combat unit; 4 – motor and transmission part

laziness

Figure 2.5 - Location of the separate chassis of the machine

For the boarding and disembarking of the driver and the commander in the control department, bo are used

folding doors or hatches in the roof above the control room. For the landing and disembarkation of the landing force is

aft doors or hatches are used in the upper sheet of the hull above the combat compartment. On

handrails and footrests located next to the doors ensure the safety of boarding and exit

crew and landing sites.

2.1 Department of management

The control department occupies the entire front part of the machine up to the engine compartment. IN

the workplaces of the driver and the machine commander are not located there.

The driver's workplace (Figures 2.6 and 2.7) is located on the left in the direction of movement of the machine

It is equipped with an adjustable seat and controls for the movement of the machine.

To the left of the driver's seat, below the wheel arch, there is an air reducer 7 (Fig.

2-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

No. 2.6), brake valve 8 of the parking brake, installation 9 of the TNPO-168V monitoring device,
block of 4 tire cranes (Figure 2.7).

1 – fuel supply control pedal; 2 – lighting and heating control panel; 3 – control panel for selecting driving modes; 4 –
fuel distribution valve; 5 – engine start control panel; 6 – driver's seat; 7 – air reducer; 8 – parking brake brake valve; 9
– installation of the TNPO-168B surveillance device; 10 – hatch for access to the manual priming pump; 11 – steering
wheel; 12 – driver's shield; 13 – the handle of the mechanism for lifting armored front window covers; 14 – heater and
air conditioner unit; 15 – sector of manual fuel supply; 16 – brake pedal

Figure 2.6 – Driver's workplace

In front of the driver's seat 6 (Figure 2.6) there is a steering wheel 11 s combined
with a switch adjustable in height and angle of inclination. In front of the steering column
there is a driver's panel 12 with control and measuring devices, signal lamps
and management bodies. To the left of the driver's shield is a block of manometers. Below, under the shield
of the driver and the steering wheel, pedal 1 of the fuel supply control and pedal 16 are located

2-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

brakes To the right of the driver's shield is sector 15 of manual fuel supply and unit 14 oto
heater and air conditioner.
The air defense control unit (item 2, figure 2.7) is fixed on the front panel of the hull, between the front

washed glass above the heater and air conditioner unit. In the upper sheet of the hull, between the hatches
of the driver and commander, fan 1 is mounted, the cabin is located near the fan
lamp 7.

1 – fan; 2 – air defense control unit; 3 – installation of the TVN-5 device; 4 – block of tire cranes; 5 – protection and
switching unit; 6 – block AS-37; 7 – cabin lamp

Figure 2.7 – Driver's workplace

For monitoring the road situation, the car has front and side bullets
resistant glasses, which, if necessary, are covered with armored covers. When closing
those armored covers the driver uses for observation during the day, extracted from the stack 9
(Figure 2.6), periscopic device TNPO-168B. The device is used for driving at night
night vision TVN-5, installed instead of the driver's device TNPO-168B. Tab 3
the device is located on the partition of the motor-transmission compartment between the seats
driver and commander (Figure 2.7).
To the right of the driver's seat are located (Figure 2.6) the lighting control panel
heating, remote control for 3 driving modes with an indicator panel, fuel distribution handle
of the pouring crane and the control panel for starting the engine 5. In the floor of the control unit there is
hatch for access to the manual fuel pump.

They are located behind the driver (on the partition of the engine and transmission compartment).
block 5 of protection and switching and block AS-37 (item 6)

To the right of the driver's seat is the commander's workplace.

2-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Directly in front of the commander's seat, on the reclining bracket, a raspolo

control panel PU-03-05 (pos. 4), video monitor 5 and commander's panel 7, and above them ras
embrasure 8 of the commander and remote control 9 of the collective defense system are laid. To the left is the video

below is the reception indicator 6 of the radio navigation equipment. To prevent

mud from the winch cable entering the control compartment is equipped with a protective shield 1.

1 – winch protective shield; 2 – places for storing property; 3 – commander's seat; 4 – control panel PU-03-05; 5 –
video monitor; 6 – reception indicator of radio navigation equipment; 7 – commander's console; 8 – embrasure of the
commander; 9 – remote control of the collective protection system

Figure 2.8 – Workplace of the machine commander

Block 3 is located to the right of the commander's seat, on the starboard side of the hull (Figure 2.9).
indication of dose power, block 1 intercom device and block of fuses (in the figure
not shown), and on the right wheel niche there is a tank with drinking water and a radio station.

2-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – intercom unit; 2 – temperature regulator; 3 – dose power indication block

Figure 2.9 – Workplace of the machine commander

Behind the commander's seat (on the bulkhead of the engine and transmission compartment) there was a raspolo

wife water control unit, 2 temperature controller, electric co

units

In the bow part of the hull, in the control compartment, there is a winch with pipelines

hydraulic drive and cable release device, hydraulic drive for lifting the wave-reflecting shield,

windshield washer tank, etc.

2.2 Combat detachment

The combat compartment is located behind the engine-transmission compartment and occupies the whole

aft part of the hull. Directly behind the partitions is the motor-transmission compartment

the workplace of the BM operator (hereinafter referred to as the operator) is located here (figures 2.10

and 2.11).

Behind the operator's workplace 1 (Figure 2.11) is the main volume of the combat unit

nia, in which there are landing work stations with individual hanging seats

we 7, stacking personal property and weapons of the landing party (not shown in the figure), stacking 8 additional

of ammunition to the combat module, fire extinguishers 9. To monitor the area

paratroopers use periscopic devices 5, for conducting fire by paratroopers from scoreboards

of weapons, loopholes 6 are used in the sides of the hull, the rear door, and in the hatches of the hull.

2-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – video monitor; 2 – the operator's console; 3 – control panel PU-03-05; 4 – places for arranging property; 5 –
headset of the operator; 6 – operator's seat; 7 – stacking of additional ammunition to the machine gun; 8 – stacking
additional ammunition to the grenade launcher; 9 – protective partition of the FVU; 10 – rotary support

Figure 2.10 - Operator's workplace

Individual suspended landing seats can be installed in two positions:

"combat" and "transport" (figure 2.5 shows the combat position, figure 2.11 shows
transport position). In the "combat" sitting position, a comfortable ride is ensured
nie of fire through the loopholes, and in the "transport" sitting position, convenient po
garden of paratroopers for recreation. To ensure installation of six seats in the position "by
bracket 2 serves as a "combat"
Trans aggregates are located under the floor of the living space and under the floor of the transition-laza

missions and control systems: bridges and cardan transmissions, water pump drive gear

motor, batteries and fuel tank. there is a drain valve. In the floor
the combat compartment has hatches: for access to the bridges, drain valve and fuel tank
ku.

2-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Along the right side of the hull (in the passageway and combat compartment) is placed the ukled
ka 4 equipment and personal protective equipment, and behind the seats of the paratroopers - stowage of additional ammunition to

cannons and anti-tank missiles. Behind, on the left wheel niche, there is a tank for working fluid
hydrosystems of water propulsion, first aid kit.

1 – operator's workplace; 2 – a bracket for installing a paratrooper seat in a “combat style”, 3 – a removable motor
partition; 4 – arrangement of tools and property; 5 – periscopic observation device; 6 – landing embrasure; 7 –
individual suspended paratrooper seat; 8 – stacking additional ammunition to the gun; 9 - fire extinguishers

Figure 2.11 - Combat compartment

The combat module installed on the machine is designed to combat armored personnel carriers
and non-armored, ground and low-flying low-speed targets. Combat module
equipped with a separate weapons complex on a platform,
stabilized in two planes, as well as an optical-television sighting complex.
This allows solving a wide range of combat tasks in the offensive and defense, day and night, in
various road and climatic conditions.

2-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Work with the module as part of the combat vehicle is carried out by both the operator and the commander

in "Double" mode. Reloading the cannon, switching the supply of shells, reloading the machine gun

it can be produced from the operator's workplace.

2.3 Motor and transmission department

The motor-transmission compartment (Figures 2.7 and 2.8) is located on the port side behind

management department. It is separated from the living space by removable airtight walls

towns In the motor-transmission compartment there is an engine with an attendant

we are systems, transmission units and parts of traffic control systems.

1 – partition; 2 – transmission oil tank; 3 – input reducer; 4 – radiators; 5 – engine; 6 – air defense cylinders; 7 – MTO
roof; 8 – air cylinders; 9 – water pumping pump

Figure 2.7 – Motor-transmission compartment (view from the side of the control compartment)

2-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Engine 5 is located above the second gangway 6 (Figure 2.8) on the port side on
frame 8 (Figure 2.8). With the help of input reducer 3 (Figure 2.7), located in front
engine, the engine is connected to automatic transmission 1 (Figure 2.8). Over
transmission oil tank 2 (Figure 2.7) is located by the input gear. Behind the engine
air cleaner 2 is located (Figure 2.8). There is a distributor under the air cleaner
box 4 (Figure 2.8). The motor-transmission compartment is closed from above
the existing roof MTO 7 (Figure 2.7), in which radiators 4 of the cooling system are located
as well as the flow part of the ejector cooling system. In addition, in
MTO contains 8 cylinders for compressed air, 6 air defense cylinders (Figure 2.7), a reducer
drives 5 (Figure 2.8), steering parts 7 (Figure 2.8), hydraulic booster tank 3
steering wheel, pipelines of hydraulic systems. Water is pumped out from the bottom of the housing with the help of a water pump

of the floating pump 9 (Figure 2.7).

1 – automatic transmission; 2 – air purifier; 3 – tank of the hydraulic system of the steering amplifier, winch and wave-
reflecting shield; 4 – distribution box; 5 – drive gear reducer; 6 – the second passage bridge; 7 – steering; 8 – power
plant frame;

Figure 2.8 – Motor-transmission compartment (left view)

2-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

3.1 General data

Machine type................................................... ................................ wheeled, four-axle with all

with driving wheels, closed,

floating

Wheel formula ................................................... ....................... 8x8

The total weight of the machine with anti-bullet protection,

tons, no more ....................................... ................................................. 21 ,9+0,66

The total weight of the machine with installed additional protection,

tons, no more ....................................... ............................. 23.5+0.7

Crew, people................................................... .................................... 3 (the commander is located in

management office near the village

driver; the split operator

gaetsya in combat department; in

ditel - is located in the department

management)

Desant, person ................................................ ................................ 7 (they are located in the combat zone

laziness)

The specific power of the machine with bulletproof protection,

kW/t (hp/t)...................................... ........................................... 17.0 (22.83 )

The specific power of the machine with the installed supplement

body protection, kW/t (hp/t) .................................... .............. 12.6 (17.2)

3.1.1 Main dimensions, mm:

Length ................................................... ........................................... 7878

Width:

- on the body................................................... ................................... 2936

- on elements of additional protection................................... 3600
Height ................................................... ........................................ 3050

Base................................................. ............................................... 4400

Track width................................................... .............................. 2410

Ground clearance (without taking into account stampings on the bottom)......... 475

3.1.2 Operating data

Maximum driving speed, km/h:

- on the highway .............................................. ................................ 110

- afloat................................................... ................................. 8 – 10

3-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Minimum driving speed, km/h................................ 3-5

The maximum speed of movement in the rear gear

and in the mode of external characteristics at the maximum
engine crankshaft speed, km/h.............. 11 – 12
The minimum turning radius on the front wheel
of the outer wheel, m, no more................................................ ......... thirteen

The tactical diameter of the circulation at the speed of movement

on water no more than 10 km/h, m, no more................................................ .... 20

Fuel consumption per 100 km of road, l:

- on the highway................................................... .................................... 80

- off-road................................................... ....................... 150

Mileage on the highway, km………………………………………… 690

Braking distance at a speed of 30 km/h, m, no more............... 11.4

3.1.3 Surmountable obstacles on dry turf
The maximum angle of elevation, degrees................................... 30
The maximum angle of roll, degree ............................................. 25
The width of the ditch, m, no more ........................................... .................... 2.0

Height of the vertical wall, m................................................... .... 0.5

3.1.1.4 Characteristics of a surmountable water barrier
The maximum angle of entry into the water, degrees................................... 25

The maximum angle of exit from the water, degree ........................... 15

of the water barrier, m ................................................ .... without limitation (limited by the width
fuel reserve)
Maximum excitement, points .............................................. 2 (wave height no more than 75 cm)

3.1.5 Characteristics of reliability and maintenance

The maximum duration of service from
using maintenance equipment
with the simultaneous work of three people and the temperature of the environment

burning air not lower than 288 K (15°ÿ), h:

- for control inspection (CO)................................................ .... 0.2
- for daily maintenance (ETO) ........... 1.6
- for maintenance after the first 2000 km
mileage................................................... ......................................... 4.5
- for maintenance No. 1 (TO No. 1)
(every 2000 km mileage)............................................. ...... 2.0

3-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- for maintenance No. 2 ( MOT No. 2)

(every 6,000 km) ........................................... ..... 6.5

- for maintenance performed through

every two MOT No. 2 (after every 12,000 km mileage)............ 9.5

- for routine and technical maintenance, perform

after 10 years of storage ............................................. ......... 15.0

Allowable storage period without technical changes

characteristics with carrying out regular works, years ......... 10, 0

3.2 Armament of the combat module

3.2.1 General information

The maximum mass of the combat module, kg

- without ammunition................................................... ........................ 1650

- with ammunition................................................... ......................... 2031

General dimensions of the combat module, mm:

- length................................................... ........................................... 3600

- width ................................................ ........................................ 1997

- height (with VKU bracket)................................................. ....... 974

- cannon sweep radius................................................. ............ 2550

- the height of the tower (that is, the joint surface for the tower gutter) ... 904

- diameter of the barbette................................................... ......................... 1586

3.2.2 Cannon

Brand................................................. ........................................ ZTM1 (2A72)

Type................................................. ............................................ automatic

Caliber, mm................................................... .................................... 30

Question................................................... ..................................... tape

The number of cartridges in the tape, pcs.:

- cartridges with BT and BTZ projectiles............................................ ..... 117

- cartridges with OFZ and OT projectiles................................................. ... 183

Recharging................................................... .......................... remote

Ammunition supply switch................................................ remote

Aiming range of firing at ground targets, m:

- cartridges with BT and BTZ shells................................................... 2000

- cartridges with OFZ and OT projectiles................................................... 4000

The maximum range of aimed fire at the wagon

suffocating targets flying at subsonic speeds

heights of 2000 m, m………………………………………….. 2500

3-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Method of execution of the shot………………………………. remote (electric

descent)

3.2.3 Machine gun

Brand................................................. ........................................ KT-7,62 or PKT

Type……………………………………………………………….. paired with automatic

with a gun

Caliber, mm................................................... ............................... 7.62

Question................................................... ................................... tape

The number of cartridges in the tape, pcs…………………………………… 500

Aiming firing range, m…………………………. 1800

The method of execution of the shot……………………………….. remote (electric

descent)

3.2.4 Grenade launcher

Brand................................................. ........................................ KBA-117 or AG-17

Type……………………………………………………………….. automatic

Caliber, mm................................................... .................................... 30

Question……………………………………………………….. tape

The minimum amount of grenades in the tape………………... 29

Aiming firing range, m................................................... 1700

Method of execution of the shot………………………………. remote (electric

descent)

3.2.5 Anti-tank missile complex

Number of launchers................................................... 2

Brand................................................. ........................................ 240

Range of target damage, m................................................ ..... that's 100 to 5000

The method of firing a shot……………………………….. remote control

3.3 Ammunition and weapons located in the cor

empty cars

3.3.1 Composition of crew weapons

- automatic rifles AK or AKM, AKMS, AKS-74S, pcs.................. 3

- 26mm caliber signal pistol……………………. 1

3.3.2 Armament of the landing party

- automatic rifles AK or AKM, AKMS, AKS-74S, pc............ 5

- PC machine guns, pcs............................................. ................ 2

- RPG-7 grenade launchers, pcs. ................................................. 1

3-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

3.3.3 Ammunition

In the combat module:

- cartridges for the gun, pcs. ………………………………. 300

- cartridges for a machine gun, pcs. ……………………………. 500

- grenade for a grenade launcher, pcs. …………………………… 29

- anti-tank missiles, pcs. ………………………………. 2

In the body of the machine there are places for accommodation:

- shells for an automatic cannon, pcs. ……………. 108 (6 packs of 18 rounds)

- cartridges for a paired machine gun, pcs. ……………… 1,500 (3 stores of 500 cartridges each)

- a grenade for an automatic grenade launcher, pcs. ………. 29

- anti-tank missiles pcs. ……………………………….. 2

- cartridges for automatic weapons AK or AKM, AKMS,

AK-74S, pcs. ………………………………………….. 450 (3 bags of 5 stores)

- cartridges for a signal pistol, pcs. …………… 12

- PG-7B grenade for the RPG-7 grenade launcher, pcs. …………… 5

- grenade F-1, pcs. ………………………………………. 10

3.4 Weapon stabilizer

Brand…………………………………………………………. SVU-500-4C

Type................................................. ............................................. electromechanical, so stable

by lysis in two planes

Power-on time, s………………………………………….. 12±3

The maximum preparation time, min……………………... 2

Time of continuous work, h……………………………….. 6 (after 6 hours of work - re

ryv for 1 time, work in combat

conditions – not limited)

Vertical guidance drive…………………………… electromechanical, manual

duplication if necessary

smokestacks

Horizontal guidance drive……………………………… electromechanical, manual

duplication if necessary

smokestacks

Range of pointing angles, degrees:

- in the vertical plane………………………………. that's minus 8 to plus 45

- in the horizontal plane................................................... 360xn (n – revolutions of the tower)

Angular speed of guidance along GN and VN, degree per second:

3-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- in AUTO mode…………….……………………………… from 0.07 to 6

- in PAV mode………………………………………… from 0.1 to 35
- in ATGM mode………………………………………….. from 0.02 to 0.5
Angular transfer velocity along GN and VN, degree in SE
kundu………………………………………………………………... 35
The method of pointing................................................... ..................... from the control panel

3.5 Fire control system

Type……………………………………………………………….. optical television system p

rangefinder and devices

fire control
The maximum preparation time, min……………………... 2
Time of continuous work, h……………………………….. 6 (after 6 hours of work - re
ryv for 1 time, work in combat
conditions – not limited)
The maximum detection range to a ground target
"tank" type, m:

a) with daylight, illumination of the locality ot

100 to 105 lux and a maximum viewing distance of 10 km:

- for the narrow field of vision channel…………………………. 5000

- for a channel with a wide field of vision……………………… 1700
b) in passive mode for a narrow field of view channel
at low illumination of the area no less
5ÿ10-3 lux…………………………………………………….. 800

Field of view angle with an error of ±5%:

- for TPK narrow field………………………………. 2°20' x 1°50'
- for TPK of a wide field………………………………. 8°40' x 6°30'
The range of distances measured to targets that
are observed through a television camera, from 160 to 5000
m……………….

3.6 Commander's panoramic instrument

Brand…………………………………………………………. Panorama-2R
Viewing angle in the search mode, degree……………………. 360
Angular speed of tracking, degree/s:
- search mode………………………………………………. 3
- transfer mode…………………………………………………… 36

3-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The angle of the field of vision with an error of ±5%................................... 8°40' x 6°30'

3.7 Monitoring devices

3.7.1 TNPO-168B surveillance device

Type ................................................ .......................................... periscopic, prismatic ,

heated

Periscopicity, mm................................................... ................... 168

Field of view angles, degree:

- vertically................................................... .......................... 6

- horizontally .............................................. ........................ 58

Magnification, times .............................................. .......................... 1

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 1 (in the management department at

driver's workplace)

3.7.2 TNP-165A surveillance device

Type ................................................ .......................................... periscopic, prismatic

Periscopicity, mm................................................... ................... 165

Field of view angles, degree:

- vertically................................................... .......................... 7

- horizontally .............................................. ........................ 34

Magnification, times .............................................. .......................... 1

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 7 (at the workplaces of the landing party in
combat unit)
3.7.3 TVN-5 night vision device
Type ................................................ .......................................... periscopic, active passive, biocular

Periscopicity, mm................................................... ................... 198

Field of view angles, degree:

- vertically ................................................... ........................... 27

- horizontally .............................................. ........................ 36

The minimum range of vision of the road surface, m:

- in passive mode with natural night light

brightness (3 – 5)ÿ10-3 lux ....................................... ................... 180

- in active mode with natural night lighting

load less than 3ÿ10-3 lux, using the FG-125 headlamp

infrared filter................................................... ............ 80

Magnification, times .............................................. .......................... 1

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 1 (in the management department at

3-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

driver's workplace)

3.7.4 Rear-view mirror

Type................................................. ................................................ spherical, external

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 2

3.8 Windscreen cleaning system

3.8.1 Windshield wiper

Type................................................. ................................................ electric, two-speed,

with two brushes

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 1

3.8.2 Windshield washer

Type................................................. ................................................ electric

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 1

3.9 Power plant

3.9.1 Engine

Type................................................. ................................................ two-stroke, multi-fuel,

three-cylinder, with turbocharger

blowing, will cool the liquid

nia, with a horizontal distribution

by driving the cylinders and vice versa

moving pistons

Brand ................................................... ........................................... 3TD-3A

Maximum power under test conditions on the bench

when working on diesel fuel, kW (hp) ............................. 368±6 (500±8)

Maximum torque, N·m (kgf·m)........................ 1285.5±30 (131±3) Crankshaft rotation frequency ,

min-1 :

- at maximum power................................................... 2600±10

- at maximum torque ............................... 1950±10

The maximum frequency of rotation of crankshafts when working at idle

speed, min-1 .................................... .............. 2800

The minimum steady frequency of rotation of the crankshafts when idling,

min-1 :

- on diesel fuel and fuel for jet engines

hotels ................................................... ......................................... 800

- on gasoline ........................................................ ............................ 1000

Specific consumption of diesel fuel under test conditions on the bench at

maximum power, g/kWh 211+11 (155+7)

3-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

(g/l.s.h)........................................ ................................................
Temporary oil consumption per burn, kg/h, no more.............................. 0.4+0.2
Nominal overall dimensions, mm:

- length................................................... ....................................... 1124

- width ................................................ ................................... 1126

- height................................................... ..................................... 590

The maximum total weight in the delivery set, kg........... 900

3.9.2 Starting system

Starting methods:

- main……………………………………………………. electric (with the help of old

tera)

- duplicate……………………………………………………. combined (using

starter and external air

devices)

Means of facilitation of starting .................................................... ......... pre-start heater,

autonomous flare system

heating, glow plugs

(one for each cylinder)

3.9.3 Fuel supply system

Used fuel:

- main................................................... ............................. diesel brands L (summer), Z

(winter), A (arctic)

- reserve................................................... ............................ fuel for jet engines

bodies TS-1, T-2, RT, gasoline

A-72, A-76

- mixtures of the above-mentioned fuels with inclusion of diesel top

left less than 10% and regulation

gasoline engine

with inclusion of diesel top

left more than 10% and regulation

diesel engine

Filling capacity of fuel tanks, l.............................. 585±10

3.9.4 Lubrication system

Used oils ................................................... .................... HALOL M-4042TD, M8V2S,

AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT,

M-16IHP-3

3-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Refueling capacity of the tank, l................................................. .. 75±5

3.9.5 Cooling system

Type................................................. ................................................ liquid, closed type,

ejection

Used liquid:
- in the summer................................................... ................................... special cooling Jew

bone with three-component at

Kindergarten

- in winter................................................... ................................... low-freezing liquid

marks 40 or 65, OJ-40 "Lena"

or OJ-65 "Lena", TOSOL-A40
or TOSOL-A65

Filling capacity of the system, l ....................................... 65±5

3.9.6 Air cleaning system

Type................................................. ................................................ three-step village continuous

ejection dust removal

(the first step is inertial

grid, the second is cyclonic

apparatus, the third – cassettes)

3.10 Transmission

3.10.1 Input reducer

Type................................................. ................................................ reducer p obliquely toothed six

dumb

Gear ratio ................................................... .................... 1,095

3.10.2 Gear box

Type................................................. ................................................ single-flow hydromechanical

program, consisting of

hydrotransformer, plane

tarnoi gearbox and so on

management systems

Gear ratios:

- 1st gear ............................................ .............................. 7.15

- 2nd gear ............................................ .............................. 3.03

- 3rd gear ............................................ .............................. 1.92

- 4th gear ............................................ .............................. 1.40

- 5th gear ............................................ .............................. 1.00

3-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- reverse gear................................................... ............. 7,18

Shifting gears ................................................ ............... automatic, manual mode
controls in the full range

gear shifting, prynu

ditelno inclusion 2nd per

giving and passing the reverse gear in

emergency mode
3.10.3 Distribution box
Type ................................................ .............................................. mechanical, interaxial , two

step with differential

distribution of torque
and differential lock
la

Gear ratios:
- increasing transmission................................................... ....... 0.686
- downshift .......................................................... ....... 2,182
Control drives................................................... ................... electropneumatic
3.10.4 Cardan transmissions
Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 14 (1 – connects the box per
dacha with distribution box; 2 –
connect the transfer box
with passage bridges; 2 - co
the connecting bridges of the village

impassable bridges; 8 - co
unite bridges with wheeled vehicles

doctors; 1 – connects the shaft

power take-off razdatochnoy
boxes with a shaft of a pump reducer

of the drive of the water main

resident)
Shafts, type................................................... ...................................... tubular
Cardan joints ................................................... ................... open type, hard, on
needle bearings

3.10.5 Bridges

Type ................................................ ........................................... first, second , third and even

vertyy - leading; second and third

3-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the one is of the pass-through type

The main transmissions of bridges ................................................... ............ conical with a circular tooth, p
with a gear ratio of 1.32
Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 4

Interaxial differentials of the 2nd and 3rd bridges ...................... conical, with four satellites
locks and couplings
electrohydraulic drive

house

Inter-wheel differentials ................................................ .. kulachkovy, increased tre

nia

3.10.6 Wheel gearboxes

Type................................................. ................................................ single-stage, with crooked teeth
cylindrical gears

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ......................... 8

Gear ratio ................................................... .................... 4.33

3.11 Steering
Management on land ................................................... ..................... controls by turning
wheels

Control while afloat .............................................. .................... controls by turning

of my wheels and by way of modification

speed and direction of rotation

nya screw of the water supply

calf on the trailing board

The number of pairs of steerable wheels................................... 2 (on the first and second bridges)
The type of transmission of the steering mechanism............................................ screw-ball nut -rail
sector
Gear ratio................................................... .................... 23.55

3.12 Hydraulic system

3.12.1 Hydraulic transmission control and lubrication system
Used oil................................................... ..................... ARIAN EMT-8
Filling capacity of the hydraulic system, l.............................. 80±5

3.12.2 The hydraulic system of the drive of the water-flowing engine

Hydropumps, brand
- left ................................................... ..................................... SAUER-DANFOSS

90L055KA5NN80S3C6CO3GBA

3-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

424224

- right................................................... ................................... SAUER-DANFOSS

90R055KA5NN80S3C6CO3GBA
424224

Hydromotors................................................... ............................... SAVER-DANFORS

90M055NCON7NOC6W00NN0000F3

Working pressure of the hydraulic system,

MPa (kgf/cm2 )..................... 40 (400)

Used oil................................................... ..................... Mobil DTE-18M or

Shell Tellus T68

Filling capacity of the hydraulic system, l.............................. 90±5

The reducer of the pumps of the drive of the water pump, type....cylindrical, two-stage
that is, with a switchable drive
transfer box
Number of driven pumps, pcs. ...................................... 2
Gear ratio to the shafts of hydraulic pumps ............................. 0.63
Power-on drive ................................................ ...................... electropneumatic
3.12.3 Hydraulic system of hydraulic power steering, winch hydraulic drive and hydraulic drive
wave-reflecting shield

Working pressure, MPa (kgf/cm2 )............................................. ............... from 11+1 (110+10)

Used oil................................................... ............................ brand "R"

Filling capacity of the system, l................................................. .... 21±1
3.13 Brake systems
3.13.1 Working brake system
Brake mechanisms................................................... ......................... drum, drum
type, closed

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 8

Holding angle, degree (%)................................................ ..................... 31 (60)
Brake drive................................................... ................................ pneumohydraulic,
double contoured, with two
main cylinders and

with two brake cams

frames

3.13.2 Parking brake system

Brake mechanisms................................................... ......................... drum, drum
of the type installed on you

drive shafts razdatochnoy

3-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

boxes

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 2

Holding angle, degree (%) 10.2 (18)

Brake drive ................................................... ................................ mechanical

3.13.3 Emergency braking system

Brake mechanisms................................................... ......................... ra contours are used

barrels of the brake system and

parking mechanisms

brake system

Brake drive pneumohydraulic

3.14 Water-powered propellant

Type................................................. ................................................ ....... single-stage, with evens

with retorque paddles

screws with a diameter of 370 mm

in nozzles, with individual

hydraulic drive

Number of screws, pcs................................................. .......................... 2

The drive of the control of the water-moving engine................................... electric,

3.15 Chassis

3.15.1 Wheels

Type................................................. ................................................ ....... with detachable rims

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 8

Tires, type .............................................. .......................................... pneumatic, tubeless

nye

– dimension (quantity, pcs). ................................................ ....... 12,00R20 (8) or

365/80R20 (8)

The air pressure in the tires, adjustable depending on the road conditions and

the type of installed tires, MPa (kgf/cm2 ) ....... from 0.15 to 0.52 (from 1.5 to 5.2)

3.15.2 Suspension

Type................................................. ................................................ ....... independent, across

nyh levers

Elastic element................................................... ................................... torsion shaft

Number of torsion bars, pcs................................................. ..................... 8 (one for each ko

forest)

Number of levers, pcs. ................................................ ................... 16 (2 each (lower and upper

3-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ny) for each wheel)

Shock absorbers, type................................................... ................................ hydraulic, telescopic

Pics, two-sided

actions established by

two in the pendants of the first and

fourth wheels and each

nom in the suspensions of the second i

third wheels

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ ................................... 12

3.16 Pneumatic equipment (low-pressure air system)

Compressor performance at nominal frequency

engine crankshaft rotations, l/min, not less than ................. 305.7 Pressure, MPa (kgf/

cm2 ).......... ................................................ ......... 0.8 (8)

Air dryer with pressure regulator, brand.............................. A01.03.000-01 Operating limits of the

pressure regulator, MPa (kgf/cm2 )

- upper limit................................................... .................................... 0.83-0.05 (8.3-0.5)

- lower limit................................................... .................................... 0.66+0.05 (6.6+0.5 )

Safety valve actuation pressure, MPa (kgf/

cm2 )...................................... ............................................... 1.1 ±0.1 (11.0±1.0)

Low-pressure air cylinder, pcs.............................................. 2

Capacity of one cylinder, l................................................. ............. 20.5

Air pressure drop limiting valve, type……………. piston pressure, MPa (kgf/

cm2 )………………………………………… from 0.45 to 0.55 (from 4.5 to 5.5)

pneumatic valve, type ................................................ ... membrane co-balances Reduction

rovannym throttle

valve

Limits of adjustable pressures, MPa (kgf/cm2 ) ............................ from 0.05 to 0.9 (from 0, 5 to 9.0)

3.17 Electrical equipment

Scheme type................................................... .............................................. direct current, one

wired (for the duty officer

lighting and emergency

outlet - two-wire)

Voltage of the on-board network, V................................................. ................ from 22.5 to 28.5

Network protection system ................................................... ............................ automatic protection devices and float-

3-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

which fuses

3.17.1 Accumulator batteries

Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. 12ST-85
Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 2

Electric charge of one battery, A·h ........................................... 85

Total electrical charge of batteries, A·h ......................................... 170
Nominal voltage of one battery, V ..................................... 24

3.17.2 Generator
Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. 6301.3701
Nominal power, kW................................................ .................... 4.2

Nominal voltage, V............................................... ................. 28

3.17.3 Starter
Brand…………………………………………………………………….. 252.3708
Nominal power, kW................................................ ................. 9

Nominal voltage, V............................................... ................. 24

3.17.4 Voltage regulator

Brand................................................. ................................................ 21.3702-01

3.17.5 Lighting and traffic signaling devices

Lighting devices (quantity, brand):

- main beam headlights................................................... ....................... 2, 227.3711 and 226.3711

- headlights with a light-masking nozzle....................................... 2, FG-127

- headlights with a light filter................................................... ................... 1, FG-125

- additional headlight .............................................. ...................... 1, FG-16K

- front lights................................................... .............................. 2, PF 133AB

- rear lights .............................................. ................................. 2, FP 133AB

- rear fog light................................................... ... 1, 2402.3716

- reversing light................................................... ......................... 1, FP 135B

- turn repeater .............................................. ..................... 2, UP101-B

Sound signal................................................... .................................... 1, SZ14G

3.18 Means of communication

3.18.1 Radio station

Type................................................. ................................................ ....... ultrashortwave,

transceiver

Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. VRC-90s

Operating frequency range, MHz ............................................. .............. from 30 to 80

Maximum communication distance, km ............................................. ....... 20

3-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Number of pre-prepared frequencies: 10

3.18.2 Intercom and switching equipment

Type ................................................ ................................................ ...... telephone, with electromagnet

thread laryngophones

Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. AVSK-1

Number of subscribers, people ................................................ .............. 4 (5 – taking into account additions

body sockets for desan

and)

3.18.3 Helmet phone

Type ................................................ ................................................ ...... noise canceling

Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. ÿÿ1

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 4

3.19 Radio navigation equipment

Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. SN-3003M

Position determination accuracy, m................................................ .... that's 10 to 30

The number of processed route points, pcs., no more than..... 498

Number of processed routes, units................................... 50

3.20 Defense

3.20.1 Armor protection

Type ................................................ ................................................ ...... anti-bullet, c vnut

renney installation against

vooskolochnoy protection

The possibility is foreseen

installation on the body

machine protection kit

nyh lattice screens

to protect against cumulative

anti-tank grenades

grenade launchers

3.20.2 Protection against weapons of mass destruction

The way to protect the crew and landing party:

- from the shock wave................................................... ................................ sealing of living quarters

separated

- from radioactive dust, poisonous substances and bacteria air purification and creation

funds .............................................. .............................................. of excess pressure in these

inhabited departments

3-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

3.20.3 Filter ventilation installation

Supercharger, type .............................................. .................................... centrifugal, with inertia

onnoy separation of dust

Filter-absorber, type................................................ ........................ absorption
Minimum value of overpressure, Pa (mm water level) ... 245 (25)

3.20.4 Radiation reconnaissance equipment

Dose power meter, brand................................................. .......... DRG-T

3.20.5 Fire protection equipment

Type................................................. ................................................ ....... automatic, twice
action

Method of inclusion................................................... ................................ automatic and automatic

tomato

Number of cylinders with fire-extinguishing mixture, pcs.............................. 2

Capacity of one cylinder, l ................................................ ........ 2

Number of thermal sensors, pcs................................................. ............. 5

Manual fire extinguisher

Type................................................. ................................................ ....... carbonated
Brand ................................................... ................................................ .. OU-1,4 (2)
Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 3

3.20.6 Means of disguise

3.20.6.1 The smoke curtain installation system

Number of launchers, pcs................................................. ... 6

Smoke grenade, stamp 3D6

The time of masking with curtains, s………………………………………… from 30 to 60

The distance of the installation of the smoke curtain, m……………………... from 200 to 300

3.20.6.2 Thermal smoke apparatus of multiple action

Maximum duration of continuous action, 10 minutes
Fuel consumption, l/min................................................ .............................. from 8 to 12

3.20.6.3 Deformative staining

Number of flowers................................................... .............................. trehtsvetnoe, with spots
ro-yellow, brown and

black color

3.21 Water pumping equipment

Water pumping pumps, type .............................................. .......... centrifugal with electric

3-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

reason

Number of pumps, pcs............................................. ......................... 2

Productivity of one pump at a counter pressure of 0.013 MPa (0.13 kgf/cm2 ), l/

min, not less ............................ ............. 250

3.22 Winch

Cable length, m .............................................. ........................................ 50

The maximum traction force on the hook of the cable with a single row

wind the cable on the drum, N (kgf).

- without using the block................................................ ...................... that is 90,000 to 92,000

(from 9000 to 9200)

- using the block .............................................. ....................... from 18,000 to 18,400

(from 18000 to 18400)

Winch drive ................................................ ................................... hydraulic

3.23 Habitability support system

3.23.1 Air conditioner

Type ................................................ ................................................ ...... steam compression, p

driven by the compressor from
the engine of the machine
Cooling capacity, kW ........................................... .............. to 10

Refrigerant ................................................... ............................................ R134a

Power consumption, W, no more

- in cooling mode................................................... ......................... 540

- in ventilation mode................................................... ......................... 250 Air consumption

through air handling units, m3 /h....... 900

3.23.2 Heating system

Heaters, type .............................................. ...................................... calorifernye, with use

heat transfer of liquid,

cooling engine

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 3 (1 - in the administrative department

niya, 2 - in the combat department

not)

3.23.3 Ventilation system

................................................ ................................................ ..... general exchange, forced Type

fuel injection

Fans, type ................................................ ............................... axial

Quantity, pcs. ................................................ .................................... 2 (1 - in the administrative department

nia, 1 – in the combat detachment

3-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

not)

3-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

5 TOWER

The tower is designed to be placed for the installation of the weapons unit in the composition
automatic cannon, machine gun, automatic grenade launcher, anti-tank missile
of the complex, as well as the fire control system, weapon stabilizer and ammunition.
The tower is welded from armored sheets (Figure 5.1). Ahead at the top of the tower
there is an opening for placing the armor mask of the gun.
Technological covers are installed on the roof and in the back of the tower
they open when assembling and disassembling weapons and when refueling ammunition. In the back
The commander's panoramic instrument is also installed in the tower.

The tower rotates on a ball bearing (spindle).

1 – tower, 2 – small store hatch cover, 3 – large store hatch cover, 4 – electrical systems service hatch cover,
5 – weapons unit service hatch cover.

Figure 5.1 - Tower

5-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

5.1 Epaulet of the tower

The shoulder of the tower is a radial thrust bearing, which consists of

moving 1 (Figure 5.2) and stationary 2 drives. Between mobile and immobile
epaulettes are laid with balls 7, separated by springs.
The movable shoulder strap 1 is attached to the tower 8 with the help of bolts. The tower is assembled with a shoulder strap

it is installed on the turret sheet of the hull and fastened with bolts.
A sealing ring 5 is installed between the tower and the movable shoulder 1, and between
a seal 6 is installed by the fixed shoulder strap 2 and the turret sheet of the case.

1 – movable epaulette; 2 – fixed epaulette; 3 – sealing; 4 – ring; 5 – sealing ring; 6 – sealing; 7 – ball; 8 – tower; 9 –
housing

Figure 5.2 - Tower shoulder

5.2 Tower stopper

The stopper is located on the left in the aft part of the tower and is intended for locking
towers in any position and consists of housing 1 (Figure 5.3), attached to the tower,
lever 5, which enters the interdental space of the toothed crown of the epaulet when it is stopped. At
this activates the secondary winding of the electromagnet 2, which can hold the stopper v
this state is a long time.

To install the tower on the stopper manually, it is necessary to pull the lever 5 until the ego exits
interdental space of the toothed crown of the epaulet. To fix this position, it is provided
screw 4 and locking nut 3.

5-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – body; 2 – electromagnet, 3 – locking nut; 4 – screw; 5 - lever

Figure 5.3 – Tower stopper

5-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6 WEAPONS BLOCK
6.1 General information

The weapon block (BW) of the combat module is stabilized in two planes and consists of the following
blowing components: (Figure 6.1):
- mask;

- mask body;

- cradles;

- 30-mm automatic cannon ZTM1 (or 2A72);

- farms;
- tape feed switching mechanism;

- mechanism of recharging;

- 7.62-mm machine gun KT-7.62 (or PKT);

- 30-mm automatic grenade launcher KBA-117 (or AG-17);
The weapon block is controlled by vertical and horizontal guidance drives.

6.2 Safety requirements when working with weapons

Persons familiar with the device of the material are allowed to operate the module's weapons
parts of weapons, rules of operation and handling of weapons and ammunition.
Safety of work and operation of the module is ensured by solid knowledge of materials
no part and compliance with the rules of operation.
When operating the gun, it is necessary to comply with safety requirements according to Ru
00.00.000 RE.

6.2.1 Safety requirements when working with an automatic gun,

automatic grenade launcher and machine gun

The crew must work in headsets.

Turn the tower, raise and lower the weapon block only when closed
hatches and installed shields of the combat module.
At the end of the shooting, the cannon, machine gun and grenade launcher must be put on safety
calves

In the event that all the ammunition is used up, check the absence of cartridges in the chamber
ke and make a control descent of moving parts, having previously raised them with a mechanism
recharge

6-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – tape feed switching mechanism; 2 – farm; 3 – – grenade launcher; 4 – recharge mechanism; 5 – cradle; 6 – cannon;
7 – machine gun; 8 – mask; 9 – mask body.

Figure 6.1 – Armament block

1 – cannon; 2 – fuse; 3 – feed switching lever.

Figure 6.2 – ZTM-1 cannon

6-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ATTENTION! The gun is equipped with a mechanism for disconnecting the electric trigger before feeding

on the loading line of the last cartridge. In all cases, at the end of the shooting independently

moreover, if the ammunition is used up, the cartridge that is needed remains on the loading line

can be removed from the transmission line after switching the fuse (Figure 6.2), located on

butt of the gun, to the "PR" position (Safety position upwards).

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- be in the rotation zone of the turret and cannon both outside and inside the car

with the stabilizer turned on;

- carries out technical maintenance and repair work when the machine is turned on

lyzer;

- make a check with loaded weapons;

- inspects the target when the weapon block is not set to maximum

ny elevation angle;

- be in front of the weapons unit when loading, unloading, removing jams

jack

- use tape links with cracks, dents, bent legs and hooks,

with an extended or bent loop, as well as links that have passed through the automation of two arms

eleven times;

- use for shooting cartridges with external damage (bruises, external

dents, punctures, rust, etc.);

- use cartridges that have passed through the automatic gun, extracted manually, and

also cartridges, in case they fall from a height of 5 m or more;

- tilts and throws boxes with ammunition, starts fire and smokes near ammunition

owls;

- applies an abundant layer of lubricant in the chamber, barrel channel and automatic parts;

- to transport loaded cartridges without boxes.

When loading the tapes into the module, it is not allowed to hit the main part of the cartridges against the edges of the pro

emo

6.2.2 Safety requirements when working with an ATGM launcher

Preparation of the launcher is carried out only in anticipation of ATGM launches.

When launching an ATGM, the distance between neighboring vehicles must be at least 15 m.

ATGM launches should be made only when the hatches of the machine are closed.

If the ATGM has not left the guide, it is necessary to press the nearby button again

6-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the right handle of the PU03-05 remote control, and in case of repeated failure, wait at least 5 minutes and

remove the projectile. Send the projectile that failed to the base.

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- to be installed on the anti-tank guide, subjected to a fall without capping with you

the honeycomb is more than 0.5 m and in the capping from a height of more than 1.5 m;

- ATGM launch when people and equipment, ammunition, explosives and fire are found

of substances in the dangerous zone (closer to 30 m from the launcher);

- touch and take into hands the abandoned combat unit or its component elements in the slu

the failure of the ATGM combat unit in the area, as well as the lack of liquid

damage or destruction of the combat unit to harmless elements. The combat unit or its unit

stavnye elements must be destroyed at the place of fall, but not earlier than after

15 minutes after the fall.

6.3 Transfer of weapons from the marching position to the combat position

To transfer the weapons from the deployed position to the combat position, it is necessary:

- open the covers of the OEM-B and PN-B protective covers and the OEM-B protective covers

and PN-B;

- load a cannon (see section 6.6.7), a grenade launcher (see section 6.8.6) and an ATGM (see section 6.9.3);

- cock the movable parts of the cannon, machine gun, and grenade launcher and install the guard

needles in the "PR" position, if firing from the weapon is not foreseen;

- close all hatches;

- turn on the EMS (see clause 8.5);

- with the help of the weapon selection switch on the PN operator's console (PN) in the main

mode, select the type of weapon on the PC commander's remote control in the "Double" mode
alive

- turn on the weapons stabilizer (see clause 7.3.2).

6.4 Transfer of weapons from the combat position to the walking position

To bring the weapons to the marching position, it is necessary:

– press the WS DRIVE (DIMENSION) button on the PN (PN) in the main mode, on the PC (PK) in

in the "Double" mode, the tower and BV must be brought to the initial position (0º±10´);

- turn off the weapons stabilizer;

- turn off the toggle switch on the PN in the main mode, on the PC in the "Double" mode

FC (CS);

– discharge the cannon (see section 6.6.11) and the machine gun (see section 6.7.8);

– discharges the AG-17 grenade launcher (see section 6.8.8);

6-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- put the turret on the stopper;

- put the weapons block on the stopper;

– close protective covers on OEM and PN-B and covers of the protective casing;

- put covers on the muzzle parts of the barrel of the cannon, machine gun and grenade launcher.

6.5 The locking mechanism of the armament block

The locking mechanism of the weapon block serves to fix (stop) the anti-aircraft gun in the horizon

vertical position in relation to the body of the machine.

The locking mechanism consists of housing 4 (Figure 6.3), fixed on the side

the inner wall of the tower of the combat module. A spring-loaded rod 1 is mounted in the housing 4,

which is retracted when the electromagnet 5 is activated through the lever 3, overcoming the air

state of the spring.

Removal from the stopper and installation on the BV stopper occurs automatically after switching on

nia and switching off the control system, respectively. To remove the BW from the stopper in manual mode, it is necessary

pull lever 3 away from the magnet and fix its position with screw 2 (Figure 6.3). For

to set the stopper manually, it is necessary to return lever 3 to the initial position.

1 – rod; 2 – screw; 3 – lever; 4 – body; 5 – electromagnet; 6 – locking nut

Figure 6.3– The locking mechanism of the armament block

6-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6 Automatic cannon

6.6.1 Appointment

30-mm automatic cannon ZTM1 (or 2A72) is designed to defeat ground

(light armored vehicles, enemy manpower, etc.) and low-flying air targets.
A more detailed description of the ZTM1 (or 2A72) gun is given in the instruction manual
AAKYA.00.00.000 RE (or 2A72.00.000 TO1).

6.6.2 Installation of an automatic cannon

The gun (Figure 6.4) is installed in the opening of the BV mask 1. The gun is attached to the body 4
masks with the help of a gun shock absorber 5 and a receiver, connected by a screw
boy. The shock absorber 5 is held in place by a toothed retainer. I send mine
the receiver of the gun is inserted into the guide grooves of the cradle 2.

1 – weapon block mask; 2 – gun barrel; 3 – gun receiver; 4 – mask body; 5 – shock absorber of the gun barrel; 6 –
cannon barrel truss; 7 - barrel of a cannon.

Figure 6.4 – Installation of an automatic cannon

6-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.3 Bringing the cannon to normal combat

Bringing the cannon to normal combat is done in order to find the center of the group
alignment of shells and its alignment with the control point after replacing the gun, barrel, shock absorber
traffic jam, muzzle brake, standard THP-30-515, and also after the detection of systematic
deviated average hit points from the aiming point, significantly reducing the effect
firing rate.
Brings the cannon to normal combat during the day or at night (with artificial lighting
nii) time with good visibility of the aiming points on the targets (the illumination of the mouse is allowed
ny), with a land wind, the lateral component of which does not exceed 7 m/s, in the conditions, is
key hits of atmospheric precipitation on the gun barrel.
Brings the gun to normal combat is allowed with any tape or with alternating
tapes equipped with armor-piercing tracer cartridges of the same batch of products
laziness Cartridges must be kept at the same temperature before shooting
conditions not less than 4 hours.

Figure 6.5 – 100 m target

6-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The cannon is brought to normal combat on the target (Figure 6.5), set on the race

standing (100±0.5) m from the cross section of the barrel, while the plane of the target must be perpendicular
axes of the gun barrel.

The gun is fired with one of the two available ammunition - fragmentation

high-explosive or armor-piercing tracer. If there are ammunition, on the monitor in the opera zone

tive information next to the letter designation of ammunition OF (FT) and BT (APT) is available

information about the amount of remaining ammunition. The choice is made by setting the galetny

the SELECT WEAPON switch to the FT or APT position

politely

The shot is made by pressing the fire button under the thumb on the right hand

the control panel of the weapon stabilizer.

The vertical line of the target must be checked plumb, and the aiming point of the gun

(TNP) of the target at 100 m should be located at the height of the line of fire (angle

the barrel elevation should not exceed ±1°).

To bring the gun to normal combat, it is necessary to install the machine on a solid

(ground or concrete) horizontal platform, the slope of which does not exceed 15'

so that the longitudinal part of the body was directed in the direction of firing. In the absence of such

platform, it is allowed to install a machine with a roll of the axis of the gun's trunnion, not exceeding 30' at
will measure the ego with a protractor-quadrant.

Equip the tape with 28 cartridges with armor-piercing tracer cartridges, put them in

gun power supply system and charge the gun.

Targeting should be carried out when entering a range of 1000 m. Control point (CT), relatively

which should be used to estimate the deviation, is 52 mm below the center of the mark
ZTM1 on targets.

With the help of the handles of horizontal and vertical guidance of the control panel

PU03-05 weapon stabilizer to combine the aiming mark with the OEM-B mark on the mouse
we

To make 4 single shot shots and by way of correction, with the help of podÿ

of the capacitive and rotary mechanisms bring their STP (middle point of impact) closer to the TP (point

hits).

Fire the cannon in 3 bursts of 4 shots each with the gun turned off

stabilizer.

After firing the first round, measure the coordinates of the holes, determine the average

I find the hit point (STP) for this queue, check the absence of zero knockdown

line of sighting and, if necessary, make a calibration.

When shooting the next 2 rounds, it will repeat the above actions.

6-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

After firing 3 rounds, determine the deviation of the center of the STP grouping
(CG STP) ot KT on the firing target in three rounds and evaluate the quality of shooting groups
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿ and, if necessary, transfer the TNP.
Evaluate the accuracy of fired rounds with the help of an overhead frame. At the same time, three
of four shots in each turn should fit within the dimensions of 400x400 mm (spread
drawing the frame on the target is arbitrary).
If 2 out of 3 queues do not fit within the dimensions, firing from the cannon will be stopped,
find out and eliminate the reasons that cause increased scattering (necessary
ryt parameters of guidance drives, gun mounting, mechanical damage to the gun: for

hatchet, metal coloring inside the muzzle part of the barrel).

After inspection of the gun installation and elimination of the detected malfunctions, they will be fired
repeated series of 3 rounds. At the same time, the requirement for eye accuracy must be met
rarely
At the same time, you should remember:

- measure the coordinates of the holes and determine the STP immediately after
firing of each round (the interval between rounds must be within 5...15 minutes);
- if in the process of firing an error is detected, made during the aiming, turn in the race
do not accept the check and make an additional turn;

- when receiving three or five shots in a row, instead of four, count these rows

counted if three out of four or four out of five shots fit within the scope
400 × 400 mm;

6.6.3.1 Determination of STP for 4 holes

Determination of STP by 4 holes:
a) connect two holes with a line, find its middle;
b) connect the two remaining holes with a line, find its middle;
c) connect the found midpoints with a line, and in turn find its midpoint;
this point and there will be an STP queue of 4 shots (Figure 6.6).

Figure 6.6 – Determination of STP for 4 holes

6-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.3.2 Determining the coordinates for the control and calibration target of the gun

After bringing to a normal battle, determine the coordinates for the control card

calibration coordinates of the gun, which is in the machine form.

Determination of specified coordinates should be done after the barrel cools down to temperature

ambient air

With the help of guidance mechanisms, aim the OEM-B brand at your sign on the shield, institutions

linen at a distance of (25±0.5) m from the muzzle of the gun barrel.

Observing through the THP with the help of a pointer, mark on the shield the point corresponding to

lay the cross section of the THP and measure the coordinates of this point relative to the axis of the sight mark.

Enter the obtained result in the control and verification coordinate card in the form

lare machines.

For more accurate plotting of coordinates on the control target, sight

do not less than three times through the THP and, finding the middle point of the three, determine the time

coordinate measures.

6.6.3.3 Safety requirements when working with a gun

The crew must work in headsets.

Turn the tower, raise and lower the BV only when the hatches are closed.

At the end of the shooting, be sure to put the gun on the fuse.

In the event that all the ammunition is used up, check the absence of cartridges in the chamber

ke and make a control descent of moving parts, having previously raised them with a mechanism

recharge

ATTENTION! The gun is equipped with a mechanism for disconnecting the electric trigger before feeding

on the loading line of the last cartridge. In all cases, at the end of the shooting, regardless of

even if the ammunition is used up, the required cartridge remains on the loading line

remove from the transmission line after switching the fuse located on the back of the head

gun, to the "PR" position (Safety position upwards).

Before shooting, make sure that there is no THP tube in the barrel.

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- is located in the area of rotation of the turret and cannon both outside and inside the machine

included stabilizer;

-carries out maintenance and repair work with the stabilizer turned on

torus;

6-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

-produces alignment with loaded weapons;

- inspects the target when the BV is not set to the maximum elevation angle;

- located in front of the BV during charging, discharging, eliminating delays;

- use tape links with cracks, dents, bent legs and hooks,

with an extended or bent loop, as well as links that have passed through the automation of two arms

eleven times;

- cartridges with external damage (bruises, external

dents, punctures, rust, etc.);

- to use cartridges that have passed through automatic guns, extracted manually, and

also cartridges, in case they fall from a height of 5 m or more;

-cantovate and throw boxes with ammunition, start fire and smoke near ammunition

owls;

- applies an abundant layer of lubricant in the chamber, barrel channel and automatic parts;

- to transport cartridges equipped in tapes without boxes.

When loading the tapes into the module, it is not allowed to hit the main part of the cartridges against the edges

opening

6.6.4 Gun ammunition system

The gun ammunition system is intended for the placement and supply of cartridge tapes to

reception windows of the gun. The ammunition supply system is installed in the armored part of the module,

to the right of the gun and includes: magazines 1, 6 (Figure 6.9), a cocking mechanism with a dispenser

box 2 and the feed path.

6.6.4.1 Stores

Stores are intended for storage and transportation of ammunition. Stores 1 and 6

are welded boxes of a complex shape.

In the front store (small store) 1 (Figure 6.9) there is a tape with an armor-piercing

tracer (BT) cartridges in the amount of 117 pcs.; in the back store (large store) 6 –

tape with high-explosive incendiary (OFZ) and high-explosive fragmentation (OT) cartridges

by us in the amount of 183 pcs.

Stores have outlet channels and shelves for even stacking of cartridges

tape

6-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.4.2 Pull-up mechanism

The tensioning mechanism is intended for tensioning the cartridge belt during shooting.

It is installed on the distribution box, which is a complex welded one

the structure, which is attached to the central bracket and provides direction pa

tronny ribbons when pulling them from the stores into the tensioning mechanism.

The tensioning mechanism is equipped with a ratchet 3 (Figure 6.10) with a dog 2. Ratchet and dog

exclude the sliding of the cartridge tape, which is in the screw sleeve, under the action of sob
weight

When unloading an unused tape from the feed path, the ratchet is turned off with the help

lever 4 and stop 5.

To facilitate the process of loading (unloading) the tape into (from) the feed path, simultaneously

by pressing and turning the handle 1, the sprocket shaft 6 is disconnected from the drive gear of the mechanism

pull-up, when firing, by reverse rotation of handle 1, shaft 6 is connected to the gearbox.

6.6.4.3 Supply tract

The feed path is intended for the supply of cartridge tapes from the pull-up mechanism to the receiver

gun windows. The supply tract is located on the right side of the gun.

The supply tract consists of:

ÿ flexible sleeve 4 (Figure 6.9), which is a set of figured plates,

mounted on the axle and placed between two flanges, one of which is attached to the gun, and

second to the roof of the tower. A flexible sleeve ensures the supply of a cartridge tape to the gun

shooting at angles of elevation or descent.

ÿ
neck 3, which is a stamp-welded structure connecting

a flexible and screw-type sleeve that provides 90º rotation of cartridge tapes;

ÿ screw sleeve 5, which is a complex welded structure consisting of

made of two flanges and tubes, attached to the flange of the pull-up mechanism. Screw sleeve

the feeding of cartridge tapes from the tensioning mechanism to the neck and their twisting by 90º.

6.6.4.4 Loading ammunition

To load equipped tapes into the module, you need:

- remove the BV from the stopper manually (see paragraph 6.5);

- manually give the cannon an elevation angle of ÿ 8...10 degrees;

- remove protective shields under the module, open hatch covers of both stores;

6-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- check the operability of the tape feed mechanism, sprocket drive handle

must be turned off;

- check the correctness of the equipment of the tapes and the corresponding amount of ammunition on them

appointment;

ATTENTION: the first tape is always loaded into the rear magazine (lower feed of the gun). - the operator, being outside
the machine, puts the tape in the rear magazine, starting with it

of the end (link with a loop) according to the installation scheme shown on the inner surface of the cover

the hatch of the store, the main parts of the projectiles must be directed to the gun;

- the remaining, front part of the tape (link with a hook), the operator directs to the reception

magazine tray before the first projectile engages with the sprockets of the pull-up mechanism;

- the commander, rotating the sprockets of the tensioning mechanism and adjusting the smoothness of the tape feed,

inserts the end of the tape into the screw sleeve, (it is allowed to help the passage of the tape by correcting it

a hook or a screwdriver from a ZIP gun);

- the operator inserts a cable or hook from ZIP into the screw sleeve from top to bottom;

- the commander fastens the cable or hook to the loop of the first link of the tape, while the operator

fastens the second end of the cable to the handle of the hammer from the ZIP gun and winds it on the hand

use a hammer to obtain the required length of the cable;

- the commander directs the tape along the screw sleeve, while the operator pulls the tape

with a rope or hook, brings the tape with the first projectile to the middle of the screw sleeve;

- the operator removes the cable or hook from the first link of the tape;

- the front store is similarly loaded. The tape starts in upper feed. Lenta village

the first projectile is brought to the receiving window of the gun;

- open the cover of the receiver, having previously unfastened the latch of the cover forward;

- insert the loaded cartridge tape into the window of the receiver, at the same time the guides

the receiver must pass between the shelves of the unit and the cartridges;

- advance the cartridge tape along the pullers until the projectile with the link does not

rests on the gun's feed fingers;

- close the cover of the receiver, stretch the tape and make sure that the tape is securely fixed

in the receiver;

- evenly distribute the remaining part of the tape in the front magazine;

- the operator puts a cable or hook on the first projectile of the tape inserted into the lower one

feed and brings the first projectile of the tape to the receiving window of the gun;

- load the tape into the second window of the receiver.

- evenly distribute the remaining part of the tape in the rear magazine;

- install the cannon in a horizontal position;

- install protective shields under the module, close the hatches above the stores 5.

6-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – small gun magazine; 2 – a transfer box with a pull-up mechanism; 3 – neck; 4 – flexible sleeve; 5
– screw sleeve; 6 – store of a big gun

Figure 6.9 – Gun ammunition system

6-14
 6 - 15
1–
handle;
2
a
dog;
3
ratchet;
–
4lever;
–
5
emphasis;
6
sprocket
–
shaft.
Figure
6.10
-Tape
tensioning
mechanism
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.5 Preparing the automatic gun for shooting

Before shooting, it is necessary:

- remove the cover from the muzzle of the gun;

- wipe the gun with a dry rag and inspect the chamber and barrel (breech,

the return spring and bolt must be removed);

- check the presence of lubricant on the automatic parts (if dirty or absent

lubricants to clean and lubricate automation parts);

- check the reliability of the fastening of the gun mechanisms (buttplate, electric trigger, bellows

feed mechanism, etc.);

6.6.6 Checking the operation of the gun's electric trigger

To check the operation of the electric start, it is necessary:

- turn on the control system in the main mode (clause 8.5);

- turn on the FC toggle switch on the PN remote control;

- press and hold the button under the thumb on the right handle of the PU03-05 remote control

the operator At the same time, when the button is pressed, the electromagnet of the cannon starts and fires

the belt tensioning drive is protected.

- release the button under the thumb on the right handle of PU03-05. Electromagnet

the trigger of the gun is switched off and the belt tensioning drive is stopped.

6.6.7 Loading the automatic cannon

To load the cannon, you need:

- remove the BV from the stopper manually (see paragraph 6.5);

- visually give the gun an elevation angle of ÿ 8...10 degrees;

- open the cover of the receiver, having previously unfastened the latch of the cover forward;

- insert the loaded cartridge tape into the window of the receiver, at the same time the guides

the receiver must pass between the shelves of the unit and the cartridges;

- advance the cartridge tape along the pullers until the projectile with the link does not

rests on the gun's feed fingers;

- close the cover of the receiver, stretch the tape and make sure that the tape is securely fixed

in the receiver;

- similarly load the tape into the second window of the receiver.

The gun is loaded.

To bring the cannon to a state of combat readiness, perform actions according to clause 6.6.8.

6-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.8 Manual and electromechanical cocking of an automatic gun

The reloading of the automatic cannon is carried out with the help of the reloading mechanism
nia 4 (Figure 6.4), which cocks the moving parts of the gun before starting work, and also
when charging and eliminating delays such as "misfire", "missing feed", etc.

Manual reloading of the gun is carried out in the following order:

- install the cannon in a horizontal position;

- open the rear hatch of the tower;

- pull the stopper by the ring 4 (Figure 6.14) and by the handle 1 set the slider 3 of the mechanism in
the position corresponding to manual reloading (type B);
- insert the manual reload handle (from the ZIP gun) into the square hole of axis 2
of the reloading mechanism and, turning the manual reloading screw clockwise (before the appearance of
slow clicks), move the movable parts to the rear position;
- turning the manual reloading screw counterclockwise (until clicks appear)
move the barrel with the breech to the front position;

- the gun is ready to fire.

Electromechanical recharging is carried out in the following order:

- pull the stopper by the ring 4 (Figure 6.11) and by the handle 1 set the slider 3 of the mechanism in
the position corresponding to electromechanical recharging (type A);
- set the galet switch for selecting the push reload control mode
on the PN (PN) in the main mode, on the PK (PK) in the “Double” mode to the RECOIL position
(BACK) and press the START button on the PN until clicks appear (provided
recoil of moving parts of the gun);
- set the galet switch for selecting the push reload control mode
on the PN (PN) in the main mode, on the PK (PK) in the “Double” mode to the C/RECOIL position
and press the START button on the PN until clicks appear (provided
roll-out of moving parts of the gun);
- (before the clicks appear) the moving parts of the gun are rolled out;
- the gun is ready to fire.

6-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.9 Opening and shooting

Open shooting in all cases must be started only on command.

To open and conduct fire from the ZTM-1 gun, it is necessary:

- cock the moving parts of the gun and set the fuse to the "OG" position;

- close all hatches;

- turn on the EMS, according to clause 8.5;

- perform actions according to clauses 8.6.3, 8.6.4.1;

- turn on the weapons stabilizer according to clause 7.3.2;

- switch the feed switch to the required feed depending on the type of boe

supplies;

- perform the actions of paragraph 8.6.4.2–8.6.4.4.

ATTENTION! After releasing the firing button, the gun remains in combat readiness

(on the delivery line there is a cartridge), which should always be remembered even when

take precautions when handling the gun.

To resume shooting, press the shooting button again. In the case of

delay in shooting, its elimination should be carried out in the order set forth in the section
le 6.6.12.

During breaks in shooting, it is necessary to put the moving parts of the cannon on

fuse

In the case of expending cartridges in one of the tapes (at the same time, in the tract from which it was produced

shooting was carried out, one cartridge remains, which is on the delivery line, the shutter stopped

on the sear) switch feed and press the fire button.

In the case of using all the ammunition, it is necessary to move the fuse to

position "PR" and discharge the gun according to section 6.6.10.

6-18
 6 - 19
1–
handle;
2
-here;
3
slider;
–
4
stoppoor
ring
ÿ–
position
of
the
retainer
during
electromechanical
recharging;
B
latch
–position
during
manual
reloading
Figure
6.11
Switching
–
the
gun
reload
modes
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.10 Discharge of an automatic cannon

ATTENTION! The automatic gun is equipped with a mechanism that disconnects the electric

lowering the gun before feeding the last cartridge to the loading line. In all cases to the end

no firing, regardless of whether the ammunition is spent or not, remains on the delivery line

that's one cartridge.

To discharge an automatic cannon, it is necessary:

- turn on the FC toggle switch on the PN in the main mode, on the PC (PK) in the mode

"Double";

- visually give the cannon an elevation angle of ÿ 8...10 degrees (moving parts of the cannon

must be on the sear, the gun safety - in the "PR" position);

- open the covers of the receivers of the gun, having previously unfastened the latches of the covers forward;

- unfix the stop from the side where there is one cartridge on the loading line,

pulled back the latch and turned the stop;

- remove the cartridge from the delivery line back, if necessary, use the hook from

a set of personal protective equipment;

- remove one by one cartridge tapes from the windows of the receiver;

- close the covers of the gun receivers and fix them with latches;

- put the fuse located on the butt of the gun in the "OG" position and,

pressed the trigger lever, reset the bolt from the sear;

- turn the stop and fix it in the receiver.

ATTENTION! When the cannon is discharged, it is strictly prohibited for anyone to be present

in front of the gun

Inspect the gun and link leads. If there are links in the link leads and on the pullers

cannons, remove them using the hook from the cannon's ZIP.

To remove the cartridge tape from the power supply system, it is necessary:

- unlock the ratchet of the pull-up mechanism;

- turn off the pull-up mechanism, pull the support handle toward you and turn it slowly

arrow howl;

- remove the cartridge tape from the feed path to the magazine;

- remove the cartridge tape from the magazine to the outside;

- remove the second cartridge tape in the same way;

- return the tension mechanism to its original position.

6-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.6.11 Cannon maintenance

Table 6.2 – Technical maintenance of the gun after firing (busy, scientist).

Title of work Instructions for the performance of works and applicable

operational materials

Dismantling, cleaning and lubrication of the car Conducts according to the Operation Manual

silent gun ZTM-1 AAKYA.00.00.000ÿÿ automatic cannon caliber

30-mm ZTM-1

Safety measures during technical maintenance, description of the procedure for performing maintenance

bots are described in the instruction manual for the AAKYA.00.00.000ÿÿ caliber automatic gun
30-mm ZTM-1.

6.6.12 Possible malfunctions and their elimination

Table 6.3 – Possible malfunctions

Remedy Recharge
malfunction The reason for the malfunction
1 Misfire: the moving parts Defective capsule
are in the extreme forward igniter

position, the shot did not occur

Breakdown fight Discharge the gun, perform
disassembly and replace the gun.
A lot of gun pollution Clean the gun

2 Feed skip: the shutter is in Tape jamming in the tract Inspect the power supply tracts and
the forward position. There is nutrition junctions for the presence of
no cartridge in the chamber. Jamming of a link in a link protruding parts or foreign objects.
water You will bend the stepping parts,
Breakage or stretching of the cable remove foreign objects.
on

3 No moving parts Low voltage applied to the electric Will continue shooting, use the
they are removed from the whisper starter trigger lever.
electric start
The leash of the string cutting Put the leash in the forward position,
mechanism is not in the front turning the screw before charging.
position

Consumption or lack of tape on the Switch the feed or load the cannon.
included feed.

The connector is not connected to the Connect the connector to the

electric starter. electric starter.

6-21
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

4 Inadequacy of the shutter shaft Foreign objects entering the chamber or Remove the cartridge, reload the gun
in the front end using cartridges with deformed cases or and clean the cartridge.
bed a projectile

we.

The stop is not closed or the rowan Put the shutter on the sear, remove the
is not fixed with a lock unsent cartridge from the delivery line,
reload the gun

Possible malfunctions of the gun and methods of their elimination are described in the manual for ex

pluatsii AAKYA.00.00.000ÿÿ automatic cannon caliber 30-mm ZTM-1.

6.7 Paired machine gun

6.7.1 Appointment

The twin machine gun is intended for defeating firepower and manpower against

Nick A more detailed description of the use and maintenance of the machine gun is given in

PO1.00.00.000 RE.

6.7.2 Installation of a machine gun

A twin machine gun is installed in the armored mask to the left of the automatic gun.

Beam 22 (Figure 6.12) serves to fasten the machine gun 2 to the barrel of the gun, as well as lot

kov 7, 23 and casing 1, which are fastened with the help of bolts 26, 24 and 25, respectively. The front

the end of the beam 22 is installed in the bracket 15, fixed on the barrel of the gun, and fixed

with nuts 12. The rear end of the beam 22 is attached to the cradle with the help of the adjustment mechanism 6

guns

On both sides of the beam 22 there are rectangular guides with grooves

sliders 4 and 14 are installed. Checks 3 and 13 sliders 4 and 14 are connected to the machine gun.

In the front slider 14, a shock absorber designed to absorb energy is installed

rolling back and roll of the machine gun when firing, returning the machine gun to its original position after firing

position and holding it in this position at any angle of elevation or descent.

Alignment mechanism 6 is intended for correcting the position of the machine gun in the process

bringing it to a normal battle and consists of a crosspiece 30, a bracket 33, and gauges

nuts 28, 29, 31 and 32, which are splined with wire. Beam 22 with machine gun 2 moves

when turning nuts 31 and 32 (nuts 28 and 29 must first be loosened).

In the body of the mask, the machine gun is sealed with a clip 18 with a spherical compensator consisting of

6-22
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ball bearing 19, compensating spring 17 and support sleeve 16. Ball bearing hold

vaetsya in the extreme left position with the help of the locking ring 20. Construction of the seal

ensures the sealing of the embrasure and does not prevent the longitudinal movement of the machine gun

when shooting

A fence 21 is installed on the bracket 18.

The machine gun tape feed system includes casing 1 and trays 7 and 23.

The machine gun belt is placed in the magazine 10, which is fixed by the stopper 8 and the tab 11.

To remove the magazine, it is necessary to pull the stopper 8 by the ring 9 until it is in position and remove the magazine

zin, removing tab 11 from the hole.

The manual reloading mechanism 27 ensures reloading of the machine gun from the place of operation

rotor and is attached to the beam 22 with the help of bolts 5. The cable-type reloading mechanism

(Figure 6.13) consists of a handle with a cable 1, a bracket with a roller 2, a return spring 3,

rod with guide 4 and fork 5.

To reload the machine gun, it is necessary to open the protective shields (Figure 6.21) above the gun

pull handle 1 (Figure 6.13) with the rotor and release sharply. Close the protective shields.

6-23
 6 -24
1–
casing;
2
PKT
machine
gun;
3.13
check;
–
4.14
-slider;
5,
24,
25,
26
-bolt;
6
adjustment
–
mechanism;
7,
23
-tray;
8
stopper;
–
9
ring;
10
shop;
–
11
tongue;
–12,
28,
29,
31,
32
nut;
–15
bracket;
–
16
support
–sleeve;
17
-compensating
spring;
18
clip;
–
19
ball
–
support;
20
locking
–
ring;
21
fence;
–
22
machine
gun
beam;
27
manual
–
reloading
mechanism;
30
cross;
–
33
bracket.
Figure
6.12
PKT
–
machine
gun
installation
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – a handle with a rope; 2 – bracket with a roller; 3 – return spring; 4 – a rod with a
guide; 5- fork
Figure 6.13 – Mechanism of manual reloading of the machine gun

6.7.3 Bringing the machine gun to normal combat

Bringing the machine gun to a normal shooting battle is carried out with cartridges with light powder
lei with a steel core, manufactured by one factory and one batch.
The machine gun is brought to normal combat using the aiming target K1616.21.071, manufactured by
made of thick cardboard or plywood, installed at a distance of (100±0.5) m from the cut
la, while the plane of the target must be perpendicular to the axis of the gun barrel.
Targeting should be carried out when entering a range of 1000 m. Control point (CT), relatively
which should be used to estimate the deviation, is 72 mm below the center of the bullet mark
aim at targets.

The machine gun firing mode is selected by setting the toggle switch
WEAPON SELECTION (SELECT WEAPON) to the PKT (MG) position.
The shot is fired by pressing the fire button under the thumb on the left hand

6-25
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the control panel of the weapon stabilizer.

The procedure for bringing the machine gun to a normal shooting battle:

- install the machine on a flat surface (no more than 2° tilt is allowed);
- locate the tower and weapon block;
- with the help of the tower rotation mechanism and the BV lifting mechanism, combine the brand you
aiming a machine gun with an OEM-B dot on targets;
- fire 5 single warm-up shots. By means of correction, bring them closer to STP
to the hit control point (TP) on the targets.
- without losing sight, fire a continuous burst of 10 shots.
- to determine the accuracy and deviation of STP from TP. If not less than 8 holes fit into the gaba
a rectangle 14x16 cm arbitrarily superimposed on the holes and the STP of these holes
ditsya in the dimensions of a rectangle of 11x13 cm, applied to the targets, then the machine gun is considered

shot
- if the STP is outside the 11x13 cm rectangle, it is necessary to make corrections
ditch and repeat the shooting.

- eosle bringing the machine gun to normal combat adjustment bushings of the me
hanizma will be closed with a wire, sealed and made a control line of 10 points
catch and re-determine the deviation of STP from TP.

6.7.3.1 Determination of STP for 10 holes

Calculate five holes in sequence from the right or left and divide the distance between them
with the fifth and sixth holes in half, draw a vertical line.
Calculate consecutively from above or below five holes and divide the distance between them
with the fifth and sixth holes in half, draw a horizontal line.
The point of intersection of the vertical and horizontal lines and will be the STP of the queue
10 shots (Figure 6.14).

Figure 6.14 – Determination of STP for 10 holes

6-26
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.7.3.2 Determining the coordinates for the card of control and calibration coordinates

After bringing to a normal battle, determine the coordinates for the control card
calibration coordinates of the machine gun, which is in the machine form.
Determination of specified coordinates should be done after the barrel cools down to temperature
ambient air
With the help of the guidance mechanisms, aim the mark of the sight into its mark on the shield, set
nom at a distance of (25±0.1) m from the muzzle of the gun barrel.
Observing through the THP with the help of a pointer, mark the point corresponding to the pole on the shield

he will cross the THP and measure the coordinates of this point relative to the axis of the sight mark.
Enter the obtained result in the card of control and calibration coordinates in the form
cars

For more accurate plotting of coordinates on the control target, sighting

through THP to produce at least three times and, finding the middle point of the three, determine the sizes
coordinates

6.7.4 Preparing the machine gun for firing

To prepare the machine gun for shooting, it is necessary:

- remove the cover from the muzzle of the machine gun barrel;

- wipe the machine gun with a dry rag and inspect the barrel;
- check the presence of lubricant on the automatic parts, and if it is dirty or absent

lubricants to dismantle, incomplete disassembly, cleaning, lubrication of the machine gun;

- check the reliability of the machine gun mounting;

6.7.5 Loading the machine gun

To load the machine gun, you need:

- load the machine gun ammunition into the store according to the diagram on the wall
shop;

- install the magazine and start the tape along the tape guides;

- open the receiver cover and feed the tape;

- put the fuse of the machine gun in the "OG" (fire) position;
- move the reloading handle of the machine gun back to the stop and return it to its original position

position

6-27
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

If there is no immediate opening of fire, put the fuse of the machine gun in position
position of "PR".

1 – fuse; 2 – the machine gun reloading handle

Figure 6.15 - KT-7,62 machine gun

6.7.6 Checking the operation of the electric trigger of the machine gun

Before checking the operability of the shooting chains, it is necessary to transfer the movable parts
put the machine gun in the extreme rear position using the manual reloading mechanism.
They will check the operability of the firing chains from the machine gun with an unloaded machine gun and not

charged power system in the following order:

- turn on the PN, turn on the FCS toggle switch on the PN in the main mode, on the PC
(PK) in "Double" mode;
- set the SELECT WEAPON switch to PN in the base
mode, on PC (PK) in "Double" mode to MG position (PKT);
- turn on the FC toggle switch on the PN in the main mode, on the PC in the mode
"Double";
- press and hold the button under the thumb on the left handle of the remote control
PU03-05 of the operator (commander). At the same time, the lowering electromagnet is activated and held
the machine gun and moving parts will move to the front position. When releasing the button
when the electromagnet of the machine gun is turned off.

6-28
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.7.7 Shooting from a machine gun

Open shooting in all cases must be started only on command.

To open and conduct fire from a machine gun, it is necessary:

- open protective shields (Figure 6.21) above the operator;

- cock the moving parts of the machine gun by pulling handle 1 (Figure 6.13) and set

fuse in the "OG" position;

- close all hatches;

- close the protective shields.

- perform actions according to clauses 8.5, 8.6.5.1–6.5.3, 8.6.3, 7.3.2.

ATTENTION! After releasing the firing button, the machine gun remains in combat readiness

(on the delivery line there is a cartridge), which should always be remembered even when

take precautions when handling the machine gun.

To resume shooting, press the shooting button again. In the case of

delay in shooting, its elimination should be carried out in the order set forth in the section
le 6.7.10.

6.7.8 Discharging the machine gun

After the complete cessation of fire, it is necessary:

- open protective shields (Figure 6.21) above the operator;

- put the fuse of the machine gun in the "PR" position;

- open the receiver cover, remove the tape from the receiver;

- raise the base of the receiver and remove the remaining cartridge from it;

- put the fuse of the machine gun in the "OG" position and, holding the bolt frame by

the reloading handle, lower the moving parts from the ratchet;

- close the receiver cover;

- make a control descent;

- put the fuse of the machine gun in the "PR" position;

- close the protective shields.

6.7.9 Servicing the machine gun after firing

Immediately after firing to soften the soot, preferably before cleaning, plenty

but lubricate the barrel and moving parts of the machine gun with gun grease. Security measures and more

a detailed description of the use and maintenance of the machine gun is given in PO1.00.00.000ÿÿ.

6-29
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.7.9.1 Removal and installation of a machine gun

To remove the machine gun, you need:

- open protective shields Fig. 6.21 above the operator;

- disconnect the power supply harness of the electric trigger of the machine gun;

- take out the rear and front mounting checks of the machine gun;

- took out the front and rear checks to remove the machine gun;

- remove embrasure sealing details from the barrel of the machine gun.

Installation of the machine gun is carried out in the reverse order of removal.

6.7.9.2 Cleaning and lubrication of the machine gun

To clean the machine gun, it is necessary to remove the machine gun from the combat module and make a non-pol

I disassemble the machine gun in the following sequence:

- open the receiver cover;

- raise the base of the receiver and check the absence of a cartridge in the chamber;

- separate the guide rod from the recoil spring and disconnect them;

- take out the shutter frame with shutter;

- separate the shutter from the shutter frame;

- remove the firing pin from the shutter;

- disconnect the electric trigger;

- separate the trunk.

Clean the machine gun in the following order:

- prepare materials and accessories for cleaning and lubrication;

- clean the barrel from the side of the chamber.

Carry out cleaning until the soot is completely removed, then clean the chamber and

flame extinguisher;

- clean the gas chamber and regulator;

- clean the receiver, gas tube with a rag soaked in gun grease

of the piston, the bolt frame, the gas piston, the bolt and the parts of the gas outlet, then wipe

them dry;

- wipe the rest of the parts dry with a rag.

Check the installation of the gas regulator. Reliable operation of machine gun automation

occurs when the gas regulator is set to position "1" or "2". Installation in position

"3" to be made during firing when there are possible delays due to the transition of moving parts to

6-30
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

extreme rear position. To transfer the gas regulator, it is necessary to remove the pin, ie

return the regulator nut, knock the regulator out of engagement with the latch and return it to the owl

place the slot of the selected division with the latch, fasten the regulator with a nut and insert bu

a bench

Assemble the machine gun in the reverse order of disassembly and check the slave

that of its moving parts, for which to make cocking and lowering. Moving parts during descent

should energetically return to the front position.

Install the machine gun and check the correctness of the electric trigger of the machine gun as indicated above
way

Lubricate the machine gun in the following sequence:

- screw a brush onto the ramrod and soak it with grease;

- insert a brush into the bore of the barrel from the side of the chamber and evenly cover the bore of the barrel

with a layer of lubricant;

- lubricate the chamber;

- with the help of an oiled rag, cover all other parts with a thin layer of grease

machine gun

At the end of the lubrication, assemble the machine gun in the reverse order and install it in combat mode

muzzle

Check the correctness of tapes and boxes. Checks the correctness of the cartridge tape equipment

by us and their arrangement in boxes. Cartridges must be inserted into the slots of the tape until it stops, and that's it

see on the same level.

The harness is placed in the box according to the markings on the box.

6.7.10 Possible malfunctions and methods of their elimination

Table 6.4 – Possible malfunctions of the machine gun and methods of their elimination

Remedy Replace the

malfunction The reason for the malfunction
cartridge. Replace
1 Miscarriage (inability of the Defective cartridge. cartridge or tape.
throne frame to the front Crumpled or soiled cartridge or tape.
position). 2 Incomplete Contamination of rubbing parts.
withdrawal of the throne frame Raise and continue shooting, if
back necessary, adjust the regulator on the
gas tube of the machine gun higher

pressure
Wedging the tape in the cartridge box. Raise and continue firing, if the delay
Tape skew in the receiver. is repeated, the machine gun will
discharge, inspect the placement and
correctness of the ammunition

6-31
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

wife's tape If necessary, adjust the

regulator to a higher pressure. He will
stop shooting, hold the live tape,
3 Involuntary shooting. Defective electric start. disconnect the trigger connector.

Defective trigger mechanism Will stop shooting, hold the live tape.
nism Charge the battery or run two
4 Failure of electric start. Low voltage onboard
networks hotel

Absence of contact in the electrical Check the connection of the connector,

release connector. eliminate the malfunction.

A more detailed description of the use and maintenance of the machine gun is given in

PO1.00.00.000RE.

6.8 Automatic grenade launcher

6.8.1 Appointment

Automatic grenade launcher KBA-117, caliber 30 mm, intended for defeating the living

enemy forces.

6.8.2 Installing a grenade launcher

The grenade launcher is installed (Figure 6.16) on the cradle 1, fixed on the mask of the gun unit

wife The attachment of the grenade launcher to the cradle is carried out with the help of rotary axes 2 and stopo

ra 3.

The shock-trigger mechanism of the grenade launcher is electromechanical, consisting of electromagnets

bolt 4 fixed to the bottom of the cradle and the adjustable lever system 5, mounted

bathroom on housing 6, installed in the rear part of the grenade launcher.

The grenade launcher ammunition system is intended for storing tapes with shots, direction

loading it into a grenade launcher, removing and storing an empty tape and cartridges.

The ammunition supply system consists of a magazine 7, a tape conveyor 19 and a link outlet 18.

The magazine is fixed in the lower part of the cradle by fixing it in the bracket with 14 latches

which is 17

The interior of the store is divided into two compartments by a movable partition. In one

a tape with shots is placed in one compartment, shot casings and ammunition are collected in the second compartment

standing tape

The tape guide serves to direct the tape with shots into the grenade launcher and is installed with

of the right side of the cradle on two spring-loaded rods 20.

6-32
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The link outlet is rigidly attached to the left side of the cradle and serves to direct the poo

stand the tape in the vacated magazine compartment during shooting.

Shot shells are ejected through the window in the lower part of the cradle and the mag window

zina in the compartment together with an empty tape.

The sensor 8 of the shot fired counter is installed on the left side of the cradle in the zone

movements of the striker of the grenade launcher.

For cocking the bolt of the grenade launcher during its loading and reloading, the mechanism pe is used

reloading, which is a cable drive 9, one end of which is passed through

the roller of the grenade launcher clip is embedded in the rear wall of the receiver, and the second one is with a handle

reloading 10 - passed through the roller 11 on the case 6.

The spring-loaded ring 13 serves to seal the embrasure of the grenade launcher in the body armor

module.

6.8.3 Removal and installation of a grenade launcher

To remove the grenade launcher, you need:

ÿ make sure that the grenade launcher is discharged;

ÿ
install the weapon block in a horizontal position;
ÿ
open the hatch in the cover of the module;
ÿ
unlock the rotary axes 2, move them to the vertical position and lock them

burp;
ÿ
pull stopper 3 by the ring to the first stop of the figured groove and turn it to the stop

counterclockwise;
ÿ
by moving up and back, remove the grenade launcher with case 6 from the embrasure of the armored mask and

cradle 1 and remove it from the module through the hatch; to prevent wear of the sealing ring

13 and springs 12 - tie them to the barrel of the grenade launcher;

Installation of the grenade launcher is carried out in the reverse order of removal.

6-33
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

59.9

1 – cradle; 2 – rotary axis; 3 – stopper; 4 – electromagnet; 5 – lever system; 6 – body; 7 – shop; 8 – sensor; 9 – cable
drive; 10 – reload handle; 11 – roller; 12 – spring; 13 – spring-loaded ring; 14 – bracket; 15 – bolt; 16 – leveling bolt; 17
– latch; 18 – link branch; 19 – tape drive; 20 - stock.

Figure 6.16 – KBA-117 automatic grenade launcher

6-34
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.8.4 Calibration of the grenade launcher

To align the grenade launcher, you need:

ÿ
install the machine on a flat horizontal platform;

ÿ make sure that the cannon, machine gun and grenade launcher are discharged;

ÿ remove the BV from the stopper manually (see item 6.5);

ÿ
install the weapon block in a horizontal position;
ÿ
set the control target (Figure 6.5) at a distance of (100±0.5) from the muzzle

section of the gun barrel at the height of the line of fire;

ÿ insert the THP-30 tube into the barrel of the gun and move from bottom to top and from left to right p

with the help of vertical and horizontal guidance mechanisms, aim crosshairs

places THP on the point of marking ZTM1 on the target;

ÿ
check the amount of mismatch between the optical and mechanical axes of the THP tube, for

then alternately turn it in the barrel four times at an angle of 90° and with each turn

check the amount of displacement of the TZP intersection from the ZTM1 marking point to the target,

which should not exceed 1 etc., in case of exceeding this value, produce

adjusting the THP tube or replacing it;

ÿ without knocking down the gun sight, the second THP-30 tube (tested earlier by a similar

method) insert into the barrel of the KBA-117, at the same time, the deviation of the intersection of the THP is from the right

marks KBA-117 on targets should not exceed 1 td;

ÿ
with a greater deviation - to achieve owls with the alignment bolts of the grenade launcher cradle

Placement of the cross of the THP with the AGS mark on the targets, for which:

– press out two pins in the upper part of the cradle flange;

– loosen and release the bolts 15 (Figure 6.16) of the fasteners by half a turn

cradles for an armored mask (6 pcs.);

- achieve alignment of the overlap of the THP grid with the marking of the AGS on the target path

Unscrewing of three leveling bolts 16 (the two extreme ones in the upper row and the middle

him in the bottom row);

– tighten the rest of the alignment bolts 16 until they touch the clamping surface

armor masks;

– tighten bolts 15 and check alignment;

If necessary, re-adjust in the order specified above.

– tighten the 15 mounting bolts in pairs with a wire.

6-35
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.8.5 Loading a grenade launcher

To load a grenade launcher, you need:

ÿ
set the fuse flag to the "PR" position;
ÿ
open the cover of the tape receiver of the grenade launcher;

ÿ captures the first link of the tape through the opening in the tape guide (the first link of the tape is always

should be empty) and will pass it to the tape drive;

ÿ
put the second link of the tape (with a shot) on the copier of the tape receiver of the grenade launcher, for

cover the cover of the tape receiver.

If subsequent shooting from a grenade launcher is assumed, then:

ÿ remove the cover from the barrel of the grenade launcher;

ÿ
switch the fuse flag to the "OG" position;

ÿ to cock the bolt of the grenade launcher, pulled the handle of the cable drive of the gear mechanism

charging

The grenade launcher is ready to fire.

6.8.6 Preparing the grenade launcher for firing

To prepare a grenade launcher for shooting, you need:

ÿ
visually verify the completeness of the grenade launcher, the reliability of its attachment in

cradle, make sure that there is no dust, dirt, or foreign matter on the ego surfaces

metov, as well as in the absence of visible mechanical damage, check the presence

grease on visible parts of the grenade launcher without disassembly;

ÿ
check the correctness and accuracy of the reloading mechanism, for which:

– open the protective shields of the BM (Figure 6.21) above the operator;

- set the fuse flag to the "OG" position;

- sharply pull the handle of the recharging cable drive to the stop and release;

- the bolt must energetically return to the front position, and the firing pin must be on

whispered;

– when pressing the trigger (or electric trigger), the striker must

break away from the whisper and hit the lever of the striker. The check will be repeated 3...4 times;
ÿ
check the operation of the fuse, its flag should be clearly fixed in the field

"OG" and "PR" women, if the grenade launcher is set to the fuse, then it whispers, at

press the trigger, it should not go down and the firing pin should remain

on a combat platoon;

ÿ
to check the operation of the electric trigger of the grenade launcher, it is necessary:

6-36
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- will include the EMS (clause 8.5);

- perform the actions under clause 8.6.6.1;

– will turn on the FC (ÿÿ) toggle switch on the PN (PN) in the main mode, on the PC (PK) in the

"Double";

– alternately press the "WEAPONS" button on the PN until it lights up

AGS indications;

– set the "CS-OFF" toggle on the PN (PC) to the "CS" position;

- perform actions according to paragraph 8.6.6.2 - 8.6.6.4.

6.8.7 Bringing the grenade launcher to normal combat

Bringing the grenade launcher to normal combat is carried out in the "AUTO" mode.

Preliminary alignment is performed on the control target, installed on

at a distance of (100±0.1) m from the muzzle of the gun.

The shots of the inert VOG-17M grenade launcher must be sustained before the start of firing

in the same temperature conditions for at least 4 hours. The grenade launcher is brought to normal combat

along the firing area of the terrain 25x25 m, distant from the combat vehicle at a distance

(1000±1) m. In the center of the site, set a flag that is clearly visible on the monitor screens

ditch To bring the grenade launcher to normal combat, it is necessary to install the machine on the tver

blowing (soil or concrete) horizontal platform with a slope, not prevy

firing ±30ÿ (so that the longitudinal axis of the body was directed in the direction of firing).

The procedure for bringing the grenade launcher to normal combat:

- include the EMS (clause 8.5);

- turn on the CS (FS) toggle switch on the PN (PN) in the main mode or on the PC (PK) in the mode

"Double";

- select weapon SELECT WEAPON switch on PN mainly

mode or on the PC (PK) in the "Double" mode, set to the "AGS" (GL) position;

- open the MANUAL RANGE cover on the PN (PN) in the main mode or on the PC (PK) in

in the “Double” mode and press the ON/OFF button, at the same time the distance will be set

1000 m;

- align the aiming mark of the grenade launcher with the base using the GN and VN manual drives

check box (guidance should be done uniformly – from bottom to top and from left to right).

If the grenade launcher was not fired immediately before firing bursts,

it is necessary to make a warm-up round of 2...8 shots. Shoot from a grenade

tometa in three bursts (approximately four shots in each) according to p.p. 8.6.6.2 - 8.6.6.4.

6-37
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

When shooting, it is necessary to observe safety requirements, izlo

married in the present RE.

After firing the first round, measure the coordinates of the points where the grenades fell

pour STP (see clause 6.7.3.1).

If necessary, correct the alignment of the brand of the grenade launcher, guidance, etc

shoot the next two rounds.

REMEMBER:

ÿ
it is necessary to determine the coordinates of the drop of grenades and to determine the STP after each one

queues;

ÿ if in the process of firing an error is detected, made during the aiming, turn in

do not accept the calculation and make an additional turn;

ÿ
when three or five shots are fired in a row instead of four, this row is fired

that is counted, if three out of three or four out of five shots fall into the target circle

by metro 25 m.

After firing three bursts, determine the deviation of the center of the STP grouping

(CG STP) (see clause 6.7.3.2) from the base of the flag in three turns and evaluate the quality of shooting

groups of three queues. If necessary, transfer the grenade launcher aiming point

(flag) at a distance equal to the longitudinal and transverse displacements of the CG STP relative to it

flag taken with the opposite sign. At the same time, aim the grenade launcher with the help of

brand adjustment tools. Measurement of the values of the deflected centers of falling grenades

ruler with centimeter divisions. Determine the center of the grenade drop with accuracy

up to 10 cm.

Each deflection of the grenade's fall depends on its location relative to it

the checkbox will assign a sign according to the following rule:

ÿ in the longitudinal direction:

- flight - "plus" sign;

- underflight - "minus" sign;

ÿ in the lateral direction:

- the right flag is a "plus" sign;

- the left flag is a "minus" sign.

Calculate the coordinates of the STP of the queue, for which sum the deviations from the flag of all

funnel taking into account the signs and determine the average values.

It will rate the fired queues according to accuracy. Three out of 4–X shots in each round

must fit into the dimensions of a square with a side of 25 m.

If these requirements are not observed, the queue is considered abnormal and instead it is shortened

send a new one.

6-38
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

In case of abnormality of two out of three bursts, firing from the grenade launcher will be stopped, find out

thread and eliminate the reasons causing increased scattering (it is necessary to check the steam

meters of guidance drives, mounting of the grenade launcher, condition of the inner surface of the barrel

etc.).

After inspecting the installation of the grenade launcher and eliminating the detected malfunctions, fire a

repeated series of 3–X bursts. At the same time, the requirement for the accuracy of queues must be fulfilled. Evaluate

the group of 3-X queues according to the dispersion of STP. At least one of the differences

between the extreme coordinates of the STP in absolute value, more than 13 m was obtained, then the group

bursts should be considered abnormal, three bursts will be fired again.

When the CG STP is deflected in three rows, the flag is turned on longitudinally and transversely

the grenade does not carry a hit within 13 m of the flag on the platform and check

combat grenade launcher in stabilized mode. If at least one of the coordinates has ot

the inclination of the CG STP from the flag exceeds 13 m, move the flag from its actual location

position by the amount of deviation with the opposite sign, recheck the aiming line and

bring the grenade launcher to normal combat.

In case of replacement, after shooting, grenade launcher, grenade launcher cradle, optics

electronic module ed. Self-defense - the shooting must be repeated.

After bringing to a normal battle, determine the coordinates for the control card

calibration coordinates of the grenade launcher. The determination of the specified coordinates should be done later

cooling the barrel to the temperature of the surrounding air as follows:

With the help of manual drives VN and GN, align the aiming mark at the range "0"

with its sign on the shield, installed at a distance of (25±0.1 m) from the muzzle of the barrel

guns Then, observing through the THP, inserted into the barrel of the grenade launcher, with the help of the Cherno pointer

mark a point on the shield corresponding to the position of the THP intersection and measure its core

dynate relative to the mark for the aiming mark on the shield. The obtained result is entered in the box

point of control and verification coordinates of the grenade launcher in the form of the combat module.

To accurately determine the coordinates entered in the card, viewing through the THP about

derives three times, and finding the middle point of the three, similarly to the definition of STP, determine

coordinate values.

In case of replacement, after shooting, grenade launcher, grenade launcher cradle, optics

of the electronic module of the control system - the aiming must be repeated.

6.8.8 Discharging the grenade launcher

To discharge the grenade launcher, you need:

ÿ
install a grenade launcher on the fuse;

6-39
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ÿ
open the cover of the tape receiver of the grenade launcher and remove the tape with the remaining shots;

ÿ remove the magazine from the grenade launcher and remove the shot shells from its compartment and use them

new links;

ÿ move the bolt back by the handle of the reloading cable drive and take the drop-out

a shot, protecting it from blows;

ÿ remove the grenade launcher from the module and carry out its maintenance according to In

operating instructions for the grenade launcher.

6.8.9 Maintenance of the grenade launcher after firing (employed, scientist)

Table 6.5 – Maintenance of the grenade launcher after firing (employed, scientist).

Instructions for the performance of works and applicable

Title of work
operational materials

Clean and lubricate automatically Conducts according to the Operation Manual

sky grenade launcher KBA-117. KBA.117 RE

6.9 Anti-tank missile complex

The anti-tank missile complex (ATRK) is designed to combat mobile and

stationary armored targets.

6.9.1 Composition of the anti-tank missile complex

It consists of a launcher with two anti-tank guided missiles

(ATGM) and PN-B guidance device.

The launcher is intended for installation and fixation of two RK-2S missiles (Fig

point 6.18), as well as for launching rockets. The launcher is located on the rotating mask of the unit

weapons on the right side of the tower.

The launcher consists of plate 2, on which two cradles 3 are mounted

installation and fixation of rockets 4 from the left side of the plate on the bracket, the instrument is installed

nia PN-B pos. 1 (Figure 6.17).

Container pos. 4 (Figure 6.18) serves as a hermetic closure for the rocket pos. 2 i

of the starter motor pos. 1.

The PN-B guidance device provides control of readiness for launch, launch of missiles, forms

rovanie control signals in accordance with the commands of the operator (commander) and formation

laser radiation for controlling a missile in flight.

6-40
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – PN-B guidance device; 2 – plate; 3 – cradle; 4 - rockets

Figure 6.17 – ATGM installation

Opti is used as a viewing channel when launching and controlling a missile in flight
co-television channel of the PN-B guidance device. Controlling the missile and aiming it at the target
is carried out by forming an information field in laser radiation with the following
by determining its position relative to the axis of the laser beam by the on-board missile system
and formation of rudder control signals to keep the missile within the laser range
radiation.

1 - starter motor; 2 - RK-2S rocket; 3 - front plug; 4 - transport and launch container; 5 - hooks; 6 - connector; 7 - rear plug

Figure 6.18 - RK-2S rocket

6-41
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.9.2 Safety measures when working with ATGMs

– If the rocket has not left the container, press the start button again
the right handle of the PU03-05 remote control, and in case of repeated failure, wait at least 5 minutes and
take off the rocket Send the failed rocket to the base;
– if the rocket left the container, fell on the trajectory and did not explode, it is liable
destruction at the place of fall according to the instructions set out in the regulatory documents for

exploitation of rocket-artillery weapons operating in the exploiting zone

organizations

ATTENTION! When shooting at the shooting range, it is PROHIBITED to touch and pick up
the hands of the remnants of the unexploded combat unit of the ATGM and its components.

6.9.3 Preparation of ATGM for firing, installation and removal

To install an ATGM on the launch platform, it is necessary:

6.9.3.1 Remove capping rockets from boxes, for which:
1) open the box, take out the boxes and place them on the box lids or on the table;
2) remove the rockets and place them on the bases;
3) conduct an external inspection of missiles.

ATGMs must be covered on both sides with rubber plugs, electric

connector sockets must be covered with transparent films.
Rockets should not have dents, scratches or traces of corrosion on metal parts.
6.9.3.2 Place two rockets on the clamps inside the combat vehicle.
Rockets should be installed by two people as follows:
1) open the locks of the clamp housings;
2) alternately install rockets on clamp bearings;
3) close the locks of the clamps;
4) visually check the correctness of stacking of rockets. They must be tightly pressed to
clamps and should not move freely.

6.9.3.3 Install two ATGMs on the guides.

The ATGM installation is carried out by two people when the engine of the combat vehicle is not working
disabled ATGM.

6-42
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

For installation you need:

1) remove the casing from the guides;

2) remove plugs of cables RK1 and RK2 from connectors "X1";

3) bring the ATGM to the guide so that the hooks of the TPK-2S container enter the grooves

guide With a smooth forward movement, move the ATGM until the latches are activated

guide (click), at the same time, the lever of the latches should turn back and go to the outlet

new position, and the rocket connector will enter the housing of connectors "X1" of cables RK1 and RK2.

Check the correctness of the ATGM installation in the guide using the longitudinal axis

ly (along the guide) to the rocket in the forward and reverse directions, while the power spring

must move in the grooves together with the guide carriage.

6.9.3.4 Before combat use, remove the rear and front plugs from the ATGM and bullet

live on a free seat inside a combat vehicle.

To remove the ATGM container from the launch platform guides, it is necessary:

- turn the lever on the guide to the right (in the direction of the shot) until it stops

container;

– move the container back from the guides of the launcher and remove it.

The best condition for launching an ATGM is the direction along the longitudinal axis of the warhead
howl of the car

ATTENTION! Launching of rockets should be carried out at:

- to the working engine of the combat vehicle (set the frequency of rotation of the crankshaft

engine 1600 - 2200 rpm);

- closed hatches of a combat vehicle.

Installation of ATGMs on guides should be done only in anticipation of launches.

ATGM transportation on rails should be at a distance of no more than 50 km.

To prepare ATGM for shooting, it is necessary:

– open the cover of the protective casing of the PN-B device and the protective cover of the device hood
PN-B;

- remove the turret and weapons block from the turret;

- close all hatches (driver, commander, two paratroopers).

6-43
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Actions of the control operator when preparing to fire a controlled rocket

that ATGM:

– set the toggle switch for selecting the control system on the commander’s remote control:

• to the GNR (OPERATOR) position when working in the main mode;

• to the COMM (COMMANDER) position when working in the "Double" mode.

– will turn on the FCS toggle switch on the PN in the main mode (PK in the mode

"Double"), while the indicator of the same name must glow green;

- turn on the operator's monitor, for which set the mains switch key to

position "I", the "POWER" ("NETWORK") indicator will turn on;

- on the PN in the main mode (PK in the "Double" mode) the indi should be turned on

katory FIELD W (FIELD ÿ), automatic range measurement mode RANGE AUTO

(RANGE AUT), automatic firing mode from the cannon and grenade launcher AUTO (ÿÿÿ);

– the rest of the indicators on the gunner's and commander's consoles must be turned off;

- set the SELECT WEAPON switch on the gunner's remote control

when working in the main mode (on the commander's remote control when working in the "Double" mode) to the position

M1 (P1) or M2 (P2). At the same time, the missile control equipment in PN-B is turned on, on the monitor

the image from the PN-B television camera, a cross-shaped aiming mark and

service information for the operator. If the missile and equipment are available and ready, it will be launched

nia on the monitor in the area of operational information next to the letter designation M1 (P1) and

M2 (P2) is indicated by "1". If absent - "0";

Turn on the stabilizer as follows:

– set the MODE switch on the PU03-05 remote control to the AUT position. At

this turns on the AUT indication on the gunner's PU03-05 remote control in the main mode

(commander's PU03-05 remote control - in "Double" mode).

Set the DRIVE toggle switch on the gunner's PU03-05 remote control in the main re

presses (commander's PU03-05 remote control - in "Double" mode) to the ON position. After (12±3) p

the stabilizer will turn on, which is signaled by the indication on the display PN (PN) W(ÿ)

(combat work), EG (VN), AG (ÿÿ) and AUT (ÿÿÿ).

Control of HV and GN drives is carried out no earlier than 2 minutes after installation

switch DRIVE on the PU03-05 remote control to the ON position.

To ensure firing chains, the gunner is in the main" mode (the commander is in the mode

"Double") must turn on the FC (ÿÿ) toggle switch on the PN (PN) (PK (PK)), at the same time, must turn on

is the indicator of the same name.

ATGM is ready to fire.

6-44
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.9.4 Shooting from ATGMs

Open shooting in all cases must be started only on command.

In order to open and conduct fire from the ATGM, it is necessary to perform the actions according to paragraph 8.6.8

6.9.5 Maintenance of ATGM after firing

After starting it is necessary:

- remove the empty container by turning the guide lever and using your hand to remove it

move back by the handle of the container. In case of completion of the starts on the connectors X1 and X2 of the cable

put plugs on RK1 and RK2 cable;

- put caps on the empty container and put it in the box. On unspent

install caps on the rockets, put the rockets in a box, seal the boxes and put them in the warehouse.

In the event that the ATGM was installed on the guides, but the launch was not carried out, for

In the shield film of the container connector, holes from the contacts remained. In this case, it is necessary

let's make a note in the ATGM passport, and use the ATGM itself in the future as the first point

ed.

6.10 Weapon checks

To check weapons, it is necessary:

- install the machine on a flat horizontal platform without visible roll and diff

rent;

- remove the turret and the weapon block with stoppers;

- set a control target (Figure 6.5) at a distance of (100±0.5) m from the muzzle

section of the gun barrel at the height of the line of fire;

- insert the THP-30 tube into the gun barrel and check the optical and mechanical mismatch

the Czech axis of the tube, for which, with the help of lifting mechanisms, the weapon block is combined

cross the THP grid with the ZTM1 marking point on the target. When moving the tube to the right and left

at 90°, the crosshair of the grid should not move from the aiming point by more than 3.6ÿ (1t.d.);

- the aiming of the gun should be uniform, in order to exclude dead moves of the mech

gun guidance system when aiming and firing from bottom to top and from left to right;

- without knocking down the gun’s sights, insert the THP cold target tube into the barrel of the machine gun

7.62 and check the coincidence of the optical and mechanical axes of THP-7.62. Deviation of the cross

the distance of the THP grid from the PKT mark on the target should be no more than 3.6ÿ (1td). With more

by tilting the machine gun's cradle by means of adjustment mechanisms to achieve the overlapping overlap of the set-

6-45
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ki THP-7.62 with PKT mark on targets;

- in the course of the weapons exhibition, periodically control the correctness of the aiming

the barrel of the gun to the ZTM1 point on the target;

- connect the control and calibration bolts with a wire;

- without knocking down the gun sights, insert the THP-30 into the AG-17 barrel. Deflection of the intersection of the set

that the THP from the AGS mark on the target should be no more than 3.6' (1t.d.). With greater deviation

with the calibration mechanisms of the cradle of the granotome, achieve overlapping of the THP grid
with AGS mark on targets;

- connect the control and calibration bolts with a wire;

- without knocking down the gun sights, install in one, then in the other anti-tank guided missile
rehodnik with THP-7.62 (from availability in ZIP). The deviation of the cross-section of the THP network corresponds to this

RK212 mark on the target should be no more than 3.6ÿ (1t.d.);

- with a greater deviation, it is necessary to loosen the fastening bolts and mechanisms
verki align the crosshairs of the aiming grid with the corresponding mark RK212 on the target;
- at the end of alignment of the guides, tighten the alignment mechanisms with locknuts,
tighten the bolts to the full stop and pin them with a wire;
- include the EMS (clause 8.5);

- set the gun selection switch to PN (PN) in the main mode, on

PC (PK) in "Double" mode to position M1 (P1) or M2 (P2);
- carry out the alignment of the anti-tank missile channel according to clause 8.7.10;

- make the final tightening of the guide bracket mounting bolts

of ATGMs.

6-46
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.11 Balancing mechanism

To facilitate the vertical aiming of the gun, a special device, the nose, is used

controlled by a balancing mechanism.

A spring-type balancing mechanism is installed on the combat module and is located

on the roof of the aft part of the BM (Figure 6.19). The mechanism is fixed with the help of bolts 2.

6.11.1 Operation of the balancing mechanism

When pumping the BW, mask 3 (Figure 6.20) rotates around its own axis and winds up

or unwinds cable 2, which, acting on piston 10 (Figure 6.19), compresses or loosens

has springs 8 and 9, providing the necessary effort for balancing the weapon block.

6.11.2 Replacing the cable in the balancing mechanism

To replace the cable, you need:

1. Remove the balancing mechanism from the module for that with the help of the HV pod gearbox

take the BV to the extreme upper position (maximum elevation).

3. Loosen the nuts 5 (Figure 6.20) and pull the cable 2 out of the seal (types C, B-B).

4. Unscrew bolts 2 (Figure 6.19), remove the balancing mechanism from the module.

5. Place the balancing mechanism on a workbench or tarpaulin (in field conditions).

Unscrew the cover fastening bolts 15 (Figure 6.19) and, holding it, remove it from the body 6.

6. Take out piston 10.

7. Unscrew bolts 1 (Figure 6.19) and disconnect the housing of the roller mechanism 5

building 6.

8. Remove the washer 17 (view A-A, Figure 6.19), take out the axle 19 and remove the roller 18.

9. Install the cable with the roller 18 on the axis 19 in the piston 10 and lock the axis with the washer 17.

10. Pull the cable 7 through the body 6 and through the roller mechanism 5, so that

the cable lay in the groove of the roller 4.

11. Attach the roller mechanism 5 to the body 6 and tighten the bolts 1.

12. Insert piston 10 into housing 6.

13. It will ensure the initial compression of the springs laid on the bottom of the cover pos. 15 technologically

leather lining K1616.20.415 made of ZIP.

14. Attach the cover 15 to the body 6 and tighten the fastening bolts.

15. Install a balancing mechanism on the roof of the combat module in accordance with p

6-47
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 6.19, while the cable 2 (Figure 6.20) must be threaded into the protective tube 7 on the

push the module so that it is inside. After that, fix the balancing mechanism on

module using bolts 2 (Figure 6.19).

16. When assembling the balancing mechanism and replacing the cable with all rubbing and threaded ones

apply Litol - 24 GOST 21150-87 lubricant to the surface (or another lubricant in accordance with

Appendix B).

17. With the help of the VN reducer, raise the BV to the maximum angle. Cable 2 (Figure 6.20)

place the mask 3 in the guiding groove and fasten with the help of nuts 5, pads 9 and screws 8,

10, at the same time, pull cable 2 as much as possible, choosing a free stroke with an effort of 15-20

kg The free end of the cable will pass into the cavity of the mask 3.

18. Pump the weapon block into the manual from the lower stop to the upper stop behind the farm

guns

19. Lower the weapon block to the lower stop and, having removed cover 15 (Figure 6.19), remove

from the bottom of the cover, technological lining K1616.20.415. Technological lining

K1616.20.415 to be put in the ZIP.

20. Attach cover 15 to body 6.

6-48
 6 -49
1,
2
bolts;
–
3
fitting;
4
roller
–mechanism;
5
housing
–
of
the
roller
mechanism;
6
body;
–
7
cable;
8,
9
springs;
–
10
piston;
–
11
screw;
–
12,
13
locking
–
screws;
14
adjusting
–
nut;
15
cover;
–
16
counter
–
nut;
17
locking
–washer;
18
roller;
–
19
-that's
it.
Figure
6.19
The
–
structure
of
the
balancing
mechanism
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – balancing mechanism; 2 – rope; 3 – mask; 4 – bending washer; 5 – nuts; 6 – adapter fitting; 7 – protective tube; 8
and 10 – screw; 9 – overlay.

Figure 6.20 – Installation of the balancing mechanism

6.12 Protective shields

Protective shields are intended to reduce gassing in the combat compartment of the combat unit

machines, as well as to protect the operator from moving parts of the combat module. At the same time

the combat module does not take up space in the combat compartment.

When servicing the combat module, the protective shields are hinged and folded back

be removed to access the mechanisms of the combat module.

To open the protective shields, it is necessary to open the latches (Figure 6.22), 3 each
clicks on each section.

6-50
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 6.21 - Protective shields

Figure 6.22 - Latches

6-51
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7 WEAPON STABILIZER

7.1 General information

Weapon stabilizer SVU-500-4C (SVU-500-4C) (hereinafter - stabilizer)

intended for stabilized guidance of BV in the vertical and BM in the horizontal
planes in order to ensure effective firing from the spot and from the move at ground targets and
places for air purposes. When the stabilizer is turned off, manual control is provided
by the guidance mechanisms from the manual guidance flywheels of BM (Figure 7.1, item 7) and BV
(Figure 7.1, item 6).

7.2 Composition of the armament stabilizer

The stabilizer consists of the following elements:
- stabilizer control unit BU1022-04 (BU 1022-04) (Figure 7.1, item 3);
- control panels PU03-05 (PU03-05) (2 pcs.);
- gyrotachometers GT46 (GT46) and GT46-01 (GT46-01) (Figure 7.1, items 1 and 2);
- amplifiers UUD14-02 (UUD 14-02) (2 pcs.) (Figure 7.1, item 4);
- transformer SP10-01 (SP10-01) (Figure 7.1, item 9);
- electric motors EDM-20M (EDM-20M) (2 pcs.) (Figure 7.1 items 5 and 8).

Figure 7.1 – Location of the weapon stabilizer components in the BM-7 combat
module

7-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7.2.1 PU03-05 control panel

The PU03-05 stabilizer control panel (Figure 7.2) is intended for control

stabilizer from the seat of the operator or commander.

1 – button for shooting from a machine gun; 2 – target selection button when measuring range; 3 – button from distance
measurement; 4 – button for shooting from a cannon, grenade launcher, ATGM; 5 – display; 6,8 – selection buttons; 7
– COEF button ; 9 – INPUT (ENT) button ; 10 – switch DRIVE (GT/ON/OFF)
(DRIVE (RD/ON/OFF); 11 – MODE switch (AUT/PAV) (MODE (AUT/HAU); 12 – RESET button
(CLR); 13 – MODE (MOD) button .
Figure 7.2 - PU03-05

On the front panel of the PU03-05 remote control, there are the following controls and indicators
cations (see table 7.1):

Table 7.1 - Controls and indications of the PU03-05 remote control and their purpose

Management bodies and Appointment

indications
Toggle switch " DRIVE" Turns on, off, and switching to standby mode of the stabilizer

Toggle switch "MODE" Switching the stabilizer from "AUT" (AUT) to "PAV" (HAU) mode and vice versa

"ENTER" (ENT), ">", "<",

"RESET" (CLR), " COEF", " MOD
" buttons

Three eight-digit alpha-digital Informing the operator about turning on (off), switching to the
displays specified operating mode, about the activation of current protection
against overloads of EDM (EDM) VN engines
(EG) (ÿÿ (AG)), about the results of the adjustment
A button on the left handle under Turning on the electric trigger of the machine gun
the thumb

7-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Management bodies and Appointment

indications
Button on the left grip under the Crossing the target when measuring the range
index finger Button on the right grip
under the index finger Button on the Distance measurement
right grip under the thumb
Turning on the electric trigger of an ATGM, cannon or grenade launcher.

One PU03-05 remote control is located at the commander's workplace on a hinged bracket.

The second PU03-05 remote control is located at the operator's workplace.

7.2.2 Digital stabilizer control unit BU1022-04

The stabilizer control unit BU1022-04 (Figure 7.3) is intended for receiving iz

products of control commands, sensor signals and sensitive elements of the stabilizer, them

conversion into digital codes followed by microprocessor processing of VN channels

(EG) and ÿÿ (AG) in accordance with the specified work algorithms. As a result, at the outputs of the

signals are generated that control the actuators of the HV (EG) and GN (AG) channels

and providing stabilization and guidance of the BV in the vertical and horizontal planes.

The control unit is located in the hardware compartment of the combat module, Figure 7.1 (item 3).

Figure 7.3 – Block BU1022-04

7.2.3 Gyrotachometers GT46 and GT46-01

Gyrotachometers GT46 and GT46-01 (Figure 7.4) are intended for measurement and conversion

dialing in the electric signal of the angular velocities of the armament unit and the tower in the vertical

and horizontal planes. One gyrotachometer GT46 and one are installed in the combat module

Gyrotachometer GT46-01. The location of gyrotachometers in the combat module is shown in Figure 7.1

(item 1).

7-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 7.4 – Gyrotachometers GT46 and GT46-01

7.2.4 SP10-01 three-phase converter

Three-phase converter SP10-01 (Figure 7.5) is intended for the development of

variable three-phase voltage 36 V 400 Hz for powering gyromotors of gyro sensors. incl
The converter is turned on and off by applying the power supply voltage
and activation commands from the control system. Location of gyrotachometers in the combat module
shown in Figure 7.1 (item 9).

Figure 7.5 – SP10-01 three-phase converter

7.2.5 UUD14-02 vertical and horizontal guidance amplifiers

UUD14-02 vertical and horizontal guidance amplifiers (Figure 7.6) front

meant for power amplification of vertical and horizontal control signals
guidance planes and control of electric guidance motors. Location of amplifiers
UUD14-02 in the combat module is shown in Figure 7.1 (item 4).

7-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 7.6 – UUD14-02 vertical and horizontal guidance amplifiers

7.2.6 EDM-20M electric motor

The two EDM-20M electric motors used in the combat module are identical
internal motors of HV and HV drives.

7.3 Preparation of the stabilizer for work, turning it on and off, order of operation
stabilizer bots

ATTENTION! When operating the stabilizer, the crew must observe the following
safety measures:
The stabilizer can be turned on and off only at the command of the commander of the armored personnel carrier.

Before turning on the stabilizer, the operator must warn the crew and crew about it
the page must make sure that there are no foreign objects on the case and inside the product and the packaging

inform the operator about it.

It is FORBIDDEN to be in the povo zone with the crew stabilizer turned on
company of the module, as well as leave the combat unit.
IT IS PROHIBITED to carry out maintenance and repair work on the product
included stabilizer.
Remove the stabilizer devices, disconnect and connect the plugs once
it is solved only after disconnecting the voltage of the on-board network.

During maintenance, training and training of the crew, the quantity is continuous
produced reverses at maximum speed in the PAV mode (HAU) or the specified one,

there should be no more than 5-10, while the angle of each turn should be at least 90° to the mountains

umbrella plane and not less than 30° in the vertical, with a subsequent break for guidance

at maximum speed for at least 5 min.

7-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7.3.1 Preparing the stabilizer for work

Turn on the SVU-500-4C stabilizer when the machine's power supply system is turned on.

To prepare the SVU-500-4Ts stabilizer for work, perform the following operations:

a) crew: close all the upper hatches of the car body;

c) operator:

- make sure that the BM is fully equipped, all nodes are on the swinging part

fully assembled, securely fixed, there are no obstacles to the rotation of the BM, lifting, etc

lowering of the BV both inside and outside the product;

- set the " DRIVE" switch on the PU03-05 remote control to the position
"OFF ";

- set the "MODE " toggle switch on the PU03-05 remote control to the "AUTO" position

(AUT)" or "PAV (HAU) " (depending on the required operating mode);

- report to the commander about the readiness of the stabilizer for work.

d) to the commander:

- set the " DRIVE " switch on the PU03-05 remote control to the "OFF" position
(OFF)";

- set the "MODE " toggle switch on the PU03-05 remote control to the "AUTO" position

(AUT)" or "PAV (HAU) " (depending on the selected operating mode);

7.3.2 Turning on the stabilizer

Before switching on, it is necessary to prepare the stabilizer for operation in accordance with p

subparagraph 7.3.1 of this manual.

The stabilizer is turned on only after turning on the FCS of the institutions

of the toggle switch " DRIVE (DRIVE)" on the operator's or commander's PU03-05 remote control (depending on

switch from the operation mode of the FCS (FCS) selected by the commander to the "ON" position . By

(12±3) s the stabilizer will turn on, which is signaled by the indication on the display

remote controls PU03-05 "P (W)" (combat work), "VN (EG)", "GN (AG)" and "AUT (AUT)" or "PAV

(HAU)" (depending on the position of the "MODE" toggle switch on the PU03-05 remote control ).

Control of HV (EG) and GN (AG) actuators is carried out no earlier than 2 minutes after

setting the toggle switch " DRIVE (DRIVE)" on the PU03-05 remote control to the ON position .

7-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7.3.3 Stabilizer operation procedure

The stabilizer is controlled by the operator or the commander with the help of
control panel PU03-05 at their workplaces.
The SVU-500-4Ts stabilizer provides the following control modes:
- automatic (ÿÿÿ (AUT)) - stabilized guidance of BM and BV;
- semi-automatic (PAV (HAU)) - guidance of BM and BV with increased speed;
- targeting (TRD).
Also, the SVU-500-4Ts stabilizer can be quickly installed in one of the components
he:

- readiness (HT (RD));

- balancing channel VN (BAL VN (EG BAL));
- balancing of the GN channel (AG BAL).

7.3.3.1. " AUT " mode

The "AUT" mode is intended for stabilized guidance of the BW in the vert
muddy and horizontal planes, used when shooting from a place and going down on the ground
for that purpose.

To turn on the "AUT" mode , you need the MODE toggle switch on the pool
set PU03-05 to the AUT position . At the same time, the AVT indicator lights up
(AUT) on the PU03-05 remote control.

7.3.3.2. "PAV (HAU) " mode

The "PAV (HAU)" mode is intended for stabilized guidance of the BW in the vert
calcareous and horizontal planes, but with higher speeds than in the "AUT
(AUT)", used when firing at air and ground fast-maneuvering targets
lam

To turn on the "PAV (HAU) " mode, the MODE toggle switch is required
set the PU03-05 remote control to the HAU position. At the same time, the indicator lights up
HAW on the PU03-05 remote control.

7-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7.3.3.3. "ATMS (ATMS)" mode

The "ATMS (ATMS)" mode is intended for stabilized guidance of the anti-aircraft missile system
calcareous and horizontal planes with speeds of 0.02-0.5 °/sec, used when shooting
ATMS (ATMS).
To enable the "ATMS (ATMS)" mode, the WEAPON SELECTION switch is required
(SELECT WEAPON) on PC (PK) ( PN)) set to position P1 or P2 (M1 or M2).

7.3.3.4. Status " AG BAL" (" EG BAL")

In the process of operation of the stabilizer, spontaneous movement may increase

(introduction) of the weapons unit in the vertical (horizontal) plane at the initial position
handles (body) of the PU03-05 remote control , that can interfere with observation and aiming.

To enable input compensation in the horizontal plane " AD BAL"

it is necessary to press the MOD button on the PU03-05 remote control, while the indicator lights up
BAL GN (AG BAL), to include input compensation in the vertical plane "BAL VN
(EG BAL)" must be pressed again on the MODE button , while the indi lights up
cation BAL VN (EG BAL). To compensate the input, press the " MOD" button on
PU03-05 remote control, at the same time, the indication " AG BAL" lights up, upon the second press
on the " MOD" - " EG BAL" button and, by pressing the ">" (or "<") buttons, achieve
reducing (stopping) input.

7.3.3.5. Condition "HT (RD)"

In the "HT (RD)" state, the stabilizer is switched to the manual drive
by maintaining the readiness of the stabilizer. The state "HT (RD)" is intended for reduction
the time of readiness of the stabilizer for combat work in cases where it is necessary for a short time
work with manual drives and the subsequent return to work with electric drives
lysator.

To turn on the "HT (RD)" state, you need the DRIVE (DRIVE) toggle switch on the pool
set the PU03-05 of the operator to the GT (RD) position.

7.3.4 Stabilizer operation

The guidance of the BW in the HV plane and the module in the GN plane is performed by turning the hand

unit (case) of the PU03-05 remote control. The upward (downward) movement direction of the BV coincides with the turn

7-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the upper part of the handle of the PU03-05 remote control on itself (ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ). In the GN plane, the direction of movement

The end of the module coincides with the turning direction of the PU03-05 remote control body.

The value of the speed of guidance of the BV when turning the handles (body) of the PU03-05 remote control ot

zero position to the stop smoothly changes from the minimum to the maximum. In the horizon
of the floor plane when the PU03-05 remote control body approaches the stop, the "override" is turned on and the

the growth jumps from the maximum lead time in the corresponding mode to PE
ribbed (maximum possible).
During the operation of the stabilizer, after moving the vehicle up (down) to the stop, the vehicle
there can be a time delay when moving the vehicle in the opposite direction (from the stop). For skills
changing the duration of the delay will deflect the handles of the PU03-05 remote control to the stop in the opposite direction

my side

ATTENTION! Do not allow the presence of BV for more than 2 seconds.

When the BV is on the lower or upper resistance, the appearance of self-oscillation is possible.
To eliminate them, it is necessary to move the BV away from the stop.

If during operation of the stabilizer the fuse of the HV or GN drive has blown
block BU-BM system, then the module must be turned off and before turning it on, make sure that
absence of reasons for increasing the load inside and outside the module.

7.3.5 Turning off the stabilizer

The stabilizer is turned off by setting the " DRIVE (DRIVE)" toggle switch to
remote control PU03-05 to the "OFF" position . At the same time, the indication goes out on the PU03-05 remote control

"ÿÿ (EG)", "ÿÿ (AG)" and "ÿÿÿ (AUT)" or "ÿÿÿ (HAU)". With the stabilizer turned off
guidance of the BV is carried out with the help of manual drives.

7.4 Checking the functioning of the weapon stabilizer

1 Turn on the control system, then the weapon stabilizer.

2 Set the "COMMANDER - GUNNER" (COMM - GNR) switch on the PC to
position "COMMANDER" (COMM).
3 Set the "MODE" toggle switch on the PU (C) to the "AUTO" position
(AUT), set the "DRIVE" toggle switch to the "ON" position .
4 Check controllability, reversing and braking when driving drives
HV and GN from PU in AUT and HAU modes by short- term turning of the knobs
(body) from the initial position.

7-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

5 Check the controllability of the stabilizer by changing the compensation signal

EG BAL and AG BAL in AUT or HAU mode , memorized them

initial value, for which:

- press the MOD button on the PU (C) - the "BAL GN" indication lights up (AG

BAL);

- press and hold the ">" ("<") button - the BM must rotate clockwise (counterclockwise).

arrows;

- by pressing the ">" and "<" buttons, set the initial value of the BAL GN signal (AG

BAL);

- press the MOD button on the PU (C) - the indication "BAL VN" (EG

BAL);

- press and hold the ">" ("<") button - the BV should turn up (down);

- by pressing the ">" and "<" buttons, set the initial value of the BAL VN signal (EG

BAL).

6 "COMMANDER - GUNNER" switch (COMM - GNR) on PC (PK)

set to the "GUNNER" (GNR) position and repeat the operations in paragraphs 3, 4, 5 during operation

PU(O) (PU(G)).

7 Carry out a function check in accordance with table 7.2.

Table 7.2 – Checking the functioning of the weapon stabilizer

action Result

Initial position of tumblers on PU(O) The indication "ÿÿ" (EG), "ÿÿ" (AG) "PAV" (HAU)
(PU(G)): "DRIVE" (DRIVE) in the "ON" (ON) position, on the PU(O) (PU(G)) is illuminated. HV (EG)
the "MODE" (MODE) toggle switch in the "PAV" (HAU) and GN (AG) drives are controlled by PU(O)
position Switch to PU(O) (PU(G)) in AUT position (PU(G))
The " HAU " indication on the PU(G) turns off, the
"AUT" indication on the PU (G ) turns on . Drives VN

(EG) and GN(AG) are controlled by PU(O)

(PU(G))
Open the landing hatch. Indication "ÿÿ" (EG) and "ÿÿ" (AG) on PU(ÿ)
(PU(G)) turns off

Deflects the body PU(O) (PU(G)) from the Indication "ÿÿÿ" (AUT) ("PAÿ" (HAU)) does not turn off
initial position to the left (right), deflects the Control of the drive ÿÿ (EG) and ÿÿ(AG) from PU(ÿ)
handles from itself (on itself) (PU(G)) is absent.

Close the landing hatch. The indication "ÿÿ" (EG) and " ÿÿ" lights up
(AG) on PU(O) (PU(G)) The
Use the PU(O) (PU(G)) handles to return the movement of the weapon block towards the stop is
armament unit to the lowering limiter. stopped, the movement away from the stop is preserved.
The AG drive is controlled by left (right) guidance signals.

7-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

action Result

Use the PU(O) (PU(G)) handles to return the The movement of the weapon block towards the
weapon block to the elevation limiter. stop is stopped, the movement away from the stop
is preserved. The AG drive is controlled by left
(right) guidance signals.

On the PC (PK), press and hold the TSU button The tower and BV rotate to a stop
(TD)
After stopping the turret and BV, unfold the body HV (EG) and GN (AG) drives are not
and handles of PU(O) (PU(G)) to the stop Release controlled VN (EG) and GN (AG)
the TSU button (TD) drives are controlled by PU(O) (PU(G))

Unfold the PU(O) (PU(G)) housing as far as it will The tower rotates clockwise (counter-
go (counter-clockwise) and hold clockwise) with a "reverse" speed.
ego in this position.

On the PN (PN) set the weapon selection The speed of rotation of the tower
toggle switch to position P1 or P2 (M1) or (M2) On decreased sharply. The speed of
the PN (PN) set the weapon selection toggle switch rotation of the tower increased sharply.
to a position other than P1 or P2
(M1) or (M2)
Switch the MODE toggle on PU (G) to the HAU The turning speed of the weapons block has
position increased sharply

Switch the MODE toggle switch on the PU (G) to The speed of rotation of the tower changed sharply
the AUT position and decreased.

Set the "DRIVE" (MODE) toggle switch on the On the PU(O) (PU(G)) the indication "VN" goes out
PU(O) (PU(G)) to the "HT" (RD) position (EG) and "GN" (AG)
There is no control from the handles of the PU (ÿ)

Turn the handles of the manual drive of The turret and anti-aircraft guns do not deploy
the lifting and turning mechanisms

Set the toggle switch "DRIVE" (DRIVE) on the PU The indication "ÿÿ" (EG) and "ÿÿ" (AG) lights up on the
(O) ( PU (G)) to the "ON" (ON) position. control panel

Drives HV and GN (EG) and (AG) are

initial position controlled

According to the signals from the PU(O) (PU(G)), The weapon block and the tower are set to the zero
set the weapon block and the turret to zero position.
position

Set the toggle switch "DRIVE" (DRIVE) on the On the PU(O) (PU(G)) the indication "P OFF" (W
PU(O) (PU(G)) to the "OFF" position OFF) lights up. On PU(K) (PU(C)) lights up
point.

Set the "COMMANDER - GUNNER" (COMM -

GNR) switch to the " COMMANDER" (COMM)
position and repeat the checks in accordance with
this table at the commander's workplace

7-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7.5 Stabilizer storage

Storage of the stabilizer is carried out in both sealed and unsealed containers

rowan combat module.

Before placing the stabilizer in storage, it is necessary to carry out maintenance of the stabilizer in

in accordance with section 32 of this Regulation.

During the storage of the stabilizer in the unsealed module, the following is carried out

works:

- once every six months during the seasonal maintenance of the module, maintenance-1 of the stabilizer is carried out

in accordance with section 32 of this Regulation;

- once every three months, turn on the stabilizer for 25...30 minutes (from technological is

power supply point with voltage 27 2- +V, with a power of at least 7.6 kW) in accordance with clause 7.3.2
5

present RE

7.6 Possible malfunctions of the armament stabilizer

When there is a malfunction of the stabilizer components on the remote control display

control PU03-05, messages are displayed:

- NN VN (NN ED) or NN GN (NN AD), while it is necessary to replace BU1022-04;

- NN PU (NN CP), while it is necessary to replace PU03-05;

- NN BU (NN CONT),

- UZT GN (OVP AG);

- (UZT VN (OVP EG)).

The malfunctions that have arisen cannot be eliminated by the crew. Stabilizer

subject to repair in the conditions of a repair workshop.

7.7 Maintenance of stabilizer

The periodicity of maintenance of the stabilizer, ETO, TO-1 and TO-2 - in accordance with p

frequency of the corresponding works for the machine (see tables 32.1 and 32.2).

The time required for ETO is up to 20 minutes.

The time required to carry out TO-1 is up to 50 minutes.

The time required for TO-2 maintenance is up to 2 hours.

7-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8 FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

8.1 Purpose, composition and placement of components of the fire control system
The fire control system (FCS) of the BTR-4E armored personnel carrier is intended for

providing search, detection and recognition of targets in the area, distance measurement

to targets (landmarks), aiming and conducting effective fire from all types of combat weapons

of the module from the workplaces of the operator and the machine commander under normal conditions

a woman's natural enlightenment.

The fire control system of the fire control system consists of:

ÿ control systems;

ÿ optical-electronic module OEM-V (OEM-V);

- PN-B missile guidance device (PN-B);

ÿ panoramic television complex 2P (2P) (PTK);

- the commander's monitor;

- operator monitor.

8.1.1 Designation of the fire control system

The management system is the central element of the management system, providing a joint

the work of all components of the control system.

The management system provides:

- obtaining a video image of the area from the OEM-V television cameras and displaying it on the monitor

commander and operator;

ÿ formation and display of service information on the commander's and operator's monitors;

- obtaining a video image of the area from the PTK television camera and displaying it on the monitor

the commander, control of the 2P panorama guidance;

- receiving a video image of the area from the PN-B television camera and displaying it on the monitor

commander and operator, formation of signals for the launch of ATGM missiles;

ÿ control of firing chains of weapons of the combat module;

- measurement of the distance to the target using a laser rangefinder (LD (RF));

- formation of smoke grenade (DG (SG)) launch signals of the smoke production system

howl of curtains (SPZ (SSS));

- formation of guidance signals of the combat module to ensure the execution of the vehicle

matized target indication (TD) to the operator or the commander;

8-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- formation of guidance signals of the combat module to ensure it is automated

method of bringing weapons into the car's dimensions;

- control of gun mechanisms during loading, firing, changing the selected type

ammunition;

- determining the range to the target by the "base on target" method;

ÿ when firing from a cannon, machine gun, and grenade launcher:

a) automatic calculation of aiming angles depending on: selected

type of ammunition, entered firing range, as well as manually entered pa

atmosphere meters (atmospheric pressure and air temperature);

b) automatic calculation of the angles of the lateral advance taking into account the deflection

nie projectile due to derivation;

c) automatic movement of the sight mark image on the monitor in

the position corresponding to the calculated angles of aiming and side abutment
marriage;

- memorization of the number of loaded cartridges for a cannon and a grenade launcher for automatic machines

the Czech account of ego balance when shooting;

ÿ setting parameters, checking channels, inputting initial data;

- current and mandatory (on command of the operator) self-monitoring of the equipment and con

troll of adjacent systems.

8.1.2 Composition of the management system:

ÿ BU-BM combat module control unit (BU-BM);

ÿ PC commander's console (PK);

ÿ PN operator's console (PN).

8.1.2.1 BU-BM combat module control unit

The control unit of the combat module BU-BM (BU-BM) (Figure 8.1) is an electronic

block intended for solving problems of reception and processing of signals coming from

of other components of the anti-missile defense system and related systems (weapon stabilizer, OEM-B, PN-B,

panoramic television complex), formation and issuance of control signals, v

including power supply signals, ensuring the interaction of the system components

control over digital channels of information exchange.

8-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.1 – Appearance of the BU-BM block

BU- BM is located in the hardware compartment of the combat module and has no organs

controls and indications.

8.1.2.2 PC commander 's console

The PC commander 's console (PK) (Figure 8.2) is an electronic unit designed to

nym to ensure that the commander solves the tasks of fire control and panoramic control

by a television complex, targeting the operator, launching smoke grenades (SSS).

Figure 8.2 – Appearance of the PC

The following control bodies and others are located on the front panel of the PC (Figure 8.3).

dications:

8-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.3 – PC front panel (Protective covers open)

- toggle switch COMMANDER–GUNNER (COMM–GNR) (1) for selecting the control unit

rator;

- FCS toggle switch (2) for enabling (disabling) FCS. Near the village

there is an indicator with a toggle switch, the color of which glows (red or green) according to

depends on the current operating mode of the control system and the position of the control switch;

- CS (FS) toggle switch (3) for turning on the power supply of the firing circuits of the combat module. Near the village

the toggle switch has a green indicator that turns on when turned on

tumbler CS (FS);

- DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) button (4) to enable the mode of bringing the BM into position

nie along the course of the machine body and simultaneous bringing of the vehicle to the ground zero

position Next to the button there is a green indicator that turns on

it's for the time of turning BM and BV and holding the button.

To protect against accidental switching on of the COMMANDER-GUNNER toggle switch (COMM-

GNR), FCS, FS and the WS DRIVE button are separated by protective clips;

- button BRIGHTNESS (24) for controlling the brightness of the aiming mark;

- COLOR button (23) for choosing the color of the aiming mark;

- button FIELD ( 22) to select the field of view - narrow or wide. Near the village

button, there are two green indicators - ÿ (N) and ÿ (W), which include

8-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

they sound in accordance with the selected field, a narrow field is the indicator ÿ (N) or a wide one

field - indicator ÿ (W);

- button AUTO - OD (S) (18) to select the shooting mode (row or single
ny shot) from a cannon and a grenade launcher. There are two indicators next to the button
green, which are turned on in accordance with the selected firing mode,
burst firing - AUTO indicator, single shot firing - inc
indicator OD (S);
ÿ SELECT WEAPON (SELECT WEAPON) pebble switch (17) for selecting a weapon
alive Correspondence between the position of the switch and the selected weapon
table 8.1;

Table 8.1 – Positions of the SELECT WEAPON switch

Position
Selected weapon
switch
G (GL) Grenade launcher

BT (APT) Cannon (armor-piercing projectile)

OF (FT) Cannon (high-explosive fragmentation projectile)

PCT (MG) Machine gun

P1 (M1) ATGM (1st missile)

P2 (M2) ATGM (2nd missile)

- ON/OFF (ON/OFF) button (11) for turning on (off) the panoramic TV

sion complex;

ÿ two buttons ÿ (left) (16) and ÿ (right) (14) for setting the direction of rotation
the moving part of the PTK with low speed;
ÿ two buttons ÿÿ (quick left) (15) and ÿÿ (quick right) (13) for specifying the direction
rotation of the moving part of the PTK with increased speed;
- TD (TD) button (12) for turning on the targeting mode;
- galet switch (9) for selecting the gun reloading mode (OT position
RECOIL and C/RECOIL) and the mode of tensioning the gun tape (position
PULL );

- the START button ( 10) to initialize the gun reloading mode and mode
tightening of the gun ribbon;

- the green RANGE AUTO indicator, which turns on in

distance measurement mode using a laser rangefinder;

8-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Under the cover with the inscription MANUAL RANGE (MANUAL RANGE) (21), which is attached
the opening folds to the left, located:

- ON/OFF (ON/OFF) button (20) for selecting the distance measurement mode, with
using a laser rangefinder or manually using the "base on target" method. Next to the button
there is a red ON/OFF indicator , which turns on in
in the manual range measurement mode (RANGE AUTO indicator
at the same time turns off);

- button (19) for selecting the type of target when measuring the range manually. Next to the button
there are three green indicators, which are turned on in accordance with p

selected target type. The correspondence between the indicator and the target type is shown in
Table 8.2.

Table 8.2 – Correspondence of the given height of the target to the designation and name of the target

Designation
Target type Base target height, m
indicator
Fire point (machine gun in the
trench, grenade launcher in the 1
trench, recoilless gun)
BMP, APC 2,3

Growth figure 1.5

Under the cover with the inscription SSS (6), which is folded up to open,
located:

ÿ SSS ON toggle switch (5) for turning on (off) the DH starter circuits (SG);

- two LB (LS) (7) and PB (RS) (8) buttons for launching smoke grenades from the left or right
bortov, respectively.
In the closed state, the SWS cover (SSS) ensures the fixation of the SWS ON toggle switch
(SSS ON) in the lower, off position.

8.1.2.3 PN operator 's console

The PN operator 's panel (Figure 8.4) is an electronic unit designed for
to ensure that the operator solves the tasks of fire control, launching smoke grenades of the SPR
(SSS), input of initial data, adjustment and electronic calibration of sighting channels, con
FCS (FCS) troll .

8-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.4 - Appearance of the PN

The following control bodies and others are located on the front panel of the PN (Figure 8.5).

dications:

Figure 8.5 – Front panel PN (Protective covers are open).

8-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- the FCS toggle switch (FCS) (1) to ensure the inclusion (disengagement) of the FCS. Near tum
an indicator is located in the blur, the color of which glows (red or green) depends
from the current mode of operation of the control system and the position of the switch of the control system;

- CS (FS) toggle switch (2) for turning on the power supply of the firing circuits of the combat module. Near the village

the toggle switch has a green indicator that turns on when turned on
tumbler CS (FS);
- DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) button (3) to enable the BM positioning mode
nie along the course of the machine body and simultaneous bringing of the vehicle to the ground zero

position Next to the button there is a green indicator that turns on

it's for the time the button is held down.

- button BRIGHTNESS (23) for controlling the brightness of the aiming mark;
- COLOR button (22) for choosing the color of the aiming mark;
- button FIELD ( 21) to select the field of view, narrow or wide. Near the village
the button has two green indicators, U (N) and W (W), which include
they sound in accordance with the selected field, a narrow field is the indicator ÿ (N) or a wide one

field - indicator ÿ (W);

- button AUTO - OD (S) (17) to select the shooting mode (row or single
ny shot) from a cannon and a grenade launcher. There are two indicators next to the button
green, which are turned on in accordance with the selected firing mode,
burst firing - AUTO indicator, single shot firing - inc
indicator OD (S);
ÿ SELECT WEAPON (SELECT WEAPON) pebble switch (16) for selecting a weapon
alive Correspondence between the position of the switch and the selected weapon
table 8.1;
- galet switch (9) for choosing: gun reloading mode (OT positions
( RECOIL ) and C/RECOIL), gun tape tightening mode (position
PULL), initial data input mode (ID position ), jus
timing ( adj position), control mode (CNTRL position).
ID (ID), CONTROL (CNTRL) and ADJ positions are covered by a cover (10) with
set ADJUSTMENT, which when opened, tilts to the right;
- the START button ( 8) to initialize the gun reloading mode and mode
tightening of the gun ribbon;

- the green RANGE AUTO indicator, which turns on in

distance measurement mode using a laser rangefinder;

Under the cover labeled MANUAL RANGE (20), which

when opened, it folds to the left, located:

8-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- ON/OFF (ON/OFF) button (19) for selecting the distance measurement mode, with
using a laser rangefinder or manually using the "base on target" method. Next to the button
there is a red ON/OFF indicator , which turns on in
in the manual range measurement mode (RANGE AUTO indicator
at the same time turns off);

- button (18) for selecting the type of target when measuring the range manually. Next to the button
there are three green indicators, which are turned on in accordance with p

selected target type. Correspondence between the indicator and the target type according to tab
face 8.2.

Under the cover with the inscription ADJUSTMENT (10), which opens
to the right, located:

- four buttons ÿ (left) (14), ÿ (right) (11), ÿ (up) (13) and ÿ (down) (12) for
ensuring the movement of aiming marks on the video image during alignments, iz
changing values when entering initial data, moving the pointer through the menu;

- the INPUT button (15) for confirming the selection and entering values;
under the cover with the inscription SSS (5), which is folded up to open, split
wives:

ÿ SSS ON toggle switch (4) for turning on (off) the DH starter circuits (SG);

- two LB (LS) (6) and PB (RS) (7) buttons for launching smoke grenades from the left or right
bortov, respectively.
In the closed state, the SWS cover (SSS) ensures the fixation of the SWS ON toggle switch
(SSS ON) in the lower, off position.

To protect against accidental activation of the FCS (FCS), FS (FS) toggle switches and the GABA button

RIT (WS DRIVE) are separated by protective brackets.

8.1.3 Optical-electronic module OEM-B

The OEM-V optical -electronic module (OEM-V) (Figure 8.6) is an optical

an electronic device in which there are: two aiming television cameras (camera
a narrow field of view and a wide field of view camera), emitter and receiver of a long-range laser
mayor, as well as electronic schemes of power supply and control.

OEM-B is intended for the formation of a television video image of the area,
as well as distance measurements with the help of a laser rangefinder in natural and artificial conditions
low illumination.

8-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 - optical-electronic module OEM-B; 2 – OEM-B protective cover; 3 - cover of the protective casing; 4 - protective casing

Figure 8.6 – Optical-electronic module OEM-B

The OEM-B is installed on one axis with the anti-aircraft gun to the left of the gun (Figure 8.7) and is placed in protection

new casing (4) with cover (3). OEM-B protective cover (2) and cover in working condition

the protective cover is closed.

1 – complex 2P; 2 – optical-electronic module OEM-B, 3 – guidance device PN-B

Figure 8.7 – Placement of OEM-B, PN-B and panoramic

television complex on the combat module

8-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.1.4 PN-B missile guidance device

The PN-B missile guidance device (PN-B) (Figure 8.8) is an optical

an electronic-mechanical device in which there are: a television camera and a laser
emitter
PN-B is intended for the formation of a television video image of the area and
formation of a laser field of missile control.

Figure 8.8 – Appearance of PN-B

PN-B is installed in the BV in the immediate vicinity of the ATGM guides on the right
sides of the BM (Figure 8.7).

8.1.5 Panoramic television complex 2R

The 2P panoramic television complex (Figure 8.9) is an optical system

electronic-mechanical device. The main components are: television
camera (TTS-2R), rotating in the horizontal plane in the range of 360º×n, and the drive
noy mechanism ensuring rotation of TTS-2R. In TTS-2R there are lenses and televisions
a camera that generates a video signal.
The panoramic television complex is intended for the formation of television
video images of the area from a television camera.

8-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.9 – External view of the 2P panoramic complex

The 2P complex is located in the rear of the combat module on the roof of the equipment compartment

(Figure 8.7).

8.1.6 Commander and operator monitors

The commander's and operator's monitors are intended for the output of television video

images from OEM-B, PTK and PN-B television cameras, as well as service information being generated
system

The commander's monitor is located in the control compartment on the bracket in front of the command

rum.

The operator's monitor is located in the front left part of the landing compartment on the left

company bracket in front of the operator.

8.2 Safety requirements for the operation of the EMS

Personnel who have studied the present manual according to ex

pluatatsii, passed instruction on the safety of machine operation.

When working with the EMS, it is necessary to strictly follow the procedure of operations specified in this document

we eat management.

8-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

IT IS PROHIBITED:

ÿ to operate a defective control system;

- perform work not provided by the operating manual;

- perform maintenance work with loaded weapons and

charged SPR launchers;

- eliminate malfunctions with loaded weapons and loaded launchers

novices of the SZ;

- connect and disconnect electrical harnesses without first disconnecting the electrical

tripping;

- continuous operation of the EMS for more than 6 hours, a break between six-hour cycles of $
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ not less than 1 hour.

The time of continuous work in combat conditions is not limited.

In order to avoid injury to the service personnel, 3 is PROHIBITED:

- press the distance measurement button with the AMS turned on in all cases, no

related to direct distance measurement;

- when the system is turned on, get in and out of the car, stand in front

OEM-B entrance windows;

- turn on the system when the landing party is on the car;

- points the rangefinder mark at people and measures the distance, krome

cases of combat work;

- measure the distance with a laser rangefinder on objects and structures, raspolo

married in the parks of military units or in the places of technical maintenance

of the machine, except those specifically designated for measurements during slave inspections
you are a rangefinder;

To prevent equipment failure, IT IS PROHIBITED:

- directs the aiming and rangefinder marks to the sun;

- measure the distance with a laser range finder on nearby flashers

objects

NOT RECOMMENDED:

measure the distance using a laser rangefinder more often than 6 times

reny per minute, the interval between measurements should be at least 10 seconds. At three consecutive
There should not be a subsequent break in total distance measurements with an interval of 1 s
nee 20 s.

In combat conditions, the number of distance measurements with a laser rangefinder is not

are limited

8-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.3 Initial position of the management bodies of the management system

Before turning on the control system and after turning it off, all control bodies must be located
in the original positions:

on the PC commander's console:

- FCS and CS (FS) toggle switches - in the lower (off) position;

- toggle switch COMMANDER - GUNNER (COMM - GNR) - in the GUNNER position

(GNR);

- the SELECT WEAPON toggle switch is in one of the positions

new BT (APT), OF (FT) or PKT (MG);

- mode selector switch - in the OFF position ;

- SSS ON toggle switch - in the lower (off) position;

- MANUAL RANGE and SSS covers must be closed

covered

on the PN operator's console:

- FCS and CS (FS) toggle switches - in the lower (off) position;

- the SELECT WEAPON toggle switch is in one of the positions

new BT (APT), OF (FT) or PKT (MG);

- mode selector switch - in the OFF position ;

- SSS ON toggle switch - in the lower (off) position;

ÿ MANUAL RANGE, SSS and ADJUSTMENT covers

(ADJUSTMENT) must be closed.

The weapon stabilizer must be turned off.

8.4 Preparation of the EMS for work

To prepare the FCS for work, it is necessary:

ÿ open the cover of the OEM-B protective cover and the OEM-B protective cover;
ÿ open the cover of the PN-B protective cover and the PN-B protective cover;
ÿ open the protective cover of the TTS-2P complex 2P;

- make sure that there are no objects preventing the rotation of the combat module and block

weapons outside and inside the car;

- close all chassis hatches;

- start the engine according to the machine's operating manual.

8-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.5 Inclusion of AMS

8.5.1 Switching on the control system from the operator 's seat

Switching on the FCS (FCS) from the operator's seat should be done in the following sequence
say:

- turn on the FCS toggle switch on the PN remote control , while the PN must include

the FCS, FIELD W, and RANGE indicators are read

AUTO), ÿÿÿ (AUTO), FCS indicator should have a green glow.

By default, the following are installed when the OS is turned on:

- field of vision - wide;

- firing mode - burst;

- distance measurement mode - automatic (using a laser rangefinder);

- turn on the operator's monitor, for which the switch key " " is on the monitor

set to the "-" position, while the "NETWORK" ("POWER") indicator will turn on;

- a video image of the area formed by the wide field will appear on the monitor

OEM-B measure and service information (Figure 8.10).

Figure 8.10 – The type of information displayed on

the operator's monitor when the AMS is turned on

8-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.5.1.1 The following service information is displayed on the monitor:

- mnemonic diagram of the course position of the combat module relative to the chassis and direction

sighting lines of the 2P complex relative to the combat module;

- the value of the heading angle of the combat module position - the position of the turning angle of the combat module

of the module relative to the chassis in divisions of the protractor (value 00-00 corresponds to

position to the stern, 15-00 ÿ to port, 30-00 ÿ on course, 45-00 ÿ to starboard

board);

- borders of a narrow field of view - show what part of the image of the area will be

displayed when switching to a narrow field of view;

- rangefinder mark - for pointing at the target when measuring the range with a laser rangefinder

number;

- central aiming mark - for aiming at the target when shooting;

- shooting mode - burst (indicated by AUTO) or single shot (int

dictated by OD(S));

- type of weapon - gun (positions OF (FT) - high-explosive fragmentation projectile and BT (APT) -

armor-piercing projectile), grenade launcher (position G (GL)) or machine gun (position PKT (MG)).

The selected position has a white background.

- number of charges - remaining charges for the cannon and grenade launcher;

- magazine filling indicators - show the remaining charges for the gun

and a grenade launcher relative to the possible full loading of stores. Remaining charges

indicated by the white part of the strip;

- value of the elevation angle of the armament unit - angular position of the armament unit

in the plane of vertical guidance relative to the chassis;

- aiming angle value - calculated aiming angle for the selected type

weapons, calculated after measuring the range;

- if all the hatches of the landing gear are not closed, above the inscription with the value of the elevation angle

the flashing inscription HATCHES appears.

8.5.1.2 If necessary, adjust the brightness and contrast of the image to

monitor in the following sequence:

- press the "MENU" button on the monitor , the main menu will appear on the screen

(Figure 8.11):

8-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Main Menu

Input Select Main picture channel

Image Adjustments Scan inputs
Color adjustment PIP Mode

Video Settings PIP Channel

Scalings Adjustments PIP Size

System Settings PIP hor. Position

PIP ver. Position

Swap Main & PIP

Figure 8.11 - The main menu of the monitor

- using the "+" and "-" buttons, move the pointer to the item "Color adjustment" and
press the "MENU" button ("MENU");

- in the sub-menu that appears, use the "+" and "-" buttons to move the pointer to the item
"Brightness" to adjust the brightness or to the "Contrast" item to adjust the con
trust and press the "MENU" button ("MENU");

- a brightness or contrast level adjustment scale will appear;

- with the help of the "+" and "-" buttons adjust the selected parameter, change the steam
meters will be displayed on the adjustment scale;

- in order to remember the adjustment made, it is necessary to sequentially exit from

menu by pressing the EXIT button until the menu completely disappears from the screen
products

Attention! If the monitor was turned off without fully exiting the menu, it will
daily adjustments are not saved.

To return standard (factory, i.e. installed at the manufacturer's factory)

brightness and contrast settings, it is necessary:

- press the "MENU" button on the monitor , the main menu will appear on the screen
(Figure 8.11);

- using the "+" and "-" buttons, move the pointer to the menu item "System Settings" and
press the "MENU" button ("MENU");

- in the sub-menu that appears, use the "+" and "-" buttons to move the pointer to the item
"Reset to Default" and press the "MENU" button ("MENU");

8-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- the image on the monitor will turn off, after 5-15 seconds the image will turn on again

is read, and the brightness and contrast of the image will meet the standard

to my (factory) settings.

Attention! In order to avoid disturbing the monitor settings, use others

items of the on-screen menu of the monitor, except those mentioned above, is not recommended.

8.5.2 Switching on the AMS from the commander 's seat

Switch on the AMS from the commander's seat in the following sequence:

- set the COMMANDER – GUNNER (COMM – GNR) switch on the PC remote control to

position COMMANDER (COMM);

- turn on the SWO toggle switch on the PC remote, while the indicator on the PC should turn on

FCS , FIELD W , RANGE AUTO

(AUTO), the FCS indicator should be green.

By default, the following are installed when the OS is turned on:

- field of vision - wide;

- firing mode - burst;

- distance measurement mode - automatic (using a laser rangefinder);

- turn on the commander's monitor, for which the switch key " " is on the monitor

set to the "-" position, while the "NETWORK" ("POWER") indicator will turn on;

- a video image of the area formed by a wide-field camera will appear on the monitor

OEM-B measure and service information (Figure 8.10).

ÿ adjust, if necessary, the brightness and contrast of the image of the area

on the commander's monitor in accordance with clause 8.5.1.2.

8.6 Operator's and commander's actions when working with AMS

The armored personnel carrier's control system provides the ability to control weapons like an opera
armored personnel carrier, as well as the commander. Selection of the operator controlling the weapons (yes

lee - control operator), is performed by setting the COMMANDER - GUARD switch

CHIK (COMM – GNR) on the PC to the desired position.

With the toggle COMMANDER - GUNNER (COMM - GNR) turned on

COMMANDER (COMM) will appear on the monitor screen of both the commander and the gunner

8-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

COMMANDER ( Figure 8.12), at the same time on the PN operator ’s panel, all the
indication, the FCS indicator lights up in red.

Figure 8.12 – Type of information displayed on operator monitors

and the commander when selecting the COMMANDER mode

Surveillance of the area, search and identification of targets, distance measurement, etc
the control operator can aim and fire both in a narrow and in a wide range
field of vision At the same time, it is recommended to observe and search for targets in a wide field
vision, and measuring range, aiming and shooting - in a narrow field of vision.
The image on the monitor screen in a narrow field of view is shown in Figure 8.13.
If necessary, the control operator has the opportunity to monitor and
aiming with the help of a PN-B television camera. To enable this mode, it is necessary
press and hold the FIELD button on the control panel for more than 2 seconds. Image
on the monitor will correspond to the image in the shooting mode of the guided missile
that (clause 8.6.8).

8.6.1 Distance measurement with a laser rangefinder

Measuring the distance to remote objects with a laser rangefinder is better

in a precise way. To make a measurement, you need:

8-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.6.1.1 Include the EMS in accordance with clause 8.5.

8.6.1.2 Turn on the weapons stabilizer in accordance with clause 7.3.

8.6.1.3 By pressing the BRIGHTNESS or COLOR buttons, the mouth

new required, contrasting against the background of the target, the color of sight and rangefinder marks.

8.6.1.4 By turning the arms of the control panel of the weapon stabilizer on

the working place of the control operator to produce the guidance of the intersection of the rangefinder mark

to the center of the visible part of the target. In the process of pointing along the horizon, the mnemonic is in the upper left

no corner of the monitor should change its appearance in accordance with the change in mutual position

BM and chassis. The information under the mnemonic, reflecting the value, should also be changed

course angle BM in divisions of the protractor (d. u.). In the process of pointing vertically, it should be

the value of the elevation angle of the BV changes in angular degrees and minutes.

8.6.1.5 Press the distance measurement button under the index finger on the right hand

the control panel of the weapon stabilizer.

Make sure that on the monitor in the display area of the results of measuring the range of appearance

only from one to three values of the measured range, in the zone of indication of aiming angles

the value of the calculated angle appeared, and the aiming mark moved down and to the right on the screen

in (Figure 8.14).

Figure 8.13 – View of the image on the operator's and

commander's monitors when selecting a narrow field of view

8-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.14 – View of information on the monitor when measuring range

The maximum firing range is:

ÿ 3000 m for BT (APT) shells;

ÿ 4000 m for FT projectiles;

ÿ 1750 m for a grenade launcher (GL);

ÿ 2000 m for a machine gun (MG).

If the entered range is greater than the specified limits, but less than 9960 m, then in the zone of

indication of the range measurement results will flash its actual measured value,

but the angles of sighting and lateral advance will be calculated for the range of sighting

weapons, namely:

ÿ 1000 m for the gun (BT (APT) and OF (FT) shells) and grenade launcher (GL);

ÿ 600 m for a machine gun (MG).

If the entered distance is greater than 9960 m, then this measurement is ignored, the distance is not

is remembered, its value is not indicated on the monitor.

8.6.1.6 When two or three values of the measured range appear, the operator, press

I have a range selection button under the index finger on the left handle of the control panel

weapon stabilizer, moves the pointer of the selected value (v

the selected value has a white background) among the available values, choosing the most from them

8-21
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

probable At the same time, there will be a change in the target angle indication zone
of the calculated angle, and the aiming mark will accordingly move on the screen.

8.6.2 Distance measurement by the "base on target" method, manual input of the distance value and
nulling the value of the measured range.

This method of measuring the distance to the target is less accurate than laser measurement
with a rangefinder and is used either with an inoperable laser rangefinder, or for

exclusion of the probability of premature detection by the enemy with the help of
means of registration of laser radiation.

To make a measurement, you need:

8.6.2.1 Include the EMS in accordance with clause 8.5.

8.6.2.2 Turn on the weapons stabilizer in accordance with clause 7.3.

8.6.2.3 On PC or PC (depending on which of the operators is in control

) open the cover labeled MANUAL RANGE and press the button
to ON /OFF. At the same time, the AUTO indicator will turn off and the indicator will turn on

tor ON/OFF . The indicator (fire point) will also turn on, I testify
stating that when measuring, a target with a height of 1 m will be selected as the base. Cross-shaped distance

the license plate on the monitor will be extinguished, and a measuring strobe will appear (Fig

No. 8.15), representing two horizontal strokes - the fixed lower and upper
upper vertically movable. The message "1.0" will appear under the measuring strobe

face in meters of the height of the base target.

8.6.2.4 By turning the arms of the weapon stabilizer control panel

at the workplace of the controlling operator, combine the lower stroke of the measuring strobe c

lower cut of the target. By pressing the buttons under the index fingers on the left and right hand
in the slots of the weapon stabilizer guidance console, achieve alignment of the upper stroke with

upper cut of the target.

At the same time, pressing the button on the right handle decreases the distance between strokes

(range increases), and pressing the button on the left handle increases it (range
decreases). Correspondingly, the readings in the measurement results display zone change

range, in the aiming angle indication zone, and the position of the aiming mark (Fig
night 8.16).

8-22
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.15 - The type of information on the monitor when the distance
measurement mode is turned on by an indirect method

Figure 8.16 – View of information on the monitor at the end

distance measurement by an indirect method.

8-23
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.6.2.5 If the range to the target is known in advance, then its value can be entered into the system

manual control. For this, it is necessary to perform points 8.6.2.1 - 8.6.2.3, after which,
by pressing the buttons under the index fingers on the handles of the stabilizer control panel
rom to set the required value in the range display area.

8.6.2.6 To reset the range value obtained as a result of laser measurement

with a rangefinder and stored in the memory of the control system, it is necessary on a PC or PC (v
depending on which of the operators is the manager) open the cover with the inscription
MANUAL RANGE and press the ON/OFF button. At the same time
the manual range measurement mode will turn on, and then press the ON/OFF button again
(ON/OFF). At the same time, the laser rangefinder distance measurement mode will be activated again, but
the range value obtained as a result of the previous measurement will be reset. message
everything in the range display area will be turned off.

8.6.3 Selecting the firing mode

8.6.3.1 Firing from all types of weapons is possible when the SAO is turned on with the working weapon

hundred of the control operator (operator or commander) with closed hatches of the chassis and installations

turn the CS (FS) toggle switch on the PC (PN) to the upper (on) position. At the same time, greens will be included

ny indicator of CS (FS).

8.6.3.2 The type of weapon is set in accordance with the position of the trigger switch

select WEAPON (SELECT WEAPON) on the PC (MON). Change weapons in the slave process
The operator can move SELECT WEAPON to the required position.
At the same time, the inverse pointer of the selected ammunition on the monitor will be set in the period of time

armed type

8.6.3.3 After switching on, the burst firing mode is selected by default (AUTO

(AUTO)).

8.6.4 Recommendations to the operator on aiming the weapon, observing the results

shooting and correcting shooting.

8.6.4.1 When shooting from a place and from short stops at a fixed target with a point at

aiming is the center of the visible part of the target. Aiming should be done from left to right and
bottom up When firing on a roll, target the direction from the side of the roll.
When tilting to the right, aim at the upper left corner of the target, when tilting to the left - at the top
right corner
When shooting at moving targets, aiming should be carried out by the tracking method
by goal or method of waiting for the goal.

8-24
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Guidance by the method of tracking the target consists in the fact that the controlling operator,

took the necessary advance on the movement of the target (by selecting the appropriate stroke of the sight

noy mark or by moving the aiming point), moves the aiming line with speed

moves the target and fires at the most correct position

aiming mark in relation to the target.

Targeting by the method of waiting for the target consists in the fact that the control operator is vyvo

the child makes the selected aiming stroke forward along the course of the target by 2-4 figures and holds it along you

saute at the level of the selected aiming point; when the aiming point is aligned with your

shooting is done with the armed aiming stroke.

8.6.4.2 When shooting a target, when the direction to the target does not change, the aiming mark

must be brought to the aiming point by the shortest route.

Guidance must be done so that the aiming mark during field fluctuations

sight crossed the target. Firing should be carried out whenever possible at the moment of damping of the oscillation

ny (especially vertical ones). If the guidance fails, it will end due to significant fluctuations

field of vision, then one should take a bias equal to approximately half of the figure of the target, i.e.

shoot when the aiming mark approaches the contour of the target.

When the situation allows, it is expedient to slow down the speed of the armored transport

porter, up to a complete stop, for the period of refinement of aiming and firing.

8.6.4.3 Observation of shooting results is conducted in order to determine mo

ment of hitting the target, and in the case of misses, it will reveal the magnitudes and signs of the deflected.

The defeat of the target is evaluated by clearly observable results: the target is destroyed, once

moved, ignited, stopped fire, etc.

In the case of misses, the deflected value is estimated (measured) from the aiming point to

center of the rupture cloud (to the drop point, to the track):

- in direction and height - in the figures of the target (if the deviation is no more than two figures)

or in thousands;

- by distance - in meters. If the magnitude of the distance (height) deviation is estimated

it is not possible, then the gap sign is determined: overshoot (+), undershoot (-).

The cloud of rupture (dust at the place of impact of shells or bullets) should be observed at the moment

the appearance of the ego. With ricochets, the first point of impact of the projectile is taken into account. Deviation of the route

estimated at the moment of its passage around the target.

8.6.4.4 Based on the results of observation of the shooting results, a decision is made about the need

the frequency of shooting correction. The direction and range of the shot are adjusted the same

temporary

8-25
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

a) Correction of the firing direction

In the case of a lateral deflection of the rupture (point of fall, route), the direction of fire is cor

correct by removing the aiming point or by marking the gap.

When correcting the firing direction, the aiming point is estimated

the amount of lateral deviation from the target in the figures of the target and move the aiming mark to the side,

to the opposite deviation, by the amount of the deviation.

When correcting the direction of fire with a mark on the gap, they note the opposite

which side stroke of the aiming mark (points between the strokes) was broken (point pa

deniya, track) and with this stroke (dot) aim at the target for firing the next shot.

b) Correction of the firing range when the range to the target does not change

When the deviation of the gap (falling point, route) by distance, when the distance to the target

does not change, shooting is corrected by moving the aiming point as follows:

If the value of the deviation in height from the center is estimated in the figures of the target, then for the queues

of a shot, the aiming point is moved to the side, opposite to the deflection, on the ve

the guise of deviation.

If it was not possible to estimate the amount of deviation, then when shooting at an open position

for large targets at a range of up to 1,800 m and for medium-sized targets at a range of up to 1,000

m take out the aiming point:

- on one figure of the target, when the distance is determined by the eyepiece or angular size

goals;

- on half of the figure of the target, when the distance to the target is determined by the rangefinder or the scope

divided relative to landmarks (local objects), the distance to which is known from to

sufficient accuracy.

Received the opposite sign in terms of range (flight after underflight or underflight after

after the flight), the aiming point is moved to the opposite side by half of the figure

goals

When shooting at targets at a short range after a short flight (overflight) of the aiming point

nia is carried up (down) by half of the target figure.

c) If the distance to the target changes, then after the flight, when the distance to the target

increases, and after the flight, when the distance to the target decreases, the aiming point

take out the target on one figure. After the flight, when the distance decreases, and after the flight

and when the distance to the target increases, the next shot is fired without changing the setting

vok.

8-26
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.6.5 Actions of the controlling operator (operator or commander) during shooting

from a gun

8.6.5.1 Shooting from a cannon is conducted with one of the two available ammunition - fragmentation

high-explosive or armor-piercing tracer. Information about the amount of remaining ammunition

is available on the monitor in the operational information zone next to the letter designation boe

stock of OF (FT) and BT (APT). The selection is made by setting the VY switch

BOR WEAPON (SELECT WEAPON) on the PC (PN) to the FT (FT) or BT (APT) position, respectively

stven The operator also has the option of choosing one of the three push shooting modes

ky: AUTO, OD (S) or AIR. The selection is made by pressing the AUTO button

(AUTO) - OD (S) on PN or PC.

- in the AUTO mode, firing is conducted in bursts at a reduced pace. Eye length

when pressing and holding the fire button, no more than 5 shots are fired. For production

the driver of the next turn must be released and pressed and held again

fire button. The selection of this mode is signaled by the activation of the AVT indicator

(AUTO) next to the button and the message AUTO (AUTO) on the monitor. The mode is recommended

for firing at ground targets at a range of up to 500 m;

- in the OD (S) mode, shooting is conducted with single shots, regardless of time

holding down the shooting button. To produce the next shot it is necessary

release and press the fire button again. About choosing this signaling mode

turns on the OD (S) indicator next to the button and the OD (S) message on the monitor.

The mode is recommended for shooting at ground targets at a range of more than 500 m;

- in the AIR mode, shooting is conducted in bursts with the maximum possible topic

d. The length of the queue is determined by the time the shooting button is held. Oh my choice

this mode is signaled by the simultaneous inclusion of both AVT indicators

(AUTO) and OD (S) next to the button and the message AIR (AIR) on the monitor. Regime

recommended for shooting at air targets.

Attention! When firing at fast-moving ground and air targets

the weapon stabilizer must be included in the SAW (HAU) mode (semi-automatic) in the so
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ. 7.3.3.2.

8.6.5.2 Before shooting, it is necessary to measure the range to the target in accordance with p

clause 8.6.1 or clause 8.6.2.

8.6.5.3 By turning the arms of the weapon stabilizer control panel

at the workplace of the control operator, combine the top of the peak with the central sight

marks with an aiming point. By pressing the shooting button under the thumb on the right hand

coyatke of the control panel of the weapon stabilizer to fire. At each event

8-27
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The amount of remaining ammunition is indicated in the operational information zone next to it

with the letter designation of the corresponding ammunition, is reduced by one.

8.6.6 Actions of the control operator when firing from a machine gun

8.6.6.1 The selection of the firing mode from the machine gun is made by setting the gallet switch

of the SELECT WEAPON PC (PN) switch to the PCT (MG) position. At the same time

pressing the button to select the shooting mode AUTO (S) on the PN or PC is ignored.

Shooting is conducted only in bursts.

8.6.6.2 Before shooting, it is necessary to measure the range to the target in accordance with p
clause 8.6.1 or 8.6.2.

8.6.6.3 By turning the arms of the weapon stabilizer control panel

at the workplace of the control operator, combine the top of the peak of the aiming mark with the cen

three visible parts of the target. By pressing the firing button under the thumb on the left handle

of the weapon stabilizer guidance panel to fire.

For emergency firing from a machine gun with a non-working (defective) stabilizer

armament is necessary:

ÿ include the EMS in accordance with Clause 8.5;

- from the working place of the operator, turn off the stabilizer completely

weapons (if included) in accordance with clause 7.3.5;

- open the protective shields on the lower part of the BM, while providing access to the ma

BM and BV manual guidance hiders;

- rotating the handwheels of the manual guidance of the BM turning mechanism and the lifting mechanism

BV (Figure 7.1), aim at the target by pressing the emergency fire button on the

flywheel of the BV lifting mechanism, fire.

ATTENTION! When pointing with the help of manual drives, it is necessary to avoid

entrapment of parts of the body or clothing of the operator between movable and immovable

machine design elements.

8.6.7 Actions of the control operator when firing from a grenade launcher

8.6.7.1 If there are grenades on the monitor in the operational information zone next to the beech tree

the vein designation G (GL) contains information about the number of remaining grenades. Choice of re

pressing of the grenade launcher is done by setting the VYBOR toggle switch

WEAPON (SELECT WEAPON) PC (PN) to position G (GL). If at the same time a narrow path is selected

le vision, it will automatically be switched to wide. The operator also has a vehicle

8-28
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the possibility of choosing one of two modes of firing from a grenade launcher: AUTO or OD (S).

The selection is made by pressing the AUTO - OD (S) button on the PN or PC.

- in the AUTO mode, shooting is conducted in bursts. The length of the queue is determined by

by holding down the shooting button. The selection of this mode is signaled by the on

the reading of the AUTO indicator next to the button and the message AUTO on the screen

torus;

- in the OD (S) mode, shooting is conducted with single shots, regardless of time

holding down the shooting button. To produce the next shot it is necessary

release and press the fire button again. About choosing this signaling mode

turns on the OD (S) indicator next to the button and the OD (S) message on the monitor.

8.6.7.2 Before shooting, it is necessary to measure the range to the target in accordance with p
clause 8.6.1 or clause 8.6.2.

8.6.7.3 By turning the arms of the weapon stabilizer control panel

at the workplace of the control operator, combine the top of the peak of the aiming mark with the cen

three goals By pressing the shooting button under the thumb on the right handle of the remote control

denia weapon stabilizer to fire.

8.6.7.4 With each shot, the number of remaining grenades is indicated in the op zone

rative information next to the letter designation ÿ (GL) is reduced by one.

8.6.8 Actions of the control operator in situations when the calculated angle

aiming is larger than the field of view of the aiming camera

After measuring the distance on the monitor screen, a situation is possible when the calculated

the aiming angle is so large that the size of the monitor screen is not enough for the display

nia trebuemogo position of the aiming mark, at the same time, under the line with the value of UV (PA) (that is

sharp angle of elevation of the BV) a line with the value of AF (AF) ("firing angle" - by

the position in which the BV should be installed to work out the calculated angle of the sight

nia), and the aiming mark will change its shape from "" to "ÿ" and will be set to the zero position

vertically. Horizontally, the mark will be shifted to the right by the amount of lateral advance

nia (Figure 8.17).

This situation means that the calculated aiming angle for the given range

exceeds the field of view of the aiming camera.

The procedure in this case should be as follows:

8-29
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.17 – View of the image on the monitor

when the aiming mark is lost

8.6.8.1 If the control operator worked in a narrow field of vision, he must

focuses on a wide field of vision. If the line "US (AF)" has not disappeared on the monitor, but the sight

brand has not changed its form from "ÿ" to "" (the problem has not been eliminated), then the operator can

act in two ways:

a) Manual guidance:
- with the help of the handles of the stabilizer control panel at minimum speed
point the top of the aiming mark at the center of the target;

- if possible, not knocking down the horizontal guidance, controlling only the guidance in
vertical plane upwards, the operator must ensure that the AF takes the value
(00º00ÿ ±5ÿ), and the message in the line with the value of AF (AF) changed its color to inverse;
- press the firing button on the right handle of the stabilizer control panel
weapons under the thumb;
- to evaluate the results of shooting, the operator must return the BV to its original state
position, wait for the appearance of gaps and, in case of unsatisfactory results,

repeat the previous actions for aiming the BB and pressing the shooting button.
b) Automatic guidance:
- with the help of the handles of the stabilizer control panel at minimum speed
point the top of the aiming mark at the center of the target, and press the shooting button;

8-30
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- the vertical guidance drive will automatically set the weapon block to the third position

variable elevation angle. At the time of bringing the weapon block to the required angle

shooting will be blocked. As soon as the weapon block will be brought to the required angle

elevation, shooting will begin. The length of the queue is determined by the time the button is pressed

shooting If at the same time the single shot firing mode is selected (the indicator is turned on

OD (S) on PC (PN), then after installing the weapon in the required position, it will be produced

single shot After releasing the shooting button, shooting will stop. Block arms

it will be automatically set to its original position by the controlling operator

it will be possible to observe the results of shooting. In case of unsatisfactory re

results, the operator must repeat the previous actions of pointing the BV and pressing

shooting buttons;

- the time of bringing the weapon unit to the required elevation angle, and the investigator

but, the blocking of shooting can reach 3 seconds;

- if the firing button is released before the weapon is automatically installed

but in the required position, the weapon block will be automatically set to the first position
head position

With both methods of shooting, to evaluate the results of shooting, it should be taken into account that

the flight time of the PF projectile (FT) at a distance of 2500 m and more is 4-10 s, the flight time

grenades of a grenade launcher at a maximum range of 1700 m is about 18 seconds.

8.6.8.2 If the required final position of the BV exceeds the maximum angle of sub

ema (+ 45º), then the line with the value of AF (AF) will flash. In this case, the guidance of BV and

shooting at the selected target is impossible. It is necessary to change the position of the machine.

8.6.9 Actions of the control operator when firing an ATGM guided missile

8.6.9.1 Rocket shooting is possible at a range of up to 5000 m. To assess the possibility

shooting, it is necessary to measure the range to the target in accordance with clause 8.6.1 or clause 8.6.2. If

the operator clearly sees that the distance to the target is less than 5000 m, then measure the distance
not necessarily

8.6.9.2 The choice of firing mode of a guided missile is made by setting the galette

foot switch SELECT WEAPON (SELECT WEAPON) on PC (PN) to position P1 or P2

(M1 or M2). At the same time, the missile control equipment in the PN-B is turned on and displayed on the monitor

sya image from the PN-B television camera, cross-shaped aiming mark and minimal

but the service information required by the operator is in accordance with Figure 8.18. At nali

the readiness of missiles and guidance equipment, on the monitor in the operational information zone

"1" is indicated next to the letter designation P1 (M1) and P2 (M2) , in its absence - "0".

8-31
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.6.9.3 By turning the arms of the weapon stabilizer control panel

align the crosshairs with the center of the visible part at the operator's workplace
goals By pressing the shooting button under the thumb on the right handle of the guidance console
weapon stabilizer to launch the missile.
8.6.9.4 During the entire flight time of the rocket, by turning the control knobs
control of the weapon stabilizer at the control operator's workplace, hold
put a cross on the center of the visible part of the target. During the flight of the rocket, we will be on the screen

read the message RADIATION .

8.7 Actions of operators in electronic adjustment mode

8.7.1 Set the machine on a level platform, without visible roll and trim.

8.7.2 Choose a target point on the terrain at a distance of about 1000 m from the machine.

8.7.3 Turn on the FCS in accordance with clause 8.5.1 (if it is turned off).
8.7.4 Turn on the narrow field of vision by pressing the FIELD button on the PN remote control ,
indicator ÿ (N) will turn on.
8.7.5 SELECT WEAPON toggle switch on PN
set to BT (APT) position.
8.7.6 On the PN , open the ADJUSTMENT cover.
8.7.7 Set the switch for selecting the operator's mode of operation to the JST position
(ADJ). An image according to Figure 8.19 will appear on the monitor screen.

Figure 8.18 – View of the image on the monitor screen

when the missile launch mode is turned on

8-32
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.19 – View of the image on the screen

monitor in ADJUST mode

8.7.8 Alignment of the aiming mark

ATTENTION! In the mode of electronic alignment, the aiming mark is assumed

the work of one crew member outside the BM, due to which the stabilizer is turned on
arming and pressing the range measurement button are STRICTLY PROHIBITED!
FS and SSS ON switches on PC and PN must be turned off, must
the mode of manual distance measurement should be turned on, for which the lid should be opened on the P

MANUAL RANGE and press the ON/OFF button ,

the black AUTO indicator will turn off and the red indicator will turn on
ON/OFF .
8.7.8.1 Guide the aiming marks with manual drives GN (AD) and VN (ED)
to the selected aiming point.
8.7.8.2 Install the THP-30 cold firing tube in the gun barrel.
8.7.8.3 Connect the MN-1 block (MN-1) with a length of 10 m to the outlet of the external landing gear

equipment AVSK-1 (AVSK-1). Enable AVSK-1 (AVSK-1).

8.7.8.4 Aim the THP at the selected aiming point, for which the crew member, finding
from the outside of the machine, watching in the THP, gives instructions to the operator inside the machine, producing

guided by manual drives.

8-33
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.7.8.5 By pressing the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons on the PN in the area covered by the cover
ADJUSTMENT , set the pointer of the selected menu item (inverse line) to the line "CHECKING THE
AIM MARK" and press the INPUT button. At the bottom of the screen will appear the inscription
"SIGHT MARK CHECK"
8.7.8.6 By pressing the ÿ (left), ÿ (right), ÿ (up) and ÿ (down) buttons on the PN sight
place the new mark on the selected pointing point and press the INPUT button (Fig
night 8.20).

8.7.8.7 Change the field of view, for which press the FIELD button on the PN. India
the ÿ (N) grid will turn off and the ÿ (W) indicator will turn on, respectively, the wide field will turn on
vision
8.7.8.8 By pressing the ÿ (left), ÿ (right), ÿ (up) and ÿ (down) buttons on the PN sight
place the mark on the selected pointing point and press the INPUT button.

8.7.8.9 Change the field of view, for which press the FIELD button on the PN and convince
that the target mark is in the position in which it was set in paragraph 8.7.8.6.

Figure 8.20 - View of the image on the monitor screen in the mode of
CHECKING THE SIGHT MARK

8-34
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.21 – View of the image on the monitor screen in the

ADJUSTMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT mode.

8.7.9 Calibration of the rangefinder mark

8.7.9.1 By pressing the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons on the PN (PN), set the pointer of the selected
menu item (inverse line) in the line "RANGE MEASUREMENT MARK" and
press the INPUT button .

8.7.9.2 On the monitor, the image of the rangefinder mark and the image, front
measured by the calibration collimator of the OEM-V (OEM-V) range finder (Figure 8.21). When necessary
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ, ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ the brightness of the calibration mark, to increase the brightness - holding it

the BRIGHTNESS button on the PN , press the ÿ (up) button. To reduce

brightness, - while holding the BRIGHTNESS button on the PN , press the ÿ button
(down). To improve the quality of the calibration mark image, it is recommended - before starting
The trick is to close the OEM-V entrance windows with an opaque object.

8.7.9.3 By pressing the ÿ (left), ÿ (right), ÿ (up) and ÿ (down) buttons on the PN
Combine the crosshairs of the rangefinder mark with the crosshairs of the rangefinder calibration mark and
press the INPUT button .

8-35
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.7.9.4 Change the field of view, for which press the FIELD button on the PN . In
the ÿ (W) indicator will turn off and the ÿ (N) indicator will turn on, respectively, the narrow path will turn on
vision

8.7.9.5 Press the ÿ (left), ÿ (right), ÿ (up) and ÿ (down) buttons to cross
align the rangefinder mark with the crosshairs of the rangefinder calibration mark and press the button
to INPUT .

8.7.9.6 Change the field of view, for which press the FIELD button on the PN and
make sure that the rangefinder mark is in the position in which it was installed in
clause 8.7.9.3.

8.7.10 Calibration of the ATGM channel

8.7.10.1 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the pointer of the selected
menu item (inverse line) in the line "TEST CHANNEL ATTRACTION" and press the button
INPUT .

8.7.10.2 The image from the sighting camera PN-B (PN-B) will be displayed on the monitor, when
anti -tank self-propelled gun (ATMS) and self-propelled anti-tank missile ( ATMS) verification mark (Figure 8.22). If necessary

smoke, adjust the brightness of the calibration mark, to increase the brightness - holding it down

the BRIGHTNESS button on the PN , press the ÿ (up) button to decrease

brightness - while holding the BRIGHTNESS button on the PN , press the ÿ (down) button.

8.7.10.3 Press the ÿ (left), ÿ (right), ÿ (up) and ÿ (down) buttons to cross
align the aiming mark with the crosshair of the calibration mark and press the ENTER button
(INPUT).

8.7.11 To exit the adjustment mode, the operating mode selection switch is operated
set to the OFF position .

8.8 Operator actions in the input mode of initial data

8.8.1 Include the EMS in accordance with clause 8.5.1

8.8.2 On the PN, open the ADJUSTMENT cover.

8.8.3 Set the operator mode selection switch to the ID position

(ID). An image according to Figure 8.23 will appear on the monitor screen.

8-36
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 8.22 – View of the image on the monitor screen in the mode
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAND OF ATTRACTION VEHICLES

Figure 8.23 – View of the image on the monitor screen in the mode

INPUT OF OUTPUT DATA

8-37
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.8.4 Entering the air temperature value

8.8.4.1 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the pointer of the selected
menu item (inverse line) in the line "AIR TEMPERATURE, ºÿ" and press the button
INPUT .
8.8.4.2 Inverse allocation of time will be disabled. Inverse highlight will be turned on
the air temperature value is "+ 15" (Figure 8.24).
8.8.4.3 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the required value and
press the INPUT button . It should be remembered that the range of entering the temperature value
air from minus 15ºÿ to +55ºÿ. The entered air temperature value will be saved in
control system memory until the next change or shutdown.

Figure 8.24 – View of the image on the monitor screen in the mode
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE.

8.8.5 Entering the atmospheric pressure value

8.8.5.1 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the pointer of the selected
menu item (inverse line) in the line "ATMOSPHERNOE DAVLENIE, MM. RT. ST." and
press the INPUT button .
8.8.5.2 Inverse allocation of time will be disabled. Inverse highlight will be turned on
nie values of atmospheric pressure "750".

8-38
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.8.5.3 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the required value and
press the ENTER button. It should be remembered that the range of entering atmospheric pressure values
from 400 to 900 mm. mercury Art. The entered value of the atmospheric pressure will be stored in the memory

you control system until the next change or shutdown.

8.8.6 Entering the amount of ammunition

8.8.6.1 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the pointer of the selected
menu item (inverse string) to one of the strings:

PUSHKA SMALL STORE BT XXX

PUSHKA BOLSHOY STORE OF XXX

GRENADE LAUNCHER XX

and press the INPUT button .

8.8.6.2 Inverse allocation of time will be disabled. Inverse highlight will be turned on
nie digital value of the amount of ammunition.

8.8.6.3 Press the ÿ (up) or ÿ (down) buttons to set the required value and press the INPUT
button. The entered values of the amount of ammunition will be saved
in the memory of the control system until the next change.

8.8.7 To exit the initial data input mode, switch the mode selector
set the operator bots to the OFF position .

8.9 Operator actions in CONTROL (CNTRL) mode, self-monitoring of the system

management and control of adjacent systems

During operation of the FCS on the screens of the commander's and operator's monitors in the lower left

flashing messages may appear in the corner of the monitor:

PR STAB (FU STAB)
PR SCT (FU SCT)
FC SSS
FC WEAPONS GUN CONTROL

OEM _

8-39
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

PANORAMA _
ATMS (ATMS)
FCS _
Messages signal the operator about abnormal operation of the equipment. At the same time
in the event of the occurrence of several unusual situations - messages about them will flash
again

When messages appear in the process of combat work, the operator must report about
to this commander and act as follows:
PR STAB (FU STAB) – the fuse of the vertical drive and (or) has failed
horizontal guidance. Guidance of BM and BV is possible with the help of manual drives.
PR SCT (FU SCT) – the power supply fuse of the three-phase transformer has failed
arms stabilizer calf. Guidance of BM and BV is possible with the help of manual drives.
CS SZ (FC SSS) – faulty electrical circuits for launching smoke grenades SZS. post
a new smoke screen is impossible.

CS WEAPONS (FC WEAPONS) - defective electric firing circuits. Shooting from

all types of weapons are impossible.

GUN CONTROL – faulty electrical circuits of the power supply mechanisms – pull-up, feed
switching, roll-back. Shooting from a cannon is impossible.
Fire from a grenade launcher, machine gun or ATGM.
OEM (OEM) - defective electrical circuits of the OEM-B supply. Observation is possible
through a panoramic device or TV camera PN-B.
PANORAMA (PANORAMA) - defective electrical circuits of the panoramic power supply
device. Searching for targets and targeting with the help of this device are impossible.
ATMS (ATMS) - faulty electrical circuits of the ATMS. The launch of ATGM missiles is not
is possible

FCS - defective electric power supply circuits of system blocks or other channels
formation exchange. Observation and shooting are impossible.
In the conditions of technical maintenance - in order to clarify the malfunction and take measures
to eliminate it, the operator must switch to the CONTROL mode (CNTRL), for which:

8.9.1 The COMMANDER – GUNNER (COMM – GNR) switch on the PC (PK) must be set to
GUNNER (GNR) position.

8.9.2 On the PN, open the ADJUSTMENT cover.

8.9.3 Set the operator mode selection switch to the CONTROL position
(CNTRL), an image as shown in Figure 8.25 will appear on the monitor screen.
The inscription "NORMAL (OK)" indicates the normal operation of the corresponding electrical circuit

pi. In the event of an abnormal situation, "NORMAL (OK)" appears instead of the inscription

8-40
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the inscription "REFUSAL (EMERGENCY)" and in the lower left corner of the screen - a message about the

malfunctions

8.9.3.1 When the message "REFUSAL (EMERGENCY) " is displayed in the first three lines of

communication, it is necessary to eliminate the cause of the burning of the corresponding fuse and for

change the fuse. To replace the fuse, you need:

- turn off the weapons stabilizer in accordance with clause 7.3.5;

ÿ turn off the AMS in accordance with Clause 8.13;

ÿ turn off the machine's electrical supply system from the driver's seat;

- open the rear hatch of the BM;

- on the BU-BM block, open the fuse cover and replace the blown fuse

the storage unit is a new one from ZIP-O, guided by the diagram shown in the replacement

back surface of the cover;

- close the fuse cover and the rear hatch of the BM.

8.9.3.2 Indication of the message in the remaining terms of the message indicates that the

legality of the corresponding control circuits (power supply), which cannot be removed

thread in field conditions by the crew. In this case, it is impossible to continue the work.
It is necessary to turn off the AMS in accordance with clause 8.13.

Figure 8.25 – View of the image on the monitor screen

in CONTROL mode

8-41
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.10 Actions of the commander when working with the 2P complex

8.10.1 Include the FCS in accordance with clause 8.5.2.

8.10.2 Set the COMMANDER – GUNNER (COMM – GNR) switch on the PC (PK) to
GUNNER (GNR) position.

8.10.3 Press the ON/OFF button in the zone of the control bodies of the 2P complex
on a PC (PK). At the same time, the green PANORAMA indicator on the PC ( PK) will turn on,
the television camera, which is in the initial position, will be moved to the working position,
an image of the area formed by the television camera will appear on the commander's monitor
swarm of the 2P complex (2P) and service information in accordance with Figure 8.26.

Figure 8.26 – Type of information on the commander's monitor

when turning on the 2P complex

When the 2P complex (2P) is turned off and the COMMANDER - GUN toggle switch is found
CHIK (COMM – GNR) on the PC (PK) in the GUNNER (GNR) position, on the commander’s monitor you
there is an image and service information, completely similar to the information on the monitor
tore operator.

8.10.4 To rotate the television camera at a low speed (3º/s), click on the PC

(PK) ÿ (left) and ÿ (right) buttons. Press to turn at high speed (36º/s).
on PC (PK) buttons ÿÿ (quick left) and ÿÿ (quick right).

8.10.5 After detecting the target, the commander has the opportunity to perform target designation

the operator To do this, it is necessary to direct the television camera of the 2P complex so that

8-42
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the image of the target was located horizontally approximately in the region of the central vertex
of a solid stroke, press and hold the TD button on the PC (PK). In the process of targeting
it is impossible to control the weapon stabilizer from the operator's seat. About the commander
produces targeting signals the flashing message "COMMANDER
(COMMANDER)" on the monitors of both operators.

8.10.6 After releasing the central control (TD) button, control of the stabilizer guidance in
weapons are returned to the operator. The commander can continue monitoring with the help of
of the 2P complex (2P), or take control of the weapons stabilizer guidance,
turned on the COMMANDER-GUNNER (COMM-GNR) switch on the PC (PK) in the KO position
MANDIR (COMM). At the same time, the message " COMMANDER " is turned on on the phone
nitors of both operators.

8.10.7 The commander cannot take control of the guidance of the weapon stabilizer
himself or produce target indication if the operator fires from any type of weapon (pressed
firing button) or guides the guided missile (indicated on the monitors
"RADIATION" message).

8.10.8 To turn off the 2P complex , the commander must press the button again
ON/OFF (ON/OFF) in the zone of the control bodies of the 2P complex on the PC (PK). At the same time, turn it off

the green PANORAMA indicator on the PC ( PK), television camera,

which is in the working position, will turn to the position in the manner of a walker, will descend to me
hundred and it will turn off. The commander's monitor will display information completely similar to the others

formations on the operator's monitor.

8.11 Actions of the commander or operator when setting up a smoke screen

If necessary, the control operator has the ability to set up a smokehouse
curtains by launching smoke grenades from SSS launchers .
ATTENTION! When there are people in the front sector of the BM at a closer range
300 m, the launch of smoke grenades is strictly prohibited!
To start the SG (SG) it is necessary:

8.11.1 Open the SWS (SSS) cover on the PC (PK) ( PN) and turn on the SWS ON toggle switch
(SSS ON). When the electrical circuits of the start-up are working and there is at least one DG (SG) in the PU

on the left (right) side, the messages "PU-ÿ (SSS-LS)" will appear on the monitor, respectively
("PU-P (SSS-RS)"), and below them - numbers from 1 to 3 - numbers of launchers, which have
DG

8.11.2 If there is a message "PU-L (SSS-LS)" and you press the LB (LS) button, the SG (SG)
will be launched from all the loaded PUs on the left side. Message "PU-L (SSS-LS)" vy
turns on

8-43
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.11.3 If there is a message "PU-P (SSS-RS)" and you press the PB (RS) button, the
the launch of SG (SG) from all charged PUs on the starboard side has been carried out. Message "PU-P (SSS-RS)" vy
turns on

8.11.4 It is impossible to start the DG (SG) if there are open chassis hatches and an indication on
"HATCHES" message on the monitors .

8.12 Actions of the commander or operator when bringing the BM into the overall dimensions of the machine

Before turning off the FCS, or when driving the car on difficult roads

places (among trees, shrubs, trees, etc.), to avoid damage to weapons

In order to ensure the possibility of passage, the controlling operator must bring the BM to the
running position, for which:

8.12.1 Press and hold the WS DRIVE button on the PK ( PN). At

this will start flashing the DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) indicator, the BM will be at the shortest distance

deployed to the “on course” position, the BW will be set to the zero position. Termination
flashing of the DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) indicator indicates the end of turns.

8.13 Switching off the AMS

8.13.1 Before turning off the FCS, the commander must turn off the 2P complex
(if it was turned on), for which press the ON/OFF button on the PC (PK) in the org zone
new management of the 2P complex (2P).

8.13.2 The control operator must press and hold until the flashing stops
indicator of the DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) button.

8.13.3 Both operators must install all controls on PC (PK) and PN (PN)
to the initial position in accordance with clause 8.3.

8.13.4 Both operators must turn off the weapon stabilizer (if it was included
chen), in accordance with Clause 7.3.5.

8.13.5 Both operators must turn off their monitors.

8.13.6 Both operators must install all controls on PC (PK) and PN (PN)
to the initial position in accordance with Clause 8.3 and turn off the switch ON the FCS (FCS).

8-44
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.14 Possible malfunctions of the control system

Table 8.3 – Possible malfunctions of the control system

Solution Replace the

malfunction The reason for the malfunction
fuse on the PC. To
1 When turning on the AMS from 1.1 The fuse on the PC is blown. do this, use a single screwdriver
the commander's place, the indicators from the ZIP
on the PC do not light up, the
commander's monitor does not turn on. tighten the four screws securing
the protective cover to the right
side of the PC, remove the cover,
replace the fuse with a new one
made of ZIP single, install the
cover in place and fix it with
screws. If the defect is not
eliminated, replace the PC.
Replace the PC with a new one
1.2 PC crashed. from ZIP-G

2 When turning on the safety 2.1 The fuse on the PN has Replace the fuse with a PN. To
equipment from the operator's seat, blown. do this, use a single screwdriver
the indicators on the PN do not light from the ZIP
up, the operator's monitor does not turn on. turn the four screws securing
the protective cover on the right
side of the PN, remove the cover,
replace the fuse with a new one
made of ZIP single, install the
cover in place and fix it with
screws. If the defect has not been
eliminated, replace the PN.
Replace the PN with a new one
2.2 The PN failed. from the group ZIP. Turn on the
CONTROL (CNTRL) mode to
3 In the process of work, a The control circuit of the BU- clarify the defect.
message about an abnormal BM block or co
situation appeared on the monitors.relevant related devices
and systems. 4.1 The
4 After turning on the CONTROL corresponding fuse on the BU- Replace the fuse with a new one
(CNTRL) mode, there is the BM has blown. from the ZIP unit
that's it inscription night in accordance with p.

EMERGENCY in one or more 8.6.3.1. If the defect has not been

of the first three lines of the eliminated, replace the BU-BM.
message.
4.2 BU-BM failed. Replace the BU-BM with a new one from the ZIP
group.

5 After turning on the CONTROL The BU-BM or the corresponding Replace the BU-BM with a new
mode ( CNTRL) , there is the adjacent device has failed. one from the ZIP group. If the
word EMERGENCY in any defect has not been eliminated,
line(s) of the message, except replace the corresponding
the first three. adjacent device.

8-45
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8.15 Checking the operation of the control system

From the operator's seat:

1 Open the cover labeled MANUAL RANGE and press

ON/OFF button. Make sure that the AUTO indicator turns off and

the ON/OFF indicator turned on. The indicator also turned on. Cross-shaped
the rangefinder mark on the monitor is extinguished, a measuring strobe will appear. Under
the measuring strobe displayed the message "1.0" - the value in meters of the height of the base target.
Make sure that when you press the target type selection button, the types are set sequentially

goals , , . At the same time, the distance between the strokes of the measuring strobe changes
below it - the height of the base target ("1.0", "2.0" or "1.5"). It will make sure that when you press the buttons

under the index fingers on the left and right handles of the stabilizer control panel
the weapon moves vertically along the upper stroke and at the same time it is pressed

the button on the right handle decreases the distance between the strokes (range increases),
and pressing the button on the left handle increases it (the range decreases). Correspondingly
readings in the zone of indication of the results of distance measurement, readings in the zone are changing

indications of the aiming angle, and the position of the aiming mark. To avoid damage to the eyes
service personnel with the laser beam of the rangefinder, further checks
perform the operation of the control system in the MANUAL RANGE mode
(MANUAL RANGE).
2 Set the SELECT WEAPON switch sequentially to
the positions of PKT (MG), OF (FT), BT (APT), G (GL) and make sure that on the monitor
there is a corresponding change in the service information and the movement of the sights
brands
3 Press the FIELD button to switch the image from a wide field to a narrow one
back Make sure that the corresponding image change occurs
monitor and turn on the indicators near the FIELD button .
4 Make sure that pressing the BRIGHTNESS button changes
the brightness of the aiming mark in grayscale.
5 Make sure that when you press the COLOR button, inversion occurs
the color of the sighting mark from black to white and vice versa.

6 Use the handles of the weapon stabilizer control panel to arbitrarily deploy the BM
placed horizontally and vertically away from zero. Make sure that at the same time
monitor accordingly changes the type of the mnemonic and the numerical value in the message
"UV (PA)".

8-46
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

7 Press and hold the DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) button. Make sure it's next to the button

the indicator began to flash, and the BM and BV began to move in the direction of decreasing the deviation from

zero set. Without releasing the DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) button, it will deflect in any direction

handles of the weapon stabilizer control panel and make sure that BM and BV

continue to move in the same direction. Release the DIMENSION (WS DRIVE) button.

Make sure that the indicator next to the button has stopped flashing, and the BM and BV have stopped.

Deflect in any direction the handle of the control panel of the weapon stabilizer and

make sure that there is management of BM and BV.

Switch the COMMANDER - GUNNER switch on the PC commander's remote to the position

The COMMANDER will repeat points 1-7 from the commander's seat. At the same time, instead of specified bodies

controls on the PN operator's console to use the appropriate control bodies on

PC commander's remote control.

Enable the ON/OFF button on the commander's remote control to turn on

panoramic television complex. Make sure that the head of the panoramic complex

advanced from the initial position to the combat position, and the commander appeared on the monitor

the image from the television camera of the panoramic complex. By pressing the ÿ (left) and ÿ (right) buttons

make sure that the head of the panoramic complex moves at low speed. Pressing buttons

ÿÿ (quickly left) and ÿÿ (quickly right) to make sure the pan head moves

complex with high speed. It will also make sure that when turning the panoramic head

of the complex, a corresponding change in the mnemonic scheme occurs in the upper left corner

monitor

Two or three times, turning the head of the panoramic complex in different directions from the gun

and by pressing the TD button on the commander's remote control, make sure that the head is panoramic

the complex remains motionless in space, and the combat module deploys to the side

coordination with the head over the shortest distance.

Repeatedly press (disable) the ON/OFF button on the commander's remote for

inclusion of a panoramic television complex. Make sure that the head is panoramic

complex turned back along the course of the combat module, settled into the marching position and
turned off

Press and hold the GAUGE button until the indicator stops flashing (WS

DRIVE). Make sure that the weapon block is set to the zero position vertically, and

the combat module settled into the "on course" position.

Turn off the weapons stabilizer in accordance with clause 7.3.5.

Turn off the fire control system in accordance with clause 8.13.

8-47
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

9 AMMUNITION KIT

9.1 Preparation of gun ammunition

When preparing ammunition for an automatic cannon, it is necessary:

- carefully inspect the tape links, wipe them;

- unpack boxes, remove boxes with cartridges;

- if there are deformations of the box, check all cartridges in this box for

absence of damage;

- open the boxes, inspect the cartridges;

- equip a cartridge tape.

Before loading into the machine, wipe the equipped cartridge tape from mud, sand,

snow, thick grease and check by external inspection to identify stretched links

pitch, as well as the reliability of holding projectiles by links.

Ammunition is used for firing from a cannon:

- a cartridge with a high-explosive-incendiary (OFZ) projectile;

- a cartridge with a fragmentation tracer (OT) projectile;

- a cartridge with an all-body armor-piercing tracer (BT) projectile.

Cartridges with OFZ and OT projectiles are intended for firing at ground and

air targets, and cartridges with BT projectiles - for defeating lightly armored ground vehicles

targets and firing points.

Marking of cartridges for the gun:

– cartridge with OFZ – 3UOF8;

– cartridge with OT – 3UOR6;

- cartridge with BT - 3UBR6.

9.2 Preparation of machine gun ammunition

When preparing ammunition for the machine gun, it is necessary to check:

- are there rust and dents on the sleeves, does the bullet wobble in the socket of the sleeve;

- is there no green coating and cracks on the capsule, does the capsule stick out higher?

the surface of the bottom of the sleeve;

- are there any combat cartridges for training?

All defective cartridges are returned to the warehouse.

If the cartridges became dusty and dirty, covered with a small green coating or

9-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

rust, they must be wiped with a dry, clean rag.

To load the ammunition of the machine gun, you need:

- open the protective shield covering the combat module;

- put a tape for 550 cartridges in the magazine according to the laying scheme shown on

shop At the same time, a tape of ~50 cartridges must be outside the store;

- feed from the top into the machine gun's supply route a hook from the ZIP before passing

ego into the lower solution of the tape supply channel;

- fasten the hook to the last link of the cartridge;

- the operator pulls the hook with the cartridge tape until the first cartridge of the tape enters

machine gun supply line, at the same time the commander or driver lowers the magazine

machine gun to the guides, inserts it into the guides and raises the magazine until it is fixed

fixative;

- the operator closes the cover of the machine gun tray;

- close the protective shield.

9.3 Preparation of grenade launcher ammunition

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- to use for shooting shots that have duck grenades in the sleeve, green coating on

capsule, cracks on the sleeve, dents and damaged membrane.

Before loading, inspect the links and grenades and, if necessary, wipe the grenades

with a dry rag.

To place tapes of an automatic grenade launcher in magazines, it is necessary:

ÿ
inspect the links and grenades and, if necessary, wipe the grenades with a dry rag;
ÿ
equip five tapes of 29 grenades (the first link coming out of the store should be

empty);
ÿ
put the tapes in the magazines according to the laying scheme shown on the cover

shop;

ÿ
install one grenade launcher magazine in bracket 14 and fix it

latch 17 (Figure 6.16);

install two spare magazines in their regular places.

9-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

9.4 Preparation of ATGM ammunition

When working with RK-2 missiles, all safety rules must be observed,

installed for working with ammunition.

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- dismantle armed missiles when using the RK-2;

- to carry out routine work directly in the warehouses;

- carries boxes with RK-2 missiles with the lid down, tilts and throws them when loading

and unloading;

- store and use rockets:

a) dropped without capping from a height of more than 0.5 m;

b) fallen into the cap from a height of more than 1.5 m;

During the external inspection, it is necessary to check:

- absence of deformations and damage to the container;

- presence and correct installation of fastening parts;

- lack of damaged anti-corrosion coatings;

- absence of damaged connector contacts;

To load ATGM on the launcher, you need:

- remove the plug from the connector of the rocket container;

- insert the hooks of the container into the guides of the launcher;

- move the missile forward until the launcher latch clicks, turn it

handle to the right (in the direction of the shot) as far as it will go.

9-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

10 ARMAMENT OF THE CREW AND LANDING GROUNDS

10.1 Safety measures when working with weapons

When working with weapons, the following requirements must be observed:

• load weapons only at the command of the vehicle (department) commander;

• when moving with a loaded weapon, it must be directed only in the direction of the target;

• give the maximum elevation angle after firing the weapon;

• march, as a rule, with unloaded weapons;

• before servicing the weapon, it is necessary to make sure that the weapon is unloaded.

10.2 Placement of weapons and ammunition of the crew and landing party in the car

The car is equipped with places for stowing weapons and ammunition for the crew and landing party:

two ATGMs, two PC machine guns, one grenade launcher and five grenades for it, three magazines for the gun

a PKT blade and two magazines for an automatic grenade launcher, eight automatic weapons and three bags from

cartridges for the crew's machine guns, one signal pistol and two bags with cartridges for

him, four bags for F-1 grenades (Figure 10.1).

The car is equipped with quick-release fasteners for stowing in the traveling position
AKMS or AKS-74 submachine guns.

The machines are located:

- one on the engine partition to the left of the driver's seat;

- one on the engine bulkhead behind the commander's seat;

- one on the wheel well below the third wheel on the port side;

- one on the starboard side under the seats;

- two on the starboard side above the embrasures;

- one on the port side near the oil tank;

- one on the port side under the seats.

Ammunition for machine guns of the car crew is in three bags (five magazines each

150 pcs. cartridges in each): one - in the cabin between the seats; one - in a rack on wheels

below the third wheel on the port side; one - in the rack on the shield of the winch fence.

10-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Places for storage are provided in the body of the machine:

- Kalashnikov machine gun (PC) - under the starboard roof in front of the embrasures;

- Kalashnikov machine gun (PC) - on the oil tank on the port side;

- two ATGMs on the right side of the car:

- a grenade launcher on the left aft door;

- bags with two grenades - on the right aft door of the car;

-bags with three grenades - on the engine partition in the passage.

F-1 grenades, in four bags, are placed in two racks, which are installed on

wheel niches of the third wheels on the left and right sides of the car

A rocket launcher in a holster and signal rockets in two bags are placed on the right front
wheel niche.

The ammunition of the gun is available in six factory packages of 18 pcs. in each, for

mounted in racks along the starboard side. There are spare parts in one package

for projectile mounting tape.

The ammunition for the PKT machine gun and the automatic grenade launcher is in the rack on the left

on the side of the machine, near the operator's seat:

- PKT ammunition is located in three stores of 500 pcs.;

- the ammunition of the automatic grenade launcher is located in two stores of 29 pcs.

10-2
 10 - 3
1–
bag
with
AKS
stores
(3
pcs.);
2
cartridge
–case
for
rockets
(2
pcs.);
3
rocket
–
launcher;
4bag
–
with
3
RPG
grenades;
5
stacking
–shells
to
11
RPG;
–12
bag
–
with
2
RPG
grenades;
13
PCT
–
store
(3
pcs.);
14
a
–
store
with
grenades
for
the
AG
(2
pcs.).
gun
(6
pcs.);
6
bags
–with
F-1
grenades
(4
pcs.);
7
laying
–of
links
(1
pc.);
8
ATGM
–
(2
pcs.);
9
AKS
–
(8
pcs.);
10
PC
–
(2
pcs.);
Figure
10.1
Arrangement
–
of
weapons
and
ammunition
inside
the
product.
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

11 OBSERVATION INSTRUMENTS

11.1 Driver monitoring devices

In addition to windshields, the driver has a mouth to monitor the area

novice of observation devices.
When driving during the day on the march, the driver observes through the windshield. Devices
the observations must be in the stack.
The protective cover 1 (Figure 11.1) must be lowered down and pressed against the shaft with two
clamps 5 with nuts 6 ensuring the tightness of the mine.

1 – cover; 2 – spring; 3 - here; 4 – emphasis; 5 – clamp; 6 – nut

Figure 11.1 – Installation of the protective cover

When the windshields are closed at night, the nably device is installed in the shaft
deniya TVN-5, and during the day - the observation device TNPO-168B. For this it is necessary
loosen the nuts 6, unfold the clamps 5 along the cover 1 and tighten the nuts again. Extract from
install the eccentric clamp 6 (Figure 11.2) and fasten it to the forks 5 with axes 4.
At night, remove the TVN-5 device from its storage (item 15, figure 33.1), put it on
clip 7 and spacer 8 (Figure 11.2), remove the TNPO-168B device from the stack during the day
(item 16, figure 33.1) and put spacer 8 on it (figure 11.2).
Install the required device, TVN-5 or TNPO-168V, in the mine and clamp the device ex
centric clamp 6 to ensure the tightness of the shaft. At the same time, the head of the device,
resting on the stops of the protective cover 3, will raise it.

11-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – device TVN-5; 2 – device TNPO-168B; 3 – protective cover; 4 - here; 5 – plug; 6 – eccentric clamp; 7 – clip; 8 –
spacer

Figure 11.2 – Installation of driver monitoring devices

11.2 TNPO-168B driver monitoring device

The TNPO-168B monitoring device is intended for monitoring the road from the water
calf and driving a car during the day with the front armored covers closed
number of cars

The device consists of two heated prisms (upper and lower) with protective glasses,
placed in a metal case.
The heating of both prisms (windows) of the device must be turned on during rain, wet snow,
frostbite and icing. Electric heating of the exit window must be turned on when restarting
fogging or fogging of the glass surface. In the event of an ice block in front of the device,
it is necessary to remove the device and break the ice roller.

Turn on the electric heating of the device in the following sequence:

- check the connection of the plug connector of the cable to the device;
- based on the operating conditions of the machine, set the tempo regulator switch
RTS27-3M switch in one of two positions: "BOTH" or "LOVER" (OUTPUT);
- put the electric heating power switch on the RTS27-3M to the "ON" position
(ON), at the same time, if the glass temperature is below 298 K (25 °C), the warning light should light up

lamp. When the glass is heated to a temperature of 298...318 K (25...45 °C), the warning lamp must
will go out
11-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

After eliminating fogging or icing of the device, turn off the electric heating.
In order to keep the optical surfaces of the devices in good condition for a long time
it is necessary to be careful when installing and removing the devices and do not expose them
impact protective glasses. Dried mud on the protective glasses of the windows of the devices is necessary
first soften with water and remove, then wipe the glass surfaces dry
stand with a flannel napkin, which is available in the equipment package.

11.3 TVN-5 night driver monitoring device

The TVN-5 device is intended for monitoring the road when driving a car at night
both in the conditions of natural light (in passive mode) and when illuminated by a headlight (v
active mode).
Turn on the device in the following sequence:
- install the device in the mine in front of the driver and connect it to the on-board network;
- remove the plug from the biocular magnifier and put it in the storage box of the device;
- turn on the device by minimally turning the "SCREEN" curtain drive handle;
- looking at the device, turn the handle of the curtain drive to open the curtain, and the handle to
the water of the diaphragm is gradually raised up to obtain a contrast image of the area.

When the device is turned on, the biocular magnifier is constantly heated. Prism heating
is turned on by the "PRISM HEATING" switch located below when
bora The diaphragm and shutter protect the device from glare. The blind is closed when the handle
the "SCREEN" curtain drive is turned to the right and the observer can see the inscription "CLOSED"
CLOSED). The diaphragm is closed when the diaphragm drive handle "DIAFRAGM" is turned
to the left and the observer can see the inscription "CLOSED".

If the brightness of the image is insufficient for driving the car, it is necessary to turn it on
infrared headlight with the "IR LIGHT" switch on the lighting and heating control panel
(item 1, figure 21.6).
If it is necessary to heat the main prism of the device, heat the switch handle
should be set to the "PRISM HEATING" position.
The conditions of observation at night through the TVN-5 device have some features
from the observer of certain skills. Image of the area when observing through
the device is monochrome and has reduced clarity. When using the device without the illumination of races
Viewed objects do not have contrasting shadows, which hides the relief of the area.
Therefore, the driver must have certain skills in recognizing objects and terrain
localities under observation through the device.

11-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Oncoming illumination by headlights, rockets, fires and other sources of light is a challenge

there is the appearance of bright spots in the field of vision that make it difficult to observe the area. For

to eliminate this, it is necessary to partially cover the field of view with a curtain and diaphragm

the lens of the device is a diaphragm. It is recommended to use a curtain also when observing

localities on the background of a bright horizon, and the aperture - under increased illumination (in the district

measurements, at dawn, on a moonlit night, etc.). At low light (in the dark night, in the forest

clearings, gorges, etc.) it is necessary to turn on the infrared headlight with the "IR" switch

LIGHT" on the lighting and heating control panel (item 1, figure 21.6). For security purposes

Turn on headlight masking techniques only when visibility is poor, making driving difficult

given speed.

Checking the device's operability can be done at any time of the day.

The procedure for checking the device during the day is as follows:

- make sure that the shutter and diaphragm are closed;

- put an external diaphragm with a hole exposed on the head of the device,

corresponding to one of the four variants of weather conditions and time of day at the moment

checks ("SUNNY", "CLOUDLY", "HAZE"

MURNO), TWILIGHT);

- place the device so that bright and direct sunlight does not fall into the entrance window
light;

- turn on the device by minimally turning the diaphragm handle;

- watching the device gradually open the shutter and diaphragm ("OPEN" position

(OPEN)). If the visibility when observing the device is insufficient, then it is necessary to use it outdoors

install the following large holes in the diaphragm. When changing, the hole in the outer dia

the diaphragm of the curtain and the diaphragm of the device should be closed. Sequentially opening the holes

in the outer diaphragm, choose the optimal illumination for observation. When big

brightness, immediately close the curtain and go to one of the previous smaller holes.

The device must work stably, without flashes and flashing, and provide enough power

the visibility of objects in the area. The movement of the curtain and diaphragm should be tight and smooth

German In extreme positions, the curtain should open and close the field of vision. In position

diaphragm handle "CLOSED" (CLOSED), the device should turn off.

When checking the device in the field of vision, shadows from the diaphragm and unevenness may be observed

measurable brightness of the field of vision, which is not a sign of a malfunction of the device.

It is FORBIDDEN to violate the rules for checking the device during the day, as it may fail if bright
light hits the device through the prism and the bio-ocular magnifier.

11-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Checking the performance of the device at night is performed without using an external one

diaphragms in the same sequence as during the day.

For better observation of the road and objects in the field of view of the device,

it is necessary to check the alignment of the headlight axes with the optical axis of the device. Agreed

Sovanie is carried out at night in the absence of extraneous lighting.

For this it is necessary:

- install the machine on a level platform;

- turn on the TVN-5 device and the FG-125 headlight;

- release the headlight mounting nut on the bracket with easy rotation of the fa

ry with the effort of the hand;

- install or select any rectangular object with side dimensions

300-500 mm 45 m from the machine and place it so that it fits on its extension about

the lower axis and the best visibility of the object was provided;

- observing the object through the device and turning the headlight, align its center in terms of light

th spot with the place of installation of the object;

- without violating the verified position of the headlight, tighten the headlight mounting nut;

- turn off the device and the headlight.

11.3.1 Possible malfunctions of the TVN-5 device

Possible malfunctions of the TVN-5 device and methods of their elimination are given in the tables

it is 11.1.

Table 11.1 – Possible malfunctions of the TVN-5 device and ways to eliminate them

The way to eliminate the

malfunction The reason for the malfunction
malfunction by
When the device is turned on and Bad contact in the microswitch repeatedly (3-4 times) turning
the diaphragm and shutters are connected to the arm of the the diaphragm handle from left
open, the glow of the bright diaphragm. to right and vice versa to achieve
background is not visible. the inclusion of the secondary
power source
nia

The secondary power source or EOP Replace the device.

does not work.

The image in the device is dim The biocular magnifier or upper Wipe the upper prism and biocular
bad and unclear. prism is dirty or fogged. magnifier with a clean flannel napkin.

The bulbs in the headlights burned out. Replace the lamps.

Alignment of the axes of the light Align optical axes.

beam of the infrared lamp and the
observation device.
11-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

In the case of malfunctions, which cannot be eliminated by the above-mentioned methods, at

send it to a special repair department for repair.

11.4 Commander's observation devices

To ensure the search and detection of targets, the commander uses a panoramic television
zion complex 2P, which is part of the combat module.

11.5 Airborne observation devices

For observation of the area, search and detection of targets during the daytime by landing forces
seven TNP-165A surveillance devices are placed in the combat compartment of the machine, three each
devices on each side and one device in the aft part.
The device consists of two prisms placed in a metal case. Tool attachment
the trench is carried out by bracket 1 and coupling 2 (Figure 11.3).

1 – bracket; 2 – clutch; 3 – device TNP-165A

Figure 11.3 – Installation of the landing gear

11.6 Rear-view mirror

In order to improve visibility from the driver's workplace in the front part of the body
cars on the right and on the left have one rear-view mirror each (Figure 11.4).
It is necessary to adjust the mirror 4 in the vertical and horizontal planes
loosen the bolts 3, 5 of the mirror mount, install the mirror in the desired position, and then
pull the bolts.
11-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

In combat conditions and when driving through the forest, it is necessary to dismantle the mirrors, for what

unscrew bolt 3, remove the mirror and put it in the ZIP. The bolt will screw into place.

1 – bracket; 2 – collar; 3, 5 – bolt; 4 - a mirror

Figure 11.4 – Rear-view mirrors

11.7 Windshield cleaning system of observation hatches

The windshield cleaning system is designed for cleaning windows

inspection hatches from dust and dirt and consists of a windshield wiper (Figure 11.4) and a windshield washer

roller (Figure 11.5).

11.7.1 Windshield wiper

To clean the windshields of the inspection hatches, a two-brush is installed on the car

electric windshield wiper (Figure 11.4).

The windshield wiper is turned on by a switch located on the steering wheel

car speaker howl.

An electric motor with a 4-speed gearbox and a system of wiper drive levers and rods

located inside the car between inspection hatches 1.

11-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – inspection hatch; 2 – brush; 3 – bracket; 4 – electric motor with a gearbox; 5 - here; 6 – lever; 7 – nut; 8
- traction.

Figure 11.4 – Wiper

The windshield wiper has 3 operating modes:

1st – constant with low speed;

2nd – constant with high speed;

3rd – intermittent.

When using the windshield wiper, the following rules must be observed:

- do not turn on the windshield wiper if there is dry dust and dirt on the glass (necessary

use a windshield washer);

- when using a windshield wiper in winter, brush 2 must be cleaned

frozen snow;

- during operation, the brushes should not touch the seal. If the brushes hit the seals

tel, then it is necessary to change the setting of the levers 6, for which unscrew the nut 7, rearrange

lever on the splines of axis 5 and tighten the nut again.

11-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

11.7.2 Windshield washer

A windshield washer is installed on the car to wash the windshields of the observation hatches
(Figure 11.5).

1 – jets; 2 – a tank with an electric pump; 3 – tube; 4 – tee

Figure 11.5 – Windshield washer

The windshield washer consists of: a tank with an electric pump 2, two jets 1, a tee 4 and
hoses 3.

The tank with an electric pump is installed on the floor under the driver's instrument panel. Live
the lights are installed one by one in front of each of the windshields of the observation hatches. From the tank of the village

an electric pump supplies liquid to the nozzles through the tubes.

The liquid from the jets should fall on the surface of the glass to be cleaned with brushes.

If necessary, the direction of the outflowing jet can be adjusted by turning the jet body
or by turning the ball located inside the nozzle.

Clean (without mechanical impurities) water is used as a washing liquid

at an air temperature of up to 0°C, at a temperature below 0°C use a low-freezing liquid

bone

To wash and clean the windows, turn on the steering wheel washer switch

(the liquid is supplied while the switch is held in the on position), after sma
windshield wipers, turn on the windshield wiper.

If necessary, repeat the wetting of the glasses until the mud is completely removed.
Malfunctions may occur in the operation of the windshield washer, which must be rectified

they will eliminate me. If the jets are clogged, it is necessary to remove them and thoroughly wash and clean
11-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

clean, thoroughly wash the tank, fill it with liquid, install it in place and adjust it

the direction of the jet. In case of violation of the tightness of the tubes in the places of their connection to

to the pump and to the nozzles, replace the tubes or cut and remove the damaged ends of the tubes.

The procedure for filling tank 3 (Figure 8.6) of the windshield washer:

- unfasten the strap 1 of the tank fastening 3;

- remove the cover with the electric pump 4, without disconnecting the tube and electric wires;

- remove the tank from the bracket 2, put the cover with the electric pump in the bracket;

- fill the tank with liquid.

Install the tank in the reverse order.

1 – strap; 2 – bracket; 3 – tank; 4 – a cover with an electric pump

Figure 8.6 – Installation of a tank with an electric windshield washer pump

11-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12 POWER PLANT

12.1 Security measures

CATEGORICALLY when operating and servicing the engine and support systems
IT IS PROHIBITED:
• carries out work in the engine and transmission department (MTO) when it is raised, but not
blocked by bars, the roof of the MTO;
• use an open fire when inspecting the MTO;
• turn out the plug of the filler neck of the cooling system at a cool temperature
waiting liquid above 363 K (90 °C);
• dismantle the pipelines of the air system with the valves open
cylinders;

• dismantle pipeline systems while the engine is running;

• drain oil and coolant at temperatures above 353 K (80 °C).

REMEMBER! Low-freezing liquid and special cooling liquid with a three-component additive
are powerful POISONS, their entry into the body is DANGEROUS to life. If a low-
freezing liquid and a special coolant with a three-component additive come into
contact with the skin, it must be washed with soap and water.

When carrying out work, they will protect the engine and systems from getting into them by outsiders
them subjects.

12.2 Engine

The 3TD-3A engine is a three-cylinder, single-row, horizontal engine

arrangement of cylinders and counter-moving pistons, two-stroke turbo-piston
diesel with direct mixing and direct-flow slot blowing.
The engine consists of the following main parts: the core, the crank and connecting rod bellows
system, gear and drive mechanism, supercharger, turbine with exhaust system, re systems
gulirovaniya and control, fuel supply, lubrication, cooling and systems providing
engine start

Each engine cylinder has two oppositely moving pistons.

Combustion chamber 1 is formed between the pistons at their maximum convergence (Fig
nok 12.1). In each cylinder, there are: on the one hand, the purge holes are connected
with intake manifold 8, through which purging and filling of the cylinder are carried out
press with an air charge, with the other — exhaust windows connected to the exhaust manifold 2,
through which the discharge of exhaust gases is provided.
12-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – combustion chamber; 2 – exhaust manifold; 3, 10 – connecting rods; 4, 11 - crankshafts; 5, 9 - pistons; 6 – turbine; 7

– supercharger; 8 - intake manifold

Figure 12.1 - Engine schematic diagram

The pistons, in addition to their direct purpose, control the working process,

that is, the opening and closing of the blow-by holes and exhaust windows of the cylinders.

The progressive movement of the pistons is transmitted to the crankshafts 4, 11 of the engine, cat

rye are connected to each other by gears of the main transmission. The direction of rotation of the shafts is the same

which is clockwise when viewed from the side of the turbine 6.

Power selection is made through couplings installed at both ends of the exhaust
crankshaft 4.

The supercharger 7 serves to pre-compress the air supplied to the cylinders,

which significantly increases the weight filling of the cylinders with air and allows more power

will carry out their purging.

Gas turbine 6 converts part of the kinetic energy of the exhaust gases into mechanical energy

Czech work, which is used to rotate the impeller of the supercharger with the help of a spring

ry. Using the energy of exhaust gases increases the engine's economy.

The general view of the engine is presented in Figure 12.2.

12-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – injection oil pump; 2 – BNK fuel pumping pump; 3 – regulator; 4 – breather; 5 – engine mounting bracket; 6 –
generator; 7 – oil pumping pump; 8 – toothed clutch; 9 – support bolt; 10 – starter; 11 – oil centrifugal filter; 12 – cover;
13 – fuel fine filter; 14 – turbine; 15 – water pump; 16 – exhaust manifold; 17 – AFP system; 18 – D-4 tachometer sensor;
19 – flywheel housing; 20 - supercharger

Figure 12.2 – General view of the 3TD-3A engine

12.2.1 Engine operation control

The operation of the engine is controlled by instruments, the readings of which are operational
modes should be within the limits specified in table 12.1.

12-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Table 12.1
Value of
Controlled parameters
parameters
The range of changes in the operating frequency of the HV
engine, min-1 • working
: • recommended Engine oil pressure in
the lubrication system at an engine speed of 2600 min-1 MPa 800...2800
(kgf/cm2 ), not less Working temperature range of the engine oil 1950...2600
at the engine outlet, K (°C): • operational range
, 0.30 (3.00)

- on oils Galol M-4042TD, AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, M-16ÿÿ-3 - on 348...393 (75...120)

oils M-8ÿ2ÿ 348...373 (75...100)

• maximum short-term within 1 hour, no more - on oils Galol

M-4042TD, AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, M-16ÿÿ-3 - on oil M-8ÿ2ÿ 403 (130)
378 (105)

• minimum when driving in lower gears - on oils Galol

M-4042TD, AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, M-16ÿÿ-3 - on oil M-8ÿ2ÿ 323 (50)
283 (10)
Coolant temperature at the engine outlet, K (°ÿ): •
the cooling system is filled with coolant with a three-component additive
- operational range - maximum 348...393 (75...120)
for a short time within 1 hour, no more - minimum when 403 (130) 323 (50)
driving in lower gears

the cooling system is filled with low-freezing liquid of the brands "40" or "65",
antifreeze Tosol-A40 or Tosol-A65, cooling liquid OJ-40 "Lena" or OJ-65
"Lena"
- operational range - maximum 348...373 (75...100)
for a short time within 1 hour, no more - minimum when 378 (105) 283 (10)
driving in lower gears

12.3 Fuel system

12.3.1 General information

The fuel system is intended for supplying fuel to the engine cylinders, as well as for
fuel storage. The fuel system consists of fuel tanks with fuel tanks installed in them
fuel gauges, fuel pumping pumps, fuel distribution crane, drainage

foot and return valves, coarse and fine fuel filters, air separators
tank, engine fuel injection pump, high-pressure fuel pumps, for
engines and pipelines.
The hydraulic schematic diagram of the fuel system is presented in Figure 12.3.

12-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 12.3 – Scheme of the hydraulic principle of the fuel system

The list of components of the scheme of the hydraulic principle of the fuel system is given in
table 12.2.

12-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Table 12.2 - List of components of the scheme of the hydraulic principle of the fuel system

Designation Name Qty

BLG Tanks of the left 2

BPG group Tank of the 2

BR right group Fuel tank 1

BCN Gasoline centrifugal pump Differential 1

DSD pressure indicator FTO Air separator tank Engine 3TD 1

VOB Inlet (fuel tank) Drain valve Fuel distribution valve

DV Drain valve (from FGO) Fuel drain valve from the tank 11

ZG High pressure pumps (engine) Return valve Heater 5

KD Manual fuel injection pump TDA valve Engine fuel 1

KTR injection pump Engine injectors Coarse filter (fuel) 1

KSO Fine filter (fuel) Solenoid heater valve 1

KST 5

NVD 3

OK 1

PP 1

RNM 1

TDA 1

TPN 1

F1...F3 3

FGO 1

FTO EKP 1

The following types of fuel are used in the fuel system.

Diesel fuels GOST 305-82:

• summer diesel (DL) at an ambient temperature of 278 K (5 ºÿ) and higher;

• diesel winter (DZ) at ambient air temperature from 278 K (5 ºÿ) to 253 K
(minus 20 ºC);

• arctic diesel (DA) at an ambient temperature of 253 K (minus 20 °C)

up to 223 K (minus 50 ºC) and below.

Reserve fuels (used regardless of the time of year):

• fuel for jet engines TS – 1, T – 2, RT GOST 10227-86;

• automotive gasoline A-72, A-76 GOST 2084-77.

Mixtures of specified fuels in any proportion, at the same time

• if the content of diesel fuel is less than 10% of the total volume of fuel - with the rule
rovkoy engine on gasoline;

• with diesel fuel content of more than 10% of the total volume of fuel - with the rule
rovkoy engine on diesel fuel.

ATTENTION! Total working time on reserve fuels and their mixtures with used ones
fuels, should not exceed 100 h.

12-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.3.2 Fuel tanks

The system provides for the installation of five fuel tanks.

Four armored fuel tanks are located outside the body of the machine, between
wheel niches of the second and third, third and fourth bridges, on the right and left

on the sides They are divided into two groups - left and right.
The fuel tank is installed inside the hull in the aft part of the machine. Consumable fuel
The tank is located at the lowest point of the fuel system, which ensures its constant supply
filling with fuel

For measuring the amount of fuel in each group of fuel tanks and in the fuel tank
a float-type fuel gauge is installed. The fuel level indicator is located on the shield
priborov mechanic-driver.
Each tank has a filler neck and a fuel drain valve.

12.3.3 Fuel distribution valve

The fuel distribution valve (Figure 12.4) is intended for connection to the system
groups of tanks both individually and simultaneously.
The fuel distribution crane has four fixed positions:
o LEFTS – only tanks of the left group are included in the system;
o RIGHTS – only tanks of the right group are included in the system;
o ALL TANKS - the system includes two groups of tanks - right and left;
o TANKS DISCONNECTED – fuel tanks are disconnected from the system.

Corresponding inscriptions are made on the handle of the fuel distribution valve,
located in the control department to the right of the driver.

Figure 12.4 – Fuel distribution valve

12-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.3.4 Fuel filters

12.3.4.1 Fuel coarse filter

The fuel coarse filter (Figure 12.5) serves for preliminary cleaning of the top
pouring out mechanical impurities and water before it enters the fuel pump
engine pump and heater. It is installed in MTO under the floor in the engine compartment
inhabited department.

For cleaning, the fuel enters the filter cavity. Under the action of gravity part
water and mechanical impurities settle at the bottom of the case. Partially purified fuel passes through
through the mesh sections of the filtering element and is cleaned of mechanical impurities. Passing
through the cells of the grid, the purified fuel flows through the outlet pipes to the fuel filler
to the idle engine pump and heater. It accumulates in the lower part of the filter housing
sludge containing water and mechanical impurities, which is necessary after each departure
the machine drains through the tap to drain the sediment, which is opened by turning the valve of the tap
by 1.5 - 2 revolutions (at TO-1).

Figure 12.5 – Fuel coarse filter

12.3.4.2 Fuel fine filter

The fine filter 1 (Figure 12.6) is intended for the final cleaning of heat
of mechanical impurities before entering the high-pressure pump of the engine. He
installed on the engine crankcase, attached to it with two studs and consists of two parts

slowly working filter elements located in one aluminum housing.

To monitor the technical condition, the filter is equipped with a differential signal
pressure rum 2.

12-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – fine filter 2 – differential pressure indicator

Figure 12.6 – Fine filter

12.3.5 Fuel gauges

The amount of fuel in the tanks is controlled by an electric pointer located

on the instrument panel of the driver. Fuel level sensors are installed in fuel tanks

kah: front left, front right and expense. Connecting the pointer to the axis sensors
It is implemented by a switch that can take one of three positions: when measuring

the amount of fuel in the left group of tanks, when measuring the amount of fuel in the right group of tanks
kov and when measuring the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The switch is located on the shield

priborov mechanic-driver.

12.3.6 Fuel pumping pumps

Two fuel pumps are installed in the fuel system - manual (RNM) and

centrifugal (BCN), and engine fuel pump (TPN).

Manual diaphragm pump RNM (Figure 12.7) is intended for filling with fuel

system and removing air from it after refueling or long-term parking. It is installed in

in the control compartment under the floor to the left of the driver's mechanic. For access to the RNM in the letter to
the hatch is completed.

Figure 12.7 – Manual fuel pumping pump (RPM)

12-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Centrifugal pump BCN (Figure 12.8) with a drive from an electric motor is intended
for supplying fuel to the engine when starting and to the heater during its operation, for creating no
intermittent fuel circulation in the system when the engine is running on gasoline, filling with fuel
system and removal of air from it.

The pump is installed under the floor in the control room.

Figure 12.8 – Gasoline centrifugal fuel pump

The fuel pump of the engine supplies fuel to the fine filter, and for
topics for high-pressure fuel pumps of the engine.

12.3.7 Air separation tank and non-return valve

The air separation tank is intended for collecting cut-off fuel and separating it from it
air, supplying this fuel to the engine through the non-return valve to the coarse filter
fuel and exhaust air into the tank from which fuel is produced. It is installed on
on the port side in MTO near the engine partition near the drain valve.
The check valve creates pressure support in the air separation tank, which helps
and extraction of air from the cut-off fuel, fuel supply to the fuel coarse filter
va; Also, the non-return valve prevents air from entering the two high-pressure pumps
gas during pumping of the system. It is installed in MTO on the port side.

12.3.8 Drain valve

The drain valve is designed to connect the fuel system to the atmosphere. He is a mouth
newlen on the port side in MTO near the engine partition.

12-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.3.9 High-pressure fuel equipment

12.3.9.1 High-pressure fuel pump

The high-pressure fuel pump is of the spool type and is used for dosing

nyh portions of fuel to the injectors. Three fuel pumps are installed on the engine (one pump

for each cylinder).

12.3.9.2 Nozzles

Semi-closed type nozzles are intended for spraying fuel, we inject it

into the combustion chamber. Twelve nozzles are installed on the engine (four nozzles per

each cylinder).

12.3.10 Fuel pipelines

Fuel lines are divided into low-pressure and high-pressure fuel lines.

High-pressure fuel lines are made of steel tubes. Hermetichnost so

the connection of high-pressure pipelines is ensured by the pressing of cone-shaped cones

of the fuel pipes with cap nuts through the washers to the conical sockets of the fuel fittings
of the pump.

Low-pressure fuel lines are made of rubber hose and steel tube.

To avoid damage from vibration, the fuel lines are fixed with special clamps

and brackets.

12.3.11 Fuel supply control drive

The fuel supply control drive provides a change in the amount of fuel, post

welding in the cylinders of the engine, by influencing the regulator, which, in turn, voz

works on high-pressure fuel pumps.

The actuator can be controlled by the pedal located to the right of the pedal

brake and manual feed drive handle, located to the right of the mechanic's seat

the driver

The drive consists of a pedal unit 1 (Figure 12.9), a manual fuel supply drive 3,

engine shutdown mechanism (MOD) 9, traction systems 2, 4, 7, pedal position sensor 6, truck

gate springs 8, 10, end sensors 5, 11 and flexible rod 12.

12-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – pedal assembly; 2, 4, 7 - traction; 3 – manual fuel supply drive; 5, 11 – end sensors; 6 – pedal position
sensor; 8, 10 – return springs; 9 – MOD; 12 – flexible traction

Figure 12.9 - Fuel supply control drive

The manual fuel supply drive is used to set the minimum stable frequency
rotation of crankshafts of the engine, as well as any fixed frequencies, as necessary
smokestacks The drive includes a spring-loaded ratchet that does not prevent the increase
speed, but limiting the drop of the speed below the set value.
The engine shutdown mechanism is a device used to stop the engine. Rabo
it's like a stiff two-armed lever. The MOD includes an electromagnet, which at
applying voltage opens the levers. The regulator lever returns under the influence of a spring
moves to the position of zero fuel supply and the engine stops.
Electric sensors ensure the functioning of the motion control system
in automated mode.

12.3.11.1 Checking and adjusting the drive to the fuel regulator

Adjustment of the fuel supply control drive must ensure complete accuracy
fuel supply rate and maximum fuel supply.

In the first case, the engine should stop, and in the second case, it should develop the maximum speed

percent of engine crankshaft rotation.

12-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

9.3.12 Operation of the fuel system

The production of fuel can be made from each group of tanks separately or from
both groups of tanks at the same time. The connection of the tanks to the track is made by the fuel distributor

pouring crane (KTR) (Figure 12.3).

Fuel from the tanks through the fuel distribution valve enters the consumable fuel
ny tank, ensuring its constant filling, and then through a manual fuel pump
pump (RNM), gasoline centrifugal pump (BCN), in the fuel coarse filter
(FGO). After the coarse filter, the fuel is supplied through the fuel pump
engine (TPN) and fuel fine filter (FTO) in high pressure fuel pumps
engine oil (HVD). From the high-pressure pumps of the engine through the injectors (F) fuel
under pressure is injected into the engine cylinders in the order of their operation.
As fuel is produced, the tanks are filled with atmosphere through the drain valve (KD).
air
The air that got into the fuel pumps of the engine from the cut-off cavities of the pumps together with
flowing fuel is diverted to the air separation tank (VOB) through the TDA valve.
When the pressure in the air separation tank increases, the non-return valve opens
(OK) and the fuel goes to the coarse fuel filter and further to the fuel pump
of the engine pump.

When the engine is running, it is necessary to monitor the fuel level in the included group ba
kov and consumable tank. To avoid air entering the fuel system and, as a consequence,
stopping the engine, it is necessary to switch to the second group of tanks in a timely manner
When the engine stops due to the complete production of fuel and air entering the system
it is necessary to fill the tanks and pump the system with fuel with the help of fuel pumps
RNM and BCN pumps.

12.3.13 Peculiarities of engine operation on different types of fuel

For the operation of the engine on different types of fuel, there are two positions of the multi lever
heat flow 1 (Figure 12.10):
- the first position - for work on diesel fuel, fuel for jet engines
fuels and mixtures of these fuels in any proportions;
- the second position - for working on gasoline. In this position, work is allowed
only on gasoline. The permissible content of diesel fuel in gasoline is no more than 10%.

12-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The direction of rotation of the adjusting screw 2 when

working on gasoline

The direction of rotation of the adjusting screw 2 when

working on diesel fuels and fuels TS-1, T-2, RT and
their mixtures

1 – multi-fuel lever; 2 – adjusting screw; 3 – seal; 4 – cover

Figure 12.10 – Scheme of repositioning the multi-fuel regulator lever

The engine is regulated with the setting of the multi-fuel lever for diesel operation
fuel no.

To work on gasoline, you need:

• remove the cover 4 above the lever 1 and seal the adjusting screw 2;
• turn adjusting screw 2 clockwise with a key until it stops;
• tighten the adjusting screw 2;
• put cover 4 in place.

ATTENTION! Make an entry in the machine form about the transfer of the lever, indicating the
date and reason for transferring the lever to work on gasoline, as well as the
number of hours worked by the engine before the transfer of the lever.

The ignition switch must remain on during the entire time the engine is running
gasoline and ego mixtures, as well as during short-term stops for 3...5 min.
In the subsequent operation of the engine on diesel fuel, fuel for jet engines
gas or mixtures of these fuels in any proportions, a multi-fuel lever is required
set to the initial position.

When the engine is running on fuel for jet engines, the engine power is reduced
it is up to 20%.

12.3.14 Maintenance of the fuel system

Only clean fuel will be filled into the tanks. The tank for refueling must be clean. At
at the gas station, take measures to protect fuel tanks from outsiders getting into them
objects, mud, etc.

Tank filler necks are not left open. Threaded plugs and connections
must be tightly tightened to prevent fuel leakage.

12-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

If the car is stored for a long time, the fuel system must be refueled around the clock
linseed fuel used in this area in winter.
When switching to winter operation after filling the fuel tanks with winter top
run the engine for 10...15 minutes at idle speed to produce summer fuel.
When switching to summer operation, winter and arctic fuel is not permitted
change to summer until fully developed.
In the absence of diesel fuel, it is allowed to use reserve fuels and mixtures
reserve fuel with diesel fuel used.
The list of works performed during maintenance of the fuel system is issued
wives in section 28.

12.3.14.1 Refueling and draining fuel

When refueling, apply all measures to prevent fuel tanks from falling into
them mud. Pour only clean fuel into the tanks. The necks of the tanks will not be left open.
Refueling of the fuel system should be done by a special fuel filler or
in a container way through a watering can with a mesh filter and kapron cloth.

To refuel, you need:

• open the plugs of the filling nozzles of the fuel tanks and fill with fuel
standards, guided by the fuel level indicator on the driver's dashboard;

• wrap the plugs of the filling nozzles of the fuel tanks.

To drain the fuel, it is necessary to use the device (Figure 12.11) from ZIP machine
ny, which consists of pipe 3, pipe 2 and stop 1. The use of the device excludes
getting residue and fuel on hands and clothes.

Fuel can be drained from each tank separately, through one of the fuel tanks
of each group or drain all fuel tanks through the waste tank.

1 - stop; 2 - threaded pipe; 3 - pipe; 4 - key S=24 mm

Figure 12.11 - Device for draining fuel

12-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

To drain the fuel, you need:

• open the plug of the drain valve of the external fuel tanks and the plug of the drain hole
a hole in the bottom of the case (for the consumption tank);

• open the plugs of the filling nozzles of the fuel tanks;

• install the container under the drain hole and screw the device into the flange of the valve
Mr. fuel tank. When screwing into the flange of the fuel tank, stop 1 raises the valve and
fuel from the tank drains through the inner cavity of the pipe of the device.
After draining the fuel, close the drain plugs of the external fuel tanks with seals
body rings and a plug in the bottom of the case (for the consumption tank).
Replacement of fuel of one brand with fuel of another brand shall be carried out after complete production

refueled fuel or ego plum. Removal of previously filled fuel residues is carried out
after refueling the system with fuel of the required brand, start and run the engine for 1...3 min.

ATTENTION! At the first refueling (completely empty fuel tanks), the fuel tank will be filled first.
During further operation, refuel only in the tanks of the left and right groups.

Drain the fuel from the fuel tank last, after the fuel has been drained
from the left and right groups of fuel tanks.
When draining fuel only from the fuel tank, when there is fuel in the left and right tanks
group, it is necessary:

• set the fuel distribution valve to the "TANKS DISCONNECTED" position;

• screw the fuel drain fitting into the tank drain valve;

• after approximately 1 minute, unscrew the cap of the filler neck of the fuel tank
0.5...1 revolution and continue draining fuel.
12.3.14.2 Maintenance of the coarse fuel filter
Disassembly and washing of the filter (Figure 12.12) for coarse fuel cleaning should be done without
dismantling the filter from the system in the following order:

• to close the fuel distribution crane;

• loosen and release clamping bolt 1 by 1...1.5 turns;

• drains fuel from the filter through the sediment drain valve 8;

• unscrew the clamping bolt 1;

• remove the filtering element 5 from the housing;

• unscrew the nut that compresses the package of sections of the filtering element, and remove sections 6,

sealing gaskets 2, 4;

• thoroughly wash the sections of the filtering element and all filter parts in diesel
fuel;

12-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

• wipe the filter cover 3 with a clean rag soaked in diesel fuel;
• put the section of the filtering element on the pipe and tighten it with a nut. The length of the packet of sections

the filter element should be (78-3) mm;

• install the sealing gasket 4 in the groove of the cover 3;
• install the sealing gasket 2 in the groove of the clamping bolt 1;
• install the filtering element 5 in the housing 7 and fasten it with the clamping bolt 1. Za
screw the pressing bolt.

• open the fuel distribution valve.

Pump the fuel system with the RNM and BCN pumps, make sure there is no fuel leakage
from the fuel filter.

1-clamping bolt; 2-sealing gasket; 3-cover; 4-sealing gasket; 5-filtering element; 6-filter section; 7-corpus; 8-
tap plum sediment

Figure 12.12 - Fuel coarse filter

12.3.14.3 Maintenance of the fine filter

Replacement of the filter elements of the fuel fine filter is performed without disassembly
filter from the system in the following order:
• shut off the fuel supply to the engine with the fuel-distributing valve;

• clean the outer surface of the fuel fine filter that is dirty;
• loosen the tension bolt 7 (Figure 12.13);
• remove cover 12;
• remove filter element 1 from the filter housing;
• remove sealing rings 8 from rod 3;

12-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

• remove spring 6, washer 14, sealing ring 8 from the filter element;
• disassemble the filter element, remove the support flange 13, sealing ring 8, filter
troelement 1 and cover 4;
• wash the filter:
o wash the parts of the filter, except those to be replaced, in the fuel used;
o remove fuel residues from the inner cavity of the filter housing;
o wipe the inner cavity of the filter with a clean napkin;
• collect the filter:
o take new sealing rings 8 (457.86.090 – 8 pcs) and 9 from the ZIP engine
(457.86.021-2 – 2 pcs), filter elements 1 (457.86.061ÿÿ-1 – 2 pcs), covers 4
(457.86.063ÿÿ-1 – 2 pcs) and copper rings 11 (12ÿ3 – 2 pcs);
o put new covers 4 on the frames 5, and tighten the cords in the grooves; cord ends
wrap at least twice, tie a double knot;
o Lubricate the surfaces of the seating filter elements with motor oil
sealing rings 8;
o put new filter elements 1 on the frames, squeeze them by hand;
o put on the rod 3 sealing rings 8;
• install new filter elements in housing 2;
• close the case with covers 12 and tighten the covers with tension bolts 7 until the cover stops
shek in building 2;

• loosen the fastening bolts 7, remove the covers;

• install sealing rings 8, washers 14 and springs 6;
• install covers with new sealing rings 9 on the filter housing;
• put sealing copper rings 11 on tie bolts 7 and tighten the bolts;
• open the fuel distribution valve;
• pump the fuel system with the RNM and BCN pumps, make sure there are no top leaks
pour from the fuel filter.

12-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – filter element; 2 – body; 3 – rod; 4 – cover; 5 – frame; 6 - spring; 7 – tension bolt; 8, 9, 11 – sealing rings;
10 – handle; 12 – cover; 13 – support flange; 14 – puck;

Figure 12.13 - Fuel fine filter

12.3.14.4 Adjustment of fuel equipment

Adjustment of the fuel equipment must be performed by specialists outside the machine
special stands and installations.

12.4 Air supply system

The air supply system is intended for cleaning atmospheric air from dust and
of its supply to the engine cylinders.

The air supply system is installed in the MTO and consists of an air intake device
1 (Figure 12.14), installed in the roof of the MTO, a removable bunker 9 with an inertial grid
10, two-stage cyclone-cassette type air cleaner 7, outlet route cleaned
of air from the air cleaner to the engine supercharger 8 and ejectors for dust removal
from the dust collector of the air cleaner 16 and the inertial grid 17.

12.4.1 Air intake device

Air intake device 1 (Figure 12.14) is a welded structure installed in

MTO roof and consists of a shell in which folding protective blinds with a set are installed
cams and flange for fastening the air cleaner hopper. Front air intake device
meant for supplying air to the air cleaner hopper.

12-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.4.1.1 Hopper air cleaner

Air cleaner hopper 9 (Figure 12.14) is a removable structure, consisting of welded

the casing, in which the inertial grid and sealing units providing
sealing of the hopper with the flange of the air intake device and the air cyclone apparatus
cleaner The hopper is attached to the flange of the air intake device with bolts 19. The hopper p
an inertial grid provides preliminary cleaning of atmospheric air, etc
of water into the cyclone apparatus of the air cleaner. Dust from the dust collector of the inertial grid
removed by ejector 17.

1 – air intake device (VZU); 2 – VZU fastening bolts; 3 – cover fastening bolts above the air cleaner; 4 – cover above
the air cleaner; 5 – cassettes; 6 – air cleaner head; 7 – air cleaner; 8 – route of supply of clean air from the air cleaner
to the engine supercharger; 9 – bunker; 10 – inertial grid; 11 – air cleaner grids; 12 – air intake pipe fastening bolts; 13
- air intake pipe; 14 – stopper of the dust ejection valve; 15 – dust ejection valve; 16 – air cleaner ejector; 17 – inertial
grid ejector; 18 - air cleaner head mounting bolts; 19 – hopper fastening bolts

Figure 12.14 – Scheme of the air supply system

12-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.4.1.2 Air cleaner

Air cleaner 4 (Figure 12.15) – two-stage, consisting of a cyclone

and installed in a welded hermetic casing and cassettes installed in a removable head

2, which is hermetically connected to the cyclone device with bolts 3, removable nets 1, which

rye are installed on the air cleaner, the outlet pipe of the purified air, which connects

it is connected by an adapter and cuffs with a route for the supply of purified air to the two-way supercharger
the gatehouse

Dust from the dust collector of the cyclone device is removed by the ejector 5, which is attached to

dust collector nozzle.

1 – air cleaner grids; 2 – head; 3 - head mounting bolts; 4 - air cleaner; 5- air cleaner ejector

Figure 12.15 – Air cleaner

12.4.2 Operation of the air supply system

Under the action of the vacuum created by the engine, atmospheric air passes through the shield

nye blinds and grids of the air intake device 1 (Figure 12.14) enters the air bunker

air cleaner 9. Passing through the inertial grid 9, the atmospheric air passes first

cleaning Dust from the dust collector of the inertial grid is removed by the ejector 17 through the valve

pan 15, installed on the dust removal route overboard of the product. Pre-cleaned

air, through the removable grids 11 on the air cleaner, enters the cyclone apparatus and so on

thrown into centrifugal cleaning. Cyclone-separated dust is removed from the dust collector

it is an ejector 16. The final cleaning of the air takes place after the cyclone apparatus in the cash register

air cleaner sets 5 and enters the engine cylinders through the nozzle of the supercharger.

When the product is moving afloat, the air intake device is installed on the flange

air intake pipe 13, which is attached to the flange with bolts 12 and sealed with rubber

by a seal installed on the pipe, while protective blinds and nets on the air flange

of the intake device are opened and fixed in the open position with standard bolts k

12-21
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

brackets on the roof. The dust ejection valve on the MTO roof is removed from the stopper 14 and ot

is covered by the pressure of the air flow of the ejectors when the engine is running.

12.4.3 Maintenance of the air supply system

List of works performed during technical maintenance of the air supply system

and is set out in section 28.

In the process of operation, the air cassettes are replaced with subsequent flushing

air cleaner and cleaning of the protective mesh from the shutters of the air intake system. Service of cash registers

the set of the air supply system is made after 35 m.h. engine run-in followed

mark in the form of the machine about the completed work. Maintenance of the protective net with pity

is performed after a visual inspection, if necessary.

12.4.3.1 Maintenance of air cleaner cassettes

Servicing air cleaner cassettes should be done in the following sequence:

• unscrew the two bolts 3 (Figure 12.14) of the cover fastening above the air cleaner 7 on

cover MTO and fix it in the open position;

• unscrew the head 18 fastening bolts on the air cleaner brackets, remove it

trap 6 with air cleaner 7;

• remove the felt seal from the air cleaner

• unscrew the cassette fastening nuts in the head of the air cleaner;

• remove cassettes from the flange of the head;

• remove the felt sealing gaskets from the flange of the head and lower cassettes;

• clean felt sealing gaskets from dust, wash in diesel fuel

and wring;

• clean the inner surface of the head from dust;

• wash cassettes in diesel fuel;

• soak the upper (thin) cassette with engine oil heated to temperature

(333...373) K [(60...100) °ÿ] by immersion in a tank with oil for 5 min., after impregnation let drain

oil from the cassette, installed it on the short side at an angle of (50...70) °. Duration

oil draining at ambient air temperature (278 ... 313) K [(5 ... 40) °ÿ] - not less

two hours;

• hold the cassette in a horizontal position for 1 hour;

• soak the lower (thick) cassette with diesel fuel;

• lubricate felt sealing gaskets with grease and place them in

12-22
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

cassette head and air cleaner;

• install cassettes in the head and fasten them with nuts.

It is allowed to wash cassettes in the machine for washing cassettes 478ÿÿ.34.010ÿÿ according to the

wild, set out in the passport of the installation.

Installation of cassettes of the air supply system should be carried out in the reverse sequence, then start the

engine and work at the frequency of rotation of the crankshafts (2200...2400 min–1 v )

the course of (3...5) minutes to release excess oil from the air cleaner cassettes.

12.4.3.2 Maintenance of the protective net from the shutter of the air intake device

Maintenance of the protective net from the shutters of the air intake device is carried out at

every time the air supply system is serviced and during operation when it becomes clogged.

Servicing of the protective net from the shutters of the air intake device is carried out in

of the following sequence:

• unscrew the two bolts 2 (Figure 12.14) of the grid fastening from the blinds;

• raise and fix the nets from the blinds with regular bolts for the bracket on the roof

MTO;

• clean the nets from the blinds with a brush from the outside and blow with compressed air from the inside;

• install protective nets from blinds on the air intake device;

• fasten nets with blinds with standard bolts.

12.4.3.3 Maintenance of the cyclone apparatus

Servicing of the cyclone device is performed after 200 hours of engine operation, and

also unplanned, in exceptional cases, i.e. when oiling cyclones.

To do this, it is necessary to dismantle the air cleaner and flush the air

floor cleaner with a washing solution heated to (363...373) K [(90...100) °ÿ], in the installation for

washing of the air cleaner located in the group ZIP.

12.4.3.4 Maintenance of the ejector diffuser of the dust removal system of the air cleaner

Maintenance of ejectors 16, 17 (Figure 12.14) of dust removal systems of air cleaners

It is produced in the process of servicing the air cleaner and consists of a mechanical one

clean the inner surface of the diffuser from dust and deposits. Flushing is allowed

dirty surface with an aqueous washing solution heated to (363...373) K [(90...100) °C].

12-23
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.5 Exhaust gas release system

The exhaust system of the engine is designed for the removal of exhaust gases

gases into the atmosphere and ensures the passage of a flow of cooling atmospheric air

through a package of radiators due to the energy of the exhaust gases.

The exhaust system (Figure 12.16) consists of a gas pipe 1 with a compensator, nozzle 2, with

boiled to the roof of the MTO, receiver 3 with a nozzle device and the flow part of the ejector

doing 4.

The flow part of the ejector box is welded to the MTO roof and is located on the left

the sides of the car across the body. Water and oil are located in the ejector box

radiators of cooling and lubrication systems of the engine and transmission. Over the camera mixing races
the compensating tank of the engine cooling system is installed.

In the bottom of the ejector box, a pipe with a valve intended for the vent is welded
lations of MTO.

1 – gas pipeline; 2 – nozzle; 3 – receiver with a nozzle device; 4 – flow part of the ejector box; 5 – collar; 6 – cover; 7 –
valve

Figure 12.16 - Exhaust gas release system

Receiver 3, consisting of inner and outer casings, with nozzle device, mouth

is poured into the ejector box above the mixing chamber. On the one hand, the receiver is attached to

the side of the MTO roof with the help of a flange, and on the other side - with the help of a special support

(fingers).

All joints of the exhaust gas release system are sealed with copper-asbestos gaskets.

Valve 7 for draining condensate from the gas duct is located under the gas duct on the frame.

12-24
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Between gas pipe 1 and pipe 2, welded to the roof of the MTO, there is a detachable joint,

which allows you to lift the MTO roof. The connector joint is also sealed with copper - as

with a best gasket and fixed with a clamp 5.

To reduce the level of thermal radiation, the gas duct is insulated with a heat-protective cover 6.

When the engine is running, the exhaust gases entering the gas duct from the turbine through the pa

pipes of the MTO roof fall into the receiver and are directed to the nozzles. Flowing out of nozzles with a large

speed, exhausted gases entrain the air in the mixing chamber and

the sub-radiator volume of the ejector box, and the external ones are thrown out through the diffuser

blinds to the atmosphere. As a result, a vacuum is created in the housing of the ejector box

Atmospheric air flows there through the entrance blinds and a package of radiators

the cooling system is working.

12.5.1 Maintenance of the exhaust gas release system

In the process of operation, it is necessary to constantly monitor the condition of the seals

joints and timely replace gaskets that have failed.

In addition, special attention should be paid to the condition of the heat-protective cover,

not allowing ego zamaslyvaniya.

During the operation of the engine, monitor the condition of the exhaust connections

collectors with turbine inlet.

In the case of exhaust gas penetration and the appearance of soot on the turbine plate and the cooling system

The MTO should tighten the connection clamps in the following sequence:

- stretch the tension wire 7 (Figure 12.17);

- remove the insulation shield 5 above the connection;

- loosen the lock washers 9, tighten the nuts 10.

After carrying out the work, check the tightness of the connection between the turbine and the col

lecturers with the engine running at idle speed and tightened the nuts, bent the lock lugs
pucks

If you tighten the nut 10 of the clamp connecting the turbine to the collector, there is no gas penetration

is eliminated, it is necessary to replace the gaskets between the adapter pipes of the collector

turbine with new ones from ZIP.

For what:

- stretch the tensioning wire 7 on the collector;

- remove heat insulation shields 5 above the connection clamps;

- loosen the lock washers, 9 nuts, and 10 clamp bolts;

12-25
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- unscrew the nuts 10, remove the clamp and replace the gasket (it is painful to install the gasket

with this diameter to the collector);

- assemble in the reverse order, replacing lock washers with 9 new ones

(from ZIP), at the same time, the nuts of 10 clamping bolts of the clamp connecting the turbine to the collector are not

counter;

- work for 5... 10 hours under load and at the nearest ETO, the nuts will tighten 10 hours

stop them

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 – insulation shield; 7 – tie wire; 8 – bolt; 9 – lock washer; 10 – nut

Figure 12.17 – Connection of exhaust manifolds with the turbine inlet

12.6 Heating system

The heating system is an integral part of the cooling system and serves for warming up

engine oil and oil before starting and maintaining the engine in a state of readiness for starting

cold weather

12-26
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.6.1 Heater

The heater is intended for heating the coolant before starting and to a hundred
yanks at low temperatures, as well as for heating the oil in the tank of the engine lubrication system.
The main components of the heater (Figure 12.18) are: the boiler is heated
valve 9, supercharger 1, solenoid valve 14, glow plug 11, injector 12.
The heater is installed on the port side in the landing compartment under the shelf.
The machine has a coolant pumping system that serves for
protection of the engine from overheating after its sudden stop. Cooling liquid
in this case, it is pumped by the water pump of the supercharger of the heater, which is automatic
Czech turns on when the engine suddenly stops.

1 – supercharger; 2 – coolant supply pipe; 3 – coolant drain pipe; 4 – tap for switching the operation of the
heater to gasoline; 5 – heater mounting bracket; 6, 7 – fuel pipes; 8 - a flange for fastening the heater; 9 –
heating boiler; 10 – combustion chamber; 11 – candle; 12 – nozzle; 13 – fuel supply pipe to the heater; 14 –
solenoid valve

Figure 12.18 - Heater

12-27
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.6.1.1 Heating boiler

The heating boiler 9 consists of a plate heat exchanger (Figure 12.19) and a chamber

combustion The plate heat exchanger of the heater has an outer casing and a core

well, consisting of stamped plates assembled in pairs in a section.

Through the channels formed by the plates of the sections and the cavity between the casing and the core cat

the coolant circulates. Wave-shaped channels between sections of the heat exchanger,

as well as the internal cavities of the combustion chamber and the exhaust pipe form a gas tract.

1 – insert; 2, 3, 5 and 8 – rectangles; 4 and 7 – slats; 6 – block section

Figure 12.19 - Boiler block

12.6.1.2 Supercharger

The supercharger 1 (Figure 12.18) is designed to supply the heater with air, create

circulation of the cooling liquid along the main cooling system. It consists of

mounted on the common axis of the electric motor, centrifugal fan and installed on

a bracket welded to the combustion chamber and attached to it by the electric motor housing c
with the help of staples.

12-28
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.6.1.3 Nozzle

Nozzle 12 (Figure 12.18) of continuous centrifugal type, intended for

atomization and uniform distribution of fuel in the combustion chamber. Consists of body 2 (ry
12.20), fitting 1, filter 7, spring 8, swirler 5 with cone 6 and diffuser 4.
It is screwed into the threaded hole of the combustion chamber of the heating boiler.

Fuel is supplied to the nozzle from the side of the nozzle, the filter is additionally cleaned
trom and through the hole b flows inside the swirler on the cone into the swirling fuel approx
releases rotational movement and is ejected at high speed in a sprayed state
nii through the hole in The injector works at a fuel pressure in the highway of 1.7-2.0 kgfÿcm2 .

1 - fitting; 2 - body; 3 - nut; 4 - diffuser; 5 - swirler; 6 - cone; 7 - filter; 8 - spring;

b and in - swirler holes

Figure 12.20 - Nozzle

12.6.1.4 Electric valve

Electrovalve 14 is designed to ensure fuel supply to the heating nozzle

calf. It consists of a body 3 (Figure 12.21), with a winding 5, a core 9, a spring 7 and a piece
ra 1. When the valve is turned on, the core retracts, compressing the spring, and fuel from the cavity b
through the holes it enters the cavity and further to the nozzle. The valve is mounted on a bracket
supercharger mounting.

1 - fitting; 2 - gaskets; 3 - body; 4 - plug connector; 5 – electromagnet winding; 6 - clip; 7- spring; 8 - puck; 9 - core;
and b - a hole
and

Figure 12.21 - Electric valve

12-29
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.6.1.5 Glow plug

Glow plug 11 (Figure 12.18) serves to ignite the combustible mixture in the combustion chamber
wound It is screwed into the threaded hole of the combustion chamber. Electricity supply of candles osushchestvo

comes from the on-board network of the car.

12.6.2 Fuel tap

The fuel tap (Figure 12.22) is intended for turning on additional (refueling
vayuschei) of the highway going to the injector, when the heater is running on gasoline. It consists of
body 10, spindle 5 with handle 6, cuff 8 and ball 9.

1 and 2 – nozzles; 3 – bracket; 4 – pipe; 5 – spindle; 6 – handle; 7 – nut; 8 – cuff; 9 – ball; 10 – housing

Figure 12.22 - Fuel tap

The closed position of the tap (clockwise rotation of the handle) corresponds
operation of the heater on diesel fuel. In this case, all the fuel supplied to the injectors
ke, goes through pipe 2 and pipe 4 to the coil and then to the nozzle.
Open position of the faucet (rotation of the handle counterclockwise)
Corresponds to the operation of a gasoline heater. In this case, the fuel supplied by the pump
som, enters through nozzle 2 and branches into 2 streams. Part of the fuel passes through
pipe 4 and the coil, and the heated one, goes to the nozzle. The tap is attached to the bonks on the head
reheater

12-30
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.6.3 Operation of the heater

When the heater is working, the fuel pump (FPC) supplies fuel through
electric valve in the injector. With the help of the nozzle, the fuel in atomized form enters the tank
combustion measure of the heating boiler. Mixing fuel with air supplied by the fan
of the supercharger, leads to the formation of a combustible mixture in the combustion chamber, which ignites

if the glow plug is hot, it heats the liquid circulating in the liquid tract

heating boiler. The heated liquid is fed by the water pump of the supercharger through the pipeline
the engine, warming it up, returns to the water pump of the supercharger through the pipeline and so on
into the heater.
Control over the temperature of the liquid during the operation of the heater is carried out on a state-by-state basis

the thermometer of the cooling system.

To prevent failure of the heater, in the event that for any reason
the heater is not turned off in time, in the pipeline of the liquid exit from the heater
sensor 17 (Figure 12.31) is installed, which when the cooling temperature is reached
liquid (360...365) K [(87...92) °ÿ] provides automatic transfer of heating work
calf in purging mode.

12.6.4 Maintenance of the heating system

During normal operation of the heating system, maintenance of the heater is not required.

Flushing the nozzle

To wash the nozzle, you need:

• loosen the nut securing the tube to the nozzle and turn out the nozzle;
• disassemble the nozzle, wash all parts with clean diesel fuel or gasoline, and
then blow with compressed air, paying attention to the blowing of the hole;
• assemble and install the nozzle in its standard place and start the heater.

12-31
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.7 Lubrication system

The engine lubrication system (Figure 12.23) is intended for placement, cleaning, etc

giving oil to the moving parts of the engine and cooling them.

1 – radiator; 2 – oil supply hose from the engine's drain pumps to the radiator; 3 – P-1 oil temperature receiver; 4 – oil
pressure indicator sensor; 5 – emergency oil pressure sensor; 6 – oil supply pipeline to the engine injection pump; 7 – oil
drain pipe from the engine crankcase; 8 – filler neck; 9 – motor oil tank; 10 – MZN-3 pump for pumping oil from the engine
crankcase; 11 – heat pipe of the heater; 12 – MZN-3 pump for pumping oil into the engine before starting; 13 – oil supply
pipeline when pumping with the MZN-3 pump; 14 – oil drain hose from the radiator to the engine oil tank.

Figure 12.23 - Engine lubrication system

The following oils may be added to the engine lubrication system:

• GALOL M-4042 TD;

• AZMOL GARANT M-4042 VT

• M-16 IHP-3;

• M-8V2S;

AZMOL GARANT M4042VT, Galol M-4042 TD and M-16 IHP-3 oils are compatible with

a friend, it is allowed to mix them in any proportions.

The use of other types of oils is PROHIBITED .

12-32
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

For control in the system, the following are provided: manometer sensor, thermometer sensor, pointers
which are located on the driver's instrument panel. Filling capacity of the lubrication system
of 85 l.

The hydraulic diagram of the engine lubrication system is shown in Figure 12.24.

Figure 12.24 – Diagram of the engine's hydraulic lubrication system

12.7.1 Oil tank

The oil tank (Figure 12.25) serves as a container for mass storage and transportation

la, necessary for engine operation. The tank is attached to the body with strips through gaskets. For
corrosion protection inside it is covered with bakelite varnish, and outside it is painted. Zapra
the actual capacity of the tank is 75 l.

Figure 12.25 - Oil tank

12-33
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Inside the tank (in its lower part) there is an intake filter through which it is collected

oil injection pump of the engine. In the upper part of the tank, a nozzle with a foam extinguisher is installed
the body through which oil is drained from the radiator. In the upper part of the tank there is a bay

my neck In the lower part of the tank, a drain valve is welded, through which it is produced
oil drain from the tank.

To drain the oil from the tank, it is necessary to unscrew the plug from the drain valve and screw it in
his drain fitting. The fitting, compressing the spring, will raise the ball of the valve, which will be ensured
oil drain

During operation, it is not necessary to maintain the oil tank. In the process of operation

check the oil level in the engine tank with a dipstick during ETO.

12.7.1.1 Pumping oil pump

The pumping oil pump of the gear type with the reduction valve is used for

supplying oil under pressure to the rubbing parts of the engine. The pump is installed on the engine.

12.7.1.2 Intake oil filter

For filtering the oil, taken from the oil tank by the injection pump, into the tank vmon

tirovan intake filter (Figure 12.26). It consists of housing 6, on which they are located

mesh filtering elements 3, made of brass meshes, assembled in pairs on

frame

1 – retaining ring; 2 – nut; 3 – filtering mesh elements; 4, 5 - gaskets; 6 - housing

12-34
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 12.26 - Oil intake filter

12.7.2 Oil injection pump

Oil injection pump 5 (Figure 12.24) - single-section gear type,

installed on the oil tank and serves to supply oil from the tank to the engine before starting it.

It consists of a pump, an electric motor, has a bypass valve adjusted to

pressure (0.98...1.37) MPa [(10...14) kgf/cm2 ].

12.7.3 Evacuation pump

Pumping pump 2 (Figure 12.24) - single-section gear type, installed

line next to the oil tank and serves to pump oil from the engine crankcase in case of failure

starts the engine, when starting the engine on rolls and trims, before starting after a long time

parking lots, as well as before draining the oil from the lubrication system.

It consists of a pump, an electric motor, has a bypass valve adjusted to

pressure (0.98...1.37) MPa [(10...14) kgf/cm2 ].

12.7.4 Oil centrifugal filter

Oil centrifugal filter (MCF) (Figure 12.27) is designed for continuous

oil purification from mechanical impurities and oxidation products. All oil circulating in

engine lubrication system, passes through it.

The flow of oil cleaned from contamination products is directed into the channels of the block, the bottom

spraying oil for lubrication of engine units and units.

Figure 12.27 - Oil centrifugal filter

12-35
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.7.5 Oil radiator

Oil radiator (Figure 12.28) - tube-plate type, intended for

cooling of the oil leaving the engine, opened above the water radiator in the system compartment
cooling system and consists of a core, upper and lower collectors. To the upper collec
Two nozzles are welded to the torus: one is for supplying oil from the engine, and the other is for draining it
cooled oil from the radiator into the oil tank. The core of the radiator has two rows of planes
of tubes, cooling and end plates to which the collectors are soldered.

Figure 12.28 – Oil radiator

12.7.5.1 Bypass valve

Bypass valve 8 (Figure 12.24) is installed between the nozzles of the oil radiator
ra. When the pressure in the pumping line increases, the bypass valve opens and the oil drains
it goes into the engine oil tank bypassing the radiator core. It protects the tubes of the radiators
rupture with increasing resistance in the pumping line.

12.7.6 Operation of the engine lubrication system

When the engine is running, oil from the oil tank 16 (Figure 12.24) through the intake filter
3 through the supply pipeline 21 goes to the pumping oil pump 15. I pump
The pump supplies oil under pressure to the centrifugal filter 17 of the engine, where it is cleaned
Noe oil is supplied for lubrication of engine mechanisms 12. Provided lubrication and cooling
engine oil, oil drains into the crankcase. From the engine crankcase, the oil is pumped out by two masses
the engine is fed by the internal pumps 13 to the radiator 9 for cooling and then to the oil tank.
The minimum amount of oil in the tank is at least 20 liters.

12-36
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Pre-start pumping with engine oil is performed by the oil injection pump 5,
installed on the oil tank, by pressing the button on the driver's instrument panel. Jet 6
intended for air release from the injection main through the drainage tube 22, for
filling the supply pipeline 21 with oil.
To control oil pressure and temperature, the system has 10 manometer sensors
thermometer 11, the pointers of which are placed on the driver's instrument panel, the sensor is minimal
th oil pressure 18, the signal indicator of which is located on the driver's instrument panel.

12.7.7 Actions of the driver when the alarm is triggered

minimum oil pressure

In the event of a sudden engine stop and the minimum pressure banner lights up
oil on the driver's shield is necessary:

• turn off the network protection machine "SB" of the protection and switching block;

• inspect MTO in order to determine the location of the engine oil leak;

• if necessary, eliminate the malfunction;

• check the oil level in the engine oil tank;

• if necessary, add oil to the oil tank;

• turn on the circuit breaker "SB" on the protection and switching unit;

• start the engine and verify its normal operation.

12.7.8 Maintenance of the lubrication system

12.7.8.1 Flushing the oil intake filter

To wash the oil intake filter, you need:

• drains the oil from the tank;

• split the filter housing;

• unscrew the filter from the oil tank with a 27x41 mm socket wrench;

• disassemble the filter by removing the retaining ring 1 (Figure 12.26) and unscrewing the nut 2;

• remove filter elements 3 and gaskets 4, 5;

• wash each filter element and all filter parts in clean diesel top
pour and blow with compressed air.

• assemble the filter and install it in its regular place.

12-37
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.7.8.2 Maintenance of oil centrifugal filter

The service life of the oil centrifugal filter (MCF) is no longer than that without maintenance

250 engine hours (no more than 3,000 km of car mileage).

CATEGORICALLY when servicing the oil centrifugal filter

Starting the engine is PROHIBITED.

To wash the MCF rotor, it is necessary (Figure 12.29):

• raise the MTO roof and secure it with rods;

• clean the cover and body of the MCF from dirt and dust;

• take keys 457.94.122-2, 459M.94.003Sb, 457.94.204Sb, puller 459M.94.204,

collar 457.94.040-1;

• loosen the nuts on the bolts 4 of the cover fasteners 1 with the open-end wrench 457.94.122-2 and

remove the cover;

• with the help of puller 459ÿ.94.204, remove the rotor 3 together with the axis 9 from the housing 10, the axis from

Avoid getting mud, close the case with cover 1;

• holding the rotor with a special key 459ÿ.94.003ÿÿ, open it with the help of an end

key 457.94.204Sb with a collar 457.94.040-1 three nuts 2 for 9...10 turns each;

• slightly tapping on the upper end of the nut 2 with a special key 459ÿ.94.003ÿÿ, ÿÿÿÿ

unite the rotor body from the rotor cover;

• completely unscrew the nuts 2 and remove the rotor cover 3;

• clean the walls of the rotor housing and the rotor cover from non-metallic deposits

with a scraper and wash the rotor body and rotor cover in the used fuel;

• wash all filter parts in diesel fuel;

• lubricate the sealing rubber ring 6 with oil, aligning the control marks,

applied on the surfaces of the rotor body and rotor cover, will connect the rotor body and

the rotor cover in such a way that the nuts 2 are freely screwed onto the studs, and the cover

the rotor is installed in the rotor housing without distortions;

• lubricate the supporting ends of the nuts 2 and the threads of the studs with engine oil and install the nuts on

corresponding pins with the same number as the nut (the number of the nut is printed on its top

no end, pin number - on the rotor body, near the hole);

• holding the rotor with a special key 459ÿ.94.003ÿÿ, tighten the nuts 2 initially

but by hand, and then with the key 457.94.204Sb and the doorknob 457.94.040-1, successive reception

we with a small effort to the stop, after which we reach to the alignment of the marks drawn on

nuts and rotor cover;

• using the puller 459ÿ.94.204, install the rotor in the filter housing; during installation

makes sure that the pin 8, located in the filter housing, enters the groove of the axis 9. check the leg

rotor rotation bone; the rotor must rotate freely, without jamming;

12-38
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

• install a cover on the filter housing and tighten the cover nuts with an open-end wrench
457.94.122-2 to the stop. When installing the cover on the MCF body, check the presence of a seal
body rubber ring 11 and its absence is damaged;

• remove the used keys back to the ZIP;

• close the MTO roof

1 – cover; 2 – nut; 3 – rotor; 4 – bolt; 5 – pin; 6, 11 – ring; 7 – nozzle; 8 – pin; 9 - here; 10 – body; 12 – key for
rotor nuts; 13 – turnbuckle; 14 – socket wrench

Figure 12.29 - Oil centrifugal filter

12.7.8.3 Refueling (refueling) and oil level control

The engine lubrication system should only be filled with clean and tested oil
clean dishes through a mesh filter.
To refuel (refuel) with oil, you need:

• clean off dust and dirt, turn out the armored plug above the fuel filler neck, and
also a stopper of the fuel filler neck of the engine oil tank;

• use the dipstick to determine the required amount of oil for refueling;

• take a funnel with a filter from the spare part of the machine and insert it into the filling nozzle;

• fill the tank with the necessary amount of oil;

• remove the funnel with the filter from the filler neck of the tank and measure the level with a dipstick
oil in the tank. When the tank is completely filled, the oil level should reach the red level
marks on the dipstick;

• screw in the cap of the tank filler neck.

12-39
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

After refueling (refueling) the lubrication system, it is necessary to start the engine and run it

that's 2-3 minutes. 10 minutes after stopping the engine, measure the oil level on the dipstick and,

if necessary, refill the tank to the norm.

They will return the armored plug.

12.7.8.4 Draining oil

The oil must be drained from the engine lubrication system when it is hot (immediately after the run

cars).

To drain the oil, you need:

• prepare a container;

• heat the oil to a temperature not lower than 313 K (40 °C), but not higher than 353 K (80 °C);

• pump the oil from the engine crankcase into the tank by turning it on on the control panel for 1...2 minutes

the "ENGINE PUMPING - GB PRIME PUMPING" switch to the "ENGINE PUMPING" position;

• twist out the armored plug above the filler neck and into the bottom under the oil valve

Also, unscrew the fuel filler cap from the engine oil tank

thoroughly cleaned them and the places around them from dust and dirt;

• unpin and turn out the plug of the drain hole of the oil tank valve

gate;

• screw the tip of the hose into the drain hole of the valve and lower the free end

hose into the prepared container;

• drain the oil from the tank by screwing in the tip until oil flows from the hose

in a continuous stream. Draining the oil is considered complete when the oil begins to flow in drops;

• twist the tip of the hose out of the drain hole of the valve;

• wrap the plug of the drain hole of the valve until it fails and pin it;

• install the fuel filler cap and armored plugs in the standard places

bottom, and above the fuel filler neck.

If the drained oil is contaminated, it should be analyzed as follows

zatelam: viscosity, content of mechanical impurities and water, as well as system flushing

engine lubricants.

Defective parameters of AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, Galol M-4042TD, M-16IHP-3 oils:

- viscosity at a temperature of 373 K (100 °C) less than 13.0 mm2 /s;

- the content of mechanical impurities is more than 0.05%;

- water content more than 0.03%.

Defective parameters of M-8V2S oil: - viscosity at a

temperature of 373 K (100 °C) less than 6.5 mm2 /s;

- the content of mechanical impurities is more than 0.05%;

12-40
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- water content more than 0.03%.

If water is detected in the oil, it is necessary to pressurize the cooling system
0.37 MPa (3.7 kgf/cm2 ). If the pressing results are satisfactory, make a replacement
oil in the system.

When the oil pressure in the lubrication system is less than 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2 ) OPERATION
ENGINE STOPS.
Flush the lubrication system in the following order:

• pour at least 40 liters of fresh oil into the oil tank;

• start the engine and run it for 10...15 minutes at idle speed
crankshafts 1200...1400 min -1
;

• stop the engine;

• drains the oil, having previously pumped it out of the crankcases into the tank;

• wash the intake filter of the oil tank and the MCF rotor;
set the filters in their places.

12.7.8.5 Oil replacement

The oil is changed by:

- after running the engine for no more than 300 hours, but no more than after 6000 km
the machine is running, which will come earlier;

- after 2 years, if the engine has worked for less than 300 hours;
- in case of mud, water, etc. getting into the oil.

After 1 hour of operation, analyze a sample of engine oil taken from the crankcase
engine If defective parameters are reached (see clause 12.7.8.4), make a complete one
lubrication system flushing and oil change. If the oil meets the required parameters
engine operation can be continued without changing the oil.

To change the oil, you need:

• drain the oil, as indicated in paragraph 12.7.8.4;

• wash the intake filter of the oil tank and the MCF rotor

• install filters in their places;

• pour in fresh oil, as indicated in paragraph 12.7.8.3

When changing oil AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, Galol M-4042TD or M-16ÿÿ-3 by mass
lo M-8V2S and in the case of reverse replacement, it is necessary:

• the remains of the oil are drained from the oil tank (mixing of the non-drained residue is allowed);

12-41
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

• carry out two extraordinary washings of the rotor of the oil centrifugal filter:

the first - before refueling; I repeat - after 500 km of car mileage or 50 hours of operation

engine that will come earlier.

12.8 Cooling system

The cooling system is designed to remove heat from engine parts that are in contact

with hot gases, and maintaining the temperature of these parts within permissible limits.

The cooling system is high-temperature, liquid, closed-type, forced

body circulation of cooling liquid. Cooling system capacity ÿ 69 l.

The following coolants are used to cool the engine:

- at ambient air temperature higher than 278 K (5 °ÿ) - special cooling

liquid consisting of clean, fresh water without mechanical impurities and anti-corrosion agents

of additives by weight: 345 g of potassium dichromate technical GOST 2652-78 or GOST 4220-75;

34.5 g of technical duodenal trisodium phosphate GOST 201-76; 34.5 g of sodium nitrite

GOST 19906-74; the use of a low-freezing liquid is allowed, provided that

setting the appropriate coolant temperature in accordance with section 12.2.1;

- at an ambient air temperature of 278 K (5 °ÿ) and below - low-freezing liquids

brands 40 and 65, antifreeze brands Tosol-A40 and Tosol-A65, coolant brands
OJ-40 "Lena" and OJ-65 "Lena".

In special cases, FOR SHORT-TERM OPERATION, it is allowed

the cooling system will be filled or refilled with water without anti-corrosion additives

the conditions of its subsequent draining, washing and refilling of the cooling system of the cooling system
liquid applied at the appropriate temperature of the surrounding air.

ATTENTION! Mixing special coolant with low-freezing liquids is PROHIBITED.

When transitioning to summer, when the temperature of the surrounding air is higher than 278 K (5 °C), or winter

ney, at an ambient temperature of 278 K (5 °ÿ) and below, operation, as well as at

When the machine is in storage, the cooling system must be flushed, for which:

- completely drains the previously filled coolant;

- flush the cooling system with clean fresh water, pouring it into the filler neck

compensating tank and drain through the drain valves of the engine and heater; quantity

spilled water - not less than 40 l;

- close the coolant drain valves and fill the cooling system completely

drinking clean fresh water;

12-42
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- start the engine, run it for 3 minutes at idle speed at the crank speed
those shafts 1500...2600 min-1, heat the coolant to a temperature of (333...353) K [(60...80) °C];
- drains the washing water;

- fill the cooling system with coolant taking into account the temperature conditions
future operation or storage.
The cooling system includes water pump 5 (Figure 12.30) of the engine, injector 4, ra
diators 1, box with thermostats 7, compensating tank 3, steam-air valve 2, kla
Mr. drain of coolant from engine 6, pipelines (painted green). IN
the engine exhaust system ejector also participates in the system.

1 – radiator; 2 – steam-air valve; 3 – compensation tank; 4 – injector; 5 – engine water pump; 6 – valve for
draining the coolant from the engine; 7 – box with thermostats

Figure 12.30 - Cooling system

The hydraulic diagram of the cooling system is presented in Figure 12.31.

12-43
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – injector; 2 – engine water pump; 3 – engine turbine; 4 - compressor; 5 – compensation tank; 6 – steam-air valve; 7 –
plug; 8 – coolant level indicator sensor; 9 – coolant overheating alarm sensor; 10 – coolant temperature sensor; 11 –
radiator; 12 – thermostats; 13 – valve for draining the coolant from the internal combustion engine; 14 - engine; 15 –
heater pump; 16 – heater; 17 – sensor of automatic shutdown of the heater; 18 – the coolant drain valve from the heater

Figure 12.31 - Scheme of the hydraulic cooling system

12.8.1 Radiator
Radiators 1 and 2 (Figure 12.32) are tube-plate type, serve for cooling
liquid coming out of the engine. They are located in the ejector box under the oil boards
rotors and are attached to the ejector box with clamping bars.
Radiators have a filler neck 5 , nozzles 3 and 4 and fitting 6. One chimney nozzle
The pipe is connected to the nozzle of the coolant outlet from the thermostat box, and the other to the pipe
water pump wire. A steam outlet tube connected to a fitting removes steam in
compensation tank

1 and 2 – radiators; 3 – water outlet to the water pump; 4 – water inlet from the thermostat box; 5 – inlet; 6 – steam outlet
fitting in the compensating tank

Figure 12.32 – Radiators

12-44
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.8.2 Steam-air valve

Steam-air valve 2 (Figure 12.33) serves to maintain pressure in the system in

given limits and protection of the cooling system (especially radiators) from destruction.

It consists of a body 1, a cover 5, a spring 2, pressing the steam valve 7 with a gasket

8 to the seat, air valve 10 with spring 3 and washer 4. At an excess external air pressure of 0.01 MPa (0.1

kgf/cm2 ) or more, valve 10 is lowered and air passes through the holes into the tank, balancing the pressure

in the system to the limit provided by the spring 3. At an excess pressure inside the system (0.32+0.5) MPa

[(3.2+0.5) kgf/cm2 ] valve 5 under

and part of the steam from the compensation tank escapes into the atmosphere. Pressure in the system

lowers to the level provided by spring 2.

1 – body; 2, 3 – springs; 4 – puck; 5 – cover; 6 – wire pin; 7–steam valve; 8 – gasket; 9 – grid; 10 – air valve;
-
and holes in the steam valve

Figure 12.33 - Steam-air valve

12.8.3 Compensation tank

The compensating tank 5 (Figure 12.31) serves as a reservoir for expanding pressure

heating the cooling liquid, refueling the cooling system with liquid, collecting and con

density of the steam removed from the radiator.

The compensation tank (Figure 12.34) consists of a body 1, a filler neck 2,

with a closed plug, steam-air valve 3, sensor of the minimum level of coolant 4, a pipe

5, connected by pipelines to the water pump, and the nozzle of the steam exhaust pipe 6.

12-45
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – body; 2 – filling nozzle; 3 – neck of the steam-air valve; 4 – minimum coolant level sensor; 5, 6 – nozzles

Figure 12.34 - Compensation tank

12.8.4 Water pump

Water pump 15 (Figure 12.2) - centrifugal type, serves to create circulation

Coolant in the cooling system.

12.8.5 Thermostats

Thermostats are intended for automatic regulation of the thermal regime of the engine
calf.

Two TS-107 thermostats with solid filling are installed in the engine cooling system

body and straight stroke of the valve. They are placed above the engine in a box with thermostats 7

(Figure 12.30). On a cold engine, the liquid inlet to the radiator is blocked by valve 9 (Fig

No. 12.35), and the inlet to the bypass pipe to the water pump is opened by valve 11. Cooling

the liquid circulates, bypassing the radiator, which accelerates engine warm-up. When reaching topics

coolant temperature (351...355) K [(78...82) °ÿ] active mass 3 (mixture of ceresin and

aluminum powder), enclosed in cylinder 2, melts, increasing in volume. At the same time

cylinder 2 moves down, opening valve 9, and valve 11 closes the inlet to the bypass

pipe to the water pump. The coolant begins to circulate through the radiator.

The scheme of operation of thermostats is shown in Figure 12.36.

In the temperature range (353...366) K [(80...93) °ÿ] valves 9 (Figure 12.35) and 11 open

12-46
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

you are partial and the coolant circulates through the radiator and the bypass pipe on
pump inlet. At a temperature of (364...368) K [(91...95) °C] valve 9 is fully opened
and closing valve 11, while all liquid circulates through the radiator. When reducing topics
temperature of the coolant up to 353 K (80 °C) and below, the volume of the active mass decreases,
and valves 9 and 11 under the action of springs 4 and 10 take their initial position.

1, 5 – racks; 2 – cylinder; 3 – active mass; 4, 10 – springs; 6 – rod; 7, 12 - adjusting nuts; 8 – rubber insert with
washer; 9, 11 - valves

Figure 12.35 - Thermostat

I II
I – thermostats are closed; II - thermostats are open

Figure 12.36 - Schematic of operation of thermostats

12.8.6 Injector

The injector (Figure 12.37) is installed on the nozzle of the water pump and serves to increase
cavitation reserve in the cooling system, increasing the coolant pressure with the help of a nozzle
at the entrance to the water pump. Coolant comes here from the compensation tank. When mixing
In the coolant, the energy of the flows is redistributed and the cavitation reserve increases
cooling systems.

12-47
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The injector increases the pressure at the water pump inlet by 0.05 MPa (0.5 kg/cm2 ). Such

increase ensures stable operation of the water pump in case of depressurization of the system

we are at a coolant temperature of 393 K (120 °C).

1 – body; 2 – nozzle; 3 – cover; 4 – fitting; 5 – ring; a – mixing chamber; b - channel; c – diffuser

Figure 12.37 - Injector

12.8.7 Operation of the cooling system

When the engine is running, the water pump circulates the coolant

along the highways of the cooling system, injected coolant into the cooling cavity of the engine core.

Washing the walls of the cylinders, the cooling liquid flows through the channels and drillings into the col

lecturer. From the collector, the hot liquid enters the thermostat box. When fully ot

closed valves of thermostats (the temperature of the cooling liquid is (364...368) K

[(91...95) °ÿ]) the liquid is directed through the outlet pipe of the thermostats to the radiator.

After passing through the radiator, the coolant is sent through the pipeline to the suction pipe

the lever of the pump, which again pumps it into the cavities of the engine core.

When the coolant temperature is below 353 K (80 °C), the thermostat valve closes

you In this case, the liquid, without cooling, comes from the thermostat box through the bypass

I put the pipe into the pump.

To cool the turbine housing, cooling liquid from the cavity of the core through the holes in

the block enters the water cavity of the turbine housing and is diverted through the pipeline to the collector.

Part of the coolant flows through the pipelines to the heater.

The radiators are cooled by the flow of air passing through them due to vacuum, so

exhaust gases flowing through the nozzles of the ejector box. Forming

steam is diverted through steam-air pipes to the compensation tank.

12-48
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.8.8 Maintenance of the cooling system

12.8.8.1 Checking the refueling and refueling of the cooling system

The refueling check and refueling of the cooling system should be carried out in the following order:

• clean the cover on the roof of the MTO department from dust and dirt;

• unscrew the cap of the filler neck of the compensation tank;

• check the coolant level in the compensation tank.

When the dipstick B1318.32.094, taken from

ZIP of the machine, the end of the filling nozzle must be located
0
- on a warmed-up engine (coolant temperature higher than 323 K (50 C)) between dashes "1" and "2"
on a probe (30...40) mm;
0
- on a cold engine (coolant temperature below 323 K (50 C)) between dashes "2" and "3"

on a probe (40...50) mm.

If the coolant level is lower, refill the cooling system,

for what:

• insert the funnel with the nozzle into the filler neck, having previously placed it in the

canvas and filter;

• refill the system with coolant and check its level, then

screw in the plug of the filler neck and the plug on the roof of the MTO compartment.

12.8.8.2 Filling and draining the cooling liquid

To fill the system with coolant, it is necessary:

• clean the plug above the compensation tank and above the filler neck from dust and dirt

place the radiators on the roof of the power compartment and turn them out;

• unscrew the plugs of the filler necks of the compensation tank and radiators;

• insert a funnel with a filter into the filler neck of the radiators;

• fill the cooling system with a special anti-corrosion coolant

with that additive

Special coolant is prepared as follows:

- pour 5...6 liters of clean, fresh, purified from mechanical means into a clean container

of water and heated to a temperature of (333...353) K [(60...80) °C];

12-49
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- add 345 g of potassium to the container in small portions, with constant stirring

technical bichromate; 34.5 g of technical duodenal trisodium phosphate; 34.5 g

sodium nitrite.

The prepared solution is poured into the cooling system and added filtered from the machine
Czech impurities with water, in a volume of 60...63 l (based on the capacity of the cooling system ÿ 69 l).

ATTENTION! It is STRICTLY PROHIBITED to pour anti-corrosion additives directly into the cooling system !

• start the engine and run it for 2...3 minutes at idle speed at a speed of

belt shafts 1200...1400 min-1;

• check the coolant level in the compensation tank through the gas station

neck;

• bring the level of the cooling liquid to the norm;

• close the fuel filler plugs and the plugs on the MTO roof.

To drain the coolant, you need:

• install the machine on a horizontal platform;

• clean the plug above the compensation tank on the roof of the MTO compartment from dust and dirt

nia, a plug in the bottom of the car under the water drain valve from the engine and from the heater, where
install plugs;

• unscrew the plug of the filler neck of the compensation tank, the plug in the valve

coolant drain from the engine, coolant drain plug from the heater;
• screw the tip of the coolant drain hose into the engine water drain valve

liquids;

• pour the coolant into a clean container;

• twist out the tip for draining the cooling liquid from the drain valve;

• screw the tip of the hose for draining the coolant into the valve for draining water from the heater

waiting liquid;

• pour the coolant into a clean container;

• twist out the tip for draining the cooling liquid from the drain valve;

• install all dismantled plugs in the appropriate places.

RECOMMENDED! Drain the coolant from both drain valves at the same time, for which the second drain hose
should be taken from the second machine.

ATTENTION! Draining special coolant, low-freezing liquid, and water for flushing the system onto the ground
is NOT ALLOWED.

12-50
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.9 Possible malfunctions of the power plant

To determine and eliminate possible deviations from normal operation in the tables

This 12.4 gives the causes of malfunctions and methods of their elimination.
Table 12.4

A possible cause of the The way to eliminate

malfunction
malfunction is the malfunction
The crankshaft of the engine does insufficiently charged accumulator Charge or replace the accumulator
not turn when starting, or the engine batteries. batteries. Start the engine using a
repeatedly spins at the starting combined method or from an external
speed (less than 200 min-1 ). energy source.

The engine does not start at the Before starting, the engine is not Warm up the engine with a heater
normal starting frequency of the sufficiently warmed up. tel.

crankshaft rotation or the start is

difficult. Presence of air in the system Bleed the fuel system of the BCN. If the
fuel supply engine does not start after restarting, the
system will be bled again.

Fuel does not flow to the fuel pump. Wash the coarse filter
fuel

The AFP system does not work. Replace the electromagnetic

When the AFP system is turned valve 11.3745000-21 of the
on, the characteristic noise of its object's air system. Replace the
operation is not heard. candle of the AFP system.
Incandescent candles do not work Replace the glow plugs.
nia

The engine smokes: The engine is not good enough. Warm up the engine.
• white smoke after starting;
• white smoke after start-up and
discharge of oil from the exhaust Big piston wear If the oil consumption is more
gases rings and getting oil in than 5 l/h, engine operation is
the combustion chamber, with an NOT ALLOWED.
increased
oil consumption

The engine does not develop Clogged cleaning filters Wash the coarse filter and replace the
power fuel filter element of the fine fuel filter.

High coolant temperature and Malfunction of thermometers, Eliminate the malfunction. Shift to
oils thermostats, dirty radiator screens. a lower gear and increase the
frequency of rotation of the
crankshaft of the engine shafts.
Clean the protective grids of the radiators

12-51
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Possible cause of the Remedy Top up the

malfunction
malfunction The oil oil.
Low oil pressure in sy level in the oil tank is below the
stem lubricants: less minimum - allow
0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2 ), at mine

the frequency of rotation of the Clogging of the filtering element Wash the filter element of the intake
crankshaft of those engine shafts is of the intake oil filter. The oil is oil filter.
-1
more than 2600. min diluted with fuel. Replace the oil.
Analyze the oil according to the following

preachers:

- viscosity;
- content of mechanical impurities
and water; Defective parameters of
AAZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, Galol
M-4042TD, M-16 IHP-3 oils. 1)
Viscosity at 373°K (100°C) less than
13.0 mm2 /s; 2) The content of
mechanical impurities is more than
0.05%; 3) Water content is more than
0.05%. Defective parameters of
M-8V2S oil: 1) Viscosity at 373°K
(100°C) less than 6.5 mm2 /s; 2) The
content of mechanical impurities and
water as for AAZMOL GARANT
M-4042VT,IHP-3
Halol
oils.M-4042TD,
If water is found
M-16 in
the oil, pressurize the cooling system
with a pressure
cm2 ). Ifofthe
0.37
pressing
MPa (3.7results
kgf/
are satisfactory, change the oil. When
the oil pressure in the lubrication
system is lower than 0.15 MPa (1.5
kgf/cm2 ), engine operation is
STOPPED. Tighten the nuts of the
rotor cover until the marks on the nuts
and the rotor coincide.

Tightening of the nuts of the soeda has weakened

assembly of the rotor housing

with the rotor cover of the
centrifugal oil filter. Clogging of
the reduction Wash the reduction valve of the oil
oil pump valve. pump without disturbing the
adjustment. Identified the gap, will
A break in the wires in the circuit eliminate the error.
connection of pressure sensors
oils

Defective electromanometer. Replace the device.

12-52
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

A possible cause of the How to eliminate the

malfunction
malfunction is a malfunction
The frequency of rotation of the malfunction of the regulator or a Immediately stop the engine
crankshaft of the engine increases sinking of the fuel rail tel, for which close the fuel tap
spontaneously (the engine goes of the pump

into "split").

The needle of the oil manometer Air suction in the connections of It will restore its tightness
pointer oscillates. the oil supply pipe from the tank to Stems
the injection section. A break in the
wires in the circuit Identified the gap, will eliminate the
pressure sensor connections error.
oils
Leakage of cooling liquid from the Malfunction of the end seal of the Replace the water pump.
control hole water pump.
water pump shaft.

The high temperature of the The radiator is dirty. Clean the radiator.
cooling liquid on you Defective water pump or broken Replace a defective pump or a broken
get out of the engine. water spring spring. It will reveal the gap, eliminate
of the pump. the inaccuracy.
Broken wires in the connection
circuit of the coolant temperature
sensor
sit

High oil temperature The radiator is dirty. Clean the radiator. It

at the exit from the engine. Broken wires in the connection will reveal the gap, eliminate the
circuit of the oil temperature sensor. inaccuracy.
Faulty electrical
There is no signal from the speed Eliminate the malfunction in the electric
sensor chain circuit. Replace the sensor.
The speed sensor is out of order.

12-53
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13 TRANSMISSION

13.1 General description

The car uses a transmission, which is a set of aggregates and

mechanisms that transmit and transform torque in magnitude and direction

of the engine to the wheels.

The scheme and composition of the machine's transmission are shown in Figure 13.1.

1 – the first bridge; 2 – cardan shaft of the drive of the wheel reducer; 3 – wheel gearbox; 4 – input reducer and
gearbox; 5 – intermediate cardan shaft; 6 – transfer box; 7 – cardan shaft of the drive of the reducer of the pumps of
the water pump; 8 – the third bridge; 9 – reducer of the pumps of the water supply drive; 10 – the fourth bridge; 11 –
drive cardan shaft of the fourth bridge; 12 – cardan shaft of the drive of the third bridge; 13 – cardan shaft of the drive
of the second bridge; 14 – the second bridge; 15 – cardan shaft of the drive of the first bridge

Figure 13.1 – Transmission diagram

13.2 Input reducer

The input reducer in the gearbox unit is installed after the engine and is intended

for connecting the 3TD-3A engine with the gearbox.

13.2.1 Device and operation of the input reducer

The input gearbox (Figure 13.2 and 13.3) consists of a housing, a set of gears, covers,

oil pipelines of the lubrication system of the gearbox, gearbox and transfer box, i

power take-off mechanism for the drive of the two-section transmission pump.

13-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – hole for the supply of gearbox lubricant; 2, 6 – bolts for fastening the input reducer and gearbox; 3
– engine crankshaft speed sensor; 4, 5 – pipelines of hydraulic control and lubrication systems

Figure 13.2 – Input reducer with gearbox. Appearance

1 – input reducer; 2 – hydraulic control and lubrication system pump; 3 – hydraulic management and
lubrication system pipeline; 4, 9 – fittings of the hydraulic control and lubrication system; 5 – gearbox; 6
– the flange of the cardan shaft; 7 – sensor of the number of revolutions of the output shaft of the
gearbox; 8 – mounting platform of the distribution mechanism; 10 – engine connection clutch; 11 – bolt
for fastening the input gear

Figure 13.3 – Input reducer with gearbox. Appearance

13-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

On the two covers, there are bolts, which are supports for the input gearbox

and gearboxes.

A speed sensor included in the system is installed on the gearbox housing

management

In the lowest part of the housing there is an oil drain valve from the input gearbox, behind

covered cork. To drain the oil from the gearbox, it is necessary to unscrew the plugs in the bottom of the housing

and gearbox housing, then screw in the oil drain valve and drain the oil.

Lubrication of the bearings is provided forcibly through the oil lines.

13.2.2 Maintenance of the input gearbox

Maintenance of the input gearbox consists in checking:

1) by the tightness of connections;

2) according to the external cleanliness of the gearbox;

3) check the tightening of the bolts if there is a leak. If it is impossible to eliminate the leak

the topic of tightening the fastening parts - send the gearbox for repair;

4) when changing the oil in the hydraulic control and lubrication system, drain the oil from the reducto crankcase

ra through the drain valve located in the lower part and closed with a stopper.

Holes are provided on the gearbox. M12 under eye-bolts for assembly and disassembly work.

ARIAN EMT-8 oil is used to lubricate the input gear.

It is absolutely necessary that the transmission oil is clean. You need oil

harvest in clean canisters so that foreign substances do not get into the reducer.

13.3 Gear box

The gearbox (CP) is intended for changing the gear ratios in the transmission

for the purpose of obtaining traction forces on the driving wheels, as well as vehicle speeds

wider limits than it can be ensured by changing the operating modes

engine

KP also ensures the movement of the car in reverse and the engine shutdown

transmission

13-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13.3.1 Gearbox device

The main assembly units of KP 5 (Figure 13.3) are the hydrotransformer with
steering clutch and three planetary rows controlled by four friction clutches
over there

The hydrotransformer consists of three elements: pump and turbine wheels, and the reactor
Torah. The pump wheel is the leading element and is set in motion directly
but the engine. The turbine wheel is a driven element and is set in motion
liquid pressure. Thanks to the presence of the reactor, the torque increases
on the turbine wheel.
At the lowest revolutions of the turbine wheel, the greatest increase in torque occurs
difficult moment As the revolutions of the turbine wheel increase, the torque on it
decreases, and when equalizing the revolutions of the pump and turbine wheels, the moments on them become one hundred

the new ones are the same. At the same time, the stationary relative to the KP crankcase starts the reactor
rotates together with the turbine and pump wheels, and the hydrotransformer begins to work
like a hydraulic clutch.

The lock-up clutch is located inside the hydrotransformer and is turned on

signal from the electronic control unit (ECU). Turning on the locking clutch
provides direct connection of the engine to the gearbox. At the same time, losses in
hydrotransformer, and maximum fuel economy and speed are achieved.
The locking clutch is disabled at low speeds. Planetary rows are managed
four multi-disc clutches, working in pairs, and providing five
forward and one reverse gear.

13.3.2 Control panel for selecting the driving mode

The control panel for selecting the driving mode (Figure 13.4) is a push-button type, intended for selection

of the following modes:

- neutral ("N" mode);

- movement in forward gears with automatic gear shifting (re
press "D");
- turning on the reverse gear ("R" mode);
- switching to manual sequential gear selection mode ("M" mode);
- emergency switching on of the second gear and reverse gear;
- turning on the "Off-road" mode.

The remote control is located on the bracket to the right of the driver.

13-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – button for turning on the "Off-road" mode; 2 - indication of the "Off-road" mode; 3 - the button for turning on the driving
mode in forward gears with automatic gear shifting; 4 - indication of the driving mode in forward gears with automatic gear
shifting; 5 - button to turn on the "Neutral" mode; 6 - "Neutral" mode indication; 7 - button for turning on the reverse mode; 8 -
reverse mode indication; 9 - the button for turning on the mode of manual sequential selection of gears; 10 – display panel; 11
– manual sequential gear selection lever; 12 - "TEST" button; 13 - toggle switch for emergency switching on of second gear
and reverse gear.

Figure 13.4 - Control panel for selecting the driving mode

To select the "D" or "R" driving mode from the "N" position, press the corresponding button
button 3 or 7, and the corresponding indicator 4 or 8 lights up.
To select the "Off-road" mode, you need to press while in the "D" mode
button 1, and the indicator 2 lights up.
Switching to "M" mode from "D" mode occurs by pressing button 9.
Sequential shifting of gears in the "M" mode is carried out by switching
lever 7 forward and backward. When pressing forward, the next gear should be engaged, backward -
the previous one

For emergency inclusion of the second gear and the reverse gear, it is necessary to open it
cover and turn on the toggle switch 13 forward (to turn on second gear) or back (to turn on
reverse gear).

13-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13.3.3 Operation of the gearbox

Gear shifting in the gearbox is carried out with the help of electro-hydraulic valves in the bellows
distribution system, which is controlled by the electronic control unit, connecting two
of four friction clutches in the gearbox.
Lubrication of the gearbox is carried out with oil supplied from pump 2 (Figure 13.3) (generally for
RK and KP) into the internal cavities of the KP. The oil drains into the CP crankcase, from where it drains through the channels

it is in the crankcase of the input gearbox and is pumped out by the same pump.

13.3.4 Servicing the gearbox

KPs require minimal maintenance. The most important thing is attentiveness

bearing to the state of electrical and hydraulic connections.
To facilitate inspection of the KP, it should be kept clean. Will check for
heavy fastening connections in the presence of leakage. If it is impossible to eliminate the leak by
suspenders of fastening parts - KP to send for repair.
ARIAN EMT-8 oil is used to lubricate the gearbox
It is absolutely necessary that the transmission oil is clean. You need oil
harvest in clean canisters so that foreign substances do not get into the KP.

13.4 Distribution box

The transfer box (RK) is installed after the gearbox and serves to distribute the rotating motor
ment from the power unit to the driving axles and the hydraulic drive to change the traction
maximum effort on the driving wheels.

RK also ensures car braking during parking.

13.4.1 The device of the transfer box

The transfer case is mechanical, two-stage, with a symmetrical inter-axle

differential
Transfer case 6 (Figure 13.5) is installed in the engine and transmission compartment
and fixed through rubber cushions on the brackets of the longitudinal beam of the machine body.

13-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – flange for connection with the cardan shaft of the drive of the front axles; 2 – front parking brake drum; 3 –
electric speedometer sensor; 4 – front crankcase cover; 5 – the flange of the cardan shaft for connection with the
gearbox; 6 – pneumatic cylinder for switching gears; 7 – mechanism for blocking gear shifting; 8, 24 – clutch
engagement control sensors; 9 – crankcase housing; 10 - pneumocylinder for turning on the drive of the water-flow
mover; 11 – the mechanism of blocking the inclusion of the drive of the water-flowing drive; 12 - differential cover;
13 - differential lock pneumatic cylinder; 14 - mounting flange of the cardan drive shaft of the hydraulic drive; 15 –
rear crankcase cover; 16 – breather; 17 – hydraulic distributor; 18 - pumping pump; 19 – block of return valves;
20, 26 – energy accumulators; 21.25 – brackets for fastening energy accumulators; 22 - flange for connection with
the cardan shaft of the drive of the rear axles; 23 – rear parking brake drum.

Figure 13.5 - Distribution box

The transfer case consists of body parts, shafts and gears. In the lower part

a filter is installed in the crankcase to clean the oil pumped out of the crankcase by pump 18.

The input flange 5 of the primary shaft is located in the upper, front part of the crankcase. To the top

on the rear part of the crankcase, there is a flange 14 of the power take-off for the drive of the water pipe

resident Outside, along the primary shaft are located: three-position pneumatic cylinder 6 for

gear shifting in the LCD, the locking mechanism 7, three sensors 8 signaling about including

gears and two sensors that signal the activation of the drive of the water-flowing drive, me

chanism of blocking the inclusion of the drive of the water-hod drive 11 and the pneumatic cylinder of inclusion

of the drive of the hydraulic drive 10.

The sensor of the electric speedometer 3 is installed on the front cover 4. With opposite

on the other side - on the back cover 15, the pumping pump 18, built into the hydraulics, is installed

RK lubrication system. The hydraulic lubrication system includes a block of reverse valves 19, hydraulic distribution

tank 17 and the pipeline system. On the side of the front cover 4 there is an outlet

13-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

flange 1 with brake drum 2 for transmission of torque to the front axles. Co

On the sides of the cover 12, there is an output flange 22 with a brake drum 23 for transmission

torque to the rear axles. Pneumatic cylinder 13 is intended for the locking drive

differential when driving in heavy road conditions. Mouth near the pneumatic cylinder

the sensor for turning on the lock 24 is new.

Energy accumulators 20 are installed in the lower part of the LCD housing on brackets 21, 25,

26 for holding the car in parking lots.

13.4.2 Device and operation of control drives and transfer box

Shifting gears in RK is carried out with the help of pneumatic cylinder 6 (Fig

point 13.5), three electropneumovalves, which are turned on using the buttons "H", "L" and

"N", located on the driver's shield. When switching on each gear on the driver's panel

the corresponding green indicator lights up:

H - boost transmission;

L
- downshift;

N
- neutral.

The inclusion of the RC differential lock is carried out with the help of pneumocylins

dra 13, electropneumovalve, which is turned on with the help of the differential lock switch

differential RC "TC ON", located on the driver's dashboard. When turning on the lock on

the driver's shield lights up the yellow LCD differential lock indicator.

Switching on and off the drives of the water-flowing engine is carried out by a pneumocylinder

drom 10, two electropneumovalves, which are turned on with the help of the work switch

"WATER JETS ONÿ OFF" water jet engine located on the driver's dashboard. At

thus, the indicator light for turning on the water supply drive lights up on the driver's dashboard.

Lubrication of the RK is made with oil supplied from the pump (common for the RK and KP) inside
internal cavities of the primary shaft and differential. Pumping oil from the RK crankcase through the filter

produced by the pumping pump 18.

13.4.3 Maintenance of the transfer box

Servicing the transfer case consists of checking:

• by tightness of connections;

• for the external cleanliness of the gearbox.

If it is impossible to eliminate the leak by tightening the fastening parts, send the RK

in repair

13-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13.5 Cardan transmissions

Cardan gears of the transmission are intended for the transmission of torque
engine to wheel reducers.

Cardan transmissions consist of fourteen shafts connecting:

- a gearbox with a transfer box - an intermediate cardan shaft 5 (Fig
nok 13.1);
- transfer box with through bridges - cardan shafts 10, 11;
- passable with non-passable bridges - cardan shafts 8,12;
- drive axles with wheel reducers - cardan shafts 2;
- a transfer box with a reducer for the pumps of the drive of the water supply drive 7.

All cardan shafts consist of flanges, forks with telescopic splines

with nyams The spikes of the crossbar go into the lugs of the forks and are installed on the needle bottoms
rosettes Combined sealing of needle bearings. According to the size of the joints
moat, constructions of sealing of needle bearings and splined joints, they are damaged
fall into two types.

The first type includes an intermediate cardan shaft, cardan drive shafts
footbridges; to the second type - cardan drive shafts of non-passable bridges and gearboxes

wheeled

Cardan shafts are shown in figures 13.6, 13.7, 13.8, 13.9 and 13.10.

Figure 13.6 - Intermediate cardan shaft

Figure 13.7 – Cardan drive shaft of the 2nd and 3rd bridges

13-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 13.8 – Drive shaft of the 1st and 4th bridges

Figure 13.9 – Cardan shaft of the wheel gearbox drive

Figure 13.10 - Cardan shaft of the drive of the pump reducer of the water-hodow mover

Lubrication of the bearings of the hinges of the cardan shafts is carried out during assembly at the factory or

repaired by disassembling the hinge and does not require refilling during operation.

13.5.1 Maintenance of cardan transmission

The maintenance of the shafts consists in periodically checking the tightness of the fastening screws
he is

For access to the nuts for fastening the flanges of the cardan shaft to the 1st bridge in the bottom of the housing

there is a hatch covered by a cover. The rest of the cardan shaft fastening nuts

drive bridges are tightened when the shelves and partitions of the motor-transmission are removed

departments Tighten the nuts of the cardan shafts to the flange of the front wheel reducers

to produce through windows in the housings of rotary fists.

Cardan shafts are dynamically balanced. Therefore, in order to avoid violation of the balance sheet

the shafts are not disassembled, if it is necessary to disassemble the shafts - it is necessary during assembly

make sure that the arrows indicating the mutual position of the shafts along the spline joint

niyu, lay in the same plane.

13-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13.6 Bridges

All bridges are installed inside the body of the machine and are attached to it in three places each

bolts 4 (Figure 13.11) for the flange of the bridge cover through rubber gaskets 7 and 10; bolt

we 4 through the flanges 6, the sealing ring 3 and the rubber gasket 7 to the base sheets

of the body Rubber cushions 19, clamped between them, are installed on the bonks of the bottom of the case

clip 16 and bar 17 with the help of adjusting washers 13 and bolts 15. In the rubber

Dusk 19 includes bridge brackets.

Four driving bridges are installed on the machine, which serve to transmit torque

moment from the transfer case to the wheel reducers. In addition, they redistribute

the transmitted moments between the axles and the wheel gearboxes depending on

loads falling on them. Bridges of two types are installed on the car: two impassable

(first and fourth) and two through (second and third), shown in figures 13.12 and 13.13

respectively.

Impenetrable bridges (first and fourth) transfer and redistribute moments between them

wheel reducers, and pass-through (second and third), in addition, serve to transmit mo

ments from the transfer box to impassable bridges and the redistribution of moments between them

bridges

Impenetrable bridges have the same main gears, differentials of increased

friction, axle housings, semi-axle casings, semi-axles and oil separators differ from each other

we are rings, which makes them irreplaceable.

Overhead bridges have the same main gears, differentials, crankcases, etc

tank, half-axle casings, half-axles, gears of the main gear drive and differ in oil

pumps, pipelines and covers on which they are installed. Passage bridges

also non-interchangeable.

Sensors that signal the presence of pressure are installed on the pumps of the passage bridges

nia in the system and, therefore, about the serviceability of the pump and oil lines.

The interaxle differential, installed on the axle bridges, is blocked with the help of

gear clutch, lever system and pneumatic cylinder. The sensor installed on the crankcase

hundred, signals the activation of the bridge lock.

13-11
 13 -12
1–
impassable
bridge;
2
passage
–
bridge;
3
sealing
–
ring;
4
bolts;
–
5,
8
locking
–
plates;
6
flange;
–
7,10
gaskets;
9
nuts;
–11
overlay;
–
13
adjusting
–
washers;
14
puck;
–
15
bolt;
–
16
clip;
–
17
bar;
–
18
overlay;
–
19
a
–
pillow.
Figure
13.11
-Installation
of
bridges
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – a flange for connection with the cardan shaft of the drive of wheel gearboxes; 2 – the flange of the bridge
attachment to the hull side; 3 – a plug with a breather for checking the oil level and refueling; 4 – crankcase of the
main transmission; 5 – ring for bridging the bridge during transportation; 6 – place of installation of sealing ring and
flanges; 7 – flange for connection to the cardan shaft from the second (third) bridge; 8 – bracket for fastening the
bridge to the bottom of the case

Figure 13.12 – Bridge not passable (first and fourth)

1 – flange for connection to the body side; 2 – crankcase of the main transmission; 3 – plug with breather; 4 –
pneumatic cylinder for switching on the differential lock; 5 – ring for bridging the bridge during transportation; 6 –
differential lock activation lever; 7 – place of installation of sealing ring and flanges; 8 – a flange for connection with
the cardan shaft of the gear reducer drive; 9 – a flange for connection to the cardan shaft from the transfer case; 10 –
oil pumping pipeline from the bridge crankcase; 11 – bracket for fastening the bridge to the bottom of the case; 12 -
pump; 13 – minimum oil pressure sensor; 14 – oil supply pipeline to the interaxial differential; 15 – a sensor for turning
on the interaxial differential lock; 16 – casing covering the main gear; 17 – a plug with an oil indicator for checking the
oil level and refueling

Figure 13.13 – Passage bridge (second and third)

13-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13.6.1. Maintenance of bridges

At TO#1, check if there is any oil leaking from the axles. If a leak is detected, eliminate it
the reason, check the level and, if necessary, top up the oil to the norm.
Check the oil level in the first and fourth axles with an oil dipstick from ZIP, on
Torus marks the limit oil levels through the filling holes under plugs 3
(Figure 13.12).
Check the oil level in the second and third axles with an oil dipstick
together with plug 17 (Figure 13.13).
To change the oil in the bridges:

- remove the plugs above the plugs of the filling holes, clean the plugs from dust
and mud and turn them out one by one (for the first bridge, it is necessary to remove the cover under the seat

driver, access to the second through a hatch in the bottom of the body);

- clean and turn out the plugs in the bottom under the drain holes of all bridges;
- turn out one by one the plugs of the drain holes from the bridge sumps, first
put a container under them and drain the oil, used a fitting for draining the oil from the ZIP machine;
- wrap the plugs of the drain holes, and then the plugs in the bottom of the case;
- pour oil through the filling holes.

- wrap the plugs of the filling hole bridges, install the plugs in place.

13.7 Wheel gearboxes

Wheel gearboxes are intended for increasing and transmitting torques

driving bridges to the wheels.

13.7.1 Device of wheel reducers

The arrangement of wheel reducers of steerable and unsteerable wheels is shown in fig
Sundays 13.14 and 13.15.

The wheel reducer of the non-controlled wheel is attached to the upper and lower levers under
scales with the help of connecting axes 2 (Figure 13.15).
The wheel gearbox of the steered wheel differs from the gearbox of the non-steerable wheel
the presence of the housing 31 (Figure 13.14) of the rotary fist, which allows turning
wheels on pins 11 and 32. The pivot pins are removable.

13-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The wheel reducer assembly with the upper pin is attached to the upper suspension arm

with the help of a nut 10. Sealing of the upper pivot is carried out with a rubber seal

lem 8, protected from damage by a metal cap 9. The seal 8 is attached to

to the upper lever of the suspension with a cotter pin 12, and to the cover 14 - with a clamp 13. Upper grease

The pin is placed in the cavity of the pin socket 11, the insert 16 and the rubber seal
la 8.

The lower pin 32 is made in the form of a cylindrical rod with a flange at the end and

it is connected to the lower suspension arm with the help of the connecting axis 26. Between it is connected

body axis and the lower support of the rotary fist housing in the bracket 30 is installed thrust

bearing 29. A tightening screw 20 is screwed into the thread of the upper end of the pivot, which connects

pin with the upper support of the body 31.

The screw 20 is screwed to the stop of the flange in the adjusting spacers 22, which are used

there is an adjustment of the axial gap between the connecting axis 26 and the sleeve 24, and it is stopped by the washer 21.

The pivot is sealed using end rubber seals 25,

protective cap 28 and rubber rings 23. Lubrication of the pivot is done through a press

oil pan 33, located in the pivot socket. From getting water and mud, the socket of the pivot is behind

is covered by a plug 34 with a gasket.

The wheel hub is cast together with the brake drum 41 and is attached to the driven gear 35 on

studs 48. For a more even distribution of forces on the studs in the sockets of the drum of the institutions

made of conical split bushings 46, tightly covering the necks of the studs when the nuts 50 are tightened.

To prevent leakage of lubricant from the gearbox housing and the cavity of the brake bar

two oil seals are installed in the drum, and between the outer bearing and the bracket

brake mechanism 44 - sealing ring 51.

In the socket at the outer end of the trunnion, a stuffing box sealing of the air supply is mounted

to the tires The stuffing box consists of a receiving rod 1 (Figure 13.16), installed

on two metal-ceramic bearings 4 and 10, two rubber sealing sleeves 5,

sleeve 7 with a rubber sealing ring 6 and a heel pad 8. The seal is attached to the trunnion

gearbox with nut 3, which must be tightened with a wrench with a torque of (7.8...9.8) N·m

((0.8...1.0) kgf·m) to avoid excessive deformation and rapid wear of sealing sleeves.

Air supply to the tires is carried out through channels in the trunnion, receiving rod 10, pipes

ku 55 (Figure 13.14), connected with the help of nuts to the receiving rod and sleeve 57, clamp

sovannoy in the cover 56, and further, through the transition fitting 2 to the tube and the wheel valve.

Sealing of the cavity of the brake drum is carried out by a rubber ring 45, installed

in the groove of cover 56. There is a hatch in cover 56 through which the torque is adjusted

mechanical mechanism and bleeding of the brake actuator. Sealing of fitting 2 is carried out by ring 1.

The leading 3 and driven 35 gears of the gearbox are installed on two roller bevels

13-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

bearings.

1, 17, 23, 25, 45, 51 – sealing rings; 2 – transition fitting; 3 – leading gear; 4, 18, 42, 49 – sealing gaskets; 5, 15, 22,
52 – adjusting gaskets; 6 – bearing cover with oil seals; 7 – flange; 8 – seal; 9, 28 – protective caps; 10, 43, 50 – nuts;
11 – upper pivot; 12 – pin-wire; 13 – collar; 14 – cover; 16 – liner; 19 – cardan shaft; 20 – tightening screw; 21 –
locking washer; 24 – sleeve; 26 – the connecting axis of the suspension; 27 – suspension lever; 29 – bearing; 30 –
clip; 31 – housing of the rotary fist; 32 – lower pivot; 33 – oil press; 34 – cork; 35 – driven gear; 36 – drain hole plug;
37 – installation bolt; 38 – crankcase; 39 – spacer sleeve; 40 – wheel fastening bolt; 41 – brake drum; 44 – brake
mechanism; 46 – conical split sleeve; 47 – hatch; 48 – pin; 53 – fitting; 54 – tube of the brake system; 55 – tube of the
air system;

13-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

56 – cover; 57 – sleeve
Figure 13.14 – Gearbox of the first and second wheels

1 – body; 2 - connecting axis; 3 – spring washer; 4, 9 – nut; 5 – bolt; 6 – brake mechanism fastening nut; 7 - pin; 8, 16
– flat shaby; 10 – receiving rod; 11 – sealing cuffs; 12 – metal-ceramic bearing; 13 – spacer ring; 14 – counter nut; 15 –
locking washer

Figure 13.15 – Reducer of the third and fourth wheels

13-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – receiving rod; 2 – pin-wire; 3 – nut; 4 – outer bearing; 5 – cuff; 6 – sealing ring; 7 – sleeve; 8 – heel pad; 9
– trunnion; 10 – internal bearing; And - grooves

Figure 13.16 – Sealing of air supply to tires

13.7.2 Maintenance of wheel reducers

Maintenance of wheel reducers during maintenance No. 1 consists in

checking the oil level, the absence of water in the cavity of the brake drums, checking the condition
rubber compacted.

13.7.2.1 Oil replacement in wheel gearboxes

To change the oil in the wheel gearboxes, you need:

- open the filling and drain plugs and pour the oil into the preliminary
substituted capacity;

- put the plug of the drain hole in place and tighten it;
- fill the crankcase with fresh oil using a filling syringe to the bottom level
the edges of the filling hole;

- put in place the plug of the filling hole with a gasket and tighten it.
In the same sequence, replace the oil in the crankcases of the other gearboxes.

13-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

13.7.2.2 Checking the bearing adjustment of driven and driving gears

wheel reducer

With regular maintenance (after five years of operation,

tires) it is necessary to check the absence of backlash in the bearings of the driven and driving gears.
Backlash is checked by moving the brake drum relative to the crankcase when
rocking the suspended wheel in a vertical plane with a crowbar inserted between the rim and
brake drum.
If there is a noticeable backlash, it is necessary to adjust the bearings
mine and the leading gear. Adjustment is made by the forces of repair units.
After carrying out the adjustment, it is necessary to monitor the heating of the bearings in two
women If the gearbox housing heats up to a temperature of 353 K (80 ºÿ) and higher, it means that
that the bearings are stretched and it is necessary to increase the total thickness of the gaskets.

13.7.2.3 Checking the tightening adjustment of the upper bolt connection

With regular maintenance (after five years of operation,

tires) it is necessary to check the absence of backlash in the upper pivot joint of the wheels
reducers of steered wheels.
Checking the presence of backlash is done by swinging the suspended wheel in revolutions
mud plane with a crowbar inserted between the rim and the brake drum.
If there is a noticeable ducking of the wheel on the pivots, accompanied by a characteristic post
nodding, adjust the preload of the upper bolt connection. Adjustment
to produce forces of repair units.

13.8 Possible transmission faults

Table 13.7 – Possible transmission malfunctions Malfunction

Cause of malfunction Method of eliminating
Increased noise during malfunction
operation of the input gearbox or gearbox
Increased wear or breakage
of gear teeth. Destruction of
gear bearings. Destruction of
Replace the gearbox together with the gearbox
bearings

Valov

Oil leakage from the Wear or loss of elastic Replace the gearbox together with the gearbox
input gearbox or gearbox wear cuffs

Violation of tightness on the Tighten the fasteners. If the leak is not

sealing surface eliminated, replace the gearbox together
st. with the gearbox

13-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Malfunction The cause of the malfunction. The method of eliminating the malfunction
Increased noise when the Increased wear or breakage of
box is sometimes not gear teeth. Destruction of gear
accurate bearings. Destruction of bearings
Replace the distribution box

Valov

Oil leakage from the transfer Wear or loss of elastic Replace the distribution box
case wear cuffs

Violation of tightness on the Tighten the fasteners. If the leak is not

sealing surface eliminated, replace the distributor valve.
st. Check that the cardan shafts are rotated by
Knocking in the cardan Wear of needle bearings hand. When a backlash is detected
bearings when suddenly nicks or slotted so
changing the revolutions. unity replace the shafts.

Vibration of cardans Bending of pipes, improperly Check the correctness of the assembly
Valov assembled splined joint (marks and fastening of the cardan shafts, correct
on the parts are not aligned), shafts to be replaced.
loosening of fastening bolts. Wear
or damage to oil seals or gaskets.
Oil leaks from the bridges Air leakage through the oil seal of Replace axles or wheel reducers. Tighten
wheel reducers. Ingress the intake rod. nut 9 (Figure 13.15) of the seal with a torque
of air into the wheel reducers. of 7.8...9.8 N·m (0.8...1.0 kgf·m). If the air
leak resumes, replace the stuffing box seal.
Replace the gasket.

Ingress of water into the Damage to the gasket 42 (Figure

wheel reducer. 13.14) between the brake drum
41 and the hub of the driven gear
35. Damage to the sealing ring 45
Water getting into the brake (Figure 13.14) of the drum cover Replace damaged parts.
drum. or the hatch gasket 49. Loosening
of the nuts of the hub of the brake
drum 41 (Figure 13.14) on the hub
Beating of the hub of the pins driven gear 35 of the gearbox. Tighten the nuts with a 22 mm socket wrench.
brake drum. Increased axial backlash

A knock in the upper pinion Carry out adjustment

nemo connection. in connection (see clause 13.7.2.3).

13-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

14 STEERING CONTROL

The steering control is intended to ensure the movement of the machine according to the set

direction

The steering includes a steering column with a steering wheel and cardan

shaft, steering mechanism and steering drive with a hydraulic amplifier.

14.1 Steering column

The steering column is designed to transmit the forces created by the driver on the steering wheel

wheel 8 (Figure 14.1), to the input shaft of the steering mechanism 1 by means of a cardan shaft

la 16. The steering column with a wheel and the cardan shaft of the steering column are located in the compartment

controls in front of the driver.

The steering column consists of the steering column housing 15, bracket 4, rod 5, lever 6 and

shaft 10, on which the steering wheel 8 is installed. Shaft 10 is installed in the steering column housing

15 on bearings 14. The bearings are closed by cuffs 12, which are fixed on the

wheel 10 with the help of retaining rings 11 and bushings 13. A steering wheel is installed under the steering wheel

switch 7, which is attached to the steering column housing with screws 9.

around the housing of the steering column, the switch is held by the key 17.

The height of the steering wheel is adjusted by moving the lever 6

along its grooves relative to the bracket 4. Adjustment of the angle of inclination of the steering wheel obespe

is adjusted by moving the lever 6 along the grooves of the bracket 4. The bolt 23 is used for clamping and impact

lever 6 in the bracket 4. The rod 5 provides support to the lower end of the lever 6. The rod

is attached to the lever 6 and to the bracket 4 with the help of bearings 25 and retaining rings 24.

To adjust the position of the steering wheel, it is necessary to turn the handle 22 towards itself

at an angle of 90°, while the wedge protrusion of the pad 21 connected to the handle will enter the wedge

groove of the cracker 20, which is installed on the bracket. The resulting gap allows the lever 6

freely moves relative to the cheeks of the bracket 4. Set the position of the steering wheel

sa, it is necessary to move the handle 22 away from itself at an angle of 90°, which will lead to the exit of the wedge

on the lining 21 from the wedge groove of the cracker 20. The cheeks of the bracket 4 squeeze the lever 6, which

child for fixing the steering wheel. Nut 19 serves to adjust the gap between the cheeks of the crowns

mat 4 and lever 6.

14-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – steering mechanism; 2 – bipod position sensor; 3 – traction; 4 – bracket; 5 – traction; 6 – lever; 7 – steering wheel
switch; 8 – steering wheel; 9 – screw; 10 – steering column shaft; 11 – stopper noe ring; 12 – cuff; 13 – sleeve; 14 –
bearing; 15 – steering column housing; 16 – cardan shaft; 17 – key; 18 – bipod; 19 – nut; 20 – rusk; 21 – overlay; 22
– handle; 23 – bolt; 24 – retaining ring; 25 – bearing.

Figure 14.1 – Steering column with steering wheel, cardan shaft and steering gear

14.2 Steering mechanism

The steering mechanism is designed to transfer efforts from the driver to the steering drive

by converting the turning of the steering wheel into an angular movement of the steering bipod.

The steering mechanism 1 (Figure 14.1) is attached with bolts to the bracket welded to the

I will drive the car.

The steering mechanism consists of a screw 5 (Figure 14.2), a ball nut-rail 4 and a sector

24 of the steering mechanism. The gear ratio of the steering mechanism is 23.55. The sector is completed

14-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

together with the shaft and installed on two bearings 29, pressed into eccentrics
bushings 28 of the steering mechanism crankcase. To prevent grease from leaking onto the shaft mouth
new cuff 30, which is pressed by a retaining ring 31. The bipod of the steering wheel is connected to the end
sector shaft with a conical spline connection.

The screw 5 is installed on two roller bearings 6, which are pushed through by the cover 1
adjusting spacers 2. The slotted end of the screw 5 is in the backlash-free engagement with
sleeve 7, which is integral with the spool 10.
The spool shaft 16 is mounted on two ball bearings 18 and has its own external thread
the upper part is connected to the nut 12, which in turn is connected to the spool 10, and the inner part
slotted part – with some gap with screw 5. In addition, screw 5 is connected to the shaft 16
lotnyka by means of torsion shaft 17.

1 – cover; 2, 19 – adjusting spacers; 3 – crankcase; 4 – ball nut-rail; 5 – screw; 6, 18, 29 – bearings; 7 – sleeve; 8 –
spool housing; 9 – valve; 10 – spool; 11, 13 – covers; 12, 23 – nuts; 14, 20, 26 – bolts, 15, 31 – retaining rings; 16 –
spool shaft; 17 – torsion shaft; 21 – plunger; 22 – ball bearing; 24 – sector; 25 – cover; 27 – pin; 28 – eccentric sleeve;
30 – cuff

Figure 14.2 – Steering mechanism with distributor

14-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

When turning the steering wheel, the nut 12 and the spool 10 receive axial movement through

the threaded part of the shaft 16. At the same time, the torsion shaft is twisted

17 and the spool device is activated. After selecting the gap in the spline joint

the spool is fully engaged, and then joint rotation of the spool shaft 16 occurs

and screw 5. As a result, the ball nut 4 receives an axial movement and turns

sector 24.

A distribution device is bolted to the housing of the steering mechanism crankcase

which includes a spool housing 8, a valve 9, a plunger 21, a spool 10.

The spool 10 is connected to the spool shaft 16 through the nut 12. To the spool housing with bolts

attached cover 11, which in turn is closed with a cover with a sealing device

by The valve body of the distribution device is connected by pipelines to the pump and

power steering cylinders.

14.3 Cardan shaft of the steering column

The cardan shaft of the steering column is intended for:

- to transfer forces from the steering column shaft to the input shaft of the steering mechanism;
- to provide the ability to adjust the steering wheel by angle of inclination and height.

The cardan shaft has two crosses 17 (Figure 14.3), on which rollers are installed

bearings 14, fixed in forks 1, 2, 10, 11 by locking rings 13. Lubricant to

the bearings 14 are fed from the grease nipples, which are part of the crossbars 17, through drilling in

the last ones To prevent leakage of lubricant between crosspieces and bearings
new oil seals 15 with their clips 16.

The cardan shaft has the ability to change its length from 381 to 311 mm due to rotation

cutting forks 2 and 10 along the splines of shaft 6. Shaft 6 is prevented from turning in casing 19

by the locking screw 12 installed on the threaded retainer. Washers 18 and 20 prepyat

there is an exit of the splined tips of the forks 2 and 10 from engagement with the splines of the shaft when
reaching its maximum length with a cardan shaft. Washers 18 and 20 are attached to the ends of the shaft

with the help of bolts 4 and 8. Felt rings 5 and 7 protect the inner cavities of the casing 19

dust and dirt.

Lubricant on the splines of the shaft 6 is applied during the assembly of the unit and is changed during the repair of the cardan

shaft Lubricant supplied to bearings 14 is changed during maintenance No. 1.

14-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1, 2, 10, 11 – forks; 3, 9 – plugs; 4.8 - bolts; 5, 7 – rings; 6 – shaft; 12 – screw; 13 – retaining ring; 14 – bearing; 15
– oil seal; 16 – gland clamp; 17 – cross; 18, 20 – pucks; 19 – casing

Figure 14.3 – PTO shaft of the steering column

14.4 Steering drive

The steering drive serves to transmit forces from bipod 18 (Figure 14.1) to the steering gear
khanizma 1 to the rotary knuckles of wheel reducers of controlled wheels by means of traction and
steering trapezoid levers.
Internal pulls 7, 11, 14 (Figure 14.4) are identical in their structure and consist of
gy 8 (Figure 14.5) of tubular section and two threaded tips 5, fixed
tightening bolts from turning. The tips provide a hinged connection of the rods
with levers. The tips differ from each other in the direction of the thread for connecting to the wire
goy and arrangement of press oilers. A cover 15 is screwed into the body 10, in which it is installed
spring 16, pressing the support finger 14 to the spherical finger 9. To hold in the layer
nirny connections of tips of lubrication and protection of them from dirt between the body 10 and dry
rem 13, a rubber sealing ring 18 is installed, and the joint itself is closed
then with a protective cap 11. Lubricant for the hinged joints is filled through the oiler 4
at maintenance No. 1 and at the nearest maintenance after swimming
cars

14-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1, 10 – brackets for fastening cylinders of the hydraulic power steering drive; 2 – hydraulic cylinder of the steering
actuator; 3 – front right lever; 4 – pendulum arm roller bracket; 5 – wheel drive; 6 – rear right lever; 7, 11, 14 – inner
rods, 8 – rear left lever; 9 – pendulum lever; 12 – front left lever; 13 – thrust of the bipod

Figure 14.4 – Steering drive

Brackets 4 (Figure 14.4) of the rollers of the pendulum levers are installed on the right and left
howl of the side on the bottom of the car body. All four brackets are identical in their arrangement
and consist of housing 7 (Figure 14.6), in which bearings 13, roller 10 and
cover 5. Cover 5 is attached to the body with bolts 14. To adjust the tightening of the bearings
gaskets are used 6. The cavity of the bracket body is filled with grease when assembling the unit, ÿÿ ÿÿ
cuffs 4 and 12 prevent flow during operation.
Levers 3, 6, 8, 9 and 12 (Figure 14.4) are fixed with bolts 1 (Figure 14.6) on the top slots
its and lower ends of the roller 10 of the bracket and serve to transmit forces from the steering bellows
nism and hydraulic booster to the wheel drives.

14-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – cotter pin; 2 – nut; 3 – lever; 4 – oil pan; 5 – tip; 6 – nut; 7 – tension bolt; 8 – traction; 9 – finger; 10 –
body; 11 – protective cap; 12, 19 – tie rings; 13 – rusk; 14 – support finger; 15 – cover; 16 – spring; 17 –
thrust ring; 18 – sealing ring

Figure 14.5 – Hinged connection of the inner thrust of the steering trapezoid

1, 9, 14 – bolts; 2 – puck; 3, 11 – levers; 4, 12 – sealants; 5 – housing cover; 6, 8 – gaskets; 7 – bracket

body; 10 – roller; 13 – bearing

Figure 14.6 – A bracket with a roller of a pendulum arm

Wheel pulls 5 (Figure 14.4) serve to transmit forces from pendulum levers 9 to
rotary knuckles of wheel reducers of steered wheels. The device of wheel traction until
shown in Figure 14.7. Wheel tractions, unlike internal ones, in the middle part have six

14-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

faceted section that facilitates their rotation to change the length when adjusting the convergence
wheels The design of the tips of the wheel rods is the same as the design of the tips of the inside
train tracks The tips of the wheel rods differ from each other in the direction of the thread for so
connection with traction and the opposite arrangement of press-lubricators.

1 – oil pan; 2, 4 – tips; 3 – traction; 5 – nut; 6 – cotter pin; 7 – tension bolt; 8 – finger; 9 – for the shield cap; 10 – rusk;
11 – support finger; 12 – spring; 13 – cover; 14 – wire behind the thyroid sheath; 15 – sealing ring; 16 – thrust ring; 17
– housing; 18 – nut; 19 – ry chag; 20 - cotter pin

Figure 14.7 – Hinged connection of the wheel drive

In addition, the protective rubber caps of the ball tips of the front wheel rods
protected from mechanical damage by a wire sheath 14 (Figure 14.7).

14.5 Hydraulic amplifier of the steering drive

The hydraulic amplifier serves to reduce the effort on the steering wheel when steering
laziness of the car, softening of shocks transmitted to the steering wheel when driving on a bumpy road
expensive and increase traffic safety, allows you to maintain the controllability of the machine
in case of destruction of one of the controlled wheels.

The hydraulic booster is connected to the machine's hydraulic system and consists of a distribution system

device included in the steering mechanism, hydraulic cylinders 2 (Figure 14.4) and pipe
wires

14-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The hydraulic cylinders of the amplifier are installed in the front part of the car body on the left side
on the starboard side near the location of the brackets of 4 rollers of pendulum levers. device
The structure of hydraulic cylinders is shown in Figure 14.8.

1 – rod tip; 2 – counter nut; 3 – head nut; 4 – locking screw; 5, 15 – sealing rings; 6 – ring; 7, 12 – fittings; 8
– head; 9 – rod; 10 – body; 11 – piston; 13 – cylinder cover; 14 – cylinder tip.

Figure 14.8 – Power steering hydraulic cylinder

The hydraulic cylinder consists of a housing 10 (Figure 14.8), in which the piston 11 moves
with a welded rod 9. Tip 1 is screwed into the rod, which is connected to the corresponding
with the right shoulder of one of the levers 3, 6, 8, 12 (Figure 14.4) of the steering drive. Ogre piston stroke
is aligned with the latter’s stop in the cover 13 (Figure 14.8), which is welded to the body 10 and in
the head 8 is fixed in the body 10 by a thrust ring 6 and a nut 3.

To prevent liquid from leaking out of the cylinder cavity when moving the shaft
O-rings 5 and 15 are provided.

The hydraulic booster is controlled by a distribution device that changes the direction of travel
fluid flow when turning the steering gear to the left or right.

14.6 Operation of the hydraulic power steering

When the machine moves in a straight line, spool 2 (Figure 14.9) is distributed
the device is in neutral position. At the same time, oil from the pump enters the body
pus 3 of the valve device and through the gaps between the housing and the spool through the pipelines

14-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

merges into the tank. In addition, the oil fills all the cavities of the hydraulic cylinders without overflowing
who works In this case, the cavities of the hydraulic cylinders are under the same pressure and
hydraulic cylinder pistons remain motionless.

1 – front right hydraulic cylinder; 2 – spool of the distribution device; 3 – body of the valve device; 4 – rear right
hydraulic cylinder; 5 – rear left hydraulic cylinder; 6 – front left hydraulic cylinder; A and B are reactive cavities

Figure 14.9 – Scheme of operation of the hydraulic power steering drive

when the car is moving in a straight line

When turning the steering wheel to the right, spool 2 (Figure 14.10) moves axially
direction to the right relative to housing 3 and the high pressure line connects to the piston
through the cavities of the front right 1 and rear right 4 hydraulic cylinders, as well as rod
cavities of the front left 6 and rear left 5 hydraulic cylinders. Opposite cavities
the above-mentioned hydraulic cylinders are connected to the plum line. Due to this, the rods are hydro
cylinders will move until the rotation of the steering wheel stops
until the spool is in the neutral position. Further movement of the machine at
the established value of the angle of rotation of the wheels to the right is ensured due to mechanical
connections of the steering drive.

14-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – front right hydraulic cylinder; 2 – spool of the distribution device; 3 – body of the valve device; 4 – rear right
hydraulic cylinder; 5 – rear left hydraulic cylinder; 6 – front left hydraulic cylinder; A and B are reactive cavities

Figure 14.10 – Scheme of operation of hydraulic power steering when

turning the car to the right

When turning the steering wheel to the left, spool 2 (Figure 14.11) moves axially
direction to the left relative to housing 3 and the high pressure line connects to the piston
with the cavities of the front left 6 and rear left 5 hydraulic cylinders, as well as with rods
cavities of the front right 1 and rear right 4 hydraulic cylinders. Opposite poles
the above-mentioned hydraulic cylinders are connected to the plumb line. Due to this, the rods
hydraulic cylinders will move until the rotation of the steering wheel stops
until the spool is set in the neutral position. Further movement of the machine
at a fixed value of the angle of rotation of the wheels to the left is ensured due to mechanical
connections of the steering drive.

14-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – front right hydraulic cylinder; 2 – spool of the distribution device; 3 – body of the valve device; 4 – rear right
hydraulic cylinder; 5 – rear left hydraulic cylinder; 6 – front left hydraulic cylinder; A and B are reactive cavities

Figure 14.11 – Operation scheme of the hydraulic power steering drive

when turning the car to the left

As the resistance of the turning wheels increases, the pressure in the working fields increases
of power cylinders and in the pressure lines of the pump, connected to the cavities, located

nose behind the ends of the spool 2, i.e. reactive cavities A and B (depending on the direction
turning the steering wheel slowly). The pressure in these cavities also increases, which leads to
ultimately, it is necessary to apply more effort to the steering wheel. This property
hydraulic boosters is called reactive action. It is created thanks to drivers
the so-called "feeling of the road" (the greater the moment of resistance of the steered wheels
gate, the greater the effort on the steering wheel).

14-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

15 HYDRO SYSTEM

15.1 Hydraulic system of the machine

15.1.1 Purpose and device of the hydraulic system of the machine

The machine's hydraulic system is designed to ensure the operation of the power steering

drive and hydraulic drives of winch control and wave-reflecting shield.

The schematic diagram of the hydraulic system of the machine is shown in Figure 15.1.

HT – hydraulic tank; HP – pump NSh 32; VP1, VP2 – safety valves; VRF - combined flow regulator; HD4 – power
steering distributor; HC1, HC2, HC3, HC4 – power steering hydraulic cylinder; HB1 – winch control hydropanel; HM –
winch hydraulic motor;
HB2 – hydropanel shield; HB3 - distribution hydropanel; HC5, HC6 – drive cylinders of the wave-reflecting shield; F1 –
drain filter; F2 – filling filter; HD1, HD2 – hydraulic distributors; HL – hydraulic lock of the shield drive; HR – throttle with
non-return valve; Y1, Y2, Y3,
Y4, Y5 - electromagnets

Figure 15.1 – Schematic diagram of the hydraulic system of the machine

15-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The hydraulic system of the machine includes a hydraulic tank, a hydraulic pump, and safety valves

ny, combined flow regulator, power steering hydraulic distributor, hydraulics

power steering cylinders, hydraulic winch control panel, winch hydraulic motor, hydro

shield panel, distribution hydropanel, hydraulic cylinders of the wave-reflecting drive

shield, emergency valve, drain filter, filling filter, hydraulic distributors, hydraulic lock

shield drive, throttle with non-return valve.

The hydraulic tank (Figure 15.2) serves as a container into which the necessary oil is filled

for the operation of the hydraulic system of the machine. Refueling of the hydraulic system is carried out through the filling station

catch 3 with the filling filter to the level of the line in window 2. When the oil level decreases

below the lines in window 1, the hydraulic system needs to be refilled. The hydraulic tank is installed on the back

wall of the engine and transmission compartment.

1 – minimum level window; 2 – maximum level window; 3 – filling nozzle with a backflow filter; 4 –
drain filter; 5 – breather; 6 – tank body; 7 – bypass valve

Figure 15.2 - Hydraulic tank

The gear pump (Figure 15.3) is intended for pumping liquid into hydraulics

stem A pump is installed on the drive reducer.

Figure 15.3 – Gear pump

15-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The safety valve (Figure 15.4) is designed to limit the pressure in

steering hydraulic system and gear pump protection against overload in case of accidents
situations. It is located on the side wall of the engine and transmission compartment next to it
with hydraulic tank.

1 – safety valve; 2 – body

Figure 15.4 – Safety valve

The combined flow regulator (Figure 15.5) is intended for limitation

pressure and quantity of oil. The regulator consists of two safety and bypass valves. The safety
valve limits the oil pressure in the hydraulic system to 8.0+0.5 MPa (80+5 kgf/cm2 ), and the bypass
valve, together with the flow regulator, limits the amount
oil flow up to 30±3 l/min, supplied by the pump to the power steering when increasing the frequency
engine crankshaft rotation. The regulator is located under the commander's seat.

1 – oil supply "P"; 2 – safety valve; 3 – overflow valve; 4 – valve body; 5 – oil drain "T"; "A" - oil
drain to the hydraulic system

Figure 15.5 – Combined flow regulator

The hydraulic power steering distributor is intended for distribution of the working flow
fluid in the steering cylinders depending on the position of the steering wheel. Race
limiter - spool type, built into the steering mechanism.

15-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The winch control hydropanel (Figure 15.6) is intended for hydraulic control
winch drive motor and limit the pressure in the hydraulic system of the machine when it is exceeded
maximum effort on the winch cable. The hydropanel consists of a body 2, hydrodistribution
body 1 and safety valve 4.
Adjusting screw 5 of the safety valve is responsible for the pressure in the system at
pulling the cable. Adjusting screw 3 of the safety valve is responsible for the pressure
in the system when the cable is issued. The hydropanel is centrally located in the nose of the machine.

1 – hydraulic distributor; 2 – body; 3, 5 – adjusting screws of the safety valve; 4 – safety valve/

Figure 15.6 – Hydropanel for winch control

The hydro panel of the shield (Figure 15.7) is designed to control the movement of the hydraulics
Lindrov drives the control of the wave-reflecting shield and holds them in any position.
The hydraulic panel is located in the nose of the machine to the left of the winch.

The hydraulic panel consists of a body 1 on which a hydraulic lock 3 is installed, the throttle is closed
valve 2 and hydraulic distributor 4.

1 – body; 2 – throttle; 3 – hydraulic lock; 4 – hydraulic distributor

Figure 15.7 – Shield hydropanel

15-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The distribution hydropanel (Figure 15.8) is intended for turning on the drive
winch and wave-reflecting shield control drive. The hydropanel is located in
division of machine control under the commander's seat.
The distribution hydropanel consists of plate 1 and hydrodistributor 2.

1 – plate; 2 – hydraulic distributor.

Figure 15.8 - Distribution hydropanel

The power steering hydraulic cylinders (Figure 15.9) are located inside
machine body on the left and right sides in the area of the location of the roller brackets
swing arms.

Figure 15.9 – Hydraulic cylinder of the steering amplifier

Hydraulic cylinders of the drive of the control of the wave-reflecting shield (Figure 15.10), race
placed in the nose of the car.

Figure 15.10 – Hydraulic cylinder of the wave-reflecting shield control drive

The winch hydraulic motor is installed on the winch drive gear (see item 23.3).

15-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

15.1.2 Operation of the hydraulic system of the machine

When the distributors are turned off, the working fluid from the HP hydraulic pump (Figure 15.1)

comes through the safety valve VP1 and the combined flow regulator VRF in

hydraulic power steering distributor HD4.

When the machine is moving in a straight line, the liquid flows through the HD4 distributor into

hydraulic tank HT. When turning the steering wheel, the working fluid is directed by the HD4 distributor

into the corresponding cylinder cavity, which provides a reduction in effort on the steering wheel.

The winch is turned on to issue the cable by turning on the "WINCH" switch

on the driver's dashboard to the "OFF" position. At the same time, electromagnets Y5, Y3 and the working one are turned on

liquid from the HP pump through the HD2 distributor flows to the HM hydraulic motor, providing

ego rotation

To tighten the winch cable, turn the "WINCH" switch on the driver's panel to

"IN" position. At the same time, electromagnets Y5, Y4 are turned on. When the winch is overloaded, it crashes

the safety valve VP2 is activated.

ATTENTION! When the winch is working, the power steering does not work.

Raising the wave-reflecting shield is carried out by turning on the switch "TRIM

VANE" on the driver's dashboard (Figure 18.4, item 19) to the "UP" position. At the same time, they are included

electromagnets Y1, Y5 and working fluid from the HP pump through the distributors HD1, hydrosis

fluid HL and throttle HR enters the rod cavity of cylinders HC5 and HC6.

The wave-reflecting shield is lowered by turning on the switch

"TRIM VANE" on the driver's panel (Figure 18.4, item 19) to the "DOWN" position. At the same time

electromagnets Y2, Y5 and the working fluid from the ÿP pump are turned on through

distributor HD1, hydraulic lock HL and throttle HR enters the piston cavity of the cylinder

firewood HC5 and HC6. Hydrolock HL ensures retention of the wave-reflecting shield in any case
position

ATTENTION! When the wave-reflecting shield is working, the power steering does not work.

15.1.3 Maintenance of the hydraulic system of the machine

After works related to the elimination of hydraulic system leaks or after works,

that led to a violation of its tightness, it is necessary to remove from the hydraulic system by air

her pumping For this it is necessary:

- open the plug of the hydraulic tank and add oil to the norm;

15-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- start the engine even when it is running at the minimum idle speed,
pouring oil into the hydraulic tank, turn the steering wheel to the stop, until it stops
the process of foaming and reduction of oil in the hydraulic tank is underway;

- raise and lower the wave-reflecting shield until smoothness is achieved.

If necessary, top up the oil;

- issue and tighten the winch cable. If necessary, produce to
oil filling

If the process of oil foaming during pumping is delayed, then this indicates that
air entering the hydraulic system through the pump during untimely topping up of oil.
If the oil level in the tank has noticeably decreased, this indicates that the
there is a leak in the hydraulic system that needs to be fixed.
When the hydraulic system is completely filled and the engine is warmed up, the oil level in the hyd
the robot should not exceed the mark in window 2 and be located above window 1 (Figure 15.17).
Check the oil level in the tank with the wave-reflecting shield lowered.

15.1.4 Possible malfunctions of the machine's hydraulic system

Table 15.1 – Possible malfunctions of the hydraulic system of the machine

Possible cause of Remedy Add oil

malfunction
malfunction
Increased noise when Insufficient oil level in the
working gears hydraulic tank Clogging or
chat pump damage to the filter Presence of Replace the filter
air in the system (foam in the
hydraulic tank, cloudy oil) The system will be pumped, and the air leak
Excessively high level will be eliminated

Ejection of oil through the Bring the oil level to normal

breather of the hydraulic tank oils foot

Clogged or damaged filter Wash the filter and check the ego

15.2 System of hydraulic control, lubrication and cooling of the transmission

15.2.1 Designation and arrangement of the hydraulic control,

lubrication and transmission cooling system

The system of hydraulic control, lubrication and cooling of the transmission is hydraulic
part of transmission control drives and intended for:
- oil supply under pressure for transmission control and input gear lubrication,
gearboxes and transfer boxes;

15-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- pumping out oil from gearbox casings and input gearbox during operation (for
reduction of bubbling power losses) and before long-term parking of the machine;
- cooling and refueling of the hydrotransformer;
- hydraulic control with a torque converter lock-up clutch.
The system is made according to an open scheme. Its schematic diagram is shown in Figure 15.11.
Direction and regulation of oil flows through the channels in the corresponding booster boosters
Tsionov gearbox provides a distribution mechanism.

OTT – transmission tank; VM – valve device; VP1 – high pressure valve; VP2 – hydraulic transformer make-up valve;
UGP - pressure measurement point; DB – distribution box; TDB – transfer case cavity; GB – gearbox; TGB – gearbox
cavity; Fr1, Fr2 – gearbox clutches; Br1, Br2 – gearbox brakes; FP – booster pump; EP1, EP2 – pumping pumps; F1 –
pressure line filter; F2 – intake oil filter; F3 – drain oil filter; OR – oil radiator; VP3 – bypass valve; HD1 – hydrorace
limiter; VP4 – lubrication valve; HRDB, HRER, HRGB – throttles of transfer case, input reducer and gearbox; F4, F5 –
suction filters; F6 – filling filter; SP1, SP2 – pressure sensors; ST1, ST2 – temperature sensors; MD - distribution
mechanism; DV1...DV5 - hydraulic distributors; Vd – drain valve; ER – input reducer; TER – input gear cavity; Y1...Y7 -
electromagnets; HTr – hydrotransformer; FrB – locking clutch

Figure 15.11 – Diagram of the hydraulic control, lubrication and cooling system of the transmission

15-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The system consists of the following main units (Figure 15.11): transmission tank 2;
valve device 10; distribution mechanism; booster pump; pumping pumps
owls; filter 6 pressure line; intake and drain filters; oil radiator with pe
release valve; hydrodistributor 5, bypassing when the hydraulic transmission is blocked
the motor transfers most of the working fluid supplied to it to the radiator and to the lubricant; hydro race
limiter 7, which cuts off the lubrication line of the transfer case when the neutral is turned on
no transmission or reverse gear; block of 8 return valves; lubrication valve 3; the rules
movable throttles, providing the necessary flow rate of the working fluid for lubrication of the inlet
reducer, gearbox and transfer case; suction filters; pipelines 9;
pressure sensors; temperature sensors; pressure and temperature indicators.
All components of the system, except for the pressure indicator and the temperature indicator, are placed in the engine

and transmission department. Pressure indicator to show the oil pressure in the mains
lubricants, a temperature indicator for showing the temperature of the oil in the lubricant lines and signals

jam of the minimum oil pressure in the lubrication lines installed on the driver's panel.

1 – filling nozzle; 2 – transmission tank; 3 – lubrication valve; 4 – distribution mechanism; 5 – pressure line filter; 6 –
hydraulic distributor; 7, 8, 9 – pipelines; 10 – valve device; 11 – drain filter; 12 – drain valve; 13 – pump block; 14 –
filling filter

Figure 15.12 – System of hydraulic lubrication and cooling of the transmission

15-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The transmission tank serves as a container into which the necessary for work is filled

of the power transmission, the amount of oil, and provides defoaming, sedimentation and filtration of oil.

The transmission tank (Figure 15.13) is installed through rubber shock absorbers on

input reducer. Refueling capacity of the tank is 63 l. The minimum permissible for operation
machine, the amount of oil in the tank is 30...32 l.

1 – drain pipe; 2 – intake filter; 3 – level indicator of the working fluid in the tank; 4 – tank; 5 – drain oil
filter; 6 – valve device; 7 – filling nozzle with filling filter; 8 – lubrication valve

Figure 15.13 – Transmission tank

A valve device 6 and a drain oil filter 5 are installed on the upper wall of the tank

and a filler neck with a filler filter 7.

Lubrication valve 8 is installed on the left side wall, and the mouth is on the front side wall

new level indicator 3 of the working fluid in the tank.

Four handles for its dismantling are installed on the side walls of the tank. On the bottom of the tank

there is a drain pipe 1 for connecting the drain pipe from the tank to the facilities

of flax on the bottom of the machine, the plum valve 12 (Figure 15.12).

The valve device ensures maintenance and regulation of the oil pressure in the system

hydraulic system of the transmission, refueling and cooling of the hydrotransformer. When necessary

the flow rate valve device provides switching of the system to pump oil from the car

of the gearbox and the input gear in the tank before long-term parking.

15-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Inside the body of the valve device (Figure 15.14) there is a high spool
pressure, hydraulic transformer feed spool and crankcase oil pump spool
making gears and input reducer, as well as details that ensure their operation.
The valve device is installed on the flange of the upper wall of the oil tank so that everything
drain holes are located inside the tank, and adjustment screws are located outside. Regulate
eye bolt 2 of the high-pressure spool is located on the side of the valve device. Rules
slotted screw 4 of the hydraulic transformer feed spool is located on top of the valve
devices
With the help of a spool valve, high pressure in the highway is maintained
pressure in the range of 1.35...1.45 MPa (13.5...14.5 kgf/cm2 ). Oil pressure in the hydraulic lines
the control is regulated by bolt 2. The oil pressure measurement on the control should be done on the track
from the section of the booster pump to the valve device, connected the manometer to the bonke zame

pressure washer (thread 16×1.5).

The solenoid of the hydraulic transformer supply maintains pressure in the mains of the hydraulic
transformer supply in the range of 0.9...1.0 MPa (9...10 kgf/cm2 ). Oil pressure in the highways
torque converter feed is regulated by bolt 2.
The spool of oil pumping from the gearbox housings and the input gearbox provides
draining the oil from the crankcases into the oil tank before long-term parking. The spool moves when
power of the electromagnet 3, installed on the body of the valve device and included in
on the control panel.

1 – output line to the hydrotransformer; 2 – adjustment bolt of the high-pressure spool; 3 – the
electromagnet of the spool of the oil pump from the gear box and input gearbox housings; 4 – adjusting
screw of the hydraulic transformer feed spool; 5 – oil supply

Figure 15.14 – Valve device

15-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The filling filter is intended for filtration of mechanical impurities of oil, grease
in the transmission tank, as well as to clean the dust particles of the air entering the
tank. It is installed on the tank cover, in a specially processed hole near the valve
devices and is closed with a special cover with a filling nozzle installed on the side
studs

The filter consists of a plastic body 2 (Figure 15.15) with a set pressed into it
koi for filtering oil 1, a plastic cover with a neck for pouring oil 4 and
the breather hole, and the magnetic cartridge located inside. The magnetic cartridge serves
for the retention of ferromagnetic particles contained in the poured oil.
The oil poured into the filter washes the magnetic cartridge and, being cleaned from the ferromagnet

of particles, falls on the mesh of the filter housing. Passing through the cells of the grid and being cleaned from it

dirty, oil enters the tank. Air displaced from the tank through the air filter
enters the atmosphere.

1 – filter element; 2 – body; 3 – breather hole; 4 – filler neck

Figure 15.15 – Filling filter

The intake oil filter is intended for filtering the oil coming from
of the transmission oil tank to the booster pump section.
It consists of a body with a rod 4 (Figure 15.16), on which mesh
filtering elements 3, fixed with a nut 2. The nut is locked with a ring 1. Filtering
the elements are made of brass nets assembled in pairs on a corrugated frame.
To wash the intake filter, you need:
- unpin the filter housing and turn out the intake filter 2 (Figure 15.13) from the mass
frontal lobe 4 with a 27×41 mm socket wrench;

- pre-wash the bag of filter elements in clean diesel fuel;

- loosen and unscrew the nut of the filter element package attachment;
- disassemble and wash each filter element in clean diesel fuel;

15-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- assemble the package in the reverse order of disassembly, set the filter elements
ments on the filter rod and secured them with a nut. The tightening of the nut should be controlled in general
the size of the package of filtering elements, which should be equal to 80 mm if there is no
less than 15 elements, after which the nut will lock;
- install the filter in the tank, tighten it until it fails, check the condition beforehand
sealing gasket (replace an unsuitable gasket), and screw it.
The intake filter should be washed when changing the oil.

1 – retaining ring; 2 – nut; 3 – filtering mesh elements; 4 – body with a rod

Figure 15.16 – Intake oil filter

The drain oil filter is intended for filtering oil pumped out by pumps
from gearbox casings, input gearbox and transfer case. He is placed in a case
se, which is installed on the upper wall of the transmission tank and has cavities for the filter,
oil inlet and outlet. On the flange of the body there are threaded bushings for fastening the hose
inlet and outlet pipelines and bypass valve (ball and spring).
The filter consists of a body 4 (Figure 15.17) with a rod on which the filter is mounted
toxic elements fixed with a nut 3. The nut is countered by a retaining ring 1. Filter
these elements consist of brass nets assembled in pairs on the frame.
A ring 5 is installed on the housing cover to remove the filter. To the housing filter cre
fastens with the help of four nuts and pins. For sealing the flange of the cover and dividing the field
rubber sealing rings are installed on the oil inlet and outlet.

1 – retaining ring; 2 – nut; 3 – filtering elements; 4 – housing of filtering elements; 5 – a ring for removing
the filter

Figure 15.17 – Drain oil filter

15-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

To wash the drain filter, you need:

- after unscrewing four nuts, remove filter 5 (Figure 15.13) from tank 4;
- wash the bag of filter elements in clean diesel fuel;
- loosen and unscrew the nut of the filter element package attachment;
- disassemble the package and wash each filter element in clean diesel fuel;
- assemble the package in the reverse order of disassembly, set the filter elements
ments on the filter rod and fastened them with a nut;
- install the filter in the tank and fasten it with nuts.
The pressure line filter with a contamination sensor is intended for cleaning the
mechanical impurities of the oil coming from the booster pump section to the valve section
structure and mechanism of distribution. It is attached to a bracket welded to a corner
installation of the crossing along the axis of the second bridge, from the right side of the machine to the engine room

transmission department.

The filter consists of a head 1 (Figure 15.18) with inlet and outlet holes, cup 2,
connected hermetically with the help of an o-ring. Inside the glass is located
filter element In the head of the filter, there is a connector for the pollution sensor, when it is activated
on the driver's dashboard, the pressure mag filter clogging indicator lights up

arrows red color

To replace the filter element after the contamination sensor has been triggered
stop the engine and, opening the glass, remove the contaminated filter element and place it
clean filter element in a glass, wrap the ego.

1 – glass; 2 – head; 3 – dirt sensor connector

Figure 15.18 – Pressure line filter

15-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Suction filters are designed to prevent the ingress of large particles

wear products of friction discs, gears, etc., which are in the oil, in the suction
lines of pumps.

Pressure sensors are intended for measuring the pressure of the working fluid in the mag
grease arrows.
Temperature sensors are intended for measuring the temperature of the working fluid
of the hydraulic transformer and the lubrication line, respectively.
The booster pump is intended for supplying oil under pressure to the system and for sub
drinking water and cooling the hydrotransformer. It is installed on the input reducer.
The pumping pump installed on the input reducer is intended for pumping
oil from the input gearbox and gearbox.
The pumping pump installed on the transfer case is intended for pumping
of oil from the transfer box.
The oil radiator is intended for cooling the oil that has passed through the hydro
transformer, before it gets on the grease of the input gear, gearbox, etc
exact box. The radiator has a bypass valve that protects it from destruction
when the radiator channels are dirty or when starting in winter.

The bypass valve is intended for passing oil past the radiator when it thickens
washing oil in the cold season.
The hydrodistributor is intended for cutting off the flow of the incoming working fluid
for lubrication of parts of the transfer case in the "N" and "R" driving modes, as well as in the 1st and
2nd gear. It is installed on the body of the transfer box.
The hydraulic distributor consists of plate 2 (Figure 15.19) with channels made for
inlet and outlet of the working fluid and, in fact, hydraulic distributor 1 with electromagnetic
management The control body of the hydraulic distributor is a DC electromagnet
of current, which is attached to the body of the hydraulic distributor.

1 – hydraulic distributor; 2 – plate; I - in the distribution box; II - from the radiator

Figure 15.19 - Hydraulic distributor

15-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The lubrication valve is designed to maintain the pressure in the lubrication lines within the limits
0.25...0.35 MPa (2.5...3.5 kgf/cm2 ) and maintaining the minimum excess pressure in the circle
culation of the hydrotransformer, sufficient to prevent cavitation.
The grease valve is installed on a flange welded to the left side wall of the trans
of the mission tank and consists of housing 2 (Figure 15.20) and a safety valve.

1 – adjusting screw; 2 – body

Figure 15.20 - Grease valve

The distribution mechanism ensures the direction of the oil flows under the pressure k so
responsible for gearbox clutch boosters depending on control signals
fishing from the electronic control unit. The distribution mechanism has a system of channels, holes
and hydraulic distributors, which receive oil from the general hydraulic control system,
lubrication and cooling of the transmission.

The distribution mechanism (Figure 15.21) is installed using four bolts

on a special plate of the gearbox and consists of housing 6, in which drilling is performed
for the destruction of the flows of the working fluid and five hydraulic distributors 2, 4, 7, 8, 9 s control
flying electromagnets. Electromagnets can rotate around hydrodistributors and
are fixed in the set position by the cover.

1 – supply of working fluid; 2, 4, 7, 8, 9 – hydraulic distributors with control electromagnets; 3 – the channel of the
working fluid outlet to the clutch booster of the hydrotransformer lock; 6 – body;

Figure 15.21 - Distribution mechanism

15-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

15.2.2 Operation of the hydraulic control system, lubrication and cooling of the transmission

Oil pre-cleaned in intake filter F2 (Figure 15.11) from the post tank

flows to the discharge section of the pump FP, which supplies it to the filter F1 of the pressure line.

The oil purified in the F1 filter is supplied to the distribution mechanism MD and through pipelines

to valve device VM. Valve VP1 provides maintenance in pipelines between

section of the FP injection pump and the pressure distribution mechanism of 1.35...1.45 MPa (13.5...14.5 kgf/

cm2 ). At the same time, the oil drain from valve VP1 enters the cavity of valve VP2 hyd

rotor transformer HTr. Under oil pressure, the valve spool VP2 of the hydrotransformer pe

it wobbles and compresses the spring inside it, which provides support

in the pipelines between the VP2 valve and the hydrotransformer, the pressure is 0.9...1.0 MPa (9...10 kgf/

cm2 ). At the same time, excess oil is drained into the OTT tank.

To maintain the optimal operating temperature regime of the hydrotransformer HTr ra

after leaving the latter, the liquid is fed to the OR oil cooler for cooling, that is

where it goes through the pipelines for lubrication of the input gear ER, gearbox GB and razda

of the exact box DB.

To protect the pipelines from destruction when cold oil is pumped into the col

a bypass valve VP3 is installed on the OR radiator lector.

Oil pressure in transmission lubrication lines within 0.25...0.35 MPa

(2.5...3.5 kgf/cm2 ) is provided by the VP4 lubrication valve installed on the OTT tank, which

excess working fluid drains into the tank. In addition, the VP4 lubrication valve ensures the creation of

oil support at the output of the HTr torque converter sufficient to prevent cavitation
what

To limit the flow of oil supplied to the lubricant on gearbox housings

GB, input reducer ER and on the plate of the hydraulic distributor HD1, a regulator is installed

my chokes HRDB, HRER, HRGB.

In the lubrication line of the DB transfer case, a body attached to it is installed

puse hydraulic distributor HD1, which cuts off the flow of working fluid when it is turned on

neutral gear or reverse gear. This is necessary due to the fact that

In the above-mentioned modes, the EP2 oil pumping pump from the transfer case crankcase does not work
DB.

After lubricating the parts of the DB transfer case, the oil flows to the bottom of the latter's crankcase, i.e

where through the mesh filter F5, which prevents large mechanical devices from entering the HP3 pump

small particles, is collected by the EP2 pumping pump. Next, oil through the pipeline, connect

with the flow of oil pumped from the crankcase of the input gear ER, passing the drain filter

F3 is cleaned of mechanical impurities and enters the OTT transmission tank.

15-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Oil after lubricating the parts of the ER input gearbox and the GB gearbox, as well as oil
driven from the switched-off boosters of the GB gearbox through the rasprede mechanism
lenya MD flows to the bottom of the crankcase of the input reducer ER, from where through the mesh filter F4,

preventing large mechanical components from entering the pumping section of the EP1 pump
port is taken up by this section and, connecting with the flow of oil pumped out of the crankcase once
of the exact box DB, gets into the drain filter F3 and further into the transmission tank OTT.
To protect pipelines from destruction, in case of contamination of the F3 filter, on
the overflow safety valve is not installed.
Oil circulation in the system stops when the engine stops.

15.2.3 Possible malfunctions of the hydraulic control system, lubrication, etc

transmission cooling

Table 15.2
Description of the malfunction A possible cause of Troubleshooting
the malfunction is method Add oil to
Triggering of the alarm insufficient oil level in the tank. the tank to the required level.
minimum oil pressure
into the lubrication
line. Oil discharge through the Extremely high level Bring the oil level in the tank to
soap oils the required level.

There is a light on the driver's dashboard Clogging of the pressure line Replace the filter element
This is an indicator of clogging filter. of the pressure line. As
of the pressure mag filter soon as possible, drain the
oil from the oil tank and wash
arrows _
the intake filter. See clause
15.2.1.

15-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

16 BRAKE SYSTEMS

Braking systems are intended for reducing the speed of movement and for full speed
to stop the machine, as well as to hold the machine from rolling.

The car has a working brake system that works on all eight wheels and is stationary
night braking system acting on the transmission.

16.1 Working brake system

The working brake system consists of brake mechanisms installed on all cars
losakh, and a hydraulic drive with pneumatic amplification. Scheme of the working brake system
The stem is shown in Figure 16.1.

1 – pneumohydraulic devices; 2 – brake light sensor; 3 – brake valve; 4 – pedal; 5 – equalizer; 6 – wheel cylinders; 7
– air cylinder; 8 – brake light lamp

Figure 16.1 – Scheme of the working brake system

16.1.1 Drive of the working brake system

A hydraulic brake drive with a pneumatic booster is used on the car.

The drive is double-circuit. It consists of a pedal unit 6 (Figure 16.2), two pneumohydroaps
paratov 3, equalizer 5 (Figure 16.1), wheel cylinders 6, pipelines and hoses.

16-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1321 RE

The pneumatic equipment of the drive is connected to the air cylinder pneumatically
machine equipment. The installation of the drive of the working brake system is shown in fig
sunke 16.2.

1 – reservoir for brake fluid; 2 – brake master cylinder; 3 – pneumohydraulic apparatus; 4 – brake
pneumatic chamber; 5 – brake valve; 6 – pedal unit; 7 - pedal

Figure 16.2 – Installation of the service brake control drive

The pedal unit (Figure 16.3) includes sensor 1 of the final position of the pedal,
brake lever 2, brake light sensor 4, brake lever 5, pedal 6.

1 – pedal end position sensor; 2 – thrust of the brake valve; 3 – brake valve lever; 4 - brake light sensor; 5 –
two-section brake valve; 6 – pedal;

Figure 16.3 – Pedal unit

16-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The pneumohydraulic device (Figure 16.4) consists of the main cylinder 1 of the brake, the pusher
la 3, bracket 4, brake pneumatic chamber 5.
When one of the circuits fails, an indicator lights up on the driver's dashboard

malfunctions of the brake system are red . The signal to the driver's shield comes from
brake fluid level sensor located on tank 1 (Figure 16.2).

1 – main brake cylinder; 2 – piston; 3 - pusher; 4 – bracket; 5 – brake pneumatic chamber; A - a gap of 2-3 mm

Figure 16.4 – Pneumohydraulic device

16.1.2 Main brake cylinder

The main brake cylinder 1 (Figure 16.4) is attached to the pneumohydraulic bracket
parata, located in the nose part of the machine. The working fluid enters the main tank
cylinder from a plastic tank 1 (Figure 16.2).

16-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1321 RE

16.1.3 Brake mechanisms

Brake mechanisms - two-pad, closed type, installed on the wheel studs

nyh reducers (Figures 10.14 and 10.15). Figure 16.5 shows the right brake mechanism
wheels Brake parts are mounted on bracket 7.
Brake pads 6 and 12 are pressed by springs 1 and 5 to support finger 3. Lower
the ends of the pads are pressed by a spring to the adjusting mechanism consisting of the body
with 11, into which the adjusting screw 8 with star and support sleeve 10 is screwed in. To the supports
the wheel cylinder is attached to finger 3. Wheel cylinder pistons with pushers 14 so
united with pads. The sealing of each piston is carried out by two rubber and one
fluoroplastic rings.

1.5 and 9 – tension springs; 2 – cylinder pistons; 3 – support finger; 4 – wheel cylinder; 6 – rear pad; 7 – bracket;
8 – adjusting screw; 10 – support sleeve; 11 – body of the adjustment mechanism; 12 – front pad; 13 – bypass
valve; 14 - pushers

Figure 16.5 – Brake mechanism of the right wheel

All eight brake mechanisms are assembled from the same parts. Brake mechanisms
The brakes of the right wheels differ from the brake mechanisms of the left wheels in the location of the brakes

nyh pads.

The rear pads of the 6 brake mechanisms have longer pads. Therefore without
changing the position of the pads, it is impossible to rearrange the brake mechanisms from the wheels on one side

ny cars on the wheels of the other side.

16-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

When braking under the action of fluid pressure, pistons 2 move in the direction of
the boat Pushers 13, acting on pads 6 and 12, press them to the brake drum 41 (Fig.
sunok 10.14) and slow down its rotation.
For monitoring the condition of the brake mechanism, self-adjustment and pumping of hydraulics
personal brake actuator in the cover 56 there is a hatch closed by the cover 47 with a cut
with a new gasket.

16.1.4 Two-section brake valve

Two-section brake valve 4 (Figure 16.2) is intended for feed control

air from cylinders with compressed air to pneumatic amplifiers of the drive. Inhibitory
the faucet is fixed on the bracket of the pedal assembly.

Terminals I and II of the tap are connected to two receivers. From outputs III and IV compressed air
goes to pneumatic amplifiers. When you press the brake pedal, the force is transmitted through the sy
the stem of the levers and rods of the drive on the lever 3 (Figure 16.3) of the brake valve. Crane, when moving

lever 3 provides a smooth increase in the pressure of the air entering the pneumo-mouth
letters

16.1.5 Equalizer of the brake drive

The equalizer of the brake drive serves to equalize the pressure in both circuits
when braking, as well as to signal a malfunction of the hydraulic drive of one

from contours The equalizer device is shown in Figure 16.6.

Pressure equalization occurs due to the movement of the piston 6 in the housing 2 equalize
Under the influence of the pressure difference of the fluid in the circuits, which occurs in the hydraulic drive
due to the impossibility of absolutely precisely adjusting the uniform gaps between the brakes
with the drums and pads of the brake mechanisms, between the pushers and pistons of the heads
nyh cylinders.

If the tightness of one of the circuits is broken, the working fluid will leak out
bones from the contour with a drop in pressure in it. At the same time, the piston 6 moves to the side
of the damaged circuit, closing the 4 contacts of the alarm switch through the ball

the legality of the red brake system on the driver's shield.

16-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1321 RE

1 – housing cover; 2 – body; 3 – sensor of the emergency alarm of the working brake system; 4 – ball; 5 – sealing
ring; 6 – piston; 7 – spring

Figure 16.6 – Equalizer of the hydraulic drive of the working brake system

16.1.6 Operation of the brake drive

When you press the brake pedal 7 (figure 16.2), the force is transmitted to the lever 3 (figure

No. 16.3) of the brake valve 5 (Figure 16.2). At the same time, the intake brake valve opens

of the tap, ensuring the supply of air from the air cylinder 7 (Figure 16.1) in

pneumatic chambers 4 (Figure 16.2), creating a force that acts on the pistons of the main

brake cylinders Thus, there is a need in the main brake cylinders

my pressure of the working fluid, under the influence of which the pistons of the wheel cylinders through

the pushers push the pads of the brake mechanisms, pressing them against the working surfaces

brake drums.

When the load is removed from the brake pedal, the brake valve releases air from the pneumatic valve

mer, the liquid displaced during braking into the highway is returned under the action of the pru

weights 1, 5 and 9 (Figure 16.5) back to the main cylinder, and the brake system is completely

slows down

16.1.7 Adjustment of the drive of the working brake system

Adjustment of the drive must be started by setting the gap between pusher 2 (Fig

no. 16.4) and piston 2 of the main brake cylinder 1. The size of the gap should be equal to
2...3 mm.

Adjustment should be made in the following order:

- loosen the lock nut on the stem of the pneumatic chamber;

16-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- rotating pusher will increase its length until it touches the piston mainly
th cylinder;

- screw the pusher onto the fork two turns back, then tighten the lock nut.
Correct regulation is necessary for the effective operation of the working brake system
groove of the brake valve drive. The brake valve drive must be adjusted so that
so that the air supply to the pneumatic amplifiers begins at the beginning of the brake stroke
no pedal, and when the pedal was released, air did not flow from the air cylinder to the amplifiers.
Make the adjustment by changing the length of the brake lever 2 (Figure 16.3).

16.1.8 Checking and eliminating the presence of water in the brake drums

Check after swimming.

To check, open all hatches 47 (Figure 10.14) covers 56 brake drums and
make sure that there is no water in the drum cavities.
If water is detected in the drum cavity, remove the cover 56 of the brake drum, approx
rubs and dries the parts of the brake mechanism.

16.1.9 Adjustment of brake mechanisms of the working brake system

Adjustment of the brake mechanisms of the working brake system should be done in case
exceeding the brake distance or overheating of the brake drums when the car is moving without
braking

Before adjustment, make sure that there is no backlash in the bearings of the driven gear
of the forest gearbox by swinging the suspended wheel, since it is impossible if there is a backlash
adjust the wheel brake mechanism.
Adjust the brake mechanism of each wheel in the following order:
- hang the wheel;

- open the hatch in the brake drum cover;

- turning the adjusting screw 8 (Figure 16.5) by the protrusions of the connecting rod with the mounting blade

daughters (right-hand thread), separate the pads until they come into contact with the brake drum;
- screw in the adjusting screw 8 until the wheel starts to rotate
here is the effort of the hand in both directions without touching the drum of the brake pads, then screw them in

adjustment screw 8 for another ten clicks;

- install the gasket and close the hatch.

With correctly adjusted brake mechanisms when sharply pressing on pe

distance during movement, the car must be braked to the "side" of the wheels without skidding.

The adjustment must be checked when the machine is moving horizontally

section of a dry highway. Braking distance of a car with a full load, when braking

16-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1321 RE

with service brakes at a speed of 30 km/h, should be no more than 10.8 m, and when braking
with a speed of 40 km/h, should be no more than 18.3 m.

When the car is moving without braking, the brake drums should not heat up.

16.1.10 Filling the hydraulic brake actuator with working fluid,

pumping the drive and replacing the fluid

Fill the drive with working fluid separately for each circuit
drive when the air pressure in the low-pressure air system is not lower than 0.6 MPa (6 kgf/cm2 ), in the
following sequence:
- open the cover on the nose sheet of the body above the tanks for brake fluid;
- open the cover of the filling hole of the tank and fill it with working fluid;
- remove protective caps from all wheels;

- carefully remove dust from bypass valve 13 (Figure 16.5) of the wheel cylinder,
remove the rubber cap from the valve, put a special key and screws on the bypass valve
new hose 850 mm long from ZIP machine;
- lower the open end of the hose into the working liquid poured into the glass container
bone not less than 0.5 liters. Pour the liquid into the vessel up to half its height (Figure 16.7);
- open the bypass valve by 0.5...0.75 turns, then press the torus 3-4 times
brain pedal Press quickly, release slowly. At the same time, the liquid is under pressure
the piston of the main cylinder will fill the pipeline and expel air from it;
- pump the working fluid until the release of bubbles stops
air from a hose lowered into a container with liquid. During pumping, top up the working one
liquid in tanks, not allowing a dry bottom, as in this case air will enter the system again;
- tightly wrap the bypass valve of the wheel cylinder and remove the hose. twist
bypass valve when the pedal is pressed.
Pumping should be carried out for each circuit, starting with pneumohydraulic devices far from it
wheels After completion of pumping, add liquid to the tanks.
The working fluid used for pumping can be reused, giving it
stand up to the removal of air bubbles.

16-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 16.7 – Air removal from the hydraulic drive of the working brake
system

The removal of air from the system should be carried out in the following sequence:
- press the brake pedal 3-4 times;

- while holding the pedal in the depressed position, open the bypass by 0.5...0.75 turns

valve;

- after the release of air bubbles has stopped, close the bypass valve

and release the pedal;

- will repeat pumping until the release of air bubbles from the

a hose lowered into a vessel with liquid;

- will repeat pumping for each contour.

- during the removal of air from the system, do not add brake fluid to the tanks

kaya of dry bottom.

Change the working fluid in the same sequence as in the case

filling and pumping of the hydraulic drive. At the same time, after each click on

pedal, add fresh working fluid to the tank.

Fluid consumption when replacing it will be approximately 4.5 liters.

16.2 Parking brake system

The parking brake system is intended for braking the car in parking lots and

keeping it from rolling on slopes. Use it as a working brake system,

to stop the machine, allowed only in emergency cases, when the worker fails

brakes The parking brake system consists of two brake mechanisms 2 and 23 (Fig

No. 10.5) of the drum type, installed on the transfer box, mechanically driven by

from two energy accumulators 20 and 26, a reversing brake valve 26 (Fig.

16-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1321 RE

No. 20.1), accelerator valve 27, dual-main valve 24, as well as pipelines,

connecting them

Energy accumulators 20 and 26 (Figure 10.5) are installed on brackets, installed

nyh on the frame of the transfer box attachment, and are intended to actuate the tor

mechanical mechanisms of the transfer box. When the parking brake is turned on, that is, when

air is released from the energy accumulator, the springs are compressed, they press on the piston with the rod,

which, moving, pulls the lever of the brake mechanism by means of rods. There is a traffic jam

greasing the car.

When releasing the brake, compressed air enters the energy accumulator and presses on the piston

with a rod that moves and pushes the lever of the brake mechanism by means of rods.

It happened when the air pressure in the system is insufficient (or when it is completely absent).

child automatic braking of the car. At the same time, to ensure the mobility of the machine

in the energy accumulator there is a screw of mechanical decompression, which I turned

counterclockwise as far as it will go (through the holes in the starboard side, previously unscrewed

plugs 4 and 6 (Figure 4.3), it is possible to brake the energy accumulator mechanically.

The reversing brake valve (Figure 16.8) is designed to control the pru

heavy energy accumulators of the parking brake drive.

The crane is fixed with two bolts on the bracket to the left of the driver's seat.

a) position "disengaged" b) position "braked"

Figure 16.8 – Reverse brake valve

When the machine is moving, the crane handle is in the lowest position. For

to implement braking, the crane handle must be moved to the upper position.

The accelerator valve (Figure 16.9) is designed to reduce the operating time

vania of the parking brake drive due to the reduction of the length of the compressed carriage inlet highway

of air into the spring energy accumulators and release of air from them directly through the narrow

mouth valve to the atmosphere. The valve is installed on the starboard side in the area of the 2nd bridge.

16-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

I – output to the receiver; II – atmospheric output; III – output to the cylinders of energy accumulators;
IV – output to the parking brake control valve

Figure 16.9 – Accelerator valve

The two-way bypass valve (Figure 16.10) is located on the starboard side
next to the air cylinders. On the one hand, a highway is connected to it from one carriage
of the suffocating cylinder (conclusion I), from the second - from the second (conclusion II). Exit highway (exit III)

connected (through the accelerator valve) to the spring energy accumulators of the brake me
Khanismov

The valve serves to ensure the rapid passage of compressed air from the inlet cavity
with high pressure in the outlet cavity.
The valve is connected according to the arrow on the body.

1 – seal; 2 – body; 3 – cover; 4 – sealing ring;

I, II – connections to air cylinders; III - output to the cylinders of energy accumulators

Figure 16.10 – Two-way valve

16.2.1 Operation of the parking brake system

At the same pressure in air cylinders 17 and 22 (Figure 17.1), seal 1
(Figure 16.10) takes a neutral position and air to outlet ÿ of the accelerator valve
(Figure 16.9) comes from two cylinders. When the pressure drops in one of the cylinders
seal 1 (Figure 16.10) closes the outlet from the cylinder with lower pressure. Air to
output ÿ of the accelerator valve (Figure 16.9) comes from a cylinder with high pressure.

16-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1321 RE

Output ÿV of the accelerator valve is connected to the parking valve control device

foot brake 26 (Figure 17.1), and output III – with spring energy accumulator 28. At

the essence of the pressure in output ÿV, the machine is braked by the spring energy accumulator 28.
When supplying compressed air to output ÿV from the manual brake valve 26 spring cylinders

nyh energy accumulators 28, connected to output III of the accelerator valve (Fig

point 16.9), are filled with compressed air from the receiver through output ÿ.

16.3 Possible malfunctions of brake systems

Table 16.1 – Possible malfunctions of brake systems

The way to eliminate the

malfunction The reason for the malfunction
malfunction is to
The car "pulls" poorly, tor Lack of free movement regulate freely

brain drums heating pedals pedal stroke

utsya when completely otpu Clogging of the compensatory one Wash the main cylinder and

of the brake pedal holes of the master cylinder. bleed the drive.

Small gap between the drum and Adjust the gap.

brake pads

nism

Inefficient braking Friction lubrication Check oil seals and joints

and the "input" of the car to the side brake pad linings Nenia Pipeline, Ustra

with a full press on pe due to the flow of lubricant through thread flow, posle chego tcha

distance oil seals of the drum or leaks thoroughly wash the pads,

brake fluid through so dry and clean

tube connection the top of the emery pads

no paper

Clogging of pipelines and Clean the pipelines and

hoses hydraulic hoses, pump the drive

drive

The car does not brake Friction lubrication Remove the drum, rinse

parking brake. overlays pads with gasoline and wax

it's a skin

Wear of overlays Replace pads

16-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

17 WATER INLET ENGINE AND WAVE

REFLECTOR SHIELD

17.1 Water-borne propellants

Water propulsion is intended to ensure the movement of the machine afloat. He

consists of a hydraulic drive and two thrusters located on the left and right sides of the bo
metal racks behind the rear wheels outside the car body. The engine is four
bladed propeller enclosed in a nozzle.
The device of the water-flow mover is shown in Figure 17.1.

1 – adjusting gasket; 2 – nut; 3 – locking washer; 4 – puck; 5 – bearing; 6 – mange and; 7 – puck; 8 – shaft; 9 –
propeller propeller; 10 – nut; 11 – shaft; 12 – fairing; 13 – glass; 14 – nozzle; 15 – spacer; 16 – hydraulic motor

Figure 17.1 - Water-borne engine

Nozzle 14 (Figure 17.1) is a body element of the mover, to which it is attached

four ring-shaped rings with eight radial ribs and a shell are formed
schi grate to protect the mover from getting large foreign objects into it

Comrade It is attached to the inner side of the nozzle through spacer 15 and adjusting spacers 1
hydraulic motor 16, which is connected to the shaft 8 by means of splines. In turn, shaft 8 s
with the help of splines, it is connected to the shaft 11 of the propeller 9.

In the cup 13 there are cuffs 6 that protect the bearing 5 from water ingress. K
the hub of the propeller 9 is attached to the nut 10, together with the fairing 12 providing it
fixation from axial movement.

17-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

17.1.1 Hydraulic drive of the water-flow mover

The hydraulic drive of the hydraulic drive is intended for transmission of power from the reducto

ra of the drive to the movers through the hydrovolume transmission. The hydraulic drive consists of two axles

axial-piston hydraulic motors 16 and 22, two axial-piston hydraulic pumps 9 and 11, mouth

novlennyh on the gearbox of the drive of the water-housing drive near the bulkhead of the MTO under the floor

sanitary department; pipelines of high 7, 8, 14, 15 and low 2, 5, 6, 10, 12, 13, 18 and 20

pressure; tank 1 hydraulic drive, located near the stern on the port side; faucet 3; Phil

tra 4 with a monovacuometer.

1 – hydraulic drive tank; 2, 10, 13 – pipelines of the suction line; 3 – crane; 4 – filter with a monovacuum meter; 5 – pipelines providing
discharge to the tank; 6, 12, 18, 20 – pipelines for draining working fluid from motors to hydraulic pumps; 7, 8, 14, 15 – high-pressure
pipelines; 9, 11 – hydrona sosa; 16, 22 – hydraulic motors; 17, 21 – movers; 19 – screw of the right propeller; 23 – the screw of the left two

resident
Figure 17.2 – Hydraulic drive of the water-flow mover

17-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

17.1.2 Reducer of pumps of the drive of the water-housing drive

The reducer is designed to drive pumps 1, 4 (Figure 17.3) and consists of two
stepped cylindrical gearbox, the drive shaft of which is driven to rotate the car
with this shaft 2 (Figure 17.4) from the output shaft of transfer case 1.
The gearbox is turned on before the mechanism overcomes the water barrier,
installed in the distribution box. From the drive shaft, through the intermediate shaft, rotation
is transmitted to the pumps of the water propulsion system.

The reducer of the pumps of the drive of the water supply mover is installed under the floor of the sanitary ot

division between the third and fourth bridges near the starboard side on bed 4 and is attached to
with bolts. Lubrication of the gearbox is carried out by spraying, cooling is natural
by washing the lower cover of the gearbox with seawater through the opening in the bottom of the housing.

Oil is added to the gearbox through a hole covered by breather 3 (fig

pipe 12.3) up to the level of the hole closed by plug 5. To refuel the dry reducer, it is necessary
we use about 2.6 liters of Halol M-4042TD oil. Plug 6 is used to drain the oil.

1 – pump; 2 – reducer; 3 – breather; 4 – pump; 5 – control plug; 6 – drain plug; 7 – sensor

oil temperature

Figure 17.3 – The reducer of the pumps of the drive of the water supply drive

17-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – output shaft of the transfer case; 2 – cardan shaft; 3 – pump reducer; 4 - bed

Figure 17.4 – Installation of the reducer of the pumps of the drive of the water supply drive

To diagnose the critical temperature of the reducer, the temperature sensor 7 is used

yellow signal lamp on the instrument panel.

To remove and install breather 3, use a socket wrench S=22, plugs 5 – socket wrench

mallet S=17, plugs 6 – socket wrench S=19.

17.1.3 Possible malfunctions of the reducer of the pump of the drive of the water supply drive

Table 12.1

The method of
malfunction The reason for the malfunction
eliminating the
Increased heating. Excess or lack of mass malfunction Bring the oil level up to

la in the crankcase. normal

Oil leakage on the inlet neck Damaged or worn Replace the cuff.
shaft cuff.

17.1.4 Operation of the hydraulic drive of the water-flow mover

The hydraulic drive of the water-flow mover is made according to a closed circuit (working liquid

circulates between the hydraulic pump and the hydraulic motor, only leaks merge).

From tank 1 (Figure 17.2) working fluid through pipelines 2, 10 and 13, tap 3,

filter 4 is supplied to hydraulic pumps 9 and 11. Hydraulic pump 9, depending on the position of the regulator

groove washer, pumps the working fluid through the pipeline 7 or 8 to the hydraulic motor 22.

The hydraulic rotor 22 turns the screw 23.

17-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Hydraulic pump 11, depending on the position of the adjusting washer, pumps the slave

I hear the liquid through the pipeline 14 or 15 through the hydraulic motor 16, which rotates

screw 19. When turning screw 19 counterclockwise, and screw 23 clockwise, the

the car moves forward. With a simultaneous change of direction

the rotation of the screws in the opposite direction, the machine moves in reverse (in the direction of the stern

parts). When the direction of rotation of one of the screws is changed, the machine rotates

side of the location of this screw. From the hydraulic motors 16 and 22 there is a drain of leaks of the working fluid

through pipelines 18, 12 and 6, 20 to hydraulic pumps 11 and 9, respectively. From hydraulic pumps 9

and 11 through pipelines 5 the working fluid leaks are drained into tank 1.

Note - Faucet 3 should be closed only during machine maintenance in case of replacement of filter 4 or the filter
element in it. The filter is replaced when the needle of the monovacuometer installed on the
filter is constantly in the red zone during system operation. When installing/dismantling the
filter 4, use aluminum gaskets from a single set of ZIP in the connection points of the filter
with the system

17.1.5 Electronic control system of a water-driven propulsion system with a hydraulic

drive

The control system of a water-powered propulsion system with a hydraulic drive includes:

• electronic hydraulic pump control unit;

• the switch of the operating modes of the water supply drive "Forward - Back" "WATER

JETS FÿR";

• steering wheel angle sensor;

• proportional electromagnetic valves controlling two hydraulic pumps with

left and right direction of rotation;

• "WATER SPEED" swimming speed regulator.

The functional diagram of the electronic control system of the water-moving engine

shown in Figure 17.5.

Purpose of the elements of the control system of the water-powered propulsion system with a hydraulic drive:

• the electronic control unit (ECU) is designed to receive signals from sensors

control units (work mode switch, float speed regulator) of their processing

and issuing control signals to the proportional electromagnets of hydraulic pumps. ECU

located in the control department on the MTO partition on the right above the commander's seat;

• switch for the operation modes of the "WATER JETS FÿR" water jet propulsion system (schedule

lying on the driver's shield) has three positions: neutral, "F" - forward; "R" - back. Issuing

signal on the ECU to form the defining ego on the proportional electromagnets

direction of movement;

17-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

• the float speed controller (SSP) is designed to control productivity

hydraulic pumps in forward or reverse, depending on the position of the switch
press work of the hydraulic drive. Located on the driver's shield. When turning the handle
RSP clockwise to stop proportional electromagnetic valves (left/right)
are in the "max" position of RSP feed;

• the rotation sensor (DP) monitors the position of the steering wheel and sends a signal to the ECU
to generate a control signal for the proportional solenoid valve
of the position specified by the speed sensor to any extreme position depending on
turning direction DP is located near the steering mechanism;

• proportional electromagnetic valve according to the control signal from the ECU obes
bakes the installation of the pump washer in the specified position. Located on the hydraulic pump.

The direction of movement is selected with the help of the switch of the operating modes of the faucet

of the "WATER JETS FÿR" motor. This is a signal for the ECU in which direction
neutral position, it is necessary to move the proportional solenoid valve.
In proportion to the rotation of the RSP handle, the ECU moves the proportional electromagnet
thread valve on the appropriate supply and the pump starts working in the specified mode, ma
the tire moves in a straight line.
When the car turns, the turn sensor is deflected to the right or left, proportional to the angle
turning the steering wheel. The computer, having received a signal from the DP, issues a signal to move the TEM to the right

right or left pump, depending on the direction in which the turn is made

TEM on the pump of the trailing side can move from the position in which it is located
command from the switch of the operating modes of the water-flow engine and RSP in the opposite direction to

of its extreme position with transition through neutral.

The extreme position when turning the TEM takes place if the steering wheel is
returned as far as it will go. When the steering wheel is in a straight-line position on the driver's dashboard, the light

the steering wheel position indicator lights up (steering wheel straight) green color

To ensure the operation of the propulsion hydraulic system in the hydraulic system tank 1 (Figure 17.2)

oil temperature sensor TM-111-10 is installed. When it is triggered on the driver's dashboard

the indicator light for the maximum oil temperature of the pumps of the water supply drive is lit
yellow color

When an error or malfunction occurs in the system, the signal lights up on the driver's dashboard

analyzer of the accident of the water propulsion control system red color System
it stops working if the cause of the malfunction is a break in one of the electrical components
short circuit of one or more circuits.

17-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 - float speed regulator; 2 - electronic control unit; 3 and 8 - proportional electromagnetic valves; 4 – right hydraulic
pump; 5 - right hydraulic motor; 6 – left hydraulic pump; 7 – left motor guide; 9 – steering wheel rotation angle sensor;
10 – the switch of the operating modes of the water-flowing engine

Figure 17.5 – Functional diagram of the electronic system of controlling water

movement

17.2 Wave-reflecting shield and shield control drive

The wave-reflecting shield is intended to prevent nasal flooding

parts of the machine when moving afloat.

The device of the shield and ego drive is shown in Figure 17.6.
Shield 1 front levers fixed on removable supports axles 2. Drive shafts ry
Chags 9 are installed in the supports 10. Reducers 12 are attached to the support flanges with the help of bolts.

The splined protrusion of gear 3 (Figure 17.7) of the gearbox and the splined depression of the drive shaft

th lever 10, marked with dashes, must coincide.

17-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – shield; 2 – axis of fastening of the shield; 3 – support; 4 – driven lever; 5 – buffer; 6 – cotter pin; 7 – shai ba; 8 –
sleeve; 9 – leading lever; 10 – support; 11 – hydraulic cylinder; 12 – reducer; 13 – adjusting washer; 14 – screw; 15 –
counter nut; 16 – cylinder rod bolt; 17 – adjusting sleeve; 18 – adjusting washer; 19 – support; 20 – sealing ring; 21 –
support sleeve

Figure 17.6 - Wave-reflecting shield

1 – toothed sector; 2 – gearbox cover; 3 – gear; 4 – lever; A – dash on the gear; B is the axis of the lever; B is a line
on the sector

Figure 17.7 – The reducer of the drive of the wave-reflecting shield

When installing, the middle tooth of sector 1 (Figure 17.7) of the gearbox must coincide with the gear
dyno of the crown of the gear 3, marked with a line A. A splined protrusion located on the axis B
of the turning lever 4, must coincide with the slotted depression of sector 1, marked with a line B.
The shield drive is hydraulic, carried out from the driver's seat.
When the rods of the hydraulic cylinders 11 (Figure 17.6), fixed on the ball, are retracted
open the locks, the shield is down.

17-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

When the rods are extended to the stop, the locknut 15 in the washer 18, the shield is raised. Shock rod

lives with a hydraulic lock.

To raise the wave-reflecting shield, it is necessary to transfer the switch on the driver's shield

switch for controlling the raising and lowering of the wave reflector "TRIM VANE UP ÿ DOWN"

to the "UP" position and hold until the operation is completed.

To lower the wave-reflecting shield, it is necessary to transfer pe on the driver's shield

the control switch for raising and lowering the wave reflector "TRIM VANE UP ÿ

DOWN" to the "DOWN" position and hold until the operation is completed.

17.3 Possible malfunctions of the water pump and

wave-reflecting shield

Table 17.2

The way to eliminate

malfunction The reason for the malfunction
the malfunction
The speed of movement of the machete Clogged nozzle nozzle Clean the nozzle on

we are afloat at frequency third party em of the reverse course. If so

crankshaft rotation we objects (algae etc method cannot be cleaned,

engine 1800...1900 min-1 etc.) then go ashore and clean

less than 8 km/h grid

Spontaneous lowering The presence of air in the hydraulic pump With the help of a hydraulic drive
wave-reflective water shield will lower the wave reflection

shield body shield (3...5 times)

The arrow of the monovacuometer, Clogged hydraulic system filter Replace the hydraulic filter

installed on the filter, we we took the ego from the single

is constantly in of the ZIP kit.

red zone during operation

mover

17-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

18 WATER PUMPING AGENTS

18.1 General information

Water pumps are designed to remove water that has seeped inside

hull of an armored personnel carrier when overcoming a water barrier.

Water pumping means include two water pumping pumps, pipelines
and two check valves.

The armored personnel carrier is equipped with two water pumping pumps 1 (Figure 18.1), which
rye have the same construction. Water pumping pumps are installed on the bottom of the hull

pusa in the control compartment and in the power compartment, and serve to remove water from the hull

cars when the armored personnel carrier is afloat.

The pumped water is diverted overboard through pipeline 2, connected to the drain pipe
tube 4 installed on the port side. Closes the pipe coming out of the car body

It is a reverse valve 5. The reverse valve is designed to prevent ingress

and inside the car when the pump is not working and to protect against a damaged valve

No. a protective cap is installed 6.

Electric motors of water-extraction pumps of the control and motor units

of the transmission compartment are turned on by the switches "FRONT WATER PUMP" and "PPC
WATER PUMP", located on the driver's dashboard (Figure 21.4).

The water pumping pump (Figure 18.2) consists of a centrifugal pump connected together
pump 2 and drive electric motor 3. The pump impeller is driven by electric rotation

by a motor installed on the pump coaxially with the axis of the impeller. Water intake is carried out
through the lower intake hole of the pump, and the discharge through the outlet pipe. For protection

the intake part of the pump is closed with a mesh filter to prevent foreign objects from falling into it
trom 1.

To ensure normal operation of the electric motor and to prevent water from entering the
the lower end of the tube 3 (Figure 18.1) must always be placed on the fitting 4 of the electric motor

gate 1 (Figure 18.2), and the upper one is attached to pipeline 2 (Figure 18.1).

18-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – water pumping pump; 2 – pipeline; 3 - tube; 4 - outlet pipe; 5 – non-return valve; 6 – protective cap.

Figure 18.1 – Installation of a water pumping pump

1 – mesh filter; 2 – pump; 3 – electric motor; 4 – electric motor fitting.

Figure 18.2 – Water pumping pump

18-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

18.2 Possible malfunctions of water pumping equipment

Table 18.1 – Possible malfunctions of water pumping devices

Troubleshooting
malfunction The reason for the malfunction
method Flush the
Water enters the housing Getting mud into the reverse non-return valve with water.
through the water discharge valve.
hole of the water pump. When
the water pump is turned on, Broken contact in connectors. Check the condition of the
the armature of the electric Break or short circuit of electric connectors. Find a break or short circuit
motor does not rotate wires Failure of the electric motor and eliminate the malfunction. Replace
the electric motor

The rotor of the electric motor of The mesh filter is clogged Clean the mesh filter by washing it in
the water pumping pump rotates, running water.
but the pump does not pump
water

Replacing the electric motor

If the electric motor fails, it must be replaced.
Tool: Key 12x14, Key 14x17.
To dismantle the electric motor, you need:
- using keys 12x14 and 14x17, open bolts 3 (Figure 18.3) and remove mesh filter 4;
- open the nut 5 with a 14x17 key and remove the impeller 6 from the shaft of the electric motor 1;
- use a 12x14 key to open nuts 2 and dismantle electric motor 1;
To install the electric motor, you need:
- install electric motor 1 and tighten nuts 2 with a 12x14 key;
- install the impeller 6 on the shaft of the electric motor 1 and tighten the nut 5 with a 14x17 key;
- install mesh filter 4, install bolts 3.

1 – electric motor; 2, 5 – nuts; 3 – bolt; 4 – mesh filter; 6 - impeller

Figure 18.3 – Water pumping pump

18-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

19 UNDERcarriage

19.1 Suspension

The car's suspension is independent, lever, torsion, with telescopic shock absorbers

framework of two-way action. The suspension is intended for shock absorption and wheel damping

bath of the car while moving.

The suspension device is shown in figures 19.1 and 19.2.

1, 11 and 21 – nuts; 2 – finger; 3 – sleeve; 4 – compression buffer; 5 – emphasis; 6 – upper lever; 7 – rebound buffer; 8
and 10 – pucks; 9 – rubber sleeve; 12 and 14 – tension bolts; 13 – adjusting washer; 15 – adjusting sleeve; 16 – fifth; 17
– the lower pivot of the rotary fist; 18 – lower lever; 19 – housing of the rotary fist; 20 – the upper pivot of the rotary fist;
22 - shock absorber

Figure 19.1 – Suspension of the first and second wheels

19.1.1 Suspension levers

The lower and upper arms of the suspension are fixed to the axles in the brackets with the help of screws

new bushings. Brackets 5 (Figure 19.3) upper levers and 2 (Figure 19.4) lower levers

are fastened with bolts to the body of the machine. Rubber bushings are fixed on the levers with plugs 2

(Figure 19.3) and 24 and nuts 14 (Figure 19.4).

Each upper lever of the first and second wheels has a conical hole for a needle

the stop of the upper pivot 20 (Figure 19.1) of the rotary fist. The pin of its conical cha-

19-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

with the help of a nut 21 is attached to the lever 6, and with a ball head to the housing 19 of the rotary
fist
In the conical holes of the heads of the lower levers of the first and second wheels on rubber
bushings 10 (Figure 19.4) are fixed with plugs 11 of axes 21 that connect the levers from below
them with the pivots of the housings of rotary fists.

In the conical holes of the heads of the upper and lower levers of the third and fourth wheels
axles that connect the levers with the wheel housings are fixed in a similar way
Ph.D. Stops 5 (Figures 19.1 and 19.2) of recoil buffers 7 are fixed on all upper levers
(Figure 19.1) and 6 (Figure 19.2) and stops 15 (Figure 19.3) of compression buffers 4 (Figure 19.1
and 19.2).

Conical holes for fingers 14 (Figure 19.3) and 17 are made in the upper arms
mounting shock absorbers.

By design, all lower levers are interchangeable. The upper levers of the first and
the second wheels are interchangeable, and the third and fourth wheels are interchangeable.

1 – connecting axis; 2, 10 and 13 – tie bolts; 3 – shock absorber; 4 – compression buffer; 5 – emphasis; 6 – rebound
buffer; 7 – upper lever; 8 – bracket; 9 – adjusting clutch bracket; 11 – regu lyrovochny clutch; 12 – support washer; 14 –
adjusting sleeve; 15 – fifth; 16 – lower lever; 17 – wheel reducer

Figure 19.2 – Suspension of the third and fourth wheels

19-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – casing; 2 and 24 – plugs; 3 and 23 – cheeks; 4 – adjusting spacers; 5 - brackets; 6, 11, 20 and 22 – rubber
bushings; 7 and 21 – levers; 8 and 26 – stops; 9, 18 and 28 – nuts; 10, 13, 19 and 27 – pucks; 12 and 16 - plastic
bushings; 14 and 17 - fingers of shock absorbers; 15 – stop of the compression buffer; 25 – bolt a – fastening of the
upper levers of the 1st and 2nd wheels; b - fastening of the upper levers of the 3rd and 4th wheels;

Figure 19.3 – Fastening of the upper suspension arms

19.1.2 Torsion shafts

The elastic element of the suspension is the torsion shaft 4 (Figure 19.4) - a steel circle
solid rod with slotted heads.
The torsion shaft is mounted in the hollows of the axes of the lower lever and installed with one head
it is poured into the slotted end of the front axle, and the second head - into the slotted adjustment
noy coupling 6, fixed with bolts in the terminal clamp of the bracket 5 of the torsional closure
shaft From the longitudinal offset, the torsion shaft is fixed in the recess of the slotted end
axis of the lever with a locking bar 15. The splined heads of the shaft are closed from the ends with plugs 19
sealing rubber rings 16 and washers 17, fastened with bolts 18. Between
a rubber protective cover 7 is installed with the adjusting clutch 6 and the rear axle of the lever, behind
fastened with clamps 8.

19-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The adjusting clutch 13 (Figure 19.1) rests with its lever, on the one hand, on the

the catch of the adjusting sleeve 15, screwed into the heel 16 welded to the body, and on the other hand

holes - in the support washer of the tension bolt 14. The longitudinally displaced clutch is held

1 and 10 – rubber bushings; 2 – brackets; 3 – lower lever; 4 – torsion shaft; 5 - adjusting clutch bracket; 6 – adjusting
clutch; 7 – protective casing; 8 - collar; 9, 17 and 20 – thrust washers; 11 - plug; 12 and 13 – cheeks; 14 – nut; 15 -
locking bar; 16 – sealing ring; 8 – bolt; 19 – plug; 21 - connecting axis

Figure 19.4 – Installing the torsion beam and attaching the lower suspension arms

with the terminal clamp of the torsion bar closing bracket with 12 bolts.

Torsion shafts of all suspensions have a rod with a diameter of 44 mm. All torsion shafts

on both heads have the same number of slots and have a preliminary twist, vypol

nennuyu in order to increase the reliability of their work. Torsion shafts, twisted against cha

owl arrows, have the LE stamp on the end of the head and are installed in the suspensions of the wheels of the left

the sides of the car. Torsion shafts, twisted clockwise, have heads on the end

PR brand and are installed in the suspensions of the wheels on the right side of the car.

Install the left torsion shafts in place of the right ones and the right ones in place of the left ones

is spared

19-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

19.1.3 Buffers

The upward movement of each wheel of the machine is limited by rubber buffer 4 (Figures 19.1 and 19.2)

compression stroke, and two rebound buffers 7 (Figure 19.1) and 6 (Figure 19.2) limit the wheel stroke
down

The buffer of the compression stroke is attached to the sheet of the machine body with two bolts. At the maximum

lift the wheel on the obstacle of the bumper blocks, resting on the stop 15 (Figure 19.3) of the upper lever

ha, restricts the upward movement of the wheel.

Buffers 7 (Figure 19.1) and 6 (Figure 19.2) of the recoil stroke are attached to the brackets on the

puse When lowering the wheel, stops 5 (Figures 19.1 and 19.2) of the upper suspension arms, resting

o buffers, limit the sag of the wheels.

19.1.4 Shock absorbers

Twelve telescopic shock absorbers are installed on the car: two in the suspensions

of the first and fourth wheels and one each in the suspensions of the second and third wheels.

Shock absorbers are attached to the upper lugs through rubber and plastic bushings

to the brackets welded to the body of the machine, and the lower lugs, through the same sleeve

ki, - to the upper suspension arms.

The shock absorber device is shown in Figure 19.5.

19.1.4.1 Shock absorber operation

When hitting an obstacle, the wheel, twisting the torsion shaft, rises and rises

the up-turning suspension levers raise the tank 14 and the one connected to it

working cylinder 12 shock absorber. The working fluid located between the piston 19 and the core

compression valve 16, overcoming the resistance of the spring, opens compression valve 15.

When the valve is open 15 liquid, experiencing a large resistance in the groove of the valve stem

on, flows from the working cylinder into the tank. At the same time, the overpass opens

open the valve 20 and part of the liquid flows through the holes in the piston into the expanding hole

body volume above the piston. When leaving an obstacle, the wheel is under the influence of the force of elasticity

torsion shaft is lowered. At the same time, the suspension arms are turned down

the tank with the cylinder is also lowered. Liquid above the piston, overcoming the resistance of the spring

weight, opens the return valve 18. Experiencing great resistance in the piston holes,

the liquid flows into the cavity under the piston, which increases in volume. At the same time

the inlet valve 17 is closed and the liquid from the tank flows into the same cavity through the

verstiya in the body of the compression valve.

19-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 - upper ear; 2 - cotter pin; 3 - rod; 4 - reservoir nut; 5 - gasket of the tank
nut; 6 - stem seal; 7 - oil seal of the tank nut; 8 - oil seal clamp; 9 - packing
washer; 10 - guide rod; 11 - oil seal spring; 12 - working cylinder; 13-
compression valve rod; 14 - tank as a whole; 15 - compression valve; 16-
compression valve body; 17 - intake valve pan; 18 - return valve; 19 - piston;
20 - overpass

valve

Figure 19.5 - Shock absorber

When the wheel moves sharply up or down, the piston moves in the cylinder c
at high speed The pressure of the working fluid rises sharply and, as a result, it opens
compression valve or return valve occurs quickly. The bulk of the liquid flows
at the same time from one cavity to another through the compression valve (when lifting the wheel) or through the valve

pan recoil (when lowering the wheel).

When the wheel moves slowly up or down, a slow movement also occurs
nie piston in the cylinder. The liquid pressure in the cylinder increases slightly. Valves
compressions and returns most of the time continue to remain in the closed position and ra
bochaya liquid flows from the cavity to the cavity mainly through the inlet 17 or bypass
No. 20 valves and clearances in the main valves.

19.1.5 Suspension maintenance

The list of works performed during suspension maintenance is set out in
p.p. 32.2 and 32.3.

19-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

19.1.5.1 Tightening of nuts and plugs of rubber bushings of suspension arms

After 5 years of operation, the machine needs regular maintenance

the nuts and plugs of the rubber bushings of the suspension arms can be tightened from failure.

Tighten the plugs of the bushings of the suspension arms with key 3 (Figure 13.6)

(BTR-3E.90.010sb) from the kit of ZIP machines with the use of a mounting blade,

the rod is inserted into the key hole.

19.1.5.2 Checking the proper operation of the shock absorbers

In the case of frequent "breakdowns" of the suspension, check the operation of its shock absorbers.

Unscrew the nut that tightens the bushings of the lower end of the shock absorber, release the bracket

nie shock absorber to the upper lever and, pumping the shock absorber by hand, check its operation

ability A working shock absorber will be pumped smoothly under a certain effort

hands, defective - will not show proper resistance or will have "failures"

along the way or it may even get stuck. Replace faulty shock absorbers. Installation of depreciation

jams and tightening of rubber bushings for their fastening should be done on a machine standing on wheels

(under static load). The nuts tightening the bushings must be securely tightened

the stop of the pressure cheek in the shoulder of the finger of the shock absorber.

19.1.5.3 Checking and restoring the car's ground clearance

Before measuring the ground clearance, hang the machine up

touching the recoil stroke stops in the recoil stroke buffer, then set the machine to control
noy platform

The normal amount of clearance (ground clearance) under the bottom of the car body (Fig

sunok 19.7), installed on a flat horizontal platform, with pressure in the neck

of 520 kPa (5.2 kgf/cm²), must be at least 475 mm. If due to the settling of elastic elements

suspension clearance has become less, then it is necessary to restore the ego, changed the installation of all torsion bars

as follows:

Figure 19.7 – Road clearance measurement scheme

19-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

a) remove the wheel, as indicated in clause 19.2.2;

b) remove the two rubber buffers 4 (Figure 19.8) of recoil installed on the brackets

on both sides of lever 2, left spacers 5 on the brackets;

c) loosen the tightening of two bolts 9 and loosen the terminal connection of the brackets with a screwdriver

on 8 of the adjusting clutch in order to release the clutch from tightening. Turn out the tie rod
bolt 11;

d) remove the jack from under the lower lever, install it between the upper lever and

body of the machine and squeeze the upper lever with it to the position at which the stops 3 lie down

gaskets 5;

e) twist the adjusting sleeve 12 until it stops in the lever of the adjusting clutch 10.

If in this case the size A turns out to be less than 35 mm, then perform the operations listed below

sequentially from "m" to "t". If size A is greater than 35 mm, then:

f) wrap the adjusting sleeve 12 completely;

1 – gearbox housing; 2 – upper lever; 3 – emphasis; 4 – rebound buffer; 5 – package of adjustment gaskets; 6 – nut; 7
- bracket 8 – bracket of the adjusting clutch; 9 and 11 – tie bolts; 10 – regu lyrovochny coupling; 12 – adjusting sleeve;
13 – lower lever; A is the size between the head of the sleeve and the heel

Figure 19.8 – Torsion torque adjustment

g) unscrew the end bolt 18 (Figure 19.4) from the side of the adjusting coupling, you

insert plug 19, washer 17, ring 16 and bar 15;

z) hammer blows on the clutch lever 10 (figures 19.8) from the side of the end of the torsion bar about

move the coupling so that the splines of the coupling come off the splines of the torsion bar;

i) turn the clutch lever 10 up until it coincides (checked visually) with the lower one

the plane of the adjusting sleeve 12 with the upper plane of the clutch lever 10;

k) in this position, push the clutch 10 onto the nearest splines of the torsion bar. Clutch lever

it can move down a bit;

19-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

l) turn the adjusting sleeve 12 until it stops in the lever of the adjusting clutch 10.
At the same time, size A should be no more than 20 mm;

m) screw the bolt 11 until failure, holding the sleeve 12 from turning;
n) tighten the bolts 9 of the terminal connection of the bracket 8 of the adjusting coupling 10;
o) put all the details of the torsion bar in place;
n) remove the jack from the upper lever;
p) put the jack under the lower lever and raise the gearbox;
c) put both recoil buffers in place, keeping the same adjusting spacers 5;
t) put the wheel in place.
Check and adjust all other torques in a similar way.
When replacing one of the extreme torsion bars, if necessary, remove the control bracket
groove coupling with a coupling and a casing. When replacing one of the middle torsion bars, it will be disconnected

housing both brackets of the lower lever, as well as the bracket of the adjusting clutch with the clutch
and casing.

19.2 Machine wheels

Wheels with a detachable rim are installed on the car. Tubeless tires with adjustable
pressure and tread pattern of increased cross-country ability, size 12.00 R March 20
ki KI-113.

Tires of the KI-113 model provide short-term movement of the machine in the absence of it
in the overpressure tire.

Modes of tire operation according to speed and time of continuous movement of the machine
given in clause 29.9.6.
The design of a wheel with a tire is shown in Figure 19.9.
The removable board and spacer ring allow you to securely fasten the tire (they pinch the boards)
on the rim of the wheels and eliminate the possibility of the tire shifting relative to the rim when it is lowered
air pressure in it.
The air pressure in the tires, depending on the road conditions and speed of movement
tires, is set within the limits of 147...520 kPa (1.5...5.2 kg/cm²).

19.2.1 Rules for the use of wheels and tires

To increase the reliability and durability of wheels and tires during operation
tires must comply with the following rules:
- do not allow the car to move with reduced tire pressure on hard roads

coating Driving with reduced tire pressure should only be done when
overcoming hard-to-pass sections of the road;

19-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 and 5 - nuts; 2 - valve; 3 - tire; 4 - wheel rim; 6 - spacer ring; 7 - removable board

Figure 19.9 – Wheel assembled with a tire

- do not allow parking and storage of the car with flat tires. When setting up a masha

For storage, it is necessary to close the wheel taps;

- do not allow oil and fuel to get on the tires, and in case of getting them on the tire

wash it with water and sand and wipe it dry;

- do not paint the tire sides with paint;

- do not reduce the air pressure if it has increased as a result of the tires heating up

movement;

- if you find small punctures in the road, repair the tires with the help of first-aid kits

ki for tire repair;

- in case of intense wear of the front steerable wheels, check their toe-in,

if necessary, make an adjustment.

19-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

19.2.2 Maintenance of wheels and tires

Wheels should be removed in the following order:

- close the valves of the block of tire cranes (Figure 20.9);

- close the wheel valve of the removable wheel and the wheel located on the opposite side

noise from the side of the car;

- unscrew the two fastening bolts of the transition fitting 2 (Figure 13.14) of the air duct to

the cover of the brake drum, the nut securing the tube to the wheel tap and remove the transition

ny fitting in the assembly with the tube, paid attention so that when removing it was not lost or

the sealing ring 1, located in the socket of the adapter 2, is damaged. In slu

difficult access to the nut of the tube attachment to the wheel valve will loosen the nut

fastening of the bracket of the wheel crane;

- loosen the nuts 43 fastening the wheel to the brake drum 41;

- place the jack under the lower suspension arm of the removable wheel. Under the jack under

lay a wooden stand. A jack and a stand are included in the spare parts kit of the machine;

- unscrew the bolts of the wheel protective cap and remove the cap;

- completely loosen the wheel fastening nuts and remove the wheel.

Install the wheel in the reverse order.

When dismantling and installing the tire, observe the following safety rules:

- unscrew the nuts of the attachment of the removable side to the rim only after it is complete

release of air from the tire;

- you can't inflate the tire, you didn't fasten all the fourteen nuts of the removable side mount

wheel rim

Failure to meet the specified requirements can lead to the failure of the nuts of the removable attachment

sides and, as a result, to serious injuries to persons engaged in mounting and dismounting tires.

Dismantle the tire in the following order:

- release the compressed air from the tire, open the 3 wheel valve;

- remove the tap from the wheel together with the bracket;

- only after making sure that the air is deflated from the tire, unscrew the fourteen nuts, fasteners

removable side of the rim;

- remove the removable board 7 from the tire (Figure 19.9). In the case of its strong adhesion to the

the garden place should be hammered between the tire and the side of the mounting blade alternately

around the entire perimeter of the wheel. After the tire separates from the side along the entire perimeter, remove it

board, using mounting blades as levers;

- remove the rim from the tire 4.

Install the tire in the reverse order. At the same time:

- the side and rim of the wheel must be clean, without corrosion, dents and dents;

19-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

19.2.2 Maintenance of wheels and tires

Wheels should be removed in the following order:

- close the valves of the block of tire cranes (Figure 20.9);

- close the wheel valve of the removable wheel and the wheel located on the opposite side

noise from the side of the car;

- unscrew the two fastening bolts of the transition fitting 2 (Figure 13.14) of the air duct to

the cover of the brake drum, the nut securing the tube to the wheel tap and remove the transition

ny fitting in the assembly with the tube, paid attention so that when removing it was not lost or

the sealing ring 1, located in the socket of the adapter 2, is damaged. In slu

difficult access to the nut of the tube attachment to the wheel valve will loosen the nut

fastening of the bracket of the wheel crane;

- loosen the nuts 43 fastening the wheel to the brake drum 41;

- place the jack under the lower suspension arm of the removable wheel. Under the jack under

lay a wooden stand. A jack and a stand are included in the spare parts kit of the machine;

- unscrew the bolts of the wheel protective cap and remove the cap;

- completely loosen the wheel fastening nuts and remove the wheel.

Install the wheel in the reverse order.

When dismantling and installing the tire, observe the following safety rules:

- unscrew the nuts of the attachment of the removable side to the rim only after it is complete

release of air from the tire;

- you can't inflate the tire, you didn't fasten all the fourteen nuts of the removable side mount

wheel rim

Failure to meet the specified requirements can lead to the failure of the nuts of the removable attachment

sides and, as a result, to serious injuries to persons engaged in mounting and dismounting tires.

Dismantle the tire in the following order:

- release the compressed air from the tire, open the 3 wheel valve;

- remove the tap from the wheel together with the bracket;

- only after making sure that the air is deflated from the tire, unscrew the fourteen nuts, fasteners

removable side of the rim;

- remove the removable board 7 from the tire (Figure 19.9). In the case of its strong adhesion to the

the garden place should be hammered between the tire and the side of the mounting blade alternately

around the entire perimeter of the wheel. After the tire separates from the side along the entire perimeter, remove it

board, using mounting blades as levers;

- remove the rim from the tire 4.

Install the tire in the reverse order. At the same time:

- the side and rim of the wheel must be clean, without corrosion, dents and dents;

19-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- valve 2 must not be tilted;

- when assembling the wheel, a removable rim with a rim is used for preliminary tightening

three M16x1.5x75 bolts from ZIP machine. Installation of the tire on the rim and installation of the wheels in the assembly p

tires on the car, to be produced taking into account the direction of the tread pattern. At the same time, I have

The arrows on the side surfaces of the tires must coincide with the direction of rotation

forest when moving the car forward. Rearrange the wheels together with the tires on one side

the other side of the tire is not recommended, as this will lead to clogging of the tire tread

mud and loss of car passability.

To repair tubeless tires, use a first-aid kit. The specified first-aid kit together with others

The user manual is included in the machine's spare parts kit and is placed behind the niche on the right

third wheel

19.3 Possible malfunctions of the chassis

Table 19.1
Malfunction The cause of the malfunction. The method of eliminating the
Frequent breakdowns under malfunction . The torsion shaft broke. Raise each wheel with a crowbar - at
villages broken torsion wheel rises freely. Replace
the broken torus and adjust its twist (see item
19.1.5.3).

Torsion shafts have prolapsed Check the ground clearance under the car. If
ly. the ground clearance is less than 460 mm,
adjust the torque of the torsion bars.

Faulty shock absorbers. Big Inspect and check the operation of congestion
wear of rubber suspension damping. Tighten threaded plugs 11 and nuts
bushings. 14 (Figure 19.4), plugs 2 and 24 (Figure 19.3)
or replace worn bushings. Tighten plugs 2
(Figure 19.3) or replace worn bushings.

Water leaking into the housing. Big wear of bushings.

Water flows into the body Weakening of the bolts, lack Lubricate the thread with AMC-3 grease and
through the threaded of AMC-3 lubricant on the securely tighten the bolts.
holes for the mounting threads.
bolts of the new upper
and lower suspension
arms.

19-12
Machine Translated by Google

20 PNEUMATIC EQUIPMENT

20.1 Low pressure pneumatic system

20.1.1 Purpose and composition of the low-pressure pneumatic system

1 – brake valve; 2, 3, 8, 9, 29, 32, 37, 38 – air wheel cranes; 4, 7, 20, 30, 34 – pneumatic cylinders;
5, 6, 19, 25, 31, 33, 35, 36 – electric pneumatic valves; 10 – manometer of air cylinders; 11 – tire
pressure gauge; 12 – compressor; 13 – separator with automatic condensate drain valve; 14 – air
dryer with pressure regulator; 15 – double safety valve; 16, 21 – condensate drain taps; 17, 22 – air
cylinders; 18, 23 – safety valves; 24 – two-way gastral valve; 26 – reverse action brake valve with
manual control; 27 – body accelerator valve; 28 – energy accumulator; 39 – block of tire cranes; 40 –
reduction pneumatic valve; 41 – single protective valve

Figure 20.1 – Diagram of a low-pressure pneumatic system

20-1
Machine Translated by Google

- ;
- ;
-

- - -

, , , ,

, ,

, .

Air compressor

Air cylinders 20.2)

1 – safety valve; 2 – air cylinder; 3 – collar; 4 – pressure sensor

Figure 20.2 – Air cylinder

Safety valves

+0.15

20-2
Machine Translated by Google

Condensate drain taps

Separator with automatic condensate drain valve 20.3

1 – condensate drain valve; 2 - separator

Figure 20.3 – Separator with an automatic drain valve

Air dryer with pressure regulator (20.4)

Figure 20.4 – Air dryer with pressure regulator

20-3
Machine Translated by Google

Double safety valve 20.5)

Figure 20.5 – Double safety valve

Electropneumovalves
- .

20.6) 1
–
,

, , ,

1 – electromagnet; 2 – valve; A – air outlet to the executive bodies; B - air supply

from the cylinder

Figure 20.6 – Electropneumatic valve

Single safety valve 20

20-4
Machine Translated by Google

1 – valve; 2 – counter nut; 3 – adjusting bolt. Figure

20.7 – Single safety valve

2
(4.8...5.5
,

20.1.2 System of centralized tire pressure regulation

.
-
Reduction pneumatic valve 20.8.)

20-5
Machine Translated by Google

1 – adjusting screw; 2 – pneumatic valve; 3 – inlet (from the air cylinder); 4 – outlet (to the pressure
gauge); 5 – outlet (to tires)

Figure 20.8 – Reduction pneumatic valve

20.1),

20.8)
.

Block of tire cranes 20.9)

20-6
Machine Translated by Google

1 – tire disconnection valve of the 1st bridge; 2 – tire disconnection valve of the 3rd bridge; 3 – air intake valve;
4 – emergency air release valve; 5 – air intake fitting; 6 – tire disconnection valve of the 4th bridge; 7 – tire
disconnection valve of the 2nd bridge

Figure 20.9 – Block of tire cranes

Emergency air release valve 4

.
90°
"

Air wheel crane

20-7
Machine Translated by Google

20.1.3 Operation of the centralized tire pressure regulation system

2
(8.3...0.5

+0.01 0.1 2
0.55 ÿ

0.05
5.5+ -
0.5 )

20.1).

ATTENTION!
-

20.1.4 Maintenance of the low-pressure pneumatic system

20-8
Machine Translated by Google

2
).

20

20.1.5 Possible malfunctions of the low-pressure pneumatic system

20.1 –

malfunction The cause of the malfunction. The method of eliminating the malfunction

2
)

2
)

20-9
Machine Translated by Google

20.2 High-pressure air system

20.2.1 Stationary high-pressure air system

:
-

,
.

29.5

20-10
Machine Translated by Google

1 – refueling valve; 2 – fitting for connecting VUKPD; 3 – air inlet valve; 4 – manometer; 5 – cylinder; 6 – air
supply fitting to the engine.

Figure 20.10 – High-pressure air system

20.2.2 External device of the combined engine starter

-4-

20-11
Machine Translated by Google

-4-

1 – plug; 2 – cover; 3 – stopper; 4 – cylinder; 5 – sleeve; 6 – bolt-lamb.

Figure 20.11 – External device of the combined engine starter

20.2.3 Refueling of VSVD cylinders and VUKPD cylinders with air

, -
2
).
-

20-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

The electrical equipment of the machine ensures the power supply of all electrical consumers
triple energy, control of electrical systems and units, as well as control over
operation of the main systems and units of the machine.

The electrical equipment of the machine is divided into the following main groups:
- sources of electrical energy;
- consumers of electrical energy;
- switching and auxiliary equipment;

- on-board electrical network;

- control - measuring devices.
The scheme of electrical equipment of the machine body is shown in Figure 21.1.

The connection of the elements of the machine's electrical equipment is made by single-wire
scheme, except for emergency ceiling lights, emergency sockets and the coil of the AC switch contactor
accumulator batteries, which are made according to the two-wire scheme. With the body of the car so
negative conclusions of energy sources and consumers are unified.
The nominal voltage of the on-board network of the machine when working from battery batteries
voltage 24 V, when the generator is running - 26.5...28.5 V.

Sources of electrical energy include two batteries and a generator

lathe installation.
Electricity consumers include: starter, electronic system equipment,
lighting and light signaling equipment, sound signal, surveillance devices, etc
bory radio equipment and electric motors (filter ventilation installation, glass eyes
stylet, water pumping pumps, heaters, pre-heater, etc.).
Switching equipment includes: switches, switches, relays, contacts
ry, fuses, circuit breakers.

Control and measuring devices include: temperature, pressure indicators,

fuel level in tanks, speedometer, tachometer and their sensors, voltmeter, ammeter, etc.
Installation products include: junction boxes, junction panels,
plugs, etc.

Necessary information about electrical equipment, appliances and devices included

in the composition of other systems and units of the machine, given in the relevant sections of this article
instructions for operation, as well as in the operational documents included in the equipment

atation documentation of the machine.

21-1
 21 - 2
1–
FVU
panel;
2
air
–
defense
control
unit;
3
lighting
–
and
heating
control
panel;
4
control
–
panel
for
selecting
the
driving
mode
SUT-
PI-4;
5,
14,
18,
21
lamp
–
16
voltage
–
regulator
21.3702;
17
panel
–
with
fuses;
19
battery
–compartment;
20
-exhaust
ventilation
switch;
22,
32
cabin
–
nickname;
6control
–
unit
for
water
propulsion;
7,
33
box
junction
–
9K;
8DRG-
–
T
device;
9
glass
–
temperature
regulator
RTS-27-3M;
10
fuse
–
panel;
11
block
–
BAS701-1;
12
block
–
BPS-3;
13
BU-4
–control
unit;
15
shunt
–
voltmeter
SHA-180;
emergency
outlet;
23
rotating
–
contact
device
VKU-1;
24,
29,
31
underhood
–
illumination
lamp;
25,
30
connecting
–
panel
PS-200;
26
KM-50DV
–
contactor;
27
resistance
–box;
28
high
–
voltage
transformer
PVN
11;
34
protection
–
and
switching
unit;
35
control
–
panel;
36
steering
–
wheel
switch
89.3709;
37
driver's
–
shield.
Figure
21.1
-Body
electrical
equipment
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.1 Sources of electrical energy

21.1.1 Accumulator batteries

Accumulator batteries 19 (Figure 21.1) serve to power the starter when starting two
gate and supply of electricity to the entire electrical equipment of the machine when it is not working
generator, i.e. when the engine is not working.
Two parallel-connected batteries are installed on the machine
tarey 12ST-85. The batteries are connected to the on-board network through the protection panel
threaders

The negative output of the batteries is connected to the body of the machine through a contactor, ko

which is remotely turned on by the "SB" (battery) switch on the protection and switching unit (item 6,
figure 21.2). When the toggle switch is turned on, the batteries are connected to the on-board network, which is confirmed

it is the control indicators on the driver's dashboard.

IT IS PROHIBITED!
- disconnect the batteries when the engine is running and the consumers are turned on.
- operate the product without batteries.

21.1.2 Generator installation

The generator set consists of a generator and a voltage regulator.

21.1.2.1 Generator

The generator is designed to supply consumers with electricity and recharge batteries
simulator batteries with the engine running, installed on the engine. On the product will accept
nen alternating current generator with a built-in rectifier device.
The alternating current generator begins to supply electricity to the on-board network of the product already

at idling engine speed.

Current from the generator in the circuit: the voltage regulator - the fuse panel goes to
recharging batteries and powering consumers installed in the car.

21.1.2.2 Voltage regulator

Voltage regulator 16 (Figure 21.1) is used for automatic maintenance

the voltage in the on-board network is within 26.5...28.5 V regardless of the change in the rotation frequency

generator current, connected load and ambient temperature. On the product

21-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

electronic voltage regulator.

The work of the voltage regulator consists in automatically maintaining such an environment
of the excitation current of the generator, at which the regulated voltage remains constant
nym when changing the frequency of rotation of the generator rotor and changing the load current.

21.1.3 Maintenance of sources of electrical energy

21.1.3.1 Safety measures when servicing sources of electrical energy

1. All work related to battery maintenance must be done specially

by trained and safety trained personnel.
2. Persons engaged in the preparation of electrolyte (sulfuric acid solution) and its pouring
in batteries, in order to avoid burns, they must work in rubber boots, rubber boots
chatkah, rubber aprons and protective glasses.
3. If there is an electrolyte on the surface of the battery, it must be neutralized
10% solution of ammonia (ammonia) or 10% solution of soda ash.
4. In case of contact with acid on the skin immediately, before providing medical assistance, about
wash the affected areas with a copious stream of water, a 10% solution of baking soda and a 5% solution
potassium permanganate. After washing, the affected areas of the body should be covered with mar
oil impregnated with a mixture of vegetable oil and lime soda in equal proportions.
In case of acid poisoning, it is necessary to rinse the mouth with water or drink a 5% solution
drink soda, drink milk and consult a doctor immediately.
5. When working with a wrench and another metal tool, it is not allowed
kat simultaneous touch to different polarity terminals of accumulators and batteries in iz
running a short circuit.
IT IS PROHIBITED:
– Use of an open flame during work according to clause 1.6 (section 21.1.3.2).
– Install batteries during charging near heating devices and direct
exposure to sunlight.

21.1.3.2 Maintenance of electrical energy sources

1. When using batteries in the product, remove the batteries every 30 days
machine and perform the following works:
1.1 Check the level and density of the electrolyte in each battery and its density
electrolyte, taking into account the temperature correction specified in table 21.1, determine the discharge

21-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the wife of the battery, knowing that the density of the electrolyte at the end of the charge, brought to 250 C for ac

accumulator with an electrolyte density of 1.24 will correspond to:

– battery discharged by 25% – 1.20 g/cm3 ; –

battery discharged by 50% – 1.16 g/cm3 ; – the

battery is 75% discharged – 1.10 g/cm3 .

Batteries discharged by 50% or more in the summer, by 25% or more in the rest of the year

must be charged, the battery charging mode is specified in table 21.2.

1.2 Set the electrolyte level in accumulator batteries for 12ÿÿ-85 to

(14...16) mm higher than the protective shield by adding distilled water.

In winter, add water immediately before starting the engine to avoid it freezing
zania

It is prohibited to add electrolyte to batteries, except for those cases where

when it is known for certain that the lowering of the level occurred due to splashing or spilling

electrolyte In this case, topping up should be done with an electrolyte of a density equal to the density

electrolyte in the battery.

1.3 Wipe the battery from dust and dirt, electrolyte spilled on the surface of the battery,

wipe with a clean rag soaked in a 10% solution of ammonia or soda ash,

wipe with a rag soaked in water and dry with a clean, dry rag.

1.4 Clean the contact surfaces of the terminals from oxides, and the battery terminals from dust

mud

1.5 Check and, if necessary, clean the ventilation holes in

traffic jams

1.6 If cracks appeared on the surface of the sealing material of the battery,

melt them with a soldering iron or another heating device with the plugs turned out.

Table 21.1
0
C The temperature of the electrolyte, Correction to hydrometer readings, g/cm3
45 0.02
35 0.01
25 0.00
15 minus 0.01
0 minus 0.02

minus 15 minus 0.03

21-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Table 21.2

Charge mode
Tok, A
Time, ch
I stage II stage
5 9 To constancy of electrolyte density and voltage in all
accumulators within 1 hour

Note:
– Only the voltage on the majority of the battery goes to the second stage of charging
lyatorov will reach 2.4 V.
– To charge one battery, a source of direct current with a voltage of 34 V is required. – In the
process of charging, the temperature of the electrolyte should not exceed 450 C. When the
temperature of the electrolyte reaches 450 C, the charging current specified in table 21.2 should be
sew by half and accordingly increase the charging time or interrupt the charging for a while,

sufficient to lower the temperature of the electrolyte to 30-350 C.

– If during charging the density of the electrolyte exceeds the values of item 2.1.1, correct
it to the norm by adding distilled water. After topping up, the charge will continue to flow
nie 30-40 min. for mixing the electrolyte. If from excessive addition of water to the battery
lyators, the density of the electrolyte will become lower than required, adjust the density by pouring a
solution of sulfuric acid with a density of 1.4 g/cm3 with the continuation of the charge for mixing
electrolyte for 30-40 minutes.
2. Once every 9 months, conduct a training cycle (TC). Charge the batteries at the shopping center
current of the II degree. Determine the end of the charge by the constancy of the voltage and the density of electricity

cast batteries within 1 hour. When charging and discharging, the current and voltage values are monitored
destroy with an ammeter and a voltmeter of an accuracy class not lower than 1.0 and 1.5, respectively.

Correction of the density of the electrolyte is carried out in accordance with (see note p. 4). After
correction, the density of the electrolyte brought to 250 C should correspond to the specified one
in clause 1.1 of section 21.1.3.2.

For 12ÿÿ-85, set the electrolyte level in the batteries to (14...16)

mm higher than the protective shield 2 hours after the end of the charge.
3. Carry out a control 10-hour discharge with a current of 8A to the voltage at the first discharge
let's look at the 1.7V battery.
4. After the control discharge, the battery will be charged according to clause 2.1.1 with current in two stages

mode.

21-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.2 Electricity consumers

21.2.1 Starter

The starter is intended for electric starting of the engine and is designed for a short time
change work installed on the engine.
The starter is turned on in the battery circuit remotely from the "STARTER" button, located
noise on the driver's control panel.
After starting the engine and releasing the "STARTER" button, the starter is turned off.

IT IS PROHIBITED to start the engine with the starter from discharged battery batteries
ray (more than 50% in summer and more than 25% in winter).

21.3 Auxiliary and switching equipment

21.3.1 Protection and switching unit

The protection and switching unit 34 (Figure 21.1) is intended for turning on the power supply
products for protection of the electrical network from short-circuit currents, control of power electronics
ments of electrical equipment.
Turning on the power in the car (connecting the batteries to the body) of the axis
It is set by the "SB" toggle switch to the "ON" position, located on the front panel of the unit
protection and switching (Figure 21.2).
Network protection machines are located on the front panel of the protection and switching unit,
performing the role of fuses.

21.3.2 Control panel

The control panel 35 (Figure 21.1) is designed to control the engine start,
control of switching equipment, collection and processing of information from sensors
engine systems to implement the following automated modes:

- control of the operation of the heater;

- emergency stop of the engine;
- provision of engine coolant pumping;
- issuance of current information about the condition of the heater on luminous banners,
located on the front panel of the remote control;
- issuance of emergency signals on the light banners of the driver's shield.

21-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – circuit breaker of the front pump "FRONT WATER PUMP"; 2 – "LIGHTING" lighting network protection switch; 3 –
automatic circuit breaker of the driver's panel "DRIVER'S PANEL"; 4 – circuit breaker of the AC conditioner; 5 – circuit
breaker of the glow plug "GLOW PLUG"; 6 – automatic circuit breaker for the protection of the network of accumulator
batteries "SB"; 7 – automatic circuit breaker for the oil pumping pump “OIL DRAIN PUMP”; 8 – automatic circuit breaker
of the oil injection pump "OPP"; 9 – circuit breaker of the "PREHEATER" heater network; 10 – automatic circuit breaker
of the PPC WATER PUMP motor-transmission department pump network.

Figure 21.2 - Block of protection and switching

On the front panel of the control panel (Figure 21.3) there are:

- the "STARTER" button, intended for turning on the starter;

- the "OIL PRIMING PUMP" button, intended for turning on the MZN of the engine;

- "GLOW PLUG" button, intended for turning on glow plugs;

- "FUEL PUMP - SSS" toggle switch, intended for turning on fuel pump or TDA;

- tumbler "WASHING BLOWER - CONDENSATE DRAIN" intended for inclusion

washing the supercharger or draining the condensate from the gas pipe;

- toggle switch "GB PRIME PUMPING - ENGINE PUMPING", intended for incl

nia pumping oil from the gearbox or pumping oil from the engine;

- toggle switch "MOTOR HEATER - PLUG", intended for turning on the motor pod

heater or heater candles;

- "PREHEATER START - SCAVENGING" toggle switch intended for inclusion

heater start-up mode or heater purge mode;

- banners with illumination, signaling the operating mode of the heater.

21-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – LED indicator (yellow) of candle activation; 2 – the switch for turning on the "PLUG" candle - the heater motor
"MOTOR HEATER"; 3 – switch for starting the heater "PREHEATER START" - purging "SCAVENGING"; 4 –
LED indicator (yellow) of the inclusion of the gasoline centrifugal pump; 5 – the switch for turning on the gasoline
centrifugal pump "FUEL PUMP" - thermal smoke apparatus "SSS"; 6 – engine oil pumping “ENGINE PUMPING”
switch – gearbox oil pumping “GB PRIME PUMPING”; 7 – switch for turning on the washing of the blower
"WASHING BLOWER" - condensate drain "DRAIN CONDENSATE"; 8 – LED indicator (yellow) of the fuel valve
"FUEL VALVE"; 9 – LED indicator (yellow) of the inclusion of the glow plug; 10 – button for turning on the glow
plug "GLOW PLUG"; 11 – starter activation button "STARTER"; 12 – button for turning on the oil-injecting pump
"OPP"; 13 – LED indicator (yellow color) of turning on the heater motor.

Figure 21.3 - Control panel

21.3.3 Automatic transmission control unit

The control unit 13 (Figure 21.1) of the automatic transmission is intended for
control of electrohydraulic valves in the gearbox. Valve control
carried out according to the programmed algorithm based on sensor signals: crankshaft revolutions
engine speed, torque converter, fuel pedal position.
The number of the included transmission is displayed on the information board. There is a selection
there is an alarm about the torque converter blocking mode and about overheating of the oil in the box
gears

21-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.3.4 Block of control of water movers

The control block of water-moving drives 6 (Figure 21.1) is intended for control
lenya by moving the car afloat. The following are intended for the functioning of the block
Other elements: "FRONT-REVERSE" switch (located on the driver's dashboard), sensor
angle of rotation of the steering wheel, regulator for changing the speed of rotation of the water jets (spread
women on the driver's shield).

21.3.5 Driver's shield

The driver's panel is intended for controlling systems and separate mechanisms, such as
combat and landing detachments with provision of indication of current and periodic in
formations about the state of controlled parameters.
The driver's shield is included in the scheme of the machine's electrical equipment with the help of plugs

connectors

The following control and measuring devices are installed on the driver's dashboard (Figure 21.4).
devices and control elements:
– the speedometer indicator with an integrated distance counter (1) is pre-identified
chen to indicate the speed of the car in km/h and to calculate the distance traveled in kilos
meters Speedometer scale 0-120 km/h. The track counter has a capacity of 99999.9 km;
– tachometer pointer with an integrated engine hour counter (2), front
designed for continuous remote measurement of engine crankshaft speed. The tachometer measurement
range is from 0 to 4000 min-1 . Hour counter, prednaz
chenny for the automatic summation of engine operation time. Reference capacity
counter devices 999.9 h;

– “LIGHTING” (3),
intended for switching on and adjusting the degree of illumination of devices.;
– "WATER SPEED" speed controller (4);
– front heater switch in partial or full power mode
"HEATING CONTROL COMP." (5);
– heater switch in the landing compartment in partial or full mode
capacity "HEATING TROOP COMP." (6);
– transfer case differential lock switch "TC ON" (7);
– differential lock switch of the II axle "II AXLE ON" (8);
– differential lock switch of the III axle "III AXLE ON" (9);

21-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

– information board (10), intended for displaying emergency parameters

engines, transmissions, hydraulic systems of water jets. Alarm about the work of consumers and SRA
the bating of sensors of other systems is displayed on special light filters;
– button for switching on the mode of increased transmission of the transfer box "TC GEAR H" (11);

– button for switching on the reduced transmission mode of the transfer box "TC GEAR L" (12);
– button for switching on the direct transfer mode of the transfer box "TC GEAR N" (13);
- circuit breakers (14, 15, 16, 17) intended for automatic disconnection
power sources in case of dangerous overloads and electrical short circuits

of the chain The machine is turned on manually using the handle, and turned off automatically
or manually;

– switch of the front evaporator of the air conditioner in partial or full mode
"FRONT AC" capacities (18);
– switch for controlling the raising and lowering of the wave reflector "TRIM VANE
DOWN" (19);
– winch release and pull-up control switch "WINCH IN ÿOFF" (20);
– switch of the water pumping pump from the motor-transmission compartment "PPC
WATER PUMP" (21);

– front water pump switch "FRONT WATER PUMP" (22);

– HYDROSYSTEM ON switch (23);
– water jet operating mode switch "Forward-Reverse" "WATER JET FÿNÿR" (24);
– switch for the operation of water jets "WATER JET ONÿ OFF" (25);
– button for monitoring the serviceability of lamps "CHECK LAMP" (26);

– when pressing the "CHECK LAMP" button, indicators 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18 light up,
25, 26, 27, 28, 29 (Figure 21.5);
– hydrotransformer oil temperature indicator (27). The measurement range is from 0 to
120 C; The device has internal lighting;
– the pointer of the ammeter (28), intended for measuring charging (discharging)
current The measurement range is from -60 to 180 A. The device has an internal backlight;
– gearbox oil pressure indicator (29), electric, remote, co
scale from 0 to 6 kgf/cm2 . The device has internal lighting;
– the pointer of the voltmeter (30), intended for measuring the voltage of the mains of the machine.
The measurement range is from 0 to 30 V. The device has an internal backlight;
– engine oil temperature indicator (31). Measurement range from 0 to 130. Device
has internal lighting;

– engine coolant temperature indicator (32). Measurement range from

0 to 130 C. The device has internal illumination;

21-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

– engine oil pressure indicator (33). The measurement range is from 0 to 6 kgf/cm2 ;
– fuel level indicator (34). The scale has divisions "0–0.5–1", indicating
"empty tank", "half tank" and "full tank", respectively. In the index scale is located
red light filter of the signal lamp, which lights up with a minimum number of tops
pouring into the tank The device has internal lighting;
– fuel level indicator operating mode switch in the left and right tops
to the rain tanks "FUEL TANKS LEFTÿ ACCOUNT ÿ RIGHT" (35).

Figure 21.5 shows the information panel of the driver.

21-12
 21 -13
1–
speedometer
pointer
with
an
integrated
distance
counter;
2
tachometer
–
pointer
with
an
integrated
engine
hour
counter;
3
regulator
–
of
illumination
of
instrument
scales
and
driver's
panel
"LIGHTING";
4
"WATER
–
SPEED"
speed
regulator
of
the
water-
flowing
engine;
5
switch
–
of
the
front
heater
in
partial
or
full
power
mode
"CONTROL
COMP.
HEATING";
6
switch
–
of
the
heater
in
the
landing
compartment
in
partial
or
full
power
"TROOP
COMP.HEATING"
mode;
7
transfer
–
case
differential
lock
switch
"TC
ON";
8
differential
–lock
switch
of
the
IIaxle
"II
AXLE
ON";
9
differential
–
lock
switch
of
the
III
axle
"III
AXLE
ON";
10
information
–
board;
11
the
–
button
for
switching
on
the
mode
of
increased
transmission
of
the
transfer
box
"TC
GEAR
H";
12
the
–button
for
turning
on
the
reduced
gear
mode
of
the
transfer
box
"TC
GEAR
L";
13
button
–
for
switching
on
the
mode
of
direct
transmission
the
transfer
box
"TC
GEAR
N";
14,
15,
16,
17
circuit
–
breakers
(SF4,
SF3,
SF2,
SF1);
18
the
–
switch
of
front
evaporator
to
20
the
–
switch
for
controlling
the
winch
release
and
tightening
"WINCH
IN
ÿOFF";
21
water
–
pumping
pump
switch
from
the
motor-
transmission
compartment
with
the
"PPC
WATER
PUMP"
turn-
on
indicator
(yellow
color);
22
front
–
compartment
water
pump
switch
with
“FRONT
WATER
PUMP”
activation
indicator
(yellow
color);
23
water
–
hydraulic
jet
system
switch
"HYDROSYSTEM
ON";
24
"forward-
water
–
jets
back"
mode
switch
"WATER
JETS
FÿR";
25
-operation
water
jets
switch
"WATER
JETS
ONÿOFF";
26
button
–
for
checking
the
correctness
of
"CHECK
LAMPS"
signaling
devices;
27
hydrotransformer
–
oil
temperature
indicator;
28
ammeter
–pointer;
29
engine
–
oil
indicator;
34
fuel
–level
indicator;
35
switch
–
of
the
mode
of
operation
the
fuel
level
indicator
in
the
left
and
right
fuel
tanks
"FUEL
TANKS
LEFTÿ
SUPPLY
ÿRIGHT";
36
minimum
–
fuel
level
indicator
(red);
37
indicator
–for
turning
on
the
main
beam
of
the
headlights
(blue
color)
of
the
dictioner
in
the
mode
of
partial
or
full
power
"FRONT
AC";
19
switch
–
for
controlling
the
raising
and
lowering
of
the
wave
reflector
"TRIM
VANE
UP
ÿDOWN";
gearbox
oil
pressure;
30
voltmeter
–
indicator;
31
engine
–oil
temperature
indicator;
32
engine
–coolant
temperature
indicator;
33
pressure
–indicator
Figure
21.4
-Driver's
shield
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – minimum coolant level indicator (red); 2 – fuel fine filter clogging indicator (red); 3 – indicator of the
maximum temperature of the engine coolant (red); 4 – minimum engine oil pressure indicator (red); 5 –
brake system malfunction indicator (red); 6 – blocking indicator

transfer case differential (yellow); 7 – differential oil minimum pressure indicator

differential of the second bridge (yellow); 8 – indicator of activation of the differential lock of the second
bridge (yellow); 9 – indicator of the minimum oil pressure of the differential of the third bridge (yellow); 10 –
indicator of activation of the differential lock of the third bridge (yellow); 11 – stop signals, parking brake (red);
12 – indicator of power on
track transfer transfer box (green); 13 – an alarm of the gun’s oversize output (left) (red); 14 – indicator for
turning on the reduced gear of the transfer case (green); 15 – an alarm of the exit of the gun beyond the
dimension (to the right) (red); 16 – indicator for switching on the neutral gear of the transfer case (green); 17
– indicator for turning on the turn indicators (right) (green); 18 – air conditioner activation indicator (blue); 19
– turn signal indicator (left) (green); 20 – steering wheel position indicator (steering wheel straight) (green);
21 – indicator for turning on the parking lights (green); 22 – alarm "Rear door open" (red); 23 – "Upper
hatches are open" signaling device (red); 24 – alarm "Failure of the water propulsion control system" (red);
25 – pressure line filter clogging indicator (red); 26 – indicator of the maximum temperature of the hydraulic
system (red); 27 – alarm of the maximum temperature of the drive reducer (yellow); 28 –

alarm of the maximum temperature of water jet pumps (yellow); 29 – indicator for switching on the water jets
(green); 30 – indicator of the minimum oil pressure of the gearbox, BP, transfer case (red).

Figure 21.5 - Information board

21-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.3.6 Lighting and signaling devices

21.3.6.1 Lighting and heating control panel

The lighting and heating control panel 3 (Figure 21.1) is intended for control
lighting devices, road signaling, glass heating, windshield wipers, etc
windshield washer

The following control elements are located on the remote control (Figure 21.6):
- "IR LIGHT" switch, intended for turning on/off infrared
headlights;

- "FOG LIGHT" switch, intended for turning on/off the rear pro
fog lamp, the activation of which is signaled by a mnemonic symbol;
- "BLACK – OUT LAMP" switch, intended for on/off
headlights with a light masking device;
- "HEADLIGHT" switch, intended for turning on/off the projector
ra, the inclusion of which is signaled by the mnemonic symbol;
- "GLASS HEATING" switch, intended for turning on/off both
heating of front and side windows, the inclusion of which is signaled by a mnemonic symbol;
- "EMERGENCY" button, intended for turning on/off the emergency signal
lysis

- the "HEADLIGHT SWITCH" switch, intended for on/off

position lights, headlights;

1 – infrared lamp switch "IR LIGHT"; 2 – "FOG LIGHT" rear fog light switch; 3 – LED indicator (red) of turning
on the rear fog lamp; 4 – headlight switch with a "BLACK-OUT LAMP" light-masking device; 5 – headlight
switch "HEADLIGHT"; 6 – LED indicator (red) for turning on the spotlight; 7 – "GLASS HEATING" circuit
breaker for the glass heating system; 8 – LED indicator (red) of window heating; 9 – emergency signaling
switch with light indication (red) "EMERGENCY"; 10 – light switch "NEADLIGHT SWITCH".

Figure 21.6 - Lighting and heating control panel

21-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.3.6.2 Outdoor lighting and signaling devices

To illuminate the area in front of the car and to signal its maneuvers on the car

the following outdoor lighting and signaling devices are installed (Figure 21.7):

• two main headlights 3, 9 with low and high beam modes of operation. Prednazna

cheny for lighting the road when the car is moving in the dark. Low beam headlights

it is turned on by the light switch located on the lighting control panel and ob

heat, and the main beam of the headlights is turned on by a combined switch located

under the steering wheel;

• two headlights with light masking devices 4, 8. Intended for lighting

the area in front of the car with the observance, if necessary, of light masking. Turn on

headlights with a switch on the lighting and heating control panel;

• one additional (search) searchlight 6 with a transparent diffuser

colorless glass is intended for additional lighting of the road and the area in the dark

time of day If necessary, it can be used as a searchlight. Includes

with the switch on the lighting and heating control panel;

• infrared headlight 7. Designed for illuminating the road with infrared rays

when driving a car at night with a TVN-5 night vision device.

• It is turned on by the switch on the lighting and heating control panel;

• two front lights 2, 10 with two-tone glasses (section of the front indicator according to

gate - orange color, the section of the front marker light - white color) and with a light mask

eye devices. They are intended to indicate the front dimensions of the machine and for

alarm about turning the car. Turning on turn signals is done in combination

bath switch or emergency alarm button, and side lights - pere

with a key on the lighting and heating control panel;

• two turn repeaters 1, 11 of orange color. They are included simultaneously with the decree

bodies of turns;

• two rear lights 12, 15 with two-tone glasses (section of the rear indicator

tov — the color is orange, the section of the rear gauge is red, the section of the brake signal

- red color) and with light masking devices. They are intended for designation

rear dimensions of the car, for signaling about turning and braking of the car. inclusion

direction indicators are activated by a combined switch or emergency button

no signaling, turning on the side lights is done by a switch on the remote control

control of lighting and heating, and the activation of braking signals is performed automatically

ticking when pressing the pedal of the working brake system;

• rear fog lamp 14. It is turned on by the switch on the control panel

21-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

lighting and heating;

• reversing light 13. Turns on automatically when the car is moving

in reverse

1.11 – turn signal repeater; 2.10 – front lamp; 3 – headlight of the low-main beam right; 4.8 – a headlight with a light
masking nozzle; 5 – signal; 6 – turning headlight; 7 – infrared headlight; 9 - the headlight of the low and high beam of the
left; 12.15 – rear lamp; 13 – reversing lamp; 14 – rear fog lamp.

Figure 21.7 - Installation of lighting equipment

21-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.3.6.3 Internal lighting devices

For lighting the control compartment, landing compartment, motor-transmission compartment

compartments in the car are equipped with internal lighting devices. These include:
- two lampshades for emergency lighting of the control room and two emergency lampshades
lighting of the landing party;

- three lanterns for lighting the engine and transmission compartment;

All internal lighting devices have built-in switches.
There are emergency sockets for connecting a portable lamp to the board set.

21.3.6.4 Sound signal

The car is equipped with a hornless hermetic sound signal.

It is turned on with the help of a push handle located on the steering wheel
bath switch.

21.3.7 Socket for starting the engine from an external power source

The car has a socket for starting the engine from an external source (battery
batteries) with a nominal voltage of 24 V and a current of up to 800 A.

To start the engine, connect the external source to the socket of the external starter with wires
(section 95 mm2 ), available in the group kit of ZIP.

21.3.8 Emergency outlet

Two emergency sockets are installed inside the machine to connect a portable lamp
22 and 32 (Figure 21.1).

21.3.9 Fuses

To protect electrical circuits and consumers from overloads and short circuits
fuses are applied to the electrical equipment of the machine.
Fuses are used to protect the batteries in the electrical network of the machine
fuses located on the fuse panel 17 (Figure 21.1).
In the rest of the circuits, network protection machines (PSA) are used, which perform the role
fuses They are installed in the following nodes: in the switching block, in the front panel
keepers, in the driver's shield.

21-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

In the fuse panel (Figure 21.8) the following circuit breakers are placed:

- AZS-15 "GB" gas station - power supply of equipment and executive elements of the automatic company

transmissions (automatic transmission);

- AZS-5 "GB SELECTOR" gas station - automatic transmission selector power supply;

- AZS-20 "VHF RADIO" gas station - VHF radio power supply;

- AZS-5 "IC, NAW" - powering the intercom and navigation devices;

- gas station-2 "HORN" - sound signal power supply;

- ÿÿÿ-10 «+ ALARM CIRCUITS « – emergency circuit power supply;

- AZS-15 "WATER JET" - water jet control system power supply;

- AZS-15 "PPC LIGHTING, MOTORS, WIPER" gas station - power supply of MTO lighting circuits, electric

tromotors of supply and exhaust fans, electric drive of the windshield wiper;

- AZS-5 "TURNING RELAY" - power supply of the traffic signal control relay (relay

turns);

- AZS-15 "HEATING RELAY, DRIVER'S SIGHT" gas station - power supply for monitoring devices, regu

glass temperature gauges, observation devices.

All gas stations that play the role of a fuse must always be turned on.

In case of overloads and short circuits, the fuse opens the electrical circuit.

At the same time, the fuse blows, and the gas station is turned off, as evidenced by av

automatic movement of the handle to the off position.

After eliminating the causes that caused the blown fuse, it is necessary

replace it with a serviceable one available in the electrical equipment of the machine.

IT IS PROHIBITED! Hold the gas station handle in the on position at the moment
circuit overload or short circuit.

21.3.10 Rotating contact device VKU-1

Rotating contact device VKU-1 pos. 23 (Figure 21.1) is intended for

transmission of electricity from the machine body to the rotating tower, as well as for connection

intercom devices located in the hull and tower.

The rotating contact device (RCD) consists of the following main parts:

- upper and lower housings with a bearing unit and a sealing sleeve;

- a package of a low-current contact system with a sensor for signaling the output of a gun per hectare

barytes;
- high current contact system.

The fixed part of the VKU is rigidly attached to the floor of the cabin of the combat module so that

its axis of rotation coincides with the axis of rotation of the turret of the combat module.

21-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – circuit breaker for intercom, radio-navigation equipment "IC, NAV"; 2 – circuit breaker of the radio station
"VHF RADIO"; 3 – automatic protection of the network of emergency circuits "+ALARM CIRCUITS"; 4 – circuit
breaker for the lighting network of the motor-transmission compartment, electric motors, windshield wiper
"PPC LIGHTING, MOTORS, WIPER"; 5 – "TURNING RELAY" network protection switch; 6 – automatic
protection of the network of the window temperature regulator, the driver's night vision device "HEATING
RELAY, DRIVER'S SIGHT"; 7 – water jet system protection machine "WATER JET"; 8 – circuit breaker of
automatic gearbox "GB"; 9 – circuit breaker of the automatic gearbox selector "GB SELECTOR"; 10 - circuit
breaker for the "HORN" sound signal network.

Figure 21.8 - Fuse shield

21.4 Electrical network of the machine

Wires are used to connect consumers and power sources on the machine
low voltage shielded design.

The machine uses a single-wire system for connecting sources and consumers
(except emergency lamps, emergency sockets and battery switch). The second wire,
intended for the connection of minus outputs of sources and consumers, serve me
tall parts of the car body. Such a system requires a more attentive attitude to
insulation of wires and connection of devices to the housing.
When touching a live wire to metal parts of the machine
a short circuit occurs, which can lead not only to the failure of the part

electrical equipment of the machine, but it can cause a fire. Electrical weakening
connections of power sources and consumers of electrical energy lead to uvela
resistance to transitions, non-rhythmic work of consumers and a sharp increase
radio interference level.

21-21
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – shunt voltmeter SHA-180; 2 – voltage regulator 21.3702; 3 – fuse panel.

Figure 21.9 - Placement of start-up control equipment

1 – external starter socket; 2 – KM-600D-B contactor; 3 – battery 12ST-85.

Figure 21.10 - Placement of equipment in the battery compartment

21-22
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.4.1 Maintenance of the electrical network of the machine

When operating the machine, observe the following rules:

- wire bundles and individual wires are protected from mechanical damage and so on
oil, fuel and other aggressive media falling on them.

For all work with the electrical network of the machine:

- to avoid a short circuit and a fire, the accumulator batteries will be disconnected
on-board network mass contactor;
- solder wires and tips using acid-free flux;
- metal braiding of wires in all connecting connectors, as well as in individual ones

the terminals must be connected to the body of the machine;

- in order to avoid pulling out the braid from the connector during technical inspections and works, it is not allowed

cat of strong wire tension. If there is a tear, the braid will be closed again.
Do the sealing carefully. The possibility of touching individual wires of the core of the wire
the screen must be turned off;
- when screwing and unscrewing the nuts of the connectors, they prevent the screen from twisting

tearing the braid, as this will lead to the destruction of the braid and the breakdown of the electrical system
contact Friction of wires against parts and units of the machine is not allowed;
- a shielding braid of wires ending with screw tips, always

it must be fixed with cuffs that prevent it from slipping and short circuiting
chains;

- replacement of shielded wires with unshielded ones is not allowed.

The tightening of the ends of the wires must provide constant reliable electrical power
sky contact Operation of the machine with untightened screws and nuts fastening at the end
No wires are allowed.

21.4.2 Methods of detecting malfunctions in electrical circuits

Repeated blowing of the fuse or repeated switching off of the machine

network protection of the gas station indicates a short circuit in the electrical circuit. If there is a malfunction
cannot be detected by external inspection, then it is recommended to find a short circuit
it is necessary to use a probe (control lamp).
When the power supply of one or another current consumer is interrupted, first of all, inspect it
The gas station, standing in the chain of this consumer, will then proceed to inspect the connecting ones
contacts and wires.
If malfunctions caused by poor contact or broken wires, it is not possible to
will reveal by inspection, then use a probe.

21-23
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.4.3 Possible malfunctions of electrical equipment

Possible malfunctions of electrical equipment are shown in table 21.3.

Table 21.3 - Possible malfunctions of electrical equipment Possible

cause of the malfunction The remedy is to
malfunction
Defective or severely replace the
Star ter does not discharged batteries. The power supply batteries or charge them. Find
turn on. circuits of the control panel are broken, the malfunction and eliminate
there is a break in the circuits: control it.
panel - protection and switching unit - pin
"50" of the starter. The traction relay of
the starter is faulty. The selector for
selecting the operating modes of the KP Replace the
is not set to the "N" (neutral) position. starter. It will set the selector
Accumulator batteries are discharged for selecting the operating
below the permissible limit. Defective modes of the KP in the "N"
The starter scrolls starter. Increased voltage drop in the position. Replace the batteries
the engine rotates with starter power supply circuit, including the or charge them. Replace the
a reduced frequency power contacts of the battery switch. starter. Tighten the fastening
nia of all the wires in the starter
circuit. Clean and tighten the
battery terminals. Replace the
mass contactor. Replace fuse
FU3 on the fuse panel. Turn
The generator set Fuse FU3 on the fuse panel has failed. on (contactor) masses or
does not work. replace

The mass switch (contactor) is switch

switched off or defective.

thread of ego

Break in the circuits between the Eliminate the break.

generator and the voltage regulator.
Breakage of the generator drive. Faulty Replace the generator drive.
voltage regulator. Replace the direct current regulator
wife

Defective generator. Replace the

Raised itself The surface of the batteries is wet with generator. Remove dirt and
battery discharge. electrolyte, the electrolyte is contaminated electrolyte from the battery
with harmful impurities. surface. The surface should
be dry and clean. Change the
electrolyte. Replace the
The electrolyte level in Leakage of electrolyte through cracks in battery.
accumulator batteries the monobloc or battery cover. Leakage
is rapidly decreasing. of the monobloc camera. Replace the
Do not burn electrolyzer battery. Burning filaments of incandescent lamps. Replace the
lamps. Bad contact in the lamp socket. Bend the springy con
p.

strokes, clean the oxidized

contact. Eliminate the break.
Broken wire. Tighten the terminals of the
Violation of contact in electrical circuit connecting block.
connections.

21-24
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

A possible cause of the How to fix the malfunction

malfunction
malfunction is a Replace the faulty
malfunction of the switch or the switch. switch or switch

tel.

The brake lights in the Violation of contacts in the connection of the wires Will restore the connection.
rear lights do not light up to the brake light switch. Defective brake light switch.
during braking Replace the switch.

cars
The brake signal lamps in Closing the contacts of the light switch Replace the switch.
the rear lights are constantly and brake light.

on. The specified turns do

not work. The gas station was triggered due to an overload in Determine and eliminate the
the electrical circuits. Defective combined switch, malfunction, turn on the gas
turn signal relay. The gas station was triggered due station. Replace with correct ones.
to an overload in the electrical circuits.
There is no sig sound Eliminate the cause of the shutdown
nala (a short circuit is possible) and turn on
the gas station. Eliminate damage or

Circuit break: combined switch – lighting and

heating control panel – fuse panel – signal, replace the signal.

unsoldering the ends of the coils from the signal

terminals. Violation of the regulation of the
contacts of the signal interrupter (the contacts
are closed once). Violation of the regulation of the Adjust the signal.
contacts of the signal interrupter. There is no voltage
at the terminals of the electric motor.
The sound of the signal Adjust the signal.
is hoarse. When the
stack is turned on, the Eliminate the circuit break, replace
cleaner does not work. the windshield wiper relay or combined
relay
locksmith

Faulty electric motor. There is no Replace the electric motor. Check

Automatic transmission connection of the sensor output with contact and restore the connecting chain.
oil pressure indicator arrow "X2:12" of the water board
at different pressures calf.
oil level shows There is no pointer power supply.
"O" or goes beyond the Replace the driver's shield.
scale (off the scale)
Pointer arrow
There is no connection of the sensor output with Check and restore the connecting chain.
oil pressure two contact "X2:10" of the water board
the gauge at different oil calf.
pressures shows "O" or goes There is no pointer power supply. Replace the driver's shield.
off the scale (shaking) The
arrow of the temperature
indicator in the automatic
transmission lubrication There is no connection of the sensor output with Check and restore the connecting chain.
system at different contact "X2:4" of the water board
temperatures la.

There is no pointer power. Replace the driver's shield.

21-25
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Possible cause of Method of

malfunction
malfunction troubleshooting
re shows "O"

The arrow of the fuel Lack of contact between the sensor body and Check and restore the connecting
level indicator shows the machine body. There is no pointer power. chain. Replace the driver's shield.
"O" at any level in the Defective device. There is no connection of
tank. the output of the sensors with the contacts
The pointer arrow at "X1:2", "X1:23", "X1:21" of the driver's panel Check and restore the connecting
any level of fuel in when the switch is set to the position SUPPLY, chain.
the tank shows more LEFT, RIGHT ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
than full (overscaling).

but.

Defective fuel level sensor. Defective Replace the sensor.

device. There is no sensor contact with Replace the driver's shield.
The arrow of the the body Check and restore the connecting
temperature indicator will som cars. chain. Replace the driver's shield.
be to the left of the "0" There is no pointer power.
point when the personal Defective device.
temperature in the engine is reached.
The arrow of the There is no electrical circuit between contact Check and restore the connecting
coolant temperature "X2:8" of the driver's panel and contact "1" chain.
indicator of the two of the sensor. Defective device. Defective
valves at different sensor. Replace the driver's shield.
temperatures goes Replace the sensor.
beyond the "130" point
(for scaling). The needle There is no electrical circuit between contact Check and restore the connecting
of the engine oil "X2:9" of the driver's panel and contact "1" chain.
temperature indicator of the sensor. Defective device. Defective
goes beyond the point sensor. Replace the driver's shield. By
"130" (overscale) at a change the sensor.
personal temperature.
When the engine is There is no electrical circuit between contact Check and restore the connecting
running, the arrow of the "X2:3" of the driver's panel and contact "3" chain.
tachometer pointer is at of the sensor. Defective device. Defective
the "0" point sensor. There is no electrical circuit between Replace the driver's shield.
contacts "X2:5", "X2:6", "X2:7" of the driver's Replace the sensor. Check
When the machine is panel and contacts "1", "2", "3" and restore the connecting chain.
moving, the arrow of the
speedometer pointer is spread
the wife is on the left of the point of the sensor, respectively.
"0" There is no pointer power supply, the device Replace the driver's shield.
is faulty. Defective sensor.
Replace the sensor.

21-26
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.4.3.1 Procedure for disassembling accumulator batteries

To dismantle the batteries, you need:

- dismantle the protective cover above the battery compartment;

- unscrew the wing nuts of the fastening of the clamping bar of the accumulator batteries;

- dismantle the clamping bar of the accumulator batteries;

- disconnect the power jumpers from the battery terminals;

- release the battery handles from the clamps;

- pull out the batteries from the battery compartment.

Install batteries in the reverse order.

21.4.3.2 Procedure for dismantling the mass contactor

To dismantle the mass contactor, it is necessary:

- dismantle the protective cover above the battery compartment;

- disconnect power jumpers and wires from mass contactor terminals;

- turn out the mass contactor mounting bolts;

- pull out the mass contactor from the battery compartment.

Installation of the mass contactor should be done in the reverse order.

21.4.3.3 Procedure for dismantling the relay-regulator

To dismantle the relay-regulator, you need:

- disconnect the wires from the terminals of the relay-regulator;

- unscrew the mounting bolts of the relay-regulator;

- dismantle the relay-regulator from its original place.

Install the relay-regulator in the reverse order.

21.4.3.4 Procedure for dismantling the sound signal

To dismantle the sound signal, you need:

- disconnect the wire from the signal terminals;

- turn out the signal fastening bolts;

- dismantle the signal from its regular place.

Install the signal in the reverse order.

21-27
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.4.3.5 Procedure for disassembling fuses

To dismantle the fuses, it is necessary:

- open the wing nut securing the protective cover of the fuse panel;
- dismantle the protective cover;

- unscrew the nuts of the failed fuse;

- dismantle the failed fuse.

Install the fuse in the reverse order.

21.4.3.6 Procedure for dismantling the driver's shield

To dismantle the driver's shield, you need:

- disconnect the harness connectors from the driver's shield;

- turn out the fastening elements of the driver's shield;

- dismantle the driver's shield from its regular place.

Install the driver's shield in the reverse order.

21-28
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

22 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF THE COMBAT MODULE

The electrical equipment of the combat module consists of:

- electric motors MU-431 pos. 3 Figure 22.1;

- ceiling lamp PMV-71 pos. 2;

- sockets ShR-51 pos. 1.

1 - socket ShR-51; 2 - lamp PMV-71; 3 - MU-431 electric motor

Figure 22.1 – Electrical equipment of the combat module

22.1 Electric motors

The combat module uses electric motors of the MU-431 type.

Three MU-431 electric motors ensure operation:
- ZTM-1 gun reload mechanism drive;
- tape switching mechanism (ammunition selection);
- drives the belt tensioning mechanism.

Electric motor MU-431 small-sized, four-pole, direct current, with

investigative excitement. It is reversible with two separate windings
excitement The power of the electric motor is 400 W, the rotation frequency is 5000 min 1, consumed
current no more than 32 A.

22-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Switching on the electric motors of the drive of the mechanism of recharging and switching of supply

push mode from the buttons "RECOIL" , "C/RECOIL" on the operator's panel

Mon. Automatic switching on and off of the belt tensioner electric motor, with release buttons

mechanism of the ZTM-1 gun.

22.2 Ceiling PMV-71

The PMV-71 ceiling lamp is intended for lighting inside the combat module. In the split module
one PMV-71 lampshade is closed. Switching on and off the lampshade is done with the help of

toggle switch installed on the lamp housing.

22.3 ShR-51 socket

The ShR-51 socket is intended for connecting external consumers to the on-board network

direct current. The location of the outlet in the module is shown in Figure 22.1.

22-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

23 MEANS OF COMMUNICATION

23.1 General information

The machine is equipped with means of external and internal communication (Figure 23.1). For obes

It is equipped with a VRC-90s ultra-short-wave radio station for external communications. For

intercom communication and switching equipment is installed (v

further on in the text ABCK1). For working with communication devices, the machine is equipped with a radio

noise-protected ShSH-1 microphones.

1 – navigation receiver; 2 – unit AS-37; 3 – amplifier MSh-FTE; 4 – navigation antenna; 5 – unit AS-34; 6 – VHF radio station; 7 – VHF
antenna of the radio station; 8 – unit AS-35; 9 – socket outlet and inner socket; 10 – external landing gear socket.

Figure 23.1 – Placement of communication and navigation equipment

23.2 Intercom and switching equipment

23.2.1 Purpose, composition and general description of AVSK-1

AVSK1 provides the following types of communication:

– an internal two-way telephone connection between four subscribers with a voice call

sewing one's own thing;

- internal two-way telephone communication between three subscribers is listened to

speaking one's own words during the work of one of the subscribers on the radio station;

- internal circular two-way telephone communication between all subscribers of

listening to one's own speech when one of the subscribers is on an external connection,

carried out by pressing the "RING" key on the ÿÿ1 block by any subscriber (at the same time, either

23-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

nent working on the external connection temporarily switches to the internal connection);
- external communication by radio station to one of the subscribers through the AS34 block;

– external communication by radio station to one of the subscribers through the AS35 block;

- external communication via a radio station to one of the subscribers through the AC37 unit.

When working with AVSK 1, headphones ShSH-1 with built-in electro are used
magnetic laryngophones and low-impedance telephones.

The composition of AVSK 1 includes:

– block AC34;
– AC35 unit;
– unit AS37;

– two ÿÿ1 blocks with a cord 1.2 m long;

– two ÿÿ1 blocks with a cord 2.2 m long;
– one block ÿÿ1 with a cord 10.0 m long;
– ZIP single (fusible insert VP1-1V 2.0A 250V).

Block AC34 provides internal two-way telephone communication (with listening

in our own words) with all subscribers located in the internal communication tract, and so on
same access to external communication via the radio station.

The following control bodies are located on the front panel of the AC34 block (Figure 23.2):
– work type switch (3) to four working positions “IC”, “R/ST1”, “R/ST2” and
"RCVR", providing the commander with the following functions:
- "IC" - work on internal communications;
– "R/ST1" – radio station work;
– "R/ST2" – not used on this machine;
– "RCVR" – not used on this machine;
– switch "DRIVER" (1), having two working positions "IC" and "R/ST1", obes
cookie cutter for the driver has the following functions:
- "IC" - work on internal communications;
– "R/ST1" – radio station work;
– the "ON-OFF" switch (5), supplying power to the AVSK 1 set;
– call button "RING" (2) – not used on this machine;
- "VOLUME" volume control for adjusting the volume of internal calls
poor communication;

– fuse 2 A (6).
In the lower part of the AC34 block there are 7 connectors for connecting cable assemblies.

23-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 - "DRIVER" switch; 2 – call button "RING"; 3 - work type switch; 4 - "VOLUME" volume control; 5 - power supply switch;
6 – fuse; 7 - connectors.

Figure 23.2 – Block AS-34

The AC35 block provides internal two-way telephone communication (with listening
in our own words) with all subscribers located in the internal communication tract, and so on
same access to external communication via the radio station.

On the front panel of the AC35 unit (Figure 23.3) there is a work type switch 1 on
four working positions: "IC", "R/ST1", "R/ST2" and "RCVR", providing for the operation
It has the same functions as the work mode switch on the AC-34 unit.
On the side panel of the AC35 block there are 2 connectors for connecting cable assemblies.

1 - work type switch; 2 - connectors.

Figure 23.3 – Block AS-35

23-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Block AC37 provides internal two-way telephone communication (with listening

in our own words) with all subscribers located in the internal communication tract, and so on

same access to external communication via the radio station.

Block AC37 has no control bodies.

The ÿÿ1 block with a cord serves to connect subscribers' headsets.

The following governing bodies are located on block ÿÿ1:

– the “XTRM – RING” key:

– "XTRM" - for working on a radio station in "Transmission" mode;

– "RING" - for a circular call by any member of the crew of the crew members, finding

connected to external radio communications.

Reception and transmission of things over the intercom network is provided without pressing the keys on

Block MH1. When working on a radio station, reception is carried out without pressing keys, transmission

when pressing and holding down the "XTRM" key.

In addition, two subscriber sockets (internal and external) are installed in the car,

intended for connecting MH1 blocks. Sockets provide only internal

connection

23.2.2 Placement of AVSK 1 in the car

The AC34 block is installed at the commander's workplace and fixed on the starboard side in the compartment

control line, to the right of the doorway.

The AS35 unit is installed on the engine bulkhead in the fighting compartment, behind the opera seat

Torah.

The AC37 block is at the driver's workplace and is fixed on the engine partition in the compartment

control panel, right behind the driver. The top is closed with a common casing.

Subscriber socket (internal) – fixed on the stern sheet on the starboard side.

Subscriber socket (external) – installed under the protective cover on the stern sheet

right side outside the car.

23.2.3 Preparing ABCK 1 for work

To prepare AVCK 1 for work, it is necessary:

1. Put on and adjust the headset, for which:

- before putting on the headset, a movable metal lock is required

sits on the end of laryngophone belts;

23-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

– for adjusting the headset on the head on the outer side of the parietal and occipital part

there are adjustable straps with buckles, the adjustment of the headset is carried out on the

catching with chin valves fastened;

- adjustment of the position of laryngophones is made by laryngophone belts

their quilting;

– laryngophones must be placed symmetrically on the throat of the operator.

2. Connect the headphone cords to the MH1 blocks.

3. Set the work type switch and the "DRIVER" switch on the AS34 block
"IC" position.

4. Turn on ABCK 1, set the "ON-OFF" switch of the AC34 block to the "ON" position.

5. Set, by turning the knob of the "VOLUME" regulator on the AC34 unit, the necessary thunder

the bone of sound in telephones when pronouncing the count "one, two, three". Volume is recommended

install with the engine running, i.e. in the presence of ambient noise.

6. All subscribers must hear each other when working on the intercom network

released buttons on the ÿÿ1 blocks.

7. Check the operation of the circular call, for which set the work type switch

on the AC34 block to the "R/ST1" position, then any subscriber will press the key of his block

MH1 to the "RING" position. At the same time, the telephones and laryngophones of the commander, connected to

radio stations must automatically switch to the intercom network. Will check

come from the workplace of each subscriber. The caller must hold down the key

pressed in the "RING" position until the end of negotiations. When you release the key, everything is subscribed

you automatically return to the previous types of communication. Return the switch to the position

nie "IC". The equipment is ready for operation.

23.2.4 Working procedure of ABCK 1

When working with ABCK 1, it is necessary to be guided by the following provisions:

- for the commander to enter the internal communication mode, it is necessary to set the switch

wire rod works on block AC34 to "IC" position;

- for the commander to communicate with an external correspondent through a radio station

it is necessary to set the work type switch on the AC34 block to the "R/ST1" position;

- to switch the operator to the internal communication mode, it is necessary to set the switch

the wire rod works on the AC35 block to the "IC" position;

- for the operator to communicate with an external correspondent through a radio station, it is necessary

set the work type switch on the AC35 block to the "R/ST1" position;

- the "DRIVER" switch is required to switch the driver to the intercom mode

23-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

on the AC34 block, set it to the "IC" position;

- for the driver to communicate with an external correspondent through a radio station, no

set the "DRIVER" switch on the AS34 block to the "R/ST1" position;

- to switch the radio station to the "Transmission" mode when working through the radio station p

the external correspondent must press and hold the key on the ÿÿ1 block in the position
not "XTRM";

- for a circular call from any subscriber, press and hold the key

on the MH1 block in the "RING" position. At the same time, the subscriber working on an external connection is turned off

ÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿ are transferred to the intercom mode;

REMEMBER! With a circular call, the external connection is broken, so it is necessary to use the
circular call for a short time and only in case of extreme necessity.

- the operator whose ÿÿ1 unit is connected to the subscriber outlet (inside or outside

machines), cannot connect to a connection with an external correspondent.

At the end of work on ABCK 1, turn the "ON-OFF" switch on the AC34 block to
"OFF" position.

ATTENTION! The "RING" button on the AC34 block and the position of the work type switch
"R/ST2" and "RCVR" on AC34 and AC35 units are not used during operation.

23.2.5 Possible malfunctions of AVSK 1

AVSK 1 must be repaired in workshops by qualified specialists

Art. Crew members are allowed to fix only minor malfunctions: replace those that have gone out

harnesses, blocks, fuses are out of order.

Table 23.1 – Possible malfunctions of AVSK 1 and ways to eliminate them

Possible cause of Method of

malfunction
malfunction troubleshooting
All types of communication are The fuse in the AC34 unit has
unavailable for all subscribers failed. Break in the harness Replace the fuse

connected to the X5 connector of

Replace the harness with a correct one
the AC34 unit. The AC34 unit is
defective. Replace the AS34 unit
There is no internal connection Replace the AS34 unit
AC34 unit is faulty
between all subscribers. In all
types of communication, speech Malfunction of the larynx Replace the headset of this circuit of the
is not heard, it is transmitted by subscriber's headset Defective unit ÿÿ1
unit
ofÿÿ1
the Break
subscriber
in theReplace
subscriber's
the
one of the subscribers harness Replace the harness with a good one

23-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

A possible cause of the Method of troubleshooting

malfunction
malfunction Defective
unit to which the ÿÿ1 unit is connected
(ÿÿ35, ÿÿ37) Defective unit ÿÿ1 of the Replace the unit
subscriber Replace the unit ÿÿ1 in
the subscriber's harness Replace the harness with a good one
Defective block to which the ÿÿ1 block is connected
Defective (ÿÿ35,
ÿÿ34 block
ÿÿ37)

Replace the unit

Replace the AC34 unit

When any of the subscribers press the
RING CALL button on the unit Defective
AC34 ÿÿ1 unit, no circular call Replace the AC34 unit
is provided When one of the subscribers presses the RING CALL button
on the ÿÿ1 unit, no circular call is provided
Defective ÿÿ1 block of the subscriber Replace ÿÿ1 block Break in
the subscriber's harness Replace the harness
Defective
with ablock
goodto
one
which the ÿÿ1
block is connected (ÿÿ35, ÿÿ37) Defective ÿÿ1 block Break in the harness
connected to the ÿ1 connector of the ÿÿ34 block Defective ÿÿ34 block
Replace the block
When working on an external Replace the ÿÿ1 block
connection, there is no switching from
reception to transmission Replace the harness with a correct
one. Replace the AC34 block

23.3 Means of external communication

To ensure external communication, an ultra-short-wave radio is installed on the car

station VRC-90s. It is located in the management department on the right side behind the working area

hundredth commander.

The procedure for working with the VRC-90s VHF radio station is described in the following documents:

ATCS Operator's Manuals, 23ADH100;

ATCS Operator's Pocket Guide, 23ADH102;

ATCS Operator's Card, 23ADH112.

23-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

24 RADIO NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT

Radio navigation equipment is intended for solving navigational tasks on the air
radio signals of navigation spacecraft of the GLONASS and GPS NAVSTAR systems
any point on the earth's surface, at any moment of time, regardless of weather conditions and others
dications of navigation parameters.

The navigation equipment includes:

- navigation receiver APMA.469635.007
- antenna S104P APMA.464656.014

- amplifier MSh-FTE APMA.434815.028

- a set of cables and a set of mounting parts

The navigation receiver is placed at the commander's workplace and fixed to the crown
it is between the windshields of the commander and the driver.
The antenna is installed on the roof of the car near the commander's hatch. The antenna is protected from me

hanicheskih damaged by metal staples.

The MSH-FTE amplifier is located inside the car under the antenna.
The rules for working with radio navigation equipment are set out in the operating manual
Tasia PKAN.461513.014 RE ( APMA.461513.014 RE).

24-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

25 COLLECTIVE PROTECTION SYSTEM

The collective defense system is designed to protect combat personnel and equipment
consists of means of protection against weapons of mass destruction and fire-fighting equipment.
Means of protection against weapons of mass destruction are intended for protection against impact
shock wave and light radiation of a nuclear explosion, as well as from the effects of radioactive and
poisonous substances and bacterial agents.
The air defense system is designed for quick detection and liquidation of fire outbreaks
to the department

Shock wave protection is provided by special sealing devices,

installed on the car, some of which permanently seal the car body, and others are closed

are carried out manually by combat calculation.

Sealing provides protection against shock waves and getting inside the machine
blown air

Sealing is achieved due to sealed hatches, hatches and doors of the body, covers
supply and exhaust fans, as well as due to seals in the compartment partition

power plant.

25.1 Filter ventilation installation

25.1.1 Purpose and device of the filter ventilation unit

Filter ventilation unit (FVU) is intended for cleaning outdoor air

from dust, radioactive and poisonous substances and bacterial agents, supply of purified
of air into the occupied compartments of the car and the creation of excessive pressure in them, an obstacle
the penetration of outside air into the interior of the car is separated by a barrier

carried in the case.

The FVU is located in the landing compartment on the port side of the hull near the engine compartment

lines The governing bodies of the FVU are located in the landing department and the control department
cars

FVU (Figure 25.1), consists of the following main units: supercharger 1, filter
choke 11, valves 6, 21, electromagnet 16, supercharger protection 19, shut-off mechanism
9.

Nozzle 17 of the supercharger ensures the supply of outside air to the supercharger at
operation of the fuel pump and the emission of dust to the outside. To block the access of outside air to the living space

compartment with a non-working fuel pump, valves 21 are installed in the pipe. Springs 20 are equipped
Check for a close fit of the valves to the nozzle when they are closed.
25-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – supercharger, 2 – wall of the FVU compartment; 3 - nozzle; 4 - bolt of fastening of the FVU compartment; 5 - spring;
6 - valve; 7 - lever; 8 - nozzle; 9 - the mechanism for disconnecting the drive to the valve of the FVU; 10 - a bolt for
fastening the nozzle; 11 - filter-absorber FPT-200B; 12 - shock absorber; 13 - bracket; 14 - rack; 15 - nut; 16 -
electromagnet; 17 - nozzle; 18 - protection fastening bolt; 19 - supercharger protection; 20 - spring; 21 - valve; 22 -
supercharger mounting bolt

Figure 25.1 - Filter ventilation installation

The supercharger (Figure 25.2) is intended for primary cleaning of outdoor air
dust and aerosols. The supercharger is an axial fan with centrifugal cleaning
of compressed air.
The supercharger consists of a housing 2, an electric motor 1, a drum 4, a rotor 5, a guide
of the device 6, cover 7, and lever system 8, 9, 11. In the cast body 2, an electric
engine 1, on the shaft of which a rotor 5 with radial blades and a guide appa is mounted
Rat 6.

25-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The guiding device is an axial fan designed to create a discharge

nia in the air intake pipe "b" and air supply to the rotor channels. There are provisions in the case

reny channels for the output of compressed air.

1 – electric motor; 2 – body; 3 – ring; 4 – drum; 5 – rotor; 6 – guiding device; 7 – cover; 8, 9 and 11 – levers; 10 - roller. a
– dust ejection window; b – air intake pipe; c – dust ejection nozzle

Figure 25.2 - Supercharger

Drum 4 has along the forming window a, which are connected to the cavity for collecting dust,

ejected through the nozzle in In the cover 7 there is a lever system included in the system

supercharger valve control system. Rubber rings seal the seats.

The supercharger is attached to the top sheet of the machine. Saddles are pressed into the top sheet, I have

all guide bushings. Outlet and inlet valves are installed in the holes of the bushings

The saddles are sealed with rubber rings. To protect the supercharger valves from being hit

protection of the supercharger 19 (Figure 25.1) is installed outside the compartment against foreign objects, which

toray consists of a cover and a grid. The protection is attached with bolts to the roof of the product.

Filter - absorber 11 (Figure 25.1) is intended for final air purification,

coming from the supercharger, i.e. radioactive and poisonous substances and bacterial ones

funds It is installed on the rack 14, which is attached to the bracket 13, welded to

body To eliminate vibrations, the filter is installed between the rack and the bracket

shock absorbers 12.

25-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The filter body has an inlet on the end, which is connected to the pipe 8
by the supercharger, and on the cylindrical surface there is an outlet closed by rubber
valve.

Management of the FVU work is carried out from the FVU panel, located in the place of the command

hole, as well as the mechanism for disconnecting the drive to the fuel pump valve installed on the fuel pump compartment

(Figure 25.3).
The shut-off mechanism ensures that the FVU valve is kept in the lower position, and
also its switching under the action of spring 5 (Figure 25.1) to the upper position. Fur
the shutdown system is installed on a bracket welded to the FVU compartment and consists of the following

of these main units: housing 7 (Figure 25.3), retainer 8 with a spring, rod 4, and cable 6.
Cable 6 is fixed in rod 4 with bar 3, which is fixed on the rod with bolt 2, and is connected to
lever 7 of valve 6 (Figure 25.1). The valve is switched when the button is pressed
"NBC" on the FVU panel, when the "FVU" gas station is turned on.

1- handle; 2 - bolt; 3 - bar; 4 - rod; 5-spring; 6 - cable; 7- housing; 8 - retainer; 9 - traction relay
wow

Figure 25.3 - Mechanism of disconnection of the drive to the FVU valve

When overcoming a water barrier, to protect the FVU from water ingress, instead of protection
the supercharger is equipped with an intake pipe located on the roof of the car on the right side
th side (Figure 25.4).
To prevent foreign objects from entering, in the upper part of the intake pipe
there is a mesh 1. Inside the nozzle there is a nozzle for ejecting dust from the supercharger.
To install the intake pipe, it is necessary to remove the bolts 18 (Figure 25.1) and replace them
to protect the supercharger, install the intake pipe. When fastening the intake pipe is
bolts are used to secure the supercharger.

25-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1-grid; 2-pipe; 3- dust discharge nozzle

Figure 25.4 - Intake pipe

25.1.2 Work of the FVU

When operating the machine in a very dusty area or afloat, when the hatches and hatches of the inhabited compartments

of the machine must be closed, the FVU can be used to supply fresh air to the inhabited compartments. This mode of operation

of the FVU is called re

ventilation press.

To turn on the FVU in the ventilation mode, turn the handle 1 of the shutdown mechanism (Figure 25.3) down to the

stop, while the valve 6 (Figure 25.1) will open the air access

into the living quarters, bypassing the absorber filter and transfer the gas station "FVU" on the FVU panel to

position ON, the supercharger will turn on and the indicator will light up, signaling the operation on the FVU panel,

of the fuel pump. The external air sucked in by the supercharger, hitting the blades of the rotor rotating at a high speed, will

also be spun up, as a result

Therefore, the dust in the air will be thrown against the walls of the supercharger body under the action of centrifugal force,

and it will be thrown out through the dust ejection nozzle "in" (Figure 25.2). A stream of fresh air, cleaned of dust in the blower,

will enter the living room

my department

To turn off the air conditioner operating in the ventilation mode:

- turn off the "FVU" gas station on the FVU panel, at the same time, the supercharger will turn off and go out

indicator on the FVU panel.

When operating the machine in an area contaminated with radioactive and poisonous substances and bacterial agents,

the FVU must be switched on in filter ventilation mode.

To turn on the FVU in filter ventilation mode, it is necessary to switch the "FVU" gas station to

the FVU panel to the "ON" position and press the "NBC" button on the FVU panel.

25-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

At the same time, valve 6 (Figure 25.1) will move to the upper position and the contaminated air, having

undergone preliminary cleaning from radioactive dust and aerosols in the blower, will be pumped into the filter-

absorber, finally cleaned of radioactive, poisonous substances and bacterial agents, and will be pumped into the

inhabited compartments .

About the operation of the FVU in the mode of filter ventilation, the included lights are evidenced by others

indicators and on the FVU panel.

To turn off the PFU after operation in filter ventilation mode:

- set the gas station "FVU" to the "OFF" position, at the same time, the supercharger turns off and extinguishes

indicator ;

- turn the handle of the FVU valve shut-off mechanism, while the indicator goes out .

ATTENTION! In order to prevent the ingress of radioactive, poisonous and bacterial agents into the inhabited
compartments, it is PROHIBITED to turn handle 1 of the FVU valve shut-off mechanism
(Figure 25.3) after the machine is in the zone of radioactive, chemical or bacteriological
contamination !

25.1.3 Operation of the FVU

The actions of the crew and the landing party when turning on and off the FVU are performed according to the command

the commander of the machine (department), transmitted to the performers directly by voice or by intercom.

To enable the PFU to operate in the ventilation mode:

- the crew member who is in the landing compartment at the command of the commander, makes sure that

the handle 1 of the disconnection mechanism (Figure 25.3) is in the cocked position (otherwise he cocks it down) and

reports it to the commander;

- the commander sets the gas station "FVU" to the "ON" position. To

turn off the FVU operating in the ventilation mode, the commander sets v
switch of the "FVU" gas station to the "OFF" position.

To enable the FVU to operate in filter ventilation mode, the commander sets v

the switch of the gas station "FVU" to the "ON" position and presses the "NBC" button on the panel of the FVU

To turn off the air conditioner operating in filter ventilation mode:

- the commander sets the switch of the gas station "FVU" to the "OFF" position. - a crew

member winds the handle of the FVU valve drive.

If the machine is located in the zone of radioactive, chemical or bacteriological contamination, the handle 1 of

the shutdown mechanism (Figure 3) must be left in the sunken position, until the work on degassing and deactivation

of the internal surfaces of the fuel pump and replacement of the filter-absorber is carried out.

When operating the machine in a non-infested area, handle 1 of the mechanism will turn off
the line must be erected.

25-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

25.1.4 Possible malfunctions of the FVU and methods of their elimination

Possible malfunctions of the FVU and ways to eliminate them are given in table 25.1.

Table 25.1 - Possible malfunctions of the fuel pump and ways to eliminate them
Possible cause of the malfunction No How to fix the
malfunction
power at the input to the control panelmalfunction Check
When the "FVU" gas station is the presence of power at the input
switched to the "ON" position, the to the control panel
supercharger does not start
Malfunction of the electrical Check the absence of a break in
cables from the panel to the the cable circuits from the panel to
fuel pump Failure of the the fuel pump. Check the operation
solenoid or blower of the fuel of the electromagnet and the
pump inclusion of the supercharger
electric motor, if necessary, replace

The list of basic checks during maintenance is given in table 25.2.

Table 25.2 - List of basic checks during maintenance What is checked for paint coating
Technical requirements The inspection
The paint coating on the method is checked by external inspection
blower and filter absorber must
not be damaged. Punctures,
punctures and dents are checked
Absence of hole absorber by external inspection with a depth of more than 8 mm.
on the filter, prok
catch, dent repent

The condition of the threaded The threaded part of the bolts must be Lubricated by external inspection
part of the bolts of the flange and must not be torn off. Rubber gaskets should not have cracks or rips.
joints, the condition of the The formation of soap bubbles is not allowed
rubber gaskets

Airtightness of the connection It is checked with a soapy rum

points of the filter-absorber with solution
the FVU system

In order to check the operation of the FVU, a short-term inclusion of the FVU is allowed

in the filter ventilation mode for 5...10 minutes, but no more than 2-3 times per hour. Air tightness

All tracks are checked with a soapy solution

Safety measures

IT IS PROHIBITED!

- to replace the filter-absorber after staying in the zone of OB contamination without

use of personal protective equipment;

- after crossing the infected area, switch the air-conditioning unit to the ventilation mode without

special treatment of the internal cavities of the FVU.

25-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

25.1.5 Actions of the crew in the conditions of the use of weapons of mass destruction

In anticipation of overcoming the infected area, it is necessary to perform the following

actions:

- turn on the DRG-T radiation reconnaissance device;

- turn on the supercharger;

- press the "NBC" button on the FVU panel.

When overcoming an infected area, move at the maximum possible speed,

constantly monitor the level of radiation inside the product using light signaling, issued
by a radiation reconnaissance device.

It is PROHIBITED to fire small arms when crossing an infected area

localities!

After overcoming the infected area and arriving in the area of degassing and
deactivation is necessary:

- turn off the DRG-T radiation reconnaissance device;

- turn off the FVU;

- perform partial or complete deactivation, degassing or disinfection of the product

and cavities of the FVU.

25.1.6 Replacing the absorber filter

The filter-absorber is replaced with a new one after:

- a two-time stay in the zone infected with unstable poisonous substances;
- a five-fold stay of the object in the zone infected with phosphorus border or other
we persistent poisonous substances;
- degassing and deactivation of the internal cavities of the nuclear power plant;

- during operation, holes in the body or dents with a depth of more than 8 mm;
- after 5 years of operation or 6000 km mileage of the product.

To replace the filter-absorber, you need:

- remove the wall of the FVU compartment 2 (Figure 25.1);

- unscrew the bolts 10 of the attachment of the nozzle 8 and the attachment of the rack with the filter
absorber;

25-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- dismantle filter-absorber 11 with rack 14;

- loosen the nuts 15 of the filter attachment to the rack, remove the filter-absorber from the rack 14;

- remove plugs from the new filter with holes for air inlet and outlet, install

filter-absorber in rack 14;

- install the rack with the filter, fasten the pipe 8 to the filter, tighten the bolts 10;

- fasten the nuts of the filter attachment to the rack;

- install the wall of the FVU compartment 2.

25.2 Device for radiation reconnaissance DRG-T

The DRG-T device (Figure 25.5) is intended for measuring the exposure power

zy (hereinafter MED) of gamma radiation and issuing signals about exceeding its threshold value.

The device is made in the form of a block, on the front panel of which there are control bodies

and indications.

1 - cover of the built-in control buttons "TEST"; 2 - connector; 3 - toggle switch for turning on the device "POWER ON/
OFF"; 4 - information board; 5 - "R" command check button; 6 - command check button "A"; 7 - "COMMANDS ON/OFF"
switch.

Figure 25.5 - DRG-T device

The device, when turned on, provides continuous measurement of the MED of gamma radiation

in the place of its location, while it is necessary to take into account that at an elevated level of the Ministry of Internal Affairs

gamma radiation, outside the product of the Ministry of Internal Affairs, gamma radiation will be higher (the coefficient is weakened

The gamma radiation emitted by the body of the product is approximately equal to 4).

25-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The device provides the issuance of a light alarm when the MED threshold is exceeded

ma-radiation and in the presence of penetrating gamma-radiation of a nuclear explosion, at the same time auto

Matically, the attenuation of the radiation level by the body of the product is taken into account. In case of excess

of the MED threshold of gamma radiation (40...60 mR/h), during the presence of an excess, a period occurs

children's highlighting of the symbol . In the case of a powerful pulse of gamma radiation

nuclear explosion (11520...17280 R/h), for ÿ10 sec. there is periodic lighting

the meaning of the symbol.

The device is installed next to the commander's place, on the starboard side. The meter's question about

is derived from the on-board network of the machine.

To turn on the device, it is necessary to turn the "POWER" switch to the position

"ON". At the same time, the numerical value of MED gamma will be displayed on the information panel of the device

radiation (depending on the MED of gamma radiation, readings are displayed in mR/h or R/h). IN

depending on the MED of gamma radiation, the first test results may exceed the values

Well, the errors of the device, but they can make it possible to quickly evaluate the MED Gamma

radiation. A sign of inauthenticity is the periodic highlighting of numbers

switch on the device, until statically reliable information is obtained, then illumination

will go into continuous mode. The time of static processing depends on the intensity

radiation, can be from two seconds to two minutes.

To check the electrical operation of the device, check the built-in con

a troll To do this, it is necessary to open the "TEST" cover and alternately press the "A" buttons,

"R". At the same time, soot should be periodically highlighted on the information panel of the device

polite symbols , . At the same time, the position of the "COMMANDS" toggle switch can be changed
voluntarily

Detailed description of the device, preparation, inspection, storage, technical rules

maintenance and safety instructions are set out in the manual "Radiation device

onnoy reconnaissance DRG-T. ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ", included in the operational set

Product documentation.

25-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

25.3 Fire-fighting equipment

25.3.1 Designation of fire-fighting equipment

The system of fire-fighting equipment (PPE) is intended for the detection and detection of persons

publication of fire sources in the power compartment of the product.

During automatic operation, the air defense system provides:

- fire alarm;

- issuing a signal for automatic activation of the engine stop mechanism;

- supply of fire-extinguishing composition to the power plant compartment;

- repeated supply of the fire-extinguishing composition to the power plant department in case of

a second fire or incomplete elimination of a fire at the first application.

When turned on manually, the air defense system issues commands directly to supply the fire extinguisher

of the seschego composition in the power unit compartment from the buttons.

25.3.2 Composition of the air defense system

The air defense system consists of the following main units (Figure 25.6):

- two cylinders 5 with fire-extinguishing composition - Khladon 114V2;

- five thermosensors 2;

- air defense control unit 1;

- connecting cables.

1 - air defense control unit; 2 – temperature sensor; 3 – pyro cartridge; 4 – cylinder head; 5 – cylinder; 6 – cylinder bracket; 7 – pressure
sensor; 8 – thermal sensor connector; 9 – thermal sensor junctions; 10- body thermodata
chica
Figure 25.6 - Placement of the air defense system

25-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The active elements of the PPO system are thermal sensor joints that respond to

the impact of sudden changes in temperature. Installation of thermal sensors is made in the most

fire-hazardous places of the power department.

Bringing the cylinders into action is carried out with the help of pyro cartridges, which are suspended

they bake a membrane breakthrough in the heads of the cylinders.

The cylinder of the fire equipment serves as a tank for storing the fire-extinguishing composition
- Khladon 114V2.

The weight of the cylinder and the date of weighing are written on the cylinder body. The cylinder is equipped with a signal

with a pressure lyser 7, which, when the fire-extinguishing mixture comes out, disconnects the electric one

chain, while on the control panel and the air defense signaling lamp goes out, signaling about

serviceability of the cylinder.

The air defense control unit is installed in front of the control compartment between the front windows and

intended for managing air defense operations, as well as issuing information.

Executive mechanisms of the collective protection system include:

- engine stop mechanism (MOD);

- cylinder heads of fire equipment.

The engine stop mechanism provides automatic engine stop at the expense

cessation of fuel supply when receiving a signal from the air defense system.

To start the engine after the operation of the MOD, a manual feed handle is required

set the distance of the fuel supply control to the initial position.

The cylinder head of the fire equipment ensures the supply of fire-extinguishing composition to

inhabited or power compartment, when the pyro cartridge is triggered, on the "Fire" signal from ter

modatchikov or air defense block remote control.

25.3.3 Air defense system operation

To turn on the firefighting equipment, it is necessary:

- turn on the "POWER" AZR on the air defense control panel (Figure 25.7);

- turn on the "SB" switch on the protection and switching unit, and then the unit on the dashboard

anti-aircraft consoles are saved:

- light indicators, , signaling the correctness of electrical circuits

pyro cartridges and charged cylinders of fire equipment;

- light indicator for 3...4 s.;

- light indicators 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, signaling the correctness of the corresponding circuits

of the temperature sensor;

25-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 25.7 – Air defense control unit

- the TEST light indicator, signaling that the equipment is in the mode

built-in control.

After extinguishing the indicators TEST, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (which indicates the correctness of both

mining) the equipment is ready for work.

Note - Fire equipment should always be included.

Checking the operability of firefighting equipment from the "TEST" button:

- start the engine;

- press and release the "TEST" button (Figure 25.7) on the air defense control panel, while:

- the light indicator lights up for 3...4 seconds, at the same time it is displayed

sound alarm;

- light indicators 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 light up, signaling the correctness of the circuits

corresponding to the numbers of thermal sensors;

- the TEST light indicator lights up in yellow, signaling its presence

equipment in built-in control mode;

- the MOD works and the engine stops, the TEST indicator after the engine stops

the calf lights up in green;

- after 30...50 seconds from the moment of pressing the "TEST" button, the TEST, 1, 2, 3,

4, 5 go out (which indicates the correctness of the equipment).

After the inspection, you must:

- turn off the "SB" switch on the protection and switching unit;

- set the manual fuel supply lever to the extreme rear position.

25-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

25.3.4 Actions of the crew in the event of a fire

When a fire is detected, it is necessary, without waiting for the automatic activation of the system,

stop the engine and turn on the system manually. To do this, press the " " button (input of the first point

lona) on the air defense control panel. If the fire is not extinguished, press the " " button (input of the second cylinder) on

air defense control unit.

WARNING! When extinguishing a fire in the power compartment, the crew remains on
in his place and continues to perform the task.

Extinguishing fires inside and outside the product, including Napalm-type fire mixtures, mo

fire is produced by a manual fire extinguisher. A hand-held fire extinguisher must be directed with a bell

towards the source of the fire and open the shut-off valve, without tilting the cylinder with the valve down.

After extinguishing the fire, if the situation allows, it is necessary to carry out a control

inspect and repair damage caused by fire. At the first opportunity, replace the Wed

air defense cylinders and fire extinguishers.

In case of an external fire, if the situation allows, the crew must stop the engine and

put out the fire If the situation does not allow leaving the product, the crew can continue

perform the task. At the same time, to exclude combustion products from entering the product

it is necessary to stop the blower of the fuel pump, the fans of the ventilation system.

25.3.5 Replacement of cylinders and pyro cartridges of the air defense system

They will check the charge of air defense cylinders and a manual fire extinguisher with a control scale

in 12 months. The difference in weight with that specified on the stencil of the cylinder should not exceed

20 g, fire extinguisher - 30 g. If the specified difference is exceeded, the cylinders and fire extinguisher are required

let's recharge or replace with fully charged ones. Weight and date of weighing nano

paint in the appropriate columns of the stencil.

To remove air defense cylinders, it is necessary:

- open the rear roof or rear partition of the power compartment;

- turn off the battery switch;

- unscrew the cap nuts from the heads of the cylinders and disconnect them from the pyro cartridges of the cylinders

PPO of the electric line;

- remove pyro cartridges from cylinder heads;

- open the cap nuts and disconnect the electric wire from the pressure sensors;

- unscrew the bolts and separate the tapes of the cylinder fastening;

- remove the cylinders from the rack.

25-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Install the cylinders in the reverse order. At the same time, for prevention

If the wires are mixed up when they are connected to the cylinders, you should be guided by the number

with a marking applied to the ends of the cap nuts and wires.

25.3.6 Possible malfunctions of the air defense system and methods of their elimination

Table 25.3 - Possible malfunctions of the air defense system and ways to eliminate them

The possible cause of The way to eliminate

malfunction
the malfunction is not the malfunction Turn
When the battery switch is turned turned on "POWER" AZR on the air on the "POWER" AZR on the air
on, the indicators on the air defense control unit defense control unit
defense control unit do not light up.
When the battery switch is turned
on, the indicators do not light up. Low pressure in the cylinder Replace cylinders

Missing or defective pyro cartridges Replace pyro cartridges

which

Indicator 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 does not The corresponding temperature sensor Replace the incorrect date
light up when the battery switch is failed chick

turned on or when the "TEST"

Dirty joints of the corresponding Clean the thermal sensors from dirt
button is pressed on the PPO block
temperature sensor and dust with a soft hair or kapron
remote control
brush Replace the PPO block
remote control
When the battery switch is turned The anti-aircraft control unit is faulty
on or when the "TEST" button is
pressed on the PPO remote control,
the TEST indicator lights up in a
flashing mode

25-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

26 CAMOUFLAGE MEANS

26.1 The curtain installation system

For the purpose of masking from visual surveillance by the enemy, the module is equipped with a system

my production of curtains (SPZ).

The SPZ is intended for launching smoke grenades with the purpose of creating smoke screens.

26.1.1 Design and placement of the curtain installation system

The SPR kit includes six launchers 1 (Figure 26.1).

Launchers (PU) 1 are located outside in the front part of the module on the left and right

along the longitudinal axis. The launcher 1 is attached with three bolts 2 to the flange 6. The bolts are

countered with a counterwire 5. Flanges 6, in turn, are fixed on bonks at

with the help of bolts 4 and locked with locking washers 3. Launchers have contact

new device 7, which is connected to the BUM by means of cables.

1 – launcher; 2 – bolt; 3 – locking washer; 4 – bolt; 5 – counter-wire; 6 – flange; 7 – contact device.

Figure 26.1 – Installation of the curtain setting system

26-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

26.1.2 Operation of the system

When an electric pulse is applied to the electrocapsule sleeve (ECV) 6 smoke grenades
(Figure 26.2). The EKV works and ignites the powder of the propellant charge by gas pressure
of which the rubber plug 10 from the end of the pipe 2 breaks off and the smoke grenade is thrown
from the launcher, while simultaneously igniting the retarder. After 2...3 seconds
after the retarder burns, the smoke elements of 3 grenades ignite. Under the pressure of the elect
of fuming gases, smoke elements 3 are ejected from the shell 2 of the grenade and upon burning
the ground forms a smoke screen.
Installation of smoke curtains can be carried out in volleys from the left or right side.

1 – body; 2 – pipe; 3 – smoke elements; 4 – stopper; 5 – retaining ring; 6 – electrocapsule sleeve; 7 – electrical contact
node; 8 – custodian; 9 – retarder; 10 - plug.

Figure 26.2 – The device of the launcher

26.1.3 Security requirements

In all cases of checking, preparation and launch of smoke grenades, the installation system is for
the entire crew must be inside.
All hatches must be closed.
It is PROHIBITED to charge and discharge launchers while they are turned on
machine power supply.

It is PROHIBITED to load grenades into launchers in park ones

conditions
Smoke grenades belong to explosive and fire-hazardous products, therefore,
it is necessary to observe the requirements when working with them, as well as during their transportation and storage

26-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

safety regulations adopted for explosive and fire-hazardous work. In addition, it is necessary

be careful when performing any other work on the module with charged batteries

forging installations.

The safety of working with grenades depends on their correct handling. not allowed

dropping grenades and hitting them is punished. Actions are not allowed when handling grenades,

which can lead to their activation (connection to EKV current sources, etc.).

It is PROHIBITED to open fire, smoke, use open electricity

heating devices and bare wires of the electrical network within a radius of 50 m from the workplace

when working with aerosol grenades (removal from boxes, charging, etc.).

It is necessary to protect the grenades from getting snow and mud into the nozzle holes and EKV.

26.1.4 Preparing the system for operation

Prepare the system for operation in the following sequence:

- turn off the machine's power supply;

- remove the plug from the PU and check the mobility of the locking ring and the electric hammer

using a key from the ZIP module;

- will charge the PU with 3D6 grenades. Charging should be done without manual effort

application of the tool. At the same time, the locking ring must be placed in the groove of the grenade, o

what will be indicated by a light click. He pulled the grenade loop to make sure it was holding

Is it a retaining ring? When charging PU with 3D6 grenades, their rotation is allowed

bearing longitudinal axis;

- put the plugs on the PU pipe as far as they will go;

- turn on the control system according to clause 8.2 and monitor the presence of smoke on the monitor

release grenades in PU according to clause 8.8.1;

To discharge the PU, it is necessary:

- turn off the machine's power supply;

- remove the plug;

– insert the nozzle of the tank into the loop of the 3D6 grenade, rest the handle of the tank into the section of the pipe, and

acting as a lever, remove the 3D6 grenade from the PU.

26.1.5 Installation of smoke curtains

Installation of a smoke curtain can be carried out both on land and afloat. necessary

let's take into account that the shooting range from the curtain setting system is from 200 to 300 meters,

therefore, the moment of launching smoke grenades should be selected in accordance with the distance to

enemy's firearms or combat vehicles.

26-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The smoke curtain is set by launching one of the three grenades.

To set up a smoke curtain, you need:

- place a sighting or rangefinder mark on the landmark;

- fulfill the requirements of Clause 8.8 of this manual.

26.1.6 System maintenance

26.1.6.1 Checking the technical condition of the system

To check the electric circuits of PU, the key AZHIU.764431.001 located in

ZIP machine.

Determining a short circuit in electric circuits is done as follows

sequences:

- if there are loaded PUs, remove grenades from them using the protrusion on the handle

the bathing suit, which is located in the ZIP of the car (the battery switch must be switched off);

- check the image on the monitor. A message about the availability of smoke grenades

indicates a short circuit in the PU.

Checking the serviceability of electrical circuits to the electrocapsule sleeve is performed in such a way

order:

- remove the rubber plug and insert the end of the AZHIU.764431.001 key into the PU barrel

in such a way that it closes the movable plus contact with the fixed minus contact

(pressing the key will drown the movable contact).

After checking, the movable positive contact must return to its initial position.

In case of loss of mobility of the positive contact, it is necessary to clean the PU once

borkoy contact group.

26.1.6.2 Cleaning and lubrication of the system

Cleaning and lubrication of the SPR system includes:

- cleaning and lubrication of PU without disassembly when preparing the SPR system for work;

- cleaning and lubrication of PU without disassembly after launching grenades;

- cleaning and lubrication of PU with disassembly of the contact device and extraction of the locking device

rings after 25...30 starts (for each installation), when the mobility of the electric hammer or

retaining ring and during seasonal maintenance of the machine (if starts were made).

When preparing the system for work, clean the launchers for removal

grease from PU pipes and check the technical condition of the system. PU outer surfaces

clean off dust and dirt with a rag. In case of heavy contamination, wash them with water and dry them

26-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

wipe Clean grooves, grooves and hard-to-reach places with the help of sticks

cheap on them rags.

Remove the PU grease with the help of a sponge attached to the machine's spare part. To delete

lubricant from the bottom of the PU, it is necessary to fix the pad of the bathing suit on the axis with long grooves, enter

the bannik into the pipe channel until it stops at the bottom of the PU and, rotating it, achieve complete cleaning of the pipe channel

from lubricants.

If there is a large amount of grease, it is recommended to use a felt disk of a bathing suit

apply a clean rag.

To remove the grease from the pipe channel, fasten the bannik pad to the short axles

grooves Place a clean rag on the spiral grooves of the foot pad so that the foot pad

enter the PU pipe with little effort, and advance it several times with a rotary two

let's go all the way. If necessary, by changing the rag, achieve complete cleaning of the pipe channel

from lubricants.

To fix the pad of the bathing suit with long and short grooves, it is necessary to pull it

in the direction of the cup, compressing the spring at the same time, and turn it until the necessary grooves align with the axis.

Cleaning and greasing without disassembly should be done with a bath with diesel fuel

or T-1 (TS-1) fuel, GOI-54p or TSIATIM-201 lubricants and rags.

PU elements, which perceive the action of gun powder, are cleaned and lubricated

call, i.e. the inner part of the tube, the bottom of the breech, the locking ring and the groove under it, the top

contact bearings and an electric hammer, exiting into the cavity of the PU pipe.

Cleaning and lubrication of specified elements should be done after thorough removal of dust and

mud from the outer part of PU.

Clean and lubricate in the following sequence:

- prepare materials for cleaning and lubrication;

- wind a rag on a bathing suit;

- slightly soak the rag and the felt disk of the bathing suit with diesel fuel;

- insert the bannik into the pipe channel (it should enter with little effort) and a few

once, advance it with a rotary movement until it stops at the bottom of the breech;

- changing the rag, clean the pipe channel several times, achieving complete cleaning

ego from soot and soot. At the same time, it should be taken into account that an excessive amount of fuel can

subsequently lead to the closing of the electrical circuit;

- clean the pipe channel with a dry, clean rag;

- make sure that the retaining ring 6 moves freely in the groove of the breech;

- PU lubricant should be made with a bathing suit, wrapped around it with a rag impregnated with lubricant.

It is necessary to ensure that the lubricant is distributed in a thin layer over the entire surface

pipe and breech.

26-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Cleaning and lubrication of the PU with disassembly of the contact device should be carried out in such a way
vatality:

- with the help of a hammer and a screwdriver, unscrew the stopper;

- with the help of the AZHIU.764431.001 key, which is attached to the machine tool kit, unscrew the screw

it was from the treasury;

- remove the gasket from the threaded part of the pipe;

- with the help of a screwdriver and pliers, remove the retaining ring from the groove of the breech;

- with the help of a 27 mm key, unscrew the contact with the insulator, take out the electroboek and pru

jinu is a brawler;

- wash in diesel fuel or T-1 (TS-1) fuel, thoroughly clean the soot

and soot all PU parts and wipe them dry with a clean rag;

- lubricate the threaded parts of the parts, the retaining ring 6 and the groove under it with grease

GOI-54p or TSIATIM-201 and assemble PU in the reverse sequence;

- lubricate PU.

When unscrewing and screwing in the pipe, it is allowed to apply light blows with a hammer

by key Before locking the pipe with a stopper, the pipe must be screwed in tightly

stop When cleaning and lubricating, pay special attention to ensure that there is no residue left in the breech

unburnt particles and rags. After cleaning and greasing, put plugs on PU pipes.

26.1.6.3 Preparing the system for overcoming a water barrier

Preparation of the SPR to overcome the water barrier is carried out at the same time as the preparation

pounding machine.

It is necessary to ensure the presence and integrity of rubber plugs. Rubber plugs

must be tightly put on all PU pipes.

26.1.7 Storage of the curtain installation system

When preparing SPR for storage, it is necessary:

- clean and lubricate the inner surfaces of the launcher tubes with a thin layer

em grease GOI-54p;

- clean the outer surfaces of the launchers from dirt, dust and products

corrosion and restore damaged paint.

After performing the specified operations, put rubber on the pipes of the launchers

you plug.

26-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

26.1.8 Possible system malfunctions

Possible system malfunctions and methods of their elimination are given in table 26.1.

Table 26.1 – Possible system malfunctions

Malfunction 1. Cause of malfunction Solution Clean the
Tight charging. The Contaminated PU pipe PU pipe. Once take a PU and
locking device does not work Deformation or breakage of the replace the hundred porn ring
ring locking ring. (from ZIP si stemmy). Replace
the parts with new ones (from
2. When installing a grenade, The parts of the electrical contact the ZIP system). Eliminate the
there is no message about the group of the PU are destroyed. cable malfunction. Discharges
presence of smoke on the screen When the cable connected to the PU and bathing suit
nat control unit is damaged, the electric
striker does not contact the EKV of the grain
you clean the contact and electric

troboek
3. The gas station "902B" is turned Short circuit in the cable Eliminates a short circuit in the
off at start-up. connected to the PU Short cable. Clean the PU.
circuit in the PU pipe due to the
presence of
foreign objects.

26.2 Thermosmoke equipment

Thermal smoke apparatus (TDA) is intended for setting up smoke curtains for purposes
masking the car, both during the day and at night.
The machine is equipped with a multi-action thermal smoke device. IN
diesel fuel of the engine power supply system is used as a smoke-forming substance
calf. The diagram of TDA operation is presented in Figure 26.3

The smoke detector system consists of main pipelines and an electric switch
fuel supply, having a spool valve and a relay.

26.2.1 Work of TDA

The work of TDA is based on the principle of creating artificial fog (smoke) and
consists of the following: excess fuel supplied by the 896X engine unit to the pumps
of high pressure is directed to the rotor of the engine turbine by an electric switch.
Under the influence of centrifugal forces, the atomized fuel enters the
the current of engine exhaust gases evaporates. When releasing a steam-gas mixture into the atmosphere,

ry of diesel fuel become supersaturated, condense into the smallest droplets

and form a fog (smoke screen). The smoke screen obtained in this way depends
depending on the temperature of the engine and atmospheric conditions, it may be grayish-white
or milky white.

26-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – tank; 2 – electromagnet; 3 – TDA valve; 4 - turbine

Figure 26.3 – Scheme of operation of the TDA system

Figure 26.4 – TDA valve

TDA allows you to control the beginning and end of the smoke curtain installation
the continuity of the smoke detector, as well as the multiplicity of its action.
To create a smoke screen, the mechanic - the driver must turn on the TDA switch on
shields of control devices.
TDA can be turned on only when the car is moving, while it is necessary to remember that consumption

of fuel on the TDA is about 10 l/min, therefore, the TDA system should not be used unnecessarily
to work
The TDA system provides the possibility of continuous smoke starting for several seconds
up to 10 min., as well as the frequency of its action.
When the smoke curtain ignites, turn off the TDA switch for 2...3 seconds, then
turn it on again. When the smoke screen is burning, the engine does not shut down.

ATTENTION! It is strictly forbidden to include TDA in the fuel system,

filled with gasoline.
26-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

26.3 Deformable coating

The deforming coating is intended to reduce the optical visibility of the object
on a natural background, distortion of the image with the purpose of making it difficult to identify the product, less

reduction of the detection range and complication of aiming by the enemy gunner at the chosen one
point of the ego silhouette. The deformable coating is made of matte gray-yellow enamels,
light brown and black.

These enamels are chemically resistant, which ensures the safety of the product
during the specified warranty period and allows degassing and deactivation of the product
liya without breaking the coating

26-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

27 WINCH

27.1 Safety measures when working with a winch

When working with a winch , it is PROHIBITED:

- use the winch cable to tow the car;

- include gears in the transfer case;

- be near the rope or between the branches of the rope (when using the block), guide

laying the cable while the winch is working;

- use bolts and other objects instead of a safety pin;

- in the event that the cable is laid across the road, the road will be guarded and signs will be posted, it will be stopped

protecting the road

27.2 Appointment and installation of the winch

The winch is intended for self-extrication of a stuck machine, as well as for extrication

driving other stuck cars of the same type.

The maximum tensile force on the hook of the cable with single-row winding of the cable on the bar

ban 92000 N (9200 kgf). Traction force decreases as the radius of the tro winding increases

sa on the drum. With the use of the block, which is included in the ZIP kit of the machine, the effort is doubled
that's it.

The winch is installed in the front part of the machine. For access to the winch when using it

There are two hatches in the body of the machine for maintenance and maintenance. In the lower nasal

the sheet has a hatch for issuing the winch cable, along the edges of which guides are installed

rollers 7. In the middle bow sheet (above the winch) there is a hatch for access to the lock 8 cover

cable release hatch and to handle 3 of the drum switch mechanism.

The installation of the winch and its drive is shown in Figure 27.1.

27.3 Device and operation of the winch

The drum 30 (Figure 27.2) of the winch rotates freely on the shaft 10 of the two-stage gearbox

28 sliding bearings and can be connected to the gearbox shaft with a cam clutch 1

including the drum (Figure 27.3) moving along the splines of the shaft 10 (Figure 27.2)

Torah. The cam coupling is moved by the fork 35 of the drum switch, which has a handle

ku 36 with lock 38.

27-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The latch and the latch plate 39 fix the sliding cam clutch 1 (Fig.
point 27.3) in the on or off positions.

1 – bracket; 2 – hook; 3 – the handle of the mechanism for turning on the drum; 4 – crankcase of winch reducer; 5 -
oil press; 6 – drum; 7, 9 and 11 – guide rollers; 8 - hatch cover lock; 10 – roller axes

Figure 27.1 – Installation of the winch and its drive

When turning on and off the cam coupling, the handle 36 (Figure 27.2) with the lock
ROM 36 pull up. The fork 35 of the coupling will be able to freely rotate on the axis.
When the handle is released, the spring 37 lowers the latch 36 and it engages with the
wall 39, fixing the position of the cam coupling of the drum.
When disconnecting the drum and the shaft of the reducer with a cam clutch, the compression spring
bolt 4 (Figure 27.3) presses the brake pad 2 to the rim of the drum, braking
drum when unwinding the cable manually, which prevents the possibility of loops
cable when the drum is intensively untwisted.
The cable (Figure 27.2) is attached to the outer side of the bar flange with a bar 28 and bolts
bana Hook 2 is attached to the other end of the cable with the help of a wedge and a bushing (Figure 27.1).

The winch drive is hydraulic. The winch is equipped with a hydraulic motor 63 (Figure 27.2) co
thorium transforms the kinetic energy of the working fluid of the hydraulic system into rotational energy
drum movement
To turn on the winch to issue the cable, it is necessary to move and hold the switch
"WINCH" calf (Figure 18.4, item 20) in the "OFF" position. For pulling the winch cable
turn the "WINCH" switch on the driver's panel (Figure 18.4, item 20) to the position
"IN" position.

27-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – first row housing; 2 – epicycle of the second row; 3 - cover gasket; 4 – cover; 5 – gasket of the case of
the second row; 6 – special nut; 7 – special bolt; 8 – conical sleeve; 9 – shai ba otgybnaya; 10 – shaft; 11
– carrier of the second row; 12 – finger; 13 – sleeve; 14 – satellite bearing; 15 – satellite; 16 – needle
bearing; 17 – puck; 18 – adjusting bolt of the finger; 19 – race puck; 20 – oil filler plug; 21 – key; 22 – worm
wheel; 23 – large spacer washer; 24 – sealing ring; 25 – gear shaft; 26 – control hole plug; 27 – thrust ring;
28 – cable fastening bar; 29 – sliding bearing; 30 – drum, 31, 34 – oil press; 32 – adjusting gaskets; 33 –
traverse; 35 – fork; 36 – the handle of the mechanism for turning on the drum; 37 – latch spring; 38 –
retainer, 39 – under the carrier bearing; 40 – epicycle of the first row; 41 – retaining ring; 42 – finger; 43 –
the bearing of the first row; 44 – satellite bearing of the first row, 45 – satellite; 46 – vehicle of the first row;
47 – cover; 48 – adjusting gaskets; 49 – sun gear, 50 – special bolt; 51 – first row building; 52 – gaskets,
53 – worm, 54 – oil drain plug; 55 – retaining ring; 56 – intermediate shaft bearing; 57 – intermediate shaft;
58 – cam sleeve; 59 – safety pin; 60 – adjusting spacer spacers, 61 – under the worm pinion; 62 – sealing
gasket of the spacer; 63 – hydraulic motor; 64 – spacer, 65 – crankcase

Figure 27.2 - Winch

27-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – sliding clutch; 2 - brake pad; 3 - friction pad; 4 - bolt; 5 - plug; 6 - handle; 7 – nut

Figure 27.3 – Mechanism of turning on the drum

27.4 Winch block

There is a block in the ZIP kit of the machine that allows to increase the traction force of the winch
twice

In the transport position, the winch block is fixed on the outside of the machine body.
To lay the cable in block 8 (Figure 27.4), turn the hook with the traverse 90° relative to
go to the hoop and fold the earring 2.

1 - hook traverse; 2 - flip-up earring; 3 - earring finger; 4 - block clamp; 5 - axis of the block; 6 - oil pan press; 7 -
protective disc; 8 - block; 9 - nut; 10 - an earring; 11 - hook.

Figure 27.4 – Winch block

27-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

27.5 Winch maintenance

After each use of the winch, clean the rope from sand and mud, lubricate it
oil used for the engine, and put it in rows on the drum.

27.5.1 Changing the oil in the winch

To change the oil in the winch:

- turn out plug 20 (Figure 27.2) of the oil filling hole and plug 26 control
foot hole;

- loosen plug 54 of the oil drain hole and replace the container for draining oil;
- completely open the plug 54 of the oil drain hole and drain the oil into the stand
new capacity;

- close the drain hole, tighten plug 54 until failure;

- pour fresh oil through the oil filling hole up to the level of the lower edge of the cone
troll hole 26;
- put plugs 20 and 26 in place, tightening them until failure.
To fill the winch crankcase, you need ÿ 0.75 l of Galol M-4042TD or MT-16P oil
or TAp-15V.

27.6 Possible malfunctions of the winch

Table 27.1 – Possible malfunctions of the winch

Troubleshooting
malfunction The reason for the malfunction
method Install a
The winch drive is included, but Cut safety new key.
winch drum shaft no key in the winch drive.
rotates
Increased heating. Excess or lack of mass Bring the oil level up to the groove
la in the crankcase. small

27-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

28 LIVING SECURITY SYSTEM

The habitability system is designed to provide comfortable conditions

living quarters of the crew and the landing party in the product, both in the cold and in the hot season, by means of ventilation

ventilation, heating or cooling of the air in the occupied compartments of the product. It includes you

heating system, air conditioner installation and ventilation system, as well as heat and sound insulation.

28.1 Heating system

28.1.1 Composition of the heating system

The heating system is intended for heating the air in the living quarters and rooms

liver ego circulation. The source of heat in the system is the cooling liquid of the system

engine cooling. The layout of the system is shown in Figure 28.1.

The heating system includes three heaters. Heaters are installed: one in each room

the control line to the right of the driver's shield, and two in the landing compartment on the floor, u

right and left sides.

28.1.2 Design and operation of the heating system

Hot liquid from the engine cooling system through shut-off valves 4, 11 (Fig

point 28.1), enters the radiator 5 of the front heater and the rear heaters via the supply

hoses From the radiators of the heaters through the drain hoses, also through the faucets, liquid

returns to the engine cooling system. Thus, an opportunity is provided

isolate each radiator of each heater from the circuit of the cooling system, if applicable

damage The front heater is installed in rack 1, suspended from the top sheet

the nose of the car. An axial fan 7 is attached to the heater, on which the vehicle panel is installed

air vents 6. Four diffusers 3 are installed on it to ensure air distribution

mandir and driver. Plugs for dishes are provided on the supply pipes of the heaters

pouring air from radiators, when refueling the engine cooling system with liquid. Ass

these heaters are installed with the help of brackets on the floor of the landing compartment and the cover

you with casings 10 to avoid their damage.

28-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – rack; 2- traffic jam; 3 – diffuser; 4, 11 – shut-off valve; 5 – heater radiator; 6 – the panel of the air-dispensing wagon;
7 – fan; 8 – rear heater; 9 – drain plug; 10 – casing of the rear heater; 12, 13 - nozzles.

Figure 28.1 – Scheme of the heating system

The rear heater (Figure 28.2) includes a liquid radiator 6 through which
axial fan 3 provides air circulation. To ensure digestion
air from the radiator of the heater when filling the engine cooling system with liquid, v

the upper pipe has a fitting closed with a cover 4.

The efficiency of the heaters depends on the temperature of the liquid in the cooling system
air flow through them. For more efficient operation of the heaters, turn them on
them only after the engine warms up.

The heater fans are turned on by three-position toggle switches, ras

placed on the driver's dashboard, separately for the heater of the control unit and heaters
landing detachment. Depending on the working position of the tumblers, they are provided
press the maximum "1" and reduced "1/2" operating modes of the heater fans.
When draining the liquid from the engine cooling system, to eliminate the remaining liquid
in the radiators of the rear heaters, it is recommended to remove them from the seats and lift them up
20...30 cm. To drain the liquid from the pipeline and the front heater, there is a drain probe
ka 9, which is located above the hatch in the bottom of the product.

ATTENTION! In the summer period of operation, the heating system must be disconnected
from the engine cooling system by closing taps 4, 11 on the MTO partition in
the landing compartment, the floor in the control compartment and on the
engine cooling system pipelines in the MTO. Living conditions can be improved
by turning on heater fans.

28-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 - nozzle, 2 - fan connection block, 3 - fan, 4 - cover for venting the steam tank, 5 - heater body, 6 - heater
radiator.

Figure 28.2 - Rear heater

28.2 Air conditioner

28.2.1 Purpose of the conditioner

The installation of the air conditioner is designed to ensure comfortable micro conditions

The climate inside the dwelling is separated from the product in the hot season, by cooling and drying
air circulation or ventilation.

28.2.2 Composition and placement of the air conditioner

The installation of the air conditioner is a spaced steam-compression holo

a working unit with a compressor drive from the engine and consists (Figure 28.3) of the following
of the main parts:

- front evaporator 1;

- front evaporator fan 3;

- rear evaporator 14;

- compressor 6;

- air pipelines 9;

- capacitor compartment 12
- receiver-drier with pressure sensor 13;

- condenser unit with fans 11;

- 2 condensate collection tanks;

- hoses 7;

- air ducts 8.

28-3
 28 - 4
1–
front
evaporator;
2
tank
for
condensate
collection;
3
fan;
–
4
air
distribution
panel;
5
compressed
–
waste
belt;
6
compressor;
–
7
hoses;
8
air
–
duct;
9
air
–
pipeline;
10
diffuser;
–
11
condenser
–
block
with
fans;
12
condenser
–compartment;
13
fringes
–
ver-
dryer;
14
rear
–
evaporator;
15
remote
–
control
of
the
rear
evaporator.
Figure
28.3
-Layout
of
air
conditioner
units.
B1318E RE
Machine Translated by Google
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Evaporators are installed in the habitable compartments: the front one is in the control room, right
from the driver's shield, the rear - in the landing compartment on the wheel well on the left side and in front
designed for cooling or ventilation of air in living quarters. Front ispa
fan 1 (Figure 28.4) is installed in the rack 2, in front of the radiator of the heater 3, and is blown with
using a fan 4. To adjust the air direction on the air distribution panel
four diffusers are installed 5. To exclude freezing of the evaporator, on its side
thermostat 7 is installed on the wall. Rear evaporator 1 (Figure 28.5) is installed in rack 2, on
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ 3 for connecting air ducts. Air circulation
rez rear evaporator is provided with the help of fan 5. To provide regulation
air distribution directions, in the landing compartment on the ceiling and air distribution panels

diffusers are installed.

1 - front evaporator; 2 – rack; 3 - heater radiator; 4 – fan; 5 – diffuser; 6 – ras expansion valve; 7 -
thermostat.

Figure 28.4 - Front evaporator

1 – evaporator; 2 – evaporator casing; 3- pipelines; 4 – expansion valve; 5 – fan.

Figure 28.5 - Rear evaporator

28-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Compressor 3 (Figure 28.6) is installed in the MTO department on the gearbox of the drives
it is driven into rotation with the help of two V-belts - 4. belt tension is carried out
with the help of the tension mechanism 2. On the fittings of the hoses connected to the compressor
ÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ 1. The compressor is designed to ensure circulation of the refrigerant
and. Receiver - dryer - 5 is located in the power compartment on the frame of the power partition
compartment and is intended for cleaning the circulating coolant from water and mechanical ones

impurities The receiver-drier has a viewing window 6, with the help of which it is driven
monitoring the flow of refrigerant during the operation of the air conditioner.

1- filling fittings, 2 – belt tensioning mechanism, 3 – compressor; 4 – compressor drive belt, 5 – receiver – dryer, 6 –
viewing window.

Figure 28.6 - Compressor installation

The condenser unit with fans (Figure 28.7) is located in a compartment outside the body
pusa on the starboard side and is intended for refrigerant condensation. Includes two vents
lyator 2, connected using connectors 4, and two capacitors 3.
The pipelines are rubber reinforced hoses and stretched from is
vaporizers to the condenser and compressor.
Tanks for collecting condensate are installed under the evaporators and are intended for collection
condensate from evaporators.
Air ducts are intended for uniform distribution of air to the landing party.

28-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – diffuser; 2 – fan; 3 – condenser; 4 – fan connector.

Figure 28.7 Installation of capacitors

28.2.3 Air conditioner operation procedure

When one of the evaporators is turned on in the cooling mode, the electromagnet turns on
the clutch in the compressor pulley and the compressor is driven by means of the drive
belts from the engine of the product. It compresses the gaseous refrigerant and supplies it to the condenser,
where it condenses with the release of heat. Condensers transfer the generated heat to the outside
air blown through them with the help of fans.

The liquefied refrigerant passes through the receiver - dryer to the expansion valves
evaporators, as a result of the adjustable pressure drop, its expansion occurs, and so on
intensive absorption of heat in the evaporators, it again turns into a gaseous state.
Hot air from the living compartment is taken by the evaporator fans, passes through the
cut edges of evaporators, where it cools and dries, and is supplied through diffusers
back to the inhabited compartment. Condensate formed during air cooling, along the pipes
kam flows into condensate collection tanks.

28.2.4 Air conditioner operation control

Control of the air conditioner is carried out: front evaporator - three positions
with a toggle switch from the driver's panel (two-position flow rate adjustment is provided
air through the evaporator), the rear evaporator - with the handles located on the remote control (Fig
sunok 28.8) in the landing compartment, near the rear evaporator:
- the air flow control handle through the evaporator 3;
- temperature control handle 2.

28-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – rear evaporator control panel, 2 – temperature control handle, 3 – air flow control handle.

Figure 28.8 - Rear evaporator remote control

The direction of air distribution can be adjusted with the help of diffusers, spacers

lying on the air ducts in the ceiling of the landing compartment and on the air distribution system

perhaps for the front evaporator.

To turn on the front evaporator in the "Ventilation" mode (liquid supply tap from

the cooling system to the front heater must be blocked at the same time) is necessary

turn on the "HEATING CONTROL COMP" switch on the panel in one of the working positions

driver, to turn on the evaporator in the "Cooling" mode, it is necessary to turn on one of the

"FRONT AC" switch is set to work.

To turn on the rear evaporator in the "Ventilation" mode, it is necessary to turn the handle

to regulate the flow of air through the evaporator in one of the fixed positions in the

depending on the required intensity. To turn on the evaporator in the "Cooling" mode

then it is necessary to turn the temperature control handle clockwise

capacity of the required cooling capacity.

When turning on the air conditioner in the "Cooling" mode on the driver's panel dol

the symbol will be highlighted in blue .

ATTENTION! 1. Turning on the air conditioner in the "Cooling" mode is possible only when the engine of the product is
running, and it is necessary to first turn on the AZR on the protection unit. Also, the operation
of the air conditioner in the "Cooling" mode is blocked when the water jets are turned on, in
order to avoid damage to the condenser fans when overcoming water barriers. When blocking
the air conditioner,

symbol does not light up on the driver's panel.

2. If the air conditioner is blocked due to overheating, it is recommended to turn off one of the
evaporators of the air conditioner.

28-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

28.2.5 Filling the air conditioner

Necessary equipment and accessories for vacuuming, filling and con

Coolant circuit controller:
- vacuum pump (achievable vacuum no more than 10 Pa);
- leak detector (sensitivity not lower than 5 g/h);
- cylinder with refrigerant R134a;
- refrigerator oil for R134a;
- a collector with pressure gauges and hoses for measuring pressure from the suction side

high pressure (for refrigerant R134a);

- floor electronic scales (min. 20 kg, depth not lower than 0.02 kg);
- electronic thermometer (measurement range: from 1 to 50 °C).
To fill the air conditioner with refrigerant R134a, it is necessary to perform the following techniques
logical requirements for vacuuming, tightness testing, charging and slave testing
temperature capacity of the refrigerating circuit.

Filling the air conditioner with refrigerant is carried out at an air temperature of plus 15 °C
up to plus 40 °C. In the cold season, in the case of refueling the air conditioner, it is necessary
smoke to heat the room to the required temperature. When
filling the air conditioner for the first time, it is necessary to add ÿ 100 cm3 of refrigerant to the system
tar oil. Filling is done through a high-pressure hose.

28.2.5.1 General instructions

Moisture, air or other gases remaining in the refrigerant circuit can lead to
malfunctions of the system and will damage the parts of the air conditioner. Therefore, before filling it
it must be well dried and vacuumed (within min
mum 1 hour). This applies not only to the new air conditioner: after each repair, during
in which the refrigerant was discharged, these measures must be carried out.
The refrigerant has the property of evaporating through the smallest cracks, so the circuit,
to which it circulates, must be absolutely airtight. To avoid cold loss
genta, during vacuuming, the system should be checked for tightness.

28-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

28.2.5.2 Vacuuming

The procedure for vacuuming is as follows:

- connect the collector with pressure gauges 4 (Figure 28.9) to the compressor of the air conditioner
suction side (blue collector hose) and discharge side (red collector hose

Torah. Different diameters of connecting couplings exclude improper connection);

- connect the middle hose of the collector with pressure gauges to the vacuum pump 2;

- turn on the vacuum pump and open both manifold valves with manometers;

- when reaching a vacuum of about (0.9...1) bar, close both manifold valves manually

meters and turn off the vacuum pump. It will check the absence of a decrease in the current

10 minutes. If there is a drop in vacuum, it is necessary to eliminate the leak;

- if the system is airtight, then turn on the vacuum pump again, open both valves

manifold with pressure gauges and vacuum up to 1 bar. At the same time, the total time is empty

dying - not less than 1 hour;

- close the manifold valves 4 with manometers and turn off the vacuum pump.

- disconnect the hose from the vacuum pump.

1 - air conditioner compressor, 2 - vacuum pump, 3 - collector valves, 4 - collector with manometers.

Figure 28.9 - Connecting equipment for refueling.

28.2.5.3 Filling the system with refrigerant

Pre-filling

The amount of refrigerant in the circuit should be ~1.5 kg. Refueling of air conditioner hla

refrigerant must be produced until there are no bubbles in the refrigerant flow

(determined by observation through the viewing window on the receiver-drier during operation

air conditioner). Both excessively large and excessively small amounts of refrigerant are negative

strongly affects the operation of the system.

28-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Preliminary filling of the system is carried out simultaneously from the suction side

and from the injection side, for which it is necessary:

- connect the middle hose to the refrigerant cylinder, open the valve on the cylinder;

- loosen the threaded connection of the middle hose at the collector with pressure gauges, release it
air (within 2...3 seconds) and reconnect the ego;

- open shut-off valves LOW, HIGH and REF and let gas into the system, continuing for

filling to pressure equalization;

- the refrigerant must enter the system until the pressure in the cylinder and the system is not

is compared and the pressure readings on the manometer scale will no longer increase

sia The established pressure depends on the temperature of the surrounding air;

- close all manifold and cylinder valves.

Checking the circuit for tightness

With the help of a leak detector, check all possible places of leakage of refrigerant from

systems This includes the connection points of hoses to units and sealing areas

the top of the compressor.

If the leak was not detected, then the system can be filled further.

Final filling

To avoid damage to the compressor, the refrigerant must be supplied only from the outside

suction in a gaseous state, so the cylinder must be in a vertical position

laying with the valve up.

ATTENTION! If liquid refrigerant is supplied from the suction side (the cylinder is with the valve down), the compressor
may fail.

The final filling of the air conditioner with refrigerant is possible only when it is running

engine, for which it is necessary:

- start the engine and set the frequency crankshaft rotation

engine (2000 ± 100) min-1 ;

- turn on the air conditioner in the "Cooling" mode, turn on the "FRONT AC" switch (mode

maximum power) on the driver's dashboard and installed the air flow switch ÿ ÿÿ

the key of the cooling mode of the rear air cooler to extreme positions (maximum

power), while a banner must be displayed on the driver's panel ;

28-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- feed refrigerant in small portions, slightly opening the "LOW" valve.

The amount of refrigerant charged can be controlled using an electronic scale. Just a stream

the refrigerant will stop bubbling (determined by observation through the viewing window in the receiver

re-dryer, while the presence of individual bubbles in the refrigerant flow is allowed), which means that

the required amount of refrigerant is in the system. Both excessively large and excessively

a small amount of refrigerant has a negative effect on the operation of the air conditioner. At the end

after refueling, the pressure on the manifold manometers must correspond to the specified values

nym in table 28. 1. After refueling, it is necessary to disconnect the hoses of the collector

manometers from the air conditioner fittings and screw the seal onto the air conditioner fittings

new caps

28.2.5.4 Control of pressure parameters

The values of the working pressure should be controlled at an air temperature of plus

15 °C to plus 40 °C with a closed condenser compartment. At the same time, the fans of the evaporators

must work at maximum speed. In the cold season, in case of holding

editing or monitoring the operation of the air conditioner, it is necessary to warm the room to the required temperature

temperature

The values must correspond to those specified in table 28.1.

Table 28.1 - Dependence of refrigerant pressure during air conditioner operation on temperature
ambient air
Outdoor temperature, °ÿ Low pressure manometer, kgf/ High pressure manometer, kgf/
cm2 1.4±0.2 1.6±0.2 cm2 10±2 12±2
15 1.8±0.2 2.1±0.2
20 2.4±0.2 2.7±0.2
25 14±2
30 16±2
35 18±2
40 20±2

At the end of the pressure control, the control manometers should be dismantled and

cover the control holes on the compressor fittings with sealing caps.

If, during the pressure control, deviations of the actual values were established

cheny ot zadannykh, then this could happen for the reasons given in table 28.2.

28-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

28.2.5.5 Possible malfunctions and methods of their elimination

Table 28.2 – Possible malfunctions of the air conditioner and methods of their elimination.

Possible cause of Method of elimination

malfunction
malfunction malfunctions

Manometer for measuring vy Too little air passes through the Clean the capacitors, check the
juice pressure shows too high a capacitors or the blower fans do not operation of the fuel valve.
value: work.

There is too much refrigerant in the system Check the amount of refrigerant
the agent through the sight glass
a window

The receiver-drier is clogged. Replace the receiver-drier.

Manometer for measuring vy Insufficient amount of air conditioning Check the amount of refrigerant
juice pressure shows the agent through the sight glass
value too small: a window

The number of revolutions of the Check belt tension.

compressor is too low (for example,
due to slipping belts).

The compressor failed. Replace the compressor.

Manometer for measuring bottom The expansion valve is out of order. Replace the evaporator.
Whom pressure shows too much
value:
The number of revolutions of the Check belt tension.
compressor is too low (for example,
due to slipping belts).

The compressor failed. Replace the compressor.

Manometer for measuring bottom Throttle in the suction or pressure Check the absence of kinks in the
Whom the pressure shows hose (for example, due to a bent refrigerant hoses.
value too small: hose).

The expansion valve is out of order. Replace the evaporator.

Insufficient amount of air conditioning Check the amount of refrigerant

the agent through the sight glass
a window

Too little air passes through the Check the operation of the
evaporator. vaporizer valve.

28-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

28.2.5.6 Air conditioner maintenance

Even if the air conditioner is not used, to ensure lubrication of the compressor oil seal,

it is necessary to turn on the air conditioner in cooling mode at least once a month.

If the plates of the condensers or the evaporator are slightly dirty, they can be cleaned

blow compressed air in the direction opposite to the air exit from the system.

If the plate is heavily soiled or greasy, you should first wash it with soap

solution or a solution of a suitable detergent that does not affect honey

new and aluminum surfaces, and then additionally treat them with compressed air or

with a stream of water

The receiver-drier should be replaced once an hour. During maintenance work on the contour of the village

refrigerant, connected with refrigerant discharge, the receiver-drier should be replaced

necessarily The pressure sensor when replacing the receiver-drier is removed from the removable re

silver and set to a new one, at the same time it is necessary to reduce the time of the

tact of the receiver cavity with the surrounding air.

It is necessary to check the tension of the compressor drive belts at least once a month

(when a force of 4..5 kgf is applied to the belt, its deflection should be 15...20 mm).

28.3 Ventilation system

28.3.1 Composition and placement of the ventilation system

The ventilation system is designed to ensure the inflow of outside air into the living space

removable compartments, as well as extractions of powder gases from the landing compartment, formed during

shooting of landing forces from small arms.

The ventilation system (Figure 28.10) includes supply 1 and exhaust 2 valves

tori The supply fan is installed in the roof of the control compartment, the exhaust fan

installed in the roof of the landing compartment at the stern of the product.

28-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – supply fan; 2 – exhaust fan

Figure 28.10 - Ventilation system

28.3.2 Device and operation of the ventilation system

The supply fan (Figure 28.11) consists of an electric fan 7, an eccentric

mechanism with a cover opening handle 6, two clips 3, springs 5 and cover 4.
Nom fan is also installed air distribution box 1 with diffusers 2, for
ensuring regulation of the direction of incoming air. On the exhaust fan
A protective grille is installed on the air distribution box with diffusers.
The cover is designed to protect against the ingress of foreign objects and splinters
kov and pul. The cover opening device is intended for opening and fixing the cover,
the lifting of the cover is provided by springs 5.

1 – air distribution box; 2 - diffuser; 3 – clip; 4 – cover; 5 – spring; 6 – an eccentric forged mechanism with a
lid opening handle; 7 – electric fan.

Figure 28.11 - Supply fan

28-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The fans are turned on by turning on the toggle switches located next to each other
house with them, after opening the cover above the corresponding fan, while opening it

of the cover, it is necessary to move the handle of the cover opening mechanism 6 to the position
"OPEN" and fix it in the clip.

ATTENTION! When there is a threat of using a weapon of mass destruction, the lids must be
closed, the handles of the lid opening mechanisms in the "CLOSE" position
and fixed in the clips, the fans turned off. For ventilation of the living room, turn
on the filter ventilation unit in the "Filter ventilation" mode.

28.3.3 Possible malfunctions of the ventilation system and methods of their elimination

Table 28.3 - Possible malfunctions of the ventilation system and methods of their elimination
Possible cause of The method of
malfunction
malfunction eliminating the
When the fan is turned on, The fan cover is closed malfunction Move the
the sound of its operation is handle of the lid opening
heard, there is no air flow mechanism to the "OPEN" position.

The lid opening springs are If the rods do not rise

damaged when the cover is opened,
check the condition of the
springs, remove the
cover, if damaged
replace them

When the power switch is Circuit failure will connect Eliminate the malfunction
turned on, the fan does not nia connection diagrams.
turns on
Defective fan electric motor. Replace the electric valve
tor.

The impeller of the torus fan is Check the absence of

jammed. foreign objects in the place
of rotation of the fan
blades.

28-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

28.4 Heat and sound insulation

To reduce the temperature and noise level in the inhabited compartments of the armored personnel carrier on the interior

heat and sound insulation is installed on the walls of the MTO. Thermal insulation consists of screens

made of fiberglass and filled with kaolin fiber. Heat and sound insulation consists of

coating based on bitumen mastic with a layer of aluminum foil.

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – screens

Figure 28.12 - Installation of heat and sound insulation

28-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29 DRIVING A CAR

29.1 Safety measures when driving a car

The correct operation of the machine is ensured by the knowledge of the personnel of its device

regulations, maintenance rules, as well as the driver's assimilation of rules and techniques

driving cars Therefore, persons who have learned how to operate the machine are allowed to operate it

the documentation attached to the car, and those who have passed the driving license exam

by this machine.

While the car is moving, the driver must carefully watch the road ahead

shchey road (locality). Driving a car does not differ significantly from driving av

off-road vehicles. However, it is necessary to take into account the dimensions and specifics

the Czech shape of the car body when maneuvering, overcoming obstacles, narrow passages

etc.

The combat crew must have sufficient skills of boarding and disembarking at the car park

and during its movement. At the moment of landing, motorized riflemen must take hold of the central vertical
stand and put a foot on the step, personal weapons must be kept in the hand. When landing and

drop off in motion - the recommended speed of the car is no more than 5 km/h.

The combat module and weapon block must be locked. March is necessary

smoke, as a rule, with an unloaded weapon. When moving with a loaded weapon, it should

be directed only towards the target.

When preparing the machine for movement , it is PROHIBITED:

- when closing the hatch cover, hold the edge of the hatch with your hands;

- start movement with unlatched hatch covers;

When the machine is moving, it is PROHIBITED:

- open and partially open manhole covers without extreme necessity;

- place more people in the car than is provided for by the staff of the combat crew;

- be on the outside of the car body;

- transports property in the car that is not provided by the ZIP list;

- when signaling, be closer than 5 m ahead of a moving car;

- continue moving when visibility and orientation are lost.

When driving the car in a column, it is necessary to strictly adhere to the set speed limits

and the distance, they will overtake a stopped car only at the signal of the commander or the driver

At the stopped car, the lagging car should take its place in the column only at the end

novices and with the permission of the senior column commander.

29-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29.2 Preparing the machine for movement

Preparing the machine for movement consists in carrying out a control inspection of the machine

ny, starts and warms up the engine.

When preparing the machine for movement, it is necessary to perform the following work:

- make sure there are no leaks from the engine systems: fuel, lubrication and cooling, etc

hydraulic control systems and transmission lubricants, hydraulic systems. When a leak is detected, find out

the cause will be eliminated;

- check the refueling of the car with fuel (according to the instruments on the driver's dashboard), cooling

liquid (the distance to the upper cut under the cork should be on a cooled car

40...50 mm, on a hot car - 30...40 mm), motor (at least 20 l on the dipstick) and transmission

onnym (between the lines after double pumping, through the window) oils. If necessary

refill to the norm;

- check the operation of the working and parking brake systems;

- check the air pressure in the tires of the wheels (on a manometer, regulated with the help of

crane). If necessary, bring it to the level required by traffic conditions. Air co

leave forest cranes in the open position;

- check whether the corks are wrapped in the bottom of the machine and whether the water drain valve is closed

housing;

- check the correctness of the light signaling on the driver's dashboard (with the help of con

troll button on the shield);

- check the operation of outdoor lighting and alarm devices;

- check the correctness of the electric circuits to the pyro cartridges of air defense balloons and signals

pressure jams (indicators of both cylinders must light up on the PPO unit);

- check visibility through observation devices, their condition and mounting;

- turn on the intercom and make sure there is a connection between subscribers.

29.3 Preparing the engine for starting

29.3.1 Preparing the engine for starting at ambient air temperature

above 278 K (5°C)

To prepare the engine for starting at a higher ambient temperature

278 K (5°ÿ) it is necessary:

- make sure that the car is securely held in place by the parking brake;

- make sure that the handle of the manual fuel supply drive is in the "zero" position

vaya podacha", and the fuel supply pedal is released;

29-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- turn on the "SB" (battery) switch on the protection and switching unit;

- make sure that the "GB" AZR (automatic automatic transmission) is turned on on the fuse panel;

- make sure that the yellow indicator lights up on the driving mode selection panel

near the "N" button and the "N" banner on the panel of the remote control, which corresponds to switching on

neutral transmission in the gearbox;

ATTENTION! If the banner "N" on the display panel of the remote control does not light up, then the appara

The gearbox control system is faulty, and until the malfunction is eliminated, the movement of the steering wheel is stopped

it's impossible

- select the desired top group using the handle of the fuel distribution valve

rain tanks;

- open the tap of the autonomous torch heating system (located to the left of the driver

in the first wheelhouse below);

- set the manual fuel supply handle to the idling position;

- remove air from the fuel system. To do this, pump the fuel system manually

fuel pump to increase the resistance on the handle;

- turn on the gasoline centrifugal pump, for which there is a switch on the control panel

Set the "FUEL PUMP - SSS" switch to the "FUEL PUMP" position. At

the noise of the pump should be heard, and the indicator "FUEL

PUMP" (BCN). The pump must be turned on until the start-up is complete;

- turn on the oil injection pump, for which press and hold for 20...40 seconds

press the "OPP" (MZN) button on the control panel until the oil pressure in the engine lubrication system is at least

0.05 MPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 ). In the process of operation of the oil injection pump

press the fuel pedal all the way to the stop and back with a hold of 3...5 seconds in extreme positions

married Oil pressure control will be carried out when the fuel supply pedal is depressed according to the decree

calf on the driver's shield. At an oil temperature of more than 323 K (50°ÿ), the oil pressure was not regulated

is mentioned;

- 20...30 seconds before starting the engine, turn on the glow plugs with a short press

on the "GLOW PLUG" button on the control panel. About inclusion

of candles is signaled by the yellow indicator " GLOW PLUG" (GLOW PLUG) on

control panel.

After carrying out the above actions, you can start the engine.

29-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- turn on the "SB" (battery) switch on the protection and switching unit;

- make sure that the "GB" AZR (automatic automatic transmission) is turned on on the fuse panel;

- make sure that the yellow indicator lights up on the driving mode selection panel

near the "N" button and the "N" banner on the panel of the remote control, which corresponds to switching on

neutral transmission in the gearbox;

ATTENTION! If the banner "N" on the display panel of the remote control does not light up, then the appara

The gearbox control system is faulty, and until the malfunction is eliminated, the movement of the steering wheel is stopped

it's impossible

- select the desired top group using the handle of the fuel distribution valve

rain tanks;

- open the tap of the autonomous torch heating system (located to the left of the driver

in the first wheelhouse below);

- set the manual fuel supply handle to the idling position;

- remove air from the fuel system. To do this, pump the fuel system manually

fuel pump to increase the resistance on the handle;

- turn on the gasoline centrifugal pump, for which there is a switch on the control panel

Set the "FUEL PUMP - SSS" switch to the "FUEL PUMP" position. At

the noise of the pump should be heard, and the indicator "FUEL

PUMP" (BCN). The pump must be turned on until the start-up is complete;

- turn on the oil injection pump, for which press and hold for 20...40 seconds

press the "OPP" (MZN) button on the control panel until the oil pressure in the engine lubrication system is at least

0.05 MPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 ). In the process of operation of the oil injection pump

press the fuel pedal all the way to the stop and back with a hold of 3...5 seconds in extreme positions

married Oil pressure control will be carried out when the fuel supply pedal is depressed according to the decree

calf on the driver's shield. At an oil temperature of more than 323 K (50°ÿ), the oil pressure was not regulated

is mentioned;

- 20...30 seconds before starting the engine, turn on the glow plugs with a short press

on the "GLOW PLUG" button on the control panel. About inclusion

of candles is signaled by the yellow indicator " GLOW PLUG" (GLOW PLUG) on

control panel.

After carrying out the above actions, you can start the engine.

29-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29.3.2 Preparing the engine for starting at ambient air temperature

below 278 K (5°ÿ)

To prepare the engine for starting at a lower ambient air temperature

278 K (5°ÿ) and the use of oils AZMOL GARANT M-4042VT, Halol M-4042 TD, M-16ÿÿ-3
necessary:
- make sure that the car is securely held in place by the parking brake;
- make sure that the handle of the manual fuel supply drive is in the "zero" position
vaya podacha", and the fuel supply pedal is released;

- turn on the "SB" (battery) switch on the protection and switching unit;
- make sure that the "GB" AZR (automatic automatic transmission) is turned on on the fuse panel;

- make sure that the yellow indicator lights up on the driving mode selection panel
near the "N" button and the "N" banner on the panel of the remote control, which corresponds to switching on

neutral transmission in the gearbox;

ATTENTION! If the banner "N" on the display panel of the remote control does not light up, then the appara

The gearbox control system is faulty, and until the malfunction is eliminated, the movement of the steering wheel is stopped

it's impossible

- select the desired top group using the handle of the fuel distribution valve
rain tanks;
- open the tap of the autonomous torch heating system (located to the left of the driver
in the first wheelhouse below);

- set the manual fuel supply handle to the idling position;

- remove air from the fuel system. To do this, pump the fuel system manually
fuel pump to increase the resistance on the handle;

- unscrew the heater exhaust plug (the plug is located on the left side of the machine
we);
- make sure that the fuel valve of the heater for operation on gasoline is closed
(the faucet handle is turned clockwise to the stop);
- heat the coolant up to temperature with a heater
(360...365) K [(87...92)°ÿ].
ATTENTION! It is FORBIDDEN to start the heater if it is at water temperature
diator and compensation tank are not installed or the plugs are open.
To start the heater, you need:
- set the "FUEL PUMP–SSS" (ÿÿÿ-ÿÿÿ) switch on the control panel in the
"FUEL PUMP" position, while the noise of the pump should be heard, and on the control panel
the "FUEL PUMP" indicator should be lit;

29-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- turn on the heater candle, set the switch on the control panel

"MOTOR HEATER - PLUG MOTOR" to the "PLUG" position

(CANDLE). At the same time, the "PLUG" indicator on the control panel turns on. Time ra
candles for 2 to 3 minutes;
- after 2...3 minutes after turning on the candle, press and hold the switch
"PREHEATER START–SCAVENGING" on the remote control
control in the "PREHEATER START" position. At the same time
"PLUG", "FUEL PUMP", "MOTOR HEATER" indicators light up
HEATER TOR), "FUEL VALVE". The heater is on.
- after the appearance of stable combustion of the fuel-air mixture (determined by hearing),
holding the "PREHEATER START–SCAVENGING" switch
BLOWING) in the "PREHEATER START" position, transfer pe
switch "MOTOR HEATER–PLUG" (MOTOR HEATER-PLUG) from the position
"PLUG" to the "MOTOR HEATER" position. Indicator
"PLUG" turns off at the same time. Release the switch "PREHEATER START -
SCAVENGING" (STARTING THE HEATER-BLOWER).
Normal operation of the heater is characterized by an intense increase in temperature
ry of the cooling liquid and the color of the exhaust gases, which should be light in color
or colorless.
Continue the operation of the heater until the temperature of the cooling liquid is reached
(353...358) K [(80...85)°ÿ]. To stop the operation of the heater, a short time is necessary
but move the "PREHEATER START–SCAVENGING" switch
SCAVENGING) to the SCAVENGING position.
NOTE: When the coolant reaches a temperature of (360...365) K
(87...92)°C, the heater shut-off sensor is activated, and the heater automatically switches off
czech switches to SCAVENGING mode.
"MOTOR HEATER–PLUG" switch naho
it is in the "MOTOR HEATER" position, while the indicator light is on
"FUEL VALVE" goes out. Purging should be done within 30...60 seconds
kund (the evidence of removal of the remains of combustion products from the heater is white
color of exhaust gases). After completion of purging, switch "MOTOR HEATER–
PLUG" (HEATER-PLUG MOTOR) to the neutral position.
The engine is ready to start.

ATTENTION! At a temperature of the surrounding air below 243 K (minus 30°C) it produces
double heating, for which, after the first heating, wait 4...5 minutes for recovery

29-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

heat units and reheat the coolant to temperature

(360...365)K [(87...92)°ÿ.
NOTE. In the event of a sudden stop of the engine at a cooling temperature
of the liquid (383...388)K (110...115)°ÿ according to the sensor signal, the heater automatically
goes into SCAVENGING mode.
After the coolant has warmed up, it must be installed before driving
replace the heater exhaust plug.
If the heater fails to start, it is necessary to release the "PREHEATER" switch
START" (HEATER START) and move it to the "SCAVENGING" position (PRO
DUVKA). Purging should be carried out for 30...60 seconds (as evidenced by the removal of residues
the white color of the exhaust gas is the combustion product from the heater). After that, about
restart the heater, starting with the ignition of the candle for 2...3 minutes.
ATTENTION! If the lubrication system is filled with M-8V2C oil, then at temperature
ambient air higher than 263K (minus 10°ÿ), to reduce the time for preparation for launch
ku, it is allowed to start the engine without preheating the coolant.

29.4 Starting the engine using the starter (electric start)

To start the engine with the help of the starter after the procedure, depending on the temperature
rounds of ambient air, preparation is necessary:
- give a sound signal about starting the engine;
- press the "STARTER" button, and the starter will start turning the crank
ty engine shaft, regular flashes will appear in the cylinders, on the oil pressure indicator
an increase in oil pressure in the engine lubrication system will be observed.
As soon as the engine started working, release the STARTER button, at the same time
the engine oil pump will turn off. It will set the crankshaft rotation frequency to 1200...1400 min-1 .
Control of the engine operation will be carried out using the devices on the water board
calf.

Close the tap of the autonomous torch heating system.

Turn off the gasoline centrifugal pump, for which switch on the control panel
set the "FUEL PUMP - SSS" (BCN - TDA) to the neutral position.
The operating mode of the starter at start-up is short-term. The following modes are allowed
inclusions:

- the duration of one activation is no more than 7 seconds, while the starter should not be turned on
more than three times in a row with an interval between inclusions of no more than 15 seconds;

29-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- the duration of one switch-on is up to 15 seconds, while turning on the starter no longer
twice in a row with an interval between activations of at least 15 seconds;
- the duration of one activation is no more than 30 seconds at a temperature of no higher
293 K (20°C).

If the engine does not start, restart after 5...10 minutes.

If the engine fails to start, it is necessary to drain the oil from the engine crankcase
calf. For this, on the control panel, switch "ENGINE PUMPING-GB PRIME PUMP
ING" (ENGINE OIL EXHAUST-TRANSMISSION OIL EXHAUST) press and hold in the "EN
GINE PUMPING" (ENGINE OIL PUMPING) for 30...40 seconds. If the engine does not start
shut down, restart after 5 minutes. After two unsuccessful attempts to start
it is necessary to establish the cause of the malfunction and eliminate it.

29.5 Starting the engine using a starter and a high-pressure air system
(combined launch)

The engine is started by a combined method, if by an electric method

the engine does not start (discharged batteries), and also constantly - at
engine operation on gasoline and gasoline mixtures.

After the preparation of the engine for start-up for the combined start-up of the engine
necessary:

- open the valves of the cylinders of the high-pressure air system;

NOTE. The air pressure in the cylinders must be at least 7.0 MPa (70 kgf/cm2 ) at an ambient air
temperature of 278 K (5°ÿ) and higher and not less than 9.0 MPa (90 kgf/cm2 ) at an ambient air temperature
below 278 K (5°ÿ).
- give a sound signal about starting the engine;
- press the "STARTER" button on the control panel and after one second
press the lever on the high- pressure air system air starter valve. In the process of
with the starter, press the air starter lever 1...4 times for 2 seconds with an interval between the presses
for 7 seconds.
- as soon as the engine started working, release the STARTER button, the lever
do not press the air vent;

- set the crankshaft rotation frequency (1200...1400) min-1 . Work control

the engine is carried out according to the devices on the driver's dashboard.

- close the cylinder valves.

In the case of insufficient air pressure in the cylinders of the high pressure air system
it is allowed to perform a combined engine start with the help of an external device

29-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

of the combined engine starter, which is included in the group kit

ZIP

For combined engine start with the help of an external air device
necessary:
- deliver the external air device to the car and install it in the control compartment
nia in front of the left wheel niche;
- connect the hose of the device to the air supply fitting to the engine, beforehand
removed the plugs (the fitting is located on the left wheel niche in the control compartment);
- open the valves of the cylinders of the device (valves of the cylinders of the high air system
pressure should be closed).
- perform a combined engine start, as indicated above.
After starting the engine, close the device's cylinder valves, disconnect the device's hose
from the air supply fitting, close the fitting and the sleeve tip of the device with regular ones
plugs Deliver the external aerial device to the storage location. Charging the device
by air is performed by the forces and means of the operating organization.
If the engine fails to start, drain the oil from the engine crankcase. For this
th "ENGINE PUMPING–GB PRIME PUMPING" switch
on the control panel, press and hold in the "ENGINE PUMPING" position.
ENGINE) for 30...40 seconds. If the engine does not start, restart it
in 5 minutes. After two unsuccessful attempts to start, it is necessary to determine the cause of the failure
legality and will eliminate it.

29.6 Warming up the engine

The engine should be warmed up at idle (the engine crankshaft speed is 1200...1400 min-1 ) to
a temperature of the coolant and oil of 283...293 K (10...20°C). Then, increasing the rotation frequency
to 2000 min-1 , warm the engine up to temperature
ry 323 K (50°C). At this temperature, the machine is allowed to move in lower gears,
if the engine lubrication system is filled with AZMOL GARANT M-4042 VT oil, Halol M
4042 TD or M-16IHP-3. If the system is filled with M-8V2S oil, movement at lower gears
dachas are allowed after heating the coolant and oil to a temperature of 283 K
(10°C).
Movement in all gears is allowed after warming up the coolant and oil
up to a temperature of 348 K (75°C), if the lubrication system is filled with AZMOL GARANT M oil
4042 VT, Galol M-4042 TD or M-16ÿÿ-3. If the engine lubrication system is filled with oil
M-8V2S, then movement in all gears is allowed after warming up the cooling liquid and
oil up to a temperature of 323 K (50°C).

29-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ATTENTION! Operation of the engine without oil in the tank of the hydraulic system, which provides the slave

power steering system is PROHIBITED.

29.7 Stopping the engine

After running the engine under load, before stopping it, it is necessary to work in

for 2...3 minutes at idle speed (with the engine crankshaft speed 1200...1400 min-1 ), having previously

engaged the neutral gear in the gearbox. If the temperature of the cooling liquid does not exceed 388 K (115°ÿ)

by turning off the fuel supply

stop the engine.

If the engine is stopped for more than one hour, it is necessary to perform pumping

oils from the crankcases of the input gearbox and gearbox, for which:

- set the "ENGINE PUMPING–GB PRIME" switch on the control panel

PUMPING" (ENGINE PUMPING-GEAR PUMPING) to the "GB PRIME PUMPING" position (GEAR PUMPING)

and, holding it in this position, work for 1.0...1.5 minutes at engine crankshaft revolutions of 2400...2500 min-1 ;

- without changing the position of the switch, release the fuel supply pedal and set it

manual fuel supply handle to the "zero supply" position, stop the engine;

- release the "ENGINE PUMPING–GB PRIME PUMPING" switch

PICKUP KP);

- 5 minutes after stopping the engine, set the "ENGINE PUMP" switch

ING–GB PRIME PUMPING” (ENGINE PUMPING–TRANSMISSION PUMPING) to the “GB PRIME

PUMPING” and, holding it in this position, start the engine, run it for 1.0…1.5 min at 2400…2500 min-1
, and then stop the engine as instructed by you

what;

- release the "ENGINE PUMPING–GB PRIME PUMPING" switch

PICKUP KP).

To stop the engine for a short time (up to 1 hour) or at temperature

ambient air of 308 K (35°C) and higher may not cause oil to be pumped out of the transmission

see and stop the engine by releasing the fuel supply and transfer pedal

manual fuel supply handle to the "zero supply" position.

In case of spontaneous or forced stopping of the engine as a result of any

a problem when the temperature of the coolant is higher than 388K (115°C) and the pump has cooled down
the waiting liquid through the engine is not carried out by the heater (due to the exit from

system of the heater sensor or the heater itself), it is necessary 2...3 times, with an interval

2...3 minutes, crank the crankshafts with the starter motor without fuel

29-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

priming pump until the temperature of the coolant drops to

388K (115°C).

29.8 Control of the operation of the engine and its systems

Check when the engine is running, both during parking and when the car is moving
according to the readings of control devices, the temperature of the coolant in the cooling system
driving, oil temperature and pressure in the engine and transmission lubrication system, frequency

rotation of the engine crankshafts and the value of the charging current of the accumulator batteries.
The operating range of the displayed control devices is given in table 29.1:
Table 29.1

The range of changes in the operational frequency of engine crankshaft rotation, min-1 : - working
when working on diesel fuel (when working on gasoline and its mixtures) - recommended (at
maximum load) 800...2800 (1000...2800)
1950...2600
Operating temperature range of the coolant leaving the engine, K (°ÿ): operational: 348...393
(75...120) - for special coolant - for low-freezing liquid 348...373 (75...100) maximum, short-term
one hour), no more than: 403 (130) 378 (105) permissible (within

- for special coolant - for low-freezing liquid

minimum when driving in lower gears: - for special

coolant - for low-freezing liquid 323 (50)
283 (10)
Oil pressure in the engine lubrication system, MPa (kgf/cm2 ), not less than:
- at the engine crankshaft rotation frequency of 2600 min-1
- at the minimum
, no lessstable rotation frequency of 0.30 (3.00)
0.05 (0.5)
belt shafts of the engine

The working temperature range of the oil leaving the engine, K (°C):
operational: - on AZMOL GARANT M-4042 VT, Halol M-4042 TD, M-16ÿÿ-3
oils - on M-8ÿ2ÿ oil
348...393 (75...120)
348...373 (75...100)
maximum short-term (within one hour), no more than:
- on AZMOL GARANT M-4042 VT, Galol
M-4042 TD, M-16ÿÿ-3 oils - on M-8ÿ2ÿ oil 403 (130)
378 (105)
minimum when driving in lower gears: - on AZMOL
GARANT M-4042 VT, Galol M-4042 TD, M-16ÿÿ-3 323 (50)
oils - on M-8V2S oil Oil pressure in the transmission
hydraulic control and lubrication system, MPa (kgf/ 283 (10)
cm2 ) Working oil temperature range in the hydraulic control
0.25...0.35 (2.5...3.5)
and transmission lubrication system, K (°C): operational
maximum short-term

353... 383 (80...110)

403 (130)

29-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29.9 Driving the machine on land

When driving the machine on land, the following control modes can be used
Lena:

- automatic control mode ("D" mode). It is used when the car is moving along
paved roads and dirt roads in good condition. In this mode
movement begins with the 2nd gear;
- automatic control mode for severe driving conditions ("OFF" mode
ROAD"). It is used when driving the car on roads and off-road in heavy roads
conditions (potholes, bumps, mud, sand, etc.), when towing a second car. In this mode
movement begins with the 1st gear;
- mode of manual selection of gears in the full range with sequential switching
gears (mode M);
- emergency mode. It is used in case of failure of the gearbox control unit
gears In this mode, the car moves in 2nd gear with an unlocked hydraulic transmission
formator

29.9.1 Machine control in automatic mode

To start the car from a place in automatic mode ("D" mode) it is necessary:
- make sure that the handle of the manual fuel supply drive is set to the idle position
hundred march;

- squeeze the service brake pedal to the stop;

- remove the car from the parking brake by moving the handle of the brake valve to the pole position

zhenie corresponding to the debraked state of the car;

- depending on road conditions, select a gear in the transfer case;

- the "D" or "R" button on the drive mode selection panel will turn on the drive mode
forward or reverse respectively. At the same time, it lights up on the remote control near the pressed button
indicator: green near the "D" button or red near the "R" button, and on the dashboard
the letter "D" or "R" is displayed on the remote control display;

- release the service brake pedal (at the same time, the display of the remote control will be displayed
number 2, which corresponds to the 2nd gear) and, pressing the fuel pedal, start the movement.
To start the machine from the place in automatic mode for heavy driving conditions
nia ("OFF ROAD" mode) it is necessary:
- make sure that the handle of the manual fuel supply drive is set to the idle position
hundred march;

- squeeze the service brake pedal to the stop;

29-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- remove the car from the parking brake by moving the handle of the brake valve to the pole position

zhenie corresponding to the debraked state of the car;

- depending on road conditions, select a gear in the transfer case;

- use the "OFF ROAD" or "R" button on the driving mode selector to turn on the mode
forward or reverse motion, respectively. At the same time, on the remote control near the pressed button
the indicator lights up: green near the "OFF RAD" button or red near the button
key "R", and the letters "OR" or "R" are displayed on the display panel of the remote control ;

- release the service brake pedal (at the same time, the display of the remote control will be displayed
number 1, which corresponds to the 1st gear) and, pressing the fuel pedal, start the movement.
Shifting gears when the car is moving in automatic control mode
occurs at certain values of engine crankshaft rotation speed, hangs

depending on driving conditions and the position of the fuel pedal. When switching from one gear
on the other hand, the transmission number is displayed on the display panel of the remote control .

To switch to reverse mode ("R" mode), press the service brake pedal to the floor
stop the car (the letters "D" or "ÿÿ" must be lit on the display panel of the remote control ) ,
then press the "R" button (a red indicator will light up near the button, on the dashboard
dications of the remote control - the letter "R")

Braking of the machine in the automatic control mode is carried out manually
reduction of fuel supply and with the help of the working brake system. To stop the car
it is necessary to release the fuel pedal, press the brake pedal to a complete stop
machine and press the "N" button on the driving mode selection panel (it lights up next to the button
the indicator is yellow ).
When the car is moving, it is necessary to switch from the "D" mode to the "OFF ROAD" mode
press the "OFF ROAD" button on the driving mode selection panel, at the same time in the gear box
the dacha remains switched on and the gear on which the movement was carried out. Transition back to
"D" mode occurs when the "D" button is pressed.
To switch from "D" mode or "OFF ROAD" mode to manual control mode (ref
press "M") when the machine is moving, it is necessary to press the handle of the remote control to select mode two

press the button that turns on the manual control mode (at the same time, the button lights up
sia). In the gearbox, the gear on which the movement was carried out remains engaged
(1M...5M). The reverse transition to "D" or "OFF ROAD" mode occurs when re-starting
press the button (at the same time, the backlight turns off).

29-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29.9.2 Controlling the machine in manual mode

To start the car from a standstill in manual mode ("M" mode) it is necessary:

- make sure that the handle of the manual fuel supply drive is set to the idle position

hundred march;

- squeeze the service brake pedal to the stop;

- remove the car from the parking brake by moving the handle of the brake valve to the pole position

zhenie corresponding to the debraked state of the car;

- depending on road conditions, select a gear in the transfer case;

- select the mode with the "D" or "OFF ROAD" button on the driving mode selection panel

movements depending on road conditions. At the same time, on the remote control, near the pressed button, start

the green indicator near the "D" or "OFF ROAD" button is lit. On the handle there are scenes

on the remote control, press the button that includes the manual control mode, lighting will occur

buttons;

- release the service brake pedal and press the fuel supply pedal. If the button

"D" mode was selected when selecting the driving mode, then the display of the remote control is displayed

symbol "2M"; if the "OFF ROAD" mode is selected, then the display of the remote control is displayed

symbol "1M".

When the car is moving in manual control mode, gear shifting is in PE mode

make a short movement of the stage forward or backward.

Braking of the car in manual control mode is carried out by reducing it

fuel supply and with the help of the service brake system. It is necessary to stop the machine

release the fuel pedal, press the brake pedal until the car comes to a complete stop, that is

press the button to turn on the manual mode (at the same time, the backlight turns off), press the remote control

"N" button for driving mode selection (the yellow indicator lights up next to the button ).

29.9.3 Controlling the machine in emergency mode

To start the car from a standstill in emergency mode , it is necessary:

- make sure that the handle of the manual fuel supply drive is set to the idle position

hundred march;

- turn off the "GB" AZR protection network of the automatic transmission;

- squeeze the service brake pedal to the stop;

- remove the car from the parking brake by moving the handle of the brake valve to the pole position

zhenie corresponding to the debraked state of the car;

- depending on road conditions, select a gear in the transfer case;

29-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- open the cover above the emergency mode switch and select the mode with its help
"D" or "R" for forward or reverse, respectively;
- release the service brake pedal and, pressing the fuel supply pedal, start driving.
To switch to reverse mode ("R" mode) when the car is moving, you must
press the service brake pedal until the machine comes to a complete stop, then turn the toggle switch
emergency mode to the "R" position.
Braking of the car in the emergency control mode is carried out by a smaller path
fuel supply line and with the help of the service brake system. It is necessary to stop the machine
smoke, release the fuel pedal, set the emergency mode switch to neutral
position ("N") and smoothly braking with the service brake, stop the car.

29.9.4 Basic rules for driving a car on land

Moving machines from a place forward on a steep slope or a slope with loose soil
to produce in the "OFF ROAD" mode, turned on the downshift in the transfer case.
When starting the car from a standstill on steep and long descents, keeping the car stationary
no brake system, turn on the desired driving mode, after which remove the car from the car
spring brake. The movement is carried out by braking, if necessary, the slave car
than the brake when the fuel supply pedal is fully released. When braking the engine on a descent, do
not allow it to operate with a crankshaft rotation frequency higher than 2800 min-1 .

The procedure for starting a car from a place on a descent depends on the steepness of the descent, the condition of the soil, etc

obstacles in the way of movement. In all cases, descent in a lower gear is safer.
In order to avoid injury or damage due to the sudden start of the machine movement,
do not shift from neutral to reverse or forward when pressed
fuel supply pedals.

The speed of the car on roads and terrain with the presence of potholes, hard and dull
the side of the track must be lowered in a timely manner to avoid breakdowns and accidents. Does not allow

operation of the machine on land with a rotation frequency of the crankshaft of the engine higher than
2800 min-1 . When maneuvering , it is FORBIDDEN to keep the steering wheel in the extreme position

more than 15 seconds to avoid failure of the power steering pump.

When approaching a turn, it is necessary to reduce speed in advance and gradually
movement, reducing the frequency of rotation of the crankshafts of the engine. Not on sharp turns
allow sharp braking to avoid skidding. Do not make sharp and sharp turns
driving on sand, swampy areas and on an icy road, as well as on steep slopes
ups and downs.

29-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

If the car is stuck in deep sand, snow or mud, it will be possible to get out
car in swing. To do this, it is necessary to switch to the "OFF ROAD" mode. after that
as the car rolls forward as far as possible, press the service brake and hold it,
wait until the engine goes to idle speed. Then turn it on with the button
"R" on the control panel for selecting the driving mode, reverse, release the brake and moderately apply the gas,

roll the car back as far as possible. I turned it on again and holding the working brake until
wait until the engine idles, switch to the "OFF" mode
ROAD". Continue the procedure until the obstacle is overcome.
In those cases when the wheels are stuck or do not turn, it is not allowed to turn on
the engine at full power for more than 30 seconds both on the rear and front gears
cottages Working at full power for more than 30 seconds in such conditions will lead to overheating
oil in the hydraulic control system and transmission lubrication. If the oil is overheated, it is necessary
we can turn on the neutral gear and let the engine work for 2...3 minutes at the frequency
1500...2000 min-1, until the gearbox cools down. Control the temperature of the oil

pointer on the driver's dashboard.

When operating the machine at an ambient air temperature higher than 313 K (40 ° C)
monitors the readings of the coolant temperature indicator and the MAC indicator

simal temperature of the coolant red color If the alarm is lit

flashes or the temperature of the coolant has reached the limit ex
pluation value, necessary to maintain a normal temperature regime
the engine immediately shift to a lower gear in the gearbox.
The machine can be braked in the following ways;
a) in motion:
- the engine, reducing the fuel supply while driving the car with the transmission engaged;
- working brake system (when braking in an emergency mode, it is necessary to transfer
set the emergency mode switch to the neutral position);
- combined method - engine and working brake system;
b) in the parking lot - parking brake system.
The brake system should be used less often to slow down. Cha
standing and especially sharp braking leads to rapid wear and loss of slave efficiency
you brake mechanisms and tires.

On a slippery road, it brakes in a combined manner smoothly, in several steps. At

sharp braking on a slippery road may cause skidding, which can lead to an accident. At
when skidding begins, immediately stop braking and turn the steering wheel to the side

drift When skidding while braking the engine on a slippery road, gently press the pedal
fuel supply (thereby stopping engine braking) until the skid stops.

29-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

In all cases of movement, brake smoothly, without jerks, do not allow the wheels to slip
"use".

In emergency situations, when the working brake system fails, it is allowed

use a parking brake system instead of a working one, while the intensity of the brake
zheniya depends on the angle of rotation of the handle of the brake valve.

To stop the car on a slippery road, brake the car with a combined spo
by yourself (with the engine and service brake), reduce the speed to the minimum and, using the slave
with the brake, stop the car completely, after pressing the "N" button, turn it on
neutral gear.
After stopping on an uphill, downhill or flat section, the car must be stopped
equipped with a parking brake system.
In the event of a sudden need to stop the car on a good, dry road
you need to release the fuel pedal and, sharply pressing the service brake pedal, stop
car
It is necessary to always take measures to prevent the sudden start of the machine.
It is FORBIDDEN under any conditions to leave the car with the engine running, if
the neutral gear is not engaged (the "N" indicator should be lit) and the parking gear is not engaged
brake The effort of the parking brake may not be enough to hold the machine while it is running
the engine and the gear in the gearbox.

29.9.5 Gear shifting in the transfer case

To switch gears in the transfer case, you need:

- stop the car by pressing the service brake pedal;
- depending on driving conditions, choose an up or down gear,
pressed one of the "H" or "L" buttons on the driver's instrument panel. To turn on neutral
transmission, press the "N" button. At the same time, the corresponding button is displayed next to the pressed button

indicator The inclusion of neutral gear "N" in the transmission gear is possible only from
provisions "L".

- after the necessary indicator lights up, release the dispenser control button
gearbox and service brake pedal.
ATTENTION! There is NO gear shifting in the transfer case when the car is moving
ALLOWED

29-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29.9.6 Driving a car in difficult road conditions

When driving the car in difficult road conditions, engage the lower gear
in the transfer box only when overcoming difficult and slippery sections of the track,
steep climbs, natural and artificial obstacles.
When driving the car on roads and terrain with the presence of natural and artificial
the driver must show maximum attention and caution to these obstacles. If the lawsuit
if the situation is bad, then before overcoming the obstacle, it is necessary to get out of the car, carefully
examine it thoroughly and choose the best place and the most expedient method of its preparation
overcoming It is necessary to overcome obstacles, as a rule, at a right angle, smoothly, without sharp
hit, do not stop the car immediately before the obstacle, on it and immediately after it

overcoming

The machine is equipped with a system of centralized tire pressure regulation

with an air reducer of semi-automatic action. Skillful use of this system
increases the passability of the car when overcoming hard-to-pass sections of the terrain and

water barriers On wet muddy dirt roads, on swampy and sandy roads
areas, snowy virgin land, it is necessary to regulate the air pressure in the tires in accordance with p
by the density of the soil of the section of the track to be overcome.

ATTENTION! The machine must be operated only with open air wheels
cranes.
Loose sands, warm wetlands, banks of rivers and reservoirs with a muddy layer
soil, deeply soaked areas of arable land (especially in the autumn-spring period of the year), snow
virgin land with a snow layer depth of more than 0.4 m must be overcome at the minimum allowable pressure

tires, i.e. 150 kPa (1.5 kg/cm²).

Similar sections of the road with a higher density of the surface layer of the soil, steep
long climbs, as well as terrain with the presence of frequently encountered natural and iskus

to overcome natural obstacles in the form of ditches, ditches, trenches, with tire pressure
150...350 kPa (1.5...3.5 kg/cm²). It is necessary to take into account that on slippery roads (with wet
with a thin surface layer on a solid base) reducing tire pressure does not work
positive results, but, on the contrary, leads to skidding and jerking of the machine. In these cases
where it is required to set a maximum tire pressure of 520 kPa (5.2 kg/cm²).
It should be kept in mind that the pressure in the tires at high outside temperatures or
long-term movement can be raised for a short time, so this should not be the case either

use an air reducer to adjust tire pressure.

The speed of the car when driving with reduced air pressure in the tires is necessary
limit It should be no more than 20 km/h at a pressure of 150 kPa (1.5 kg/cm²), no more

29-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

30 km/h - at a pressure of 150...350 kPa (1.5...3.5 kg/cm²). At a pressure of 350...520 kPa

(3.5...5.2 kg/cm²) for the period of tire inflation after overcoming difficult sections of the track speed
the car must not exceed 40 km/h.

At speeds of up to 100 km/h, the car can move without a time limit from pressure
em in tires 520 kPa (5.2 kg/cm²) at an ambient temperature of 318 K (45ºÿ).
Continuous movement of the car with speeds of 100...110 km/h and pressure in the tires
520 kPa (5.2 kg/cm²) is allowed for 50 minutes without adjusting the air pressure in
tires and at ambient air temperature not higher than 318 K (45ºÿ), after which within one
the speed of the car should not exceed 100 km/h.
Night vision devices provide driving at night with speeds that
allow to distinguish road conditions and terrain. Image of the area and objects, found
coming into the field of vision in the glasses of the device turns out to be of the same color, but of different brightness and contrast

they are different in color from the images usually perceived by the eye. Speeds of movement with devices
at night largely depends on the skills of the driver. Therefore, a driver working with night devices
the visionary must acquire practical skills in object recognition.

Driving the car on dirt roads and in forested and swampy areas

Dirt roads on clay and chernozem soils with wetting of only the top
layer of soil, represent the danger of skidding and lateral sliding for the machine. Especially
difficult movement on slippery profiled roads. When driving on such roads
gam set the maximum air pressure in the tires to 520 kPa (5.2 kg/cm²), choose for
movement of horizontal sections, roadsides, and also use the previously laid track
or move cautiously along the ridge of the road.
When driving the car on broken, bumpy roads, avoid strong rocking
tires and hard impacts, timely reduce the speed of the car and move smoothly

reap through bumps and various obstacles.

Massifs of solid forest pass through clearings and forest roads or go around
down When driving through the bush, if possible, reduce speed and watch carefully
in terms of terrain and vegetation ahead, as there may be stumps, pits, stones, etc. in the bush.
Stumps, stones and other obstacles that do not reach the clearance of the machine in height, as well as

a track with a depth equal to or greater than the clearance is passed between the wheels. Prepyat
objects equal to or greater than the car's ground clearance will be bypassed.

When moving in a column through a wooded area, follow the trail of the vehicle in front of you.
3 waterlogged areas are bypassed if possible. If bypassing is impossible, then overcome
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ after a thorough exploration.

29-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Swampy areas of the locality to be overcome, as a rule, in the lower ranges in ko

gears, when the downshift in the transfer case is engaged.
Overcoming areas with deeply wet and sticky soil when sopro
the sensitivity to the movement of the machine is especially great, to produce in the lower ranges of gears
gearbox, which lowers the gear in the transfer case and the minimum pressure of the vehicle
tire pressure - 150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm2 ).
When driving through a swampy area, keep the established speed, not allowed
what a rush, and even more stops. If it is necessary to stop, then for this purpose choose at
a hill or a drier place.
It is difficult to resume movement after stopping the car in a swampy area, because
moving on such soil requires a lot of traction. This is an effort, passing on ot
wheels on the ground, causes the breakdown of the sod layer (the top layer of the soil) and leads to a loss of traction

wheels with soil and the car getting stuck. Therefore, they will begin to move along the swampy lot
ku with a smooth supply of fuel, preventing wheel skidding. As soon as the skid starts
wheels, press the service brake, take your foot off the fuel pedal and switch to neutral
gear, and then engage reverse gear.
If the skidding occurs again when reversing, immediately place the wheels under the wheels
new material in order to increase the grip of the wheels with the ground and ensure the movement of the machine.

Do not make sharp and sharp turns in swampy areas. It is necessary to take into account in advance
the need to turn and make it smoothly, with a large radius. Such a turn does not reduce
the speed of the machine and excludes the possibility of tearing off the turf and skidding.

When moving in a convoy through a swampy area, do not follow the trail in front of you
other cars If it is impossible to overcome the swampy area on your own, use it
winch

Driving a car on a desert-sand area

When driving a car on a desert-sandy terrain, it is necessary to turn off, if possible

areas with hard soil or vegetation should be used for movement. Soggy salt
Chalky and clayey areas, as a rule, are bypassed or overcome after the preliminary one
intelligence

When the air is very dusty, move the column in such a way that the water
the body of the car moving behind was clinging to the edge of the dust cloud. When passing through thick dust

the strips will avoid turns and move in the previously chosen direction.
Sandy areas should be covered, as a rule, with reduced tire pressure. Plots
with dry loose sand, especially when there are lifts, descents, tents, to overcome

29-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the minimum allowable pressure in the tires is 150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm2 ), and areas with raw dense sand - at a

pressure of 350 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2 ).

Movement on the sand should be carried out at the highest possible speeds, pre

waterproof tents and short sandy hikes. At the same time, the speed of movement should not

exceed the allowable one for the selected tire pressure.

On particularly difficult sections of the track, when the speed drops, wheel slippage is not allowed.

When skidding begins, take your foot off the fuel pedal and engage neutral gear

in turn, put the car back for acceleration and try to overcome a difficult section on the move.

It is necessary to observe the smoothness of movement, avoiding jerks and sudden stops. turn around

you produce smoothly with a large radius.

When moving in a column on the sand, move in the wake of the car ahead at a distance

tsi 40...50 m. The distance is necessary so that the car in front could, at

if necessary, pass back to overcome a difficult section with acceleration.

Driving a car in a mountainous area

Driving a car on roads with steep climbs, descents and turns requires that

the driver's increased attention and speed of action.

When driving on a mountain road, the car must be pressed to the side as much as possible,

on the opposite side of the cliff, and carefully observe the movement of the car in front.

Turn on the necessary gear in the transfer case in advance, before starting

lifting Short climbs, if the road allows, should be overcome with acceleration, not transition

thanks to a lower gear. Steep climbs should be overcome, if possible, at a right angle

along a straight path, since overcoming them diagonally with a roll reduces the traction of the wheels. For because

less confident overcoming of a steep, prolonged, with weak ground, to reduce the pressure

air in tires up to 150 kPa (1.5 kg/cm²).

If the engine stops while lifting and the machine begins to roll back, it is necessary
mo:

- brake the car with the working brake system to a complete stop;

- brake the car with the parking brake system and smoothly release the slave pedal

whose braking system;

- turn on the neutral gear in the gearbox, for which press the "N" button on

remote control to select the driving mode and start the engine;

- turned on the necessary driving mode ("OFF ROAD" or "M") and transmission to the distributor

hey box, keep moving forward.

If it is impossible to overcome the lift on your own, use a winch.

29-20
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

When approaching a long descent (longer than 50 m), estimate its steepness,
turn on the necessary gear in the transfer case and then overcome it, slow down
live car If on the descent with the selected gear and the pedal fully released, it will stop
whether the car will move with acceleration and engine crankshaft revolutions above 2800 min-1
, then you need to brake the car more energetically with the help of the working tor
brain system

ATTENTION! It is STRICTLY FORBIDDEN to roll down the slope, if in

The gear shifter is in neutral gear.
When overcoming steep and slippery uphills (downhills), the car driving behind should not
start moving uphill (downhill) until the car in front overtakes it. If, Pre
odolevaya lift, the car began to slide back and braking does not ensure its stop, neb
in emergency situations, avoiding acceleration, direct the car to a ledge of a rock or another place
ny object that can stop the car, preventing, if possible, a strong impact, ko
that can cause damage to the machine.
On sharp turns (especially on serpentines), if the car will not be turned in one go
succeeded, turn it alternately in reverse and forward motion at the command of the commander (senior
cars).
When driving off-road in mountainous conditions, it is necessary to choose the direction of village
with the smallest angles of elevation (descent, roll) and the smallest number of stones. When it is impossible

to bypass individual stones and overcome them by running over the wheels of one side, and the wheels of the other side

will be directed to the free part of the path. It is possible to avoid hitting the bottom against stones and stumps

his injuries. It is preferable on shallow snow cover, on uphills, downhills and slopes
it is better to choose for movement areas covered with vegetation, with wet soil - stones
empty areas, and when overcoming icy areas - areas with snow cover. Before
by overcoming sections of the road with landslides and scree, they will be explored, determine the possibility of movement

on them and, if necessary, clean up.

To stop the car, it is necessary to choose, if possible, safe places, with name
with the same angle of elevation (descent, roll) and with hard ground. When stopping the machine on a rise or

will turn on the neutral gear in the gearbox and brake the car in the parking lot
brain system. In both cases, it is necessary to put stones or logs under the wheels. Didn't stay
pour the car near gorges, on narrow roads, at sharp turns and in places of probable landslides.
On long descents, do not turn off the engine to avoid complete exhaustion of the compressed air
of air in the air cylinder during frequent braking, carefully monitors the readings of the manometer of
the air cylinder, not allowing the pressure in it to drop below 550 kPa (5.5 kgf/cm2 ).
IT IS FORBIDDEN to turn off the engine while coasting.

29-21
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

ATTENTION! When driving in the mountains, special attention should be paid to the temperature regime

boots the engine and transmission, preventing them from overheating.

Overcoming the moat and wall

The approach of the trench is carried out at an angle of 90° in the lower gear in the gearbox and

low gear in the transfer case. At the moment of contact with the front wheels of the opposite

on the right side of the ditch, gradually increase the fuel supply and move to the opposite side

moat

The approach to the vertical wall should be made at an angle of 90° in the lowest gear in the box

gear and downshift in the transfer case. After the front wheels are braided

the walls need to increase the fuel supply as you climb the wall. When you wave

on will pass through the wall (the nose part will start moving down), reduce the fuel supply and

smoothly lower the front part to the ground, braking the car with the service brake and drive away

obstacles.

29.10 Rules for driving a car afloat

ATTENTION! Movement of the machine afloat is carried out only in the manual control mode

gear box (mode "M").

At the height of the wave, there is a water barrier that prevents the driver from seeing through the front

glass and device TNPO-168B, correction of the control of the movement of the machine is produced by the company

mandir, issuing the appropriate commands over the intercom.

29.10.1 Actions of the driver when preparing the car to float

It is necessary to predict the overcoming of the water barrier, in advance, during the control

inspection at the stop, carry out the following work:

1. Check the closing of the embrasures for automatic machines, the presence and tightness of the plugs, etc

versts and bolts for fastening hatches to the bottom of the machine;

2. Check the closure of the water drain valve from the housing, for which turn the handwheel

the valve as far as it will go clockwise. The water drain valve is located behind the fourth bridge on

on the right side of the car. Access to the handwheel of the drain valve is carried out through the quick release

ny hatch in the floor of the combat compartment;

29-22
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

3. On a stationary machine, check the inclusion and operation of the water supply drive, for
what:

- check the oil level in the tank of the hydraulic system of the hydraulic drive, which is due
be between lines on the dipstick;
- start the engine;

- squeeze the brake pedal;

- turn on the neutral gear in the transfer case;

- on the driver's dashboard, the switch for the operation of the gearbox of the water-flow propulsion drive

set "WATER JETS" to the "ON" position, while on

the driver's shield lights up the indicator of the operation of the gearbox of the hydraulic drive

pale color ;
- the "HYDROSYSTEM" switch (HYDRO SYSTEM OF THE ENGINE) is set
screw to the "ON" position;
- turn on the manual gearbox control mode;
- engage the 4th gear in the gearbox;
- turn the "WATER JETS" switch on the driver's panel to
position "F" (FORWARD);
- set the engine crankshaft speed in the range of 2300...2400 rpm.
- slowly turn the handle of the "WATER SPEED" swimming speed regulator (SPEED
FLOAT) on the driver's shield clockwise as far as it will go (the propeller screws must
rotates in different directions: the left screw is clockwise, the right screw is counterclockwise
ky) and let the water mover work idling. Check the readings of the monovacuum meter
installed on the filter of the hydraulic system. The arrow of the device should be in green
zone If the arrow is in the red zone, the filter element or filter must be replaced.
ATTENTION! The operation of the water-flow mover is idling (out of water) at temperature
ambient air below 303 K (30°ÿ) is allowed for no more than 20 minutes, and at a temperature
ambient air above 303 K (30°ÿ) - no more than 10 minutes. At ambient temperature
air below 268 K (minus 5°ÿ) the operation of the water supply drive is PROHIBITED .
ATTENTION! The operation of the hydraulic motor with the reverse gear engaged
FORBIDDEN.
- turn the steering wheel first to the left: the left screw must first stop, and then
the volume begins to rotate in the opposite direction. When turning the steering wheel to the right, the right screw

must stop, and then start rotating in the opposite direction. After returning to the steering wheel
wheel to its original position, the steering wheel position indicator lights up on the driver's dashboard

green wheel ;

29-23
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- switch the mode switch of the "WATER JETS" water jet propulsion system (VO

INCOME ENGINES) in the middle position. After stopping the screws (control visually)

move the "WATER JETS" switch to the "R" (BACK) position,

at the same time, the screws must rotate in the direction opposite to the previous direction of movement

nia;

ATTENTION! When carrying out work on the inspection of the water pump, the alarm

red color (WATER ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE)

should not shine.

- install the "II AXLE" switches on the driver 's dashboard (DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

2ND AXLE ), "III AXLE" (3RD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK) and "TS" (BLOCKS

DIFFERENTIAL GROOVE RK) to the "ON" position . At the same time, on the information board

the driver's shield should light up the corresponding warning lights;

- check the operation of the wave-reflecting shield when the engine is running, for which ras

stops the wave-reflecting shield by switching the left and right locking couplings to the non-working position
position Install the TRIM VANE switch on the driver's dashboard

to the "UP" position and hold it in this position. The shield should rise fully

by the way Lower the wave-reflecting shield, set and hold the switch "TRIM

VANE" (WAVE REFLECTOR) in the "DOWN" position.

4. Check the operation of the water pumping pumps by ear, turn on the switch on the driver's panel

water pump parts from the "FRONT WATER PUMP" control unit and the motor

transmission compartment "PPC WATER PUMP".

5. Make sure that the TNPO-168B surveillance device is installed on the car. If the device is not

established, establish ego according to clause 11.2;

6. If the height of the wave of the water barrier is more than 0.5 m, install the air intake pipes on the fil

troventilation installation and air cleaner (see clause 4.2.1 and figure 12.13).

7. Close the side and rear doors.

8. Put on life jackets.

When approaching a water barrier, on the move, set the air pressure in the tires to 150 kPa

(1.5 kgf/cm2 ). At the same time, it is recommended to lower the air pressure in advance so that

the tire approached the shore with the specified air pressure and could immediately enter the water. take into account

that it takes 5...6 minutes to reduce the air pressure in the tires using the air reducer from 520 kPa (5.2 kgf/m2 ) to

150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm2 ), and when using the emergency crane

air release - 2.5...3 minutes.

Enter the water taking into account the state of the shore and its soil, the presence of shoals near the shore, etc

steep descent, preferably perpendicular to the water's edge at a speed of 5...10 km/h.

29-24
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Immediately before entering the water, you must:

- check the closing of the side and rear doors;
- turn on the downshift in the transfer case;
- on the driver's panel, install the water-flow propulsion mode switch
"WATER JETS" (WATER INLET. ENGINES) to the "F" (FORWARD) position;
- raise the wave-reflecting shield, for which the "TRIM VANE" switch (FREE
REFLECTOR) on the driver's dashboard, set it to the "UP" position and hold it
this position In the case of overcoming narrow and shallow water barriers, wave reflections are raised
a body shield is optional. If it is necessary to enter the water at a speed of more than 10 km/h, do not
raise the wave-reflecting shield to avoid damage to the stops of the wave-reflecting levers
body shield;

- turn on water pumping pumps.

- turn on the mode of manual gear selection ("M" mode), first or second gear and
start moving towards water.

Do not stop the car when entering the water until it is afloat.

29.10.2 Rules for driving a car on water

After the car's wheels come off the ground, release the fuel pedal, incl
put the neutral gear in the gearbox, press the brake pedal, turn on the neutral gear
gear in the transfer case and from 1st to 4th gear in the gearbox.
Speed control is provided by switching to the manual gearbox
gears from 1st to 4th or by changing the position of the knob of the water speed regulator "WATER
SPEED" on the driver's dashboard.
The maximum speed of movement is provided at the frequency of rotation of the crankshaft
engine speed 2300...2400 min-1 and the position of the handle of the float speed regulator "WATER
SPEED" (SPEED OF SWIMMING), turned clockwise as far as it will go.
IT IS PROHIBITED! Operation of the machine on water with the frequency of rotation of the crankshaft
engine over 2400 min-1 .

For reverse, the "WATER JETS" switch on

set the driver's shield to the "R" (BACK) position.
Turning is carried out with the help of the steering wheel. Minimum turning radius to
when turning the steering wheel to the left or right, it reaches the stop.

When the car hits shallow water, when the water-borne engine cannot move
the machine is leveled, it is necessary to install the switch of the gearbox of the drive of the water hose
"WATER JETS" to the "OFF" position, release the pedal

29-25
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

fuel supply, depress the brake pedal and, having switched on the reduced gear in the transfer box,
and in the gearbox - 1st or 2nd gear, try to overcome the obstacle. If this is not the case
may try to swing the car, including alternating forward and reverse gears

gearbox. Carry out rocking until the car leaves the ground. Then the necessities
it is possible to install the switch of the gearbox of the drive of the "WATER JETS" water-flow engine (VO
INCOME ENGINES) to the "ON" position and continue the movement with the help of the water hose
drive and wheels until the car reaches deep water. It will turn on in deep water
neutral gear in the transfer case and 4th gear in the gearbox.

29.10.3 Actions of the driver when the car leaves the water

When choosing a place to get out of the water, they are guided by the same considerations, ÿÿÿ ÿ
when entering the water, the only difference is that the steepness of the shore will make it difficult for the car to exit.

A steep bank with dense soil should be preferred to a gentle one with warm and muddy soil
soil
When approaching the shore, turn on the neutral gear in the gearbox and lower gear
transmission in the transfer case. Accelerate the car afloat as fast as possible
sty, turned on the necessary gear in the gearbox (from 1st to 4th). Before touching pe
of the ground wheels, turn on the 1st gear in the gearbox and drive to the shore.
The car will be directed perpendicular to the coast line - this reduces the probability of storms
given rolls and skids. In no case do not stop the car until all wheels come out
dense soil
If the wheels slip when going to a steep bank, immediately, preventing them from getting stuck in the ground

that, turn on the reverse gear in the gearbox, drive into deep water on its own track and select no
your place of exit from the water.

If it is impossible to go ashore under your own power, use a winch. In this case, yes
slowly in the direction of the exit, choose a tree or another object and fasten the rope to it
troubles with the block. If the hatch of the winch is in the water, pulling the machine ashore will be carried out with help

winch of the second machine on the shore.

After going ashore, set the "WATER JETS" switch on the driver 's dashboard (VO
INCOME ENGINES) in the middle position, and the knob of the speed regulator floats "WATER
SPEED" (SPEED OF SWIMMING) is turned counterclockwise as far as it will go. Switch
"HYDROSYSTEM" (HYDROSYSTEM WATER INLET. ENGINE) set in position
"OFF" (OFF).
Lowers the wave-reflecting shield, for which the "TRIM VANE" toggle switch (WAVE-REFLECTION
TEL) on the driver's dashboard should be set to the "DOWN" position and held until fully

29-26
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

th lowering of the shield. The listed works can be performed without stopping the machine. If there is
possibility, stop the car on a horizontal section and drain the water that has penetrated into the body

rez drain valve. Carry out an external inspection of the machine for the absence of damage.
Locks the wave-reflecting shield with the help of the left and right locking clutches.
If it is impossible to stop the car immediately after reaching land, drain the water from the hull
to be carried out in motion, and the inspection to be carried out at the first stop. If they were in the car
air intake pipes are installed, then after leaving the shore, if possible, remove them
and put in the transport position.

Drains water from headlights and parking lights.

If necessary, install the "II AXLE" switches (DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

2ND AXLE DIFFERENTIAL), "III AXLE" (3RD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK) and
"TS" (RC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK) to the "OFF" position. At the same time, on the shoulder
the driver must extinguish the corresponding warning lights.

29.11 Car towing

The towing of the car is usually done by the same type of car, which has an analog
technical means of towing. If the car is used as a tractor, then it is owed
"OFF ROAD" mode or manual control mode ("M" mode) should be enabled.
ATTENTION! Before towing, be sure to disconnect the wheels and gearbox
of the towed car, turned on the neutral gear in the transfer case. On the contrary
otherwise, the gearbox can be damaged.

29.11.1. Car towing on land

Two towing hooks in the bow are used to tow the car on land
hull and pin-type towing device in the aft part of the hull. Towing
is carried out with the help of tow ropes (Figure 29.1) or a rigid hitch (Figure
night 29.2).

ATTENTION! For towing cars on land, it is forbidden to use it as a beech tree

cheese hooks, mooring hooks in the stern of the machine.
Before towing, check the condition of the steering, brake systems, and running gear
the howl of a towed car part.
It is allowed to tow a car with a working steering wheel with towing ropes
control and working brake system and only on roads with a hard surface.

29-27
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – towing device; 2 – towing ropes; 3 – towing hooks Figure. 29.1 – Towing

the car using tow ropes

Towing a car with an inoperative engine and, as a result, inoperative vehicles

with left steering and brakes should be performed only with the use of a hard tow
no clutch

The connection of the rods of the rigid towing hitch should be made with the help of transitional parts
lei: two earrings 6; two brackets 7; two bolts 9.

1 – towing device; 2 – ring; 3 – traction; 4 – finger; 5 – cross; 6 – an earring; 7 – bracket; 8 – towing hooks;
9 – bolt; 10 - cotter pin.

Drawing. 29.2 – Towing the car using a rigid tow hitch.

Before towing the car on a hard hitch, it is necessary to release the parking brake
brake system of the car, for which:

- with the help of an S=27 socket wrench (from the set of a single ZIP), unscrew two samples
berths located on the starboard side between the 2nd and 3rd bridges;
- with the same key, unscrew the bolts of the deactivation mechanism on the energy accumulator
counterclockwise all the way;

29-28
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- tighten both plugs on the right side of the car during towing;
- upon arrival of the towed vehicle at the parking or repair site, brake the vehicle,
performing actions in the reverse order.
When towing cars on land, the following rules apply:
- before starting from the place, the driver of the tractor must give a signal and start driving

nie, having previously made sure that there is no one between the cars;
- must be established between the drivers of the tractor and the towed vehicle
reliable communication (visual or radio);
- move from place to place smoothly, having pre-tensioned the cables;

- for towing, choose a route with small slopes, without sharp turns;
- the driver of the towed vehicle must monitor the cables, keeping them taut
state, for which to brake, if necessary, the towed car;
- before stopping, the driver of the tractor must give a signal, take his foot off the pedal
giving fuel and after the tractor has been moving for some time at the minimum
change the engine crankshaft speed, engage neutral gear and that's it
turn the car The driver of the towed car stops it in such a way that it crashes
cheese ropes sagged a bit.

29.11.2 Towing a car afloat

ATTENTION! Towing the same type of car afloat with the help of two tugs
cables are allowed in reservoirs with a depth of up to three meters. In reservoirs with a depth of more than three

meters, the towing of the car is allowed only with the permission of the senior manager. Length
the towing rope used in this case must ensure the unsinkability of the tractor
in case of flooding of the towed (defective) car.
When towing a car afloat, one of the two is used on the towed car
towing hooks located in the bow of the hull, two towing ropes and nylon
rope (from sets of single ZIP machines). Tractors of the same type are used
a bracket welded in the upper part of the aft sheet of the hull, and two towing hitches (from com
plektov of a single ZIP machine).
To tow a car afloat:
- bring the tractor to the towed vehicle at a distance of 5...7 m;
- on the towed car, remove the towing cable from the stack. One koush of towing tro
fasten it to the front towing hook, and attach the towing hitch to the second cog
hook 2 (Figure 29.3), having previously put a loop on it from one of the ends of the kapron rope.

29-29
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

The free end of the kapron rope will be thrown over the tractor and with the help of the rope under
pull both cars towards each other;
- on the towing machine, remove the tow cable from the stack and hook it with one hook with
with the help of a towing hitch 2 for a bracket 3, then connect the free legs of both beechs
cheese cables with a second tow hitch.
After that, towing is possible.

1 – towing ropes; 2 – towing couplings; 3 –

bracket for towing a car afloat; 4 – towing hook

Figure 29.3 – Towing a car afloat

When towing, observe the following rules:

- during towing, the commander of the towing vehicle, being at his workplace in po
lying down while standing with the hatch open, must carefully observe the towed vehicle, a
the commander of the towed vehicle, in addition, holds a kapron rope to "insure"
towing ropes from hitting them under underwater parts of the machine. In case of hitting a tugboat
of the cable under the underwater parts of the machine, it is necessary to unhook the tow cable from the machine

tractor, will lower it into the water and then with the help of nylon rope will pull it out of the water and

connect it again through the towing hitch to the bracket of the towing vehicle. Between the drivers
the tire of the tractor and the towed vehicle must be connected;
- select the slack in the tow ropes at low speed until they are tensioned;
- to avoid a large roll during maneuvering and flooding of the towed vehicle
when towing, limit the engine crankshaft rotation frequency, which is recommended to be
maintained at no higher than 1500 min-1 ;
- the tractor must move smoothly, without jerks, without sudden changes in direction,
especially when going through rollovers and when moving downstream, as this can happen
lead to impacts of the towed car on underwater objects or on the shore, as well as landing on
shoal;

29-30
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- do not sharply reduce the speed of the tractor, stop it smoothly;

- reduce the speed of movement to a minimum when the towed vehicle approaches the shore;

- in order to avoid breaking off the clamp for towing the car on water, when pulling out the towbar

When the car is moving on land, after its wheels touch the ground, turn off the water-operated ones

movers and hook the tow ropes into position for towing on land.

29.11.3 Self-extraction of the machine or extraction of the same type of machine

with the help of a winch

For self-extraction of the machine or extraction of the same type of machine with the help of a
woes:

- choose an object (anchor) to which you need to pull the car, and position the car

so that the direction of pulling coincides, if possible, with the longitudinal axis of the machine,

as shown in Figure 29.4;

- release the lever of the parking brake system (in a self-extracting machine);

- start the engine, remove the plate from the wave-reflecting shield, open the top hatch

(above the winch) and the cable release hatch;

- on the driver's dashboard, move and hold the "WINCH" switch to the position

nie "OFF" (ON) on the release of the winch cable, loosened the cable attached to the bracket. Then weakened

pull the cable and release the "WINCH" switch;

- remove the hook 2 (Figure 27.1) from the clamp 1, turn off the bar clutch with the handle 3

bana and unwind the cable, pulling it manually to an anchor or a pulling machine. Razma

wind the rope in such a way that at least three turns of the rope remain on the drum. Close

pulls the block with the help of a tow rope for an object (anchor) to which the car is pulled,

will pass the winch cable through the block(s) and secure the ego as shown in Figure 29.4.

- to pull the winch cable on the driver's dashboard, move and hold the switch

"WINCH" (WINCH) in the "IN" position before pulling the machine onto a flat surface.

1 – stationary object (tree, stump); 2 – tow rope; 3 – block; 4 – winch Figure 29.4 – Self-extraction
of the machine using one block and one towing cable

29-31
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

29.11.4 Pulling out a stuck machine using the same type of machine

Pulling out a stuck machine with the help of the same type of machine should be done as follows
as a rule, with two standard towing cables hooked to towing hooks, as yet
shown in Figure 29.2. Pulling out begins smoothly, having previously selected the slack in the cables.
Pulling out the machine with the same type of machine is also allowed with the help of one full-time employee

cable hooked to one tow hook (Figure 29.5). At the same time, the longitudinal axes of the machines
should, if possible, coincide.

When a car gets stuck, when it is impossible to evacuate it with a car of the same type
in the above way, use a standard winch or other means of evacuation in the village
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ.
At the same time, it is necessary to use two front towing hooks or a towbar at the same time
noe adaptation

1 – towing hook; 2 – winch; 3 – winch cable

Figure 29.5 – Self-extraction or extraction of the same type of machine without the
use of a block

29-32
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

30 TRANSPORTATION

30.1 Transportation of cars by railway transport

The machine can be transported on general purpose railways. Time

the dimensions of the machine fit into the loading dimensions according to Figure 30.1.

Figure 30.1 - Dimensions of loading

Transportation of cars by rail must be carried out in the village

ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ guiding documents for placement and mounting of combat equipment
and other vehicles on rolling stock for military transport
echelons and transports.

Below are concrete recommendations for loading and securing machines to the railway
fork platforms taking into account the specifics of the machine design.

30.1.1 Safety measures during loading and unloading operations

Before loading, it is necessary to check the railway platforms, choose a person

attention to the condition of longitudinal bars and flooring, braking and support of platforms, and
also state of ramps;

30-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Before starting loading or unloading, the supervisor establishes the order and general sig

management, as well as instructs drivers on the order of loading and unloading and measures
security

Only the person directly in charge is allowed to be on the platform

loading or unloading machines. Presence on platforms and loading docks

vulnerable persons are categorically prohibited.

30.1.2 Preparation of machines for loading

Before loading the machines, perform the following preparatory work:

- dismantle protective screens, if they were installed. Front is allowed

do not dismantle protective screens;

- check the degree of charge of the accumulator batteries and, if necessary, the charge

see them to the norm;

- fill the car with fuel in the amount of 30% of the full filling;

- all systems and units of the machine are completely filled with oil and working fluids

according to the climatic conditions in the place of use of the machine;

- make sure that the tires are in good condition, increase the pressure in them to 450 kPa (4.5 kgf/cm2 );

- check the availability and arrangement outside and inside the car of personal protective equipment and property. All products

and accessories must be placed in their regular places and securely fastened;

- close the windows of the department of management of regular armored protection;

- protect the glasses of lighting and inspection devices with plywood or cardboard, tied

them in place with a wire with a diameter of 1 to 2 mm or remove the devices and, wrapped in paper,

fasten them inside the car;

- make a description of removed units and parts with an indication of their location;

- will stop all moving and rotating parts of the machine from longitudinal movement

and transverse directions and turning relative to the axis of rotation by regular devices and

wire with a diameter of 2-4 mm;

- on the left door of the cabin, attach an information sheet indicating the brand of fuel

30.1.3 Loading and fastening of machines on the platform

Transportation of cars by railway is carried out on four-axle platforms

swing with metal sides.

Loading of machines onto the platforms should be done from the overpass located at a distance

1150 mm from the head of the end rail and having a height of at least 1300 mm.

30-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Before loading the machines, open all end and side sides of the platform. On the platform

we drive cars under their own power or with a tow truck.

Install one machine on one platform (Figure 30.2). On three-plate couplings

form (Figure 30.3) machines are installed according to the scheme: one-two-one, i.e. on the extreme platforms

mach on one car, on the average - two.

1 – beam 400x160x100 mm (8 pcs.); 2 – wire ÿ 6.0 mm; 3 – wire ÿ 4.0 mm; 4 – beam 300x160x100 mm (4 pcs.)

Figure 30.2 – Scheme of fixing the machine on the railway platform

30-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

On the couplings of more than three platforms, machines are placed so that on the extreme platforms
the coupling was installed on one machine, and on the others according to the scheme: two-one-two-one.

On the sides of the platforms, write the inscription DO NOT DISCONNECT COUPLING with chalk.

Install the machine with the same distance from the side boards.

1 – stretch marks; 2 – fixing bars; 3 – thrust bars Figure 30.3 –

Scheme of loading cars onto a coupler from three four-axle
railway platforms

After installing the machine on the railway platform, perform the following operation
what:

- brake the car with the parking brake system;

- turn off the engine, leaving the handle of the manual fuel supply in position

STOP;
- turn on the downshift in the transfer case;
- according to the instructions of senior managers, drain the water from the cooling system (if the car is

driven by a non-freezing liquid) and will hang a sign WATER on the steering wheel
cast;
- disconnect the batteries from the on-board network;
- close the air valves on the wheels, and hang the sign "FRONT" on the steering wheel
AT THE BEGINNING OF MOVEMENT, OPEN THE VALVES ON THE WHEELS";

- close and lock all hatches and doors, except for the driver's hatch;

- fix the car on the platform with four wire ties (two in front and
two at the back) of steel wire with a diameter of 6 mm in six strands or with a diameter of 4 mm - 15 each
threads in each twist. Fasten the wire tensioners to the towing and mooring hooks
machines and for rack sockets and end angles of the platform. Threads of wire ropes
after tying, twist with a crowbar to a tight tension;

- fix the machine on the platform with eight support bars 1 (Figure 30.2), size
400x160x100 mm, which are installed close to the wheel tire protectors. From the inside

30-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

on the sides of the extreme front and rear wheels, install bars 4. Each bar is nailed to

the floor of the platform with six nails measuring 6x200 mm.

Fasten the bars so that their side ends are flush with the end of the boards

forms Such a position of the bars provides partial cover of the board, which protects

from worn tires of the wheels when the train is moving.

After fastening, close the driver's hatch.

Fix the sides of the platform with racks, without closing them with hooks, for which:

- raise the sides of the platform;

- insert racks made from wooden blanks with a diameter into the rack sockets

diameter 120...160 mm and a length of at least 400 mm. The upper end of the rack should be lower than the top

200 mm platform side edges; put the sides of the platform on the racks.

30.1.4 Unloading machines from platforms

Before unloading the machine from the railway platform, it is necessary to cut the stretch

ki, remove the support wedges from under the wheels. Open the driver's hatch, perform a control

inspection of the car and prepare it for movement. Open air wheel cranes and prove

pressure in the tires to the level required by the conditions of the upcoming traffic.

Unload the machine from the platform onto the front apron. The movement will begin

smoothly, without jerks and turns. Unloading should be carried out alternately. Simultaneous movement

several cars on the platforms along the train is PROHIBITED.

30.2 Transportation of machines by air transport

Transportation of cars by air transport should be carried out accordingly

stvii with valid instructions for air transportation of armored vehicles

nicknames

For air transportation, suitable for operation and technical requirements are allowed

legal machines During the preliminary preparation of the machine for the air transporter

daily maintenance should be performed on it. At the same time, pay special attention

we must pay attention to the tightness of the filling nozzles and the absence of top leakage

oil, oil and working fluids, correctness of electrical equipment and electrical wiring

maintenance, correctness of the running gear, steering and braking systems.

A low-freezing coolant must be filled in the cooling system.

At ambient air temperatures above zero (if water is poured into the system), it is necessary

30-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

the water drain bridge from the cooling system is coordinated with crew commanders who
they carry out the transportation of the machine.

Immediately before loading the car into the plane, it is necessary:

- prove the pressure in the system of centralized regulation of air pressure in the air

pressure up to 600 - 770 kPa (6 - 7.7 kgf/cm2 ) (controlled by the pressure gauge of the air cylinder), and
in the wheel tires - up to 450 kPa (4.5 kgf/cm2 ), then close the wheel taps;

- turn off the suspensions of the first and fourth wheels using a special device
(Figure 30.4), for which set the stops 1 on the compression buffer 4 and fix them beforehand
bolts 7, then unscrew the bolts 7 until they come into contact with the upper levers 6 of the suspension and
in this position, tighten the bolts with locknuts 5. Four sets of the device are placed in
instrument box on the right side of the machine.

1 – emphasis; 2 – stop amplifier; 3 – bolt; 4 - compression buffer; 5 – counter nut; 6

– upper suspension lever; 7 – thrust bolt

Figure 30.4 – Device for turning off the suspension

Machines are loaded into the plane on their own in first gear or gear
reverse gear in the gearbox and downshift in the transfer case without sharp
jerky and braked on the loading ramps with subsequent movement on the cargo ot
secam to the place of installation.

After finishing the installation in the cargo compartment of the aircraft, the car will be braked by the parking brake

brake system, shut down the engine, left the handle of the manual fuel supply drive in
in the STOP position and the downshift in the transfer case, turn off the battery
torque batteries, check the installation of suspension switches and close the covers of all hatches.
The mooring of machines loaded into the aircraft is carried out with mooring cables (ie
points) according to the diagrams shown in Figures 30.5 and 30.6.

30-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

When attaching machines to the floor of the cargo compartment of the aircraft with mooring cables (chain

we) the latter should not concern pipelines of pneumatic and hydraulic systems
airplane

The tightening of the cables (chains) should be uniform, for which it is necessary three or four times

pull the cables (chains) simultaneously from two sides diagonally.

1 – mooring nodes on the cargo cabin floor; 2 – stretchers (cable or chain); 3 - towing hooks; 4 – lower suspension arms; 5 –
cargo cabin floor; 6 - mooring hooks; ÿÿ – center of gravity of the machine; numbers enclosed in circles are frame numbers

Figure 30.5 – Scheme of placement and mooring of machines in the cargo compartment
of the IL-76 type aircraft

30-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

a) forward loading

b) reverse loading

1 – mooring nodes on the cargo cabin floor; 2 – stretchers (cable or chain); 3 - towing hooks; 4 – lower
suspension arms; 5 – cargo cabin floor; 6 - mooring hooks; ÿÿ – center of gravity of the machine; numbers
enclosed in circles are frame numbers

Figure 30.6 – Scheme of placement and mooring of machines in the cargo cabin of the An-22 aircraft

30.3 Transportation of cars by water transport

When transporting machines by water transport, they are fastened with mooring knots
we on the ship are produced for towing and mooring hooks of the machine.
Before loading machines, perform preparatory work according to clause 30.1.2.
The order of loading, placement and fastening of cargoes on the vessel shall be established and borne by them

responsibility of the carrier.

30-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

31 STORAGE

31.1 The procedure for storing the product and putting it into operation at the place of operation

1. Car storage includes:

- special preparation of machines (conservation);

- maintenance during storage;

- checking the condition and testing of machines;

- re-conservation of machines;

- replacement (refreshment) of tires, batteries, fuel, lubricants and other ex

pluation materials, as well as parts with a limited service life.

When performing the listed works, safety regulations are strictly observed,

fire and explosion safety and industrial sanitation requirements.

2. Scope of work on preparing machines for storage, maintenance during storage

nenii, frequency of testing and re-conservation are determined depending on the conditions

and types of storage.

Storage conditions are understood as a set of factors affecting the machine

environment affecting the rate of metal corrosion and polymer aging

materials, as well as the stability of technical characteristics.

Four categories of storage conditions are established:

- light - L,

- middle - C,

- tough - Zh

- very tough - ÿÿ.

When determining the category of storage conditions for automotive equipment, the following are accepted:

- in a heated room - light category;

- in closed unheated premises - medium;

- under the canopy - hard;

- under a canopy in areas with an industrial and marine atmosphere, as well as when forced

nom hranenii on open sites in all climatic zones is a very tough category

storage conditions.

3. When transporting automobile equipment and property by land or water

three categories of transport conditions are established by transport:

- medium (C) during overland transportation in a railway car;

- rigid (ÿ) - during land or sea transportation by rail

platform or in the ship's hold;

31-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- ÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ (ÿÿ) - during sea transportation on deck in conditions, excl

those exposed to sea water.

4. Two types of machine storage are installed:

- short-term - with a term of up to one year;

- long-term - with a term of one hour or more.

31.1.1 Product storage procedure

31.1.1.1 All products whose use is not planned are subject to storage

ruetsya for a period of more than three months.

The engines installed on the products are subjected to conservation during a break in the system
products are used or stored for one month or more.

31.1.1.2 New products are put into storage, as a rule, after the product has been run-in.

The stock of mileage for field repair of products subject to storage must be no less

established norm.

31.1.1.3 Content of products when stored in good condition and permanently ready

capacity to use after storage is reached:

- preparation of storage places and maintenance of conditions in them that reduce the influence of dust

hazardous environment and ensuring the safety of machines;

- correct distribution and placement of products in storage locations;

- high-quality preparation of products for storage;

- timely and high-quality maintenance, inspection and testing

products in the process of storage;

- timely re-conservation of products, renewal (replacement) of fuel, lubricants

and other operational materials, as well as replacement of parts with a limited term

services;

- refueling of product units with all-season materials (fuel, oils, lubricants,

liquids);

- carrying out inspection and restoration work within the established time limits

product properties;

- systematic control of the organization of storage of products.

31.1.1.4 Products in storage are kept in specially equipped storage areas,

by which are understood heated and unheated storages, canopies and open ones

sites

31-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Long-term storage products are usually stored in warehouses. In exceptional cases

in some cases, it is allowed to keep the equipment under a shed or on an open site. The rest of

Delia can be kept both in warehouses and under a canopy or on an open site.

Products in long-term storage are placed separately from other products.

31.1.1.5 When placing products in storage or under a canopy, the distance between the sides

along the sides of machines, as well as between the sides of products and walls, should be at least 0.8m, and

between the rear sides of the products and the wall or fence is not less than 1 m.

With multi-row placement in warehouses of products of the second and subsequent rows

must be connected by towing ropes to the products standing in front.

31.1.1.6 The following order of short-term product maintenance is established

storage:

- engine cylinders are preserved;

- fuel tanks, crankcases of aggregates and mechanisms are filled with fuel and oils

any or all-season varieties;

- engine cooling systems are filled with low-freezing liquid

water or water with the addition of corrosion inhibitors, which has cooled from the system in cold weather

desire merges;

- accumulator batteries are installed on products, and at daytime air temperature

below 15ÿ° are removed and stored in a battery (heated room), except in cases

when special instructions provide for their storage on products;

- spare parts of an individual kit (SIP) are stored, as a rule, on products, and in

in some cases, in the warehouse in a special package with the indication of the brand of the product and its number;

- other accessories are stored on the products.

In addition, when storing products in an open area:

- the wheels are unloaded;

- the windows of the car are covered with standard armor shields.

31-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Figure 31.1 – Scheme of installing an armored personnel carrier on stands for unloading wheels

31.1.1.7 The following procedure for keeping products in long-term storage is established:

- engine cylinders, power supply system devices and hydraulic cylinder rods are preserved;

- crankcases of aggregates and product mechanisms are filled with all-season oils and sealed

zeroed out;

- the fuel tanks of the products are kept filled;

- the cooling system is filled with low-freezing coolant;

- the batteries are removed from the products and stored in the battery compartment, unless

when special instructions provide for their storage on products;

- the wheels and suspension of the car are unloaded;

- individual kit (ZIP) is stored in the warehouse.

In addition, when storing products in open areas:

- tires are protected from direct sunlight with protective coatings;

- the windows of the car are closed with standard armor shields;

- the tires are covered with protective coatings, and the windows of the car are covered with armored shields.

31.1.2 Preparation of products for use after storage

31.1.2.1 Refrigeration and removal of products from long-term storage is performed upon completion

activities provided by the plans of the higher command. In other cases -

only by personal instruction.

Products are removed from short-term storage by order of the commander of the military unit

to ensure the combat training of the troops and are used within the established daily limits

norms for plans for the operation of automotive equipment.

31.1.2.2 Removal of items from storage is announced by order of the commander of the military unit. IN

the reason for removing the products, the brand and number of the products, the order of removal, etc., will be specified

31-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

persons responsible for the organization of work, for what purposes and for what period the products are removed

from storage, as well as the planned consumption of motor resources.

Removal from long-term storage is noted in the form (passport).

31.1.2.3 Removal of products from storage is carried out by drivers (drivers - mechanics
we) with the participation of crews (battle squads) under the leadership of the commanders of the subdivision and

officials of the relevant services.

31.1.2.4 When removing products from long-term storage, under conditions of limited time,
works are performed in two shifts.
First of all, work is carried out to ensure the release of products from the park and without
their emergency operation:
- depressurization of units (engine, fuel tanks, transmission, running gear);
- installation of accumulator batteries;
- refueling with fuel and coolant;
- starting the engine and checking its operation in various modes, control check
measuring devices and signaling devices;
- checking the air pressure in the tires and bringing it up to the norm (if necessary);
- checking the correct operation of lighting and light signaling devices;
- installation of wiper brushes and checking of its operation;
- checking the correctness of the brakes and steering.

In the concentration (gathering) area or at stops, second-stage works are performed:

- refueling of products (if necessary);
- laying rugs on the floor of the cabin (if necessary);
- cleaning the tool from conservation grease and putting it back in place;
- elimination of detected malfunctions that reduce the efficiency of use
products;
- replacement of winter types of oils and fuel with summer or all-season types in the summer.

31.1.2.5 Time (duration) of preparing products for use when removing

deliya from storage and putting them into operation is regulated by the terms established by

accompanying planning documents. In all cases, the products must be brought

ready for use in the shortest possible time. This is achieved:
- quick opening of parking spaces, issuing keys to cabin doors and keys
ignitions;

- the accuracy of the execution of all operations of the technological process of removing products from the warehouse

Nenia;

31-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- by using the most effective methods of starting the engine and warming it up at the bottom
at certain temperatures;

- creation of the necessary reserves of fuel and low-freezing coolant

or hot water, the organization of mechanized refueling of cars with fuel and coolant
liquid;

- a rational organization of storage of accumulator batteries, providing prive

putting batteries into working condition and delivering them to products with minimal time spent;

- the use of all-season types of fuels, oils, lubricants, etc. in aggregates and product units
special liquids

31.1.3 The procedure for putting the product into operation at the place of operation

31.1.3.1 Works carried out during commissioning:

- check the availability of operational documents (ED) and the integrity of the seals, according to

sealing tables.
- conduct a control inspection (CO) and, if necessary, daily technical maintenance

serving (ETO).
- check the functioning of systems and units.

The scope of the work to be performed is given in the relevant section of the operation manual
such products.

31.1.3.2 Before being put on permanent alert at the point of permanent deployment
(PPD) it is necessary to carry out an inspection or, if necessary, ETO or maintenance in accordance with the manual

product operating instructions.

31.1.3.3 Getting ready for use (on duty).

Before making it ready for use (on duty), it is necessary to conduct an inspection
or, if necessary, ETO in accordance with the product's operating manual.

31-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

31.2 Information on qualifications and number of service personnel

31.2.1 For the performance of work on the operation, maintenance and storage of permitted products
persons who have passed safety training and studied technical tests repent
sled and product operating instructions. Persons admitted to the execution of all types of ra
bots for preparation for operation must have appropriate documents for the right to prove
days of these works.

31.2.2 Preparation of products for commissioning, storage or removal

storage is carried out by drivers with the participation of crews, if necessary, with assistance
em specialists repair subdivisions, machine maintenance.

31-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

32 MACHINE MAINTENANCE

32.1 Types and frequency of maintenance

To maintain the machine in technically correct condition when it is used in front

the following types of maintenance are considered:

- control inspection before each exit of the machine (KO) - operative continuation

duration with simultaneous work of three people 0.15-0.16 hours (labor intensity 0.45-0.48 hours);
- control inspection at stops (KO);

- daily technical maintenance (ETO) - after each release of the machine, independent

power of the run - operational duration with simultaneous work of three people 1.1-1.6 hours

(time consuming 2.8-2.9 hours);

- technical maintenance after the first 2,000 km of mileage - operational continuation

duration with simultaneous work of three people 3.9-4.2 hours (labor intensity 13.1-13.5 hours);
- technical maintenance No. 1 (TO-1) - every 2000 km mileage - operational

duration with simultaneous work of three people 1.8-2.0 hours (labor intensity 4.9-5.1 hours);

a) for the weapon stabilizer - after 50 hours of operation or every 2000 km

mileage of a combat vehicle, before being placed in short-term and long-term storage;

b) for the fire control system - once a quarter, before setting on

short-term storage;

c) for an automatic gun - as necessary, but at least twice an hour.

- technical maintenance No. 2 (TO-2) - after every 6000 km mileage - operative pro

duration with simultaneous work of three people 6.4-6.6 hours (labor intensity 14.0-14.5 hours);
a) for the weapon stabilizer - after 100 hours of operation or every 6000 km

mileage of combat vehicles, but at least once every two years; before setting on

short-term and long-term storage; after the control run of the combat vehicle,

in long-term storage;

b) for the fire control system - once per hour, before setting it to long-term

storage;

c) for an automatic gun - as necessary, but at least once an hour.

- technical maintenance after one TO-2 (after every 12,000 km mileage) - operative

total duration with simultaneous work of three people 9.0-9.2 hours (labor intensity 26.9-

27.1 h).

32-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

32.2 Safety measures during machine maintenance

Maintenance of the machine must be carried out in a specially designated for

this place At the same time, the machine must be installed on a flat horizontal platform.

During maintenance work, the engine must be running

is stopped, and the batteries are turned off; the covers of the open hatches are locked and

fixed on stops.

It is necessary to remember that such operational materials as low-freeze

liquid, three-component additive, potassium chromium peak, as well as their solutions, poisonous,

therefore, when working with them, take precautions that exclude the possibility of zane

getting them into food, getting them in the mouth, on the skin, etc.

Sucking liquid by mouth with a hose is STRICTLY PROHIBITED!

When checking operational adjustments with engine start command to start the engine

the calf should be served only after the commander (senior) is convinced of complete safety

start up Turning on and off the control levers is allowed only at the command of the person,

responsible for the performance of work.

After adjustment and other maintenance work, do not leave the instrument under the car

the range of control drives and other places of the machine.

Before removing or installing the batteries, it is necessary to turn off the switch

battery chargers, do not allow simultaneous touching of the battery terminals with a key

simulator batteries and car body; the wires must be firmly connected to the output

batteries, and the batteries must be firmly fixed in their places.

Maintenance (TO) of the combat module must be carried out as part of the combat unit

machine (or on a stand for transporting the module) in a specially designated for this purpose

place At the same time, the combat vehicle must be installed on a flat horizontal platform.

During maintenance work on open hatch covers

must be locked on the stops.

When performing work not related to the inclusion of the module, gas stations on the BUM block must
be in the disabled state.

Turn on and off the systems of the combat module, rotate the tower is allowed only

at the command of the person responsible for the work.

IT IS PROHIBITED:

- turn on the systems of the combat module without making sure that there are no people on the module and in

gun sweep zone;

32-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

- turn on the systems of the combat module without making sure that there are no foreign objects
on the hull and inside the combat module;

- work with guidance drives when the rear hatch of the tower is open;

- when the systems of the module are turned on, open the blocks, replace the parts, produce

service and repair of blocks, connect or disconnect connecting harnesses;

- use a defective tool.

32.3 Control inspections

32.3.1 Inspection before leaving the car

Table 32.1
Used tools and
No Technical requirements and
Title of work accessories
instructions for their implementation
Square key 10 mm,
1. Check the refueling of the car The surfaces adjacent to the refueling socket wrench 27x41,
fuel points must be capacity
thoroughly cleaned of dust and
mud The amount of fuel in the for fuel, key 434.90.002sb
tanks will be measured by an
electric indicator installed on the
instrument panel. It is checked
2. Check the oil level in the front of the engine. with a dipstick. At full refueling, Dipstick, spanner
the oil level in the engine block 27x30mm, tank with oil,
should be at the "75 l" mark on the device
dipstick. laine for pouring
engine oil, key
434.90.002sb
3. Check the refueling of the machine with Refuel into the filler necks of radiators Square key, dipstick,
coolant. If necessary, top up to the norm. up to the level of the lower edge of the funnel,
neck opening; coolant is poured into the container for cooling
expansion tank to a level of 30-40 mm liquid, key 434.90.002sb
from the bottom of the tank.

4. Make sure there are no leaks

from power supply, lubrication
and cooling systems. If a leak is
detected, find out the cause and
eliminate it. 5. Start the engine
and so on The warmed-up engine should work
listen to its operation in different stably at different speeds without knocking
modes, check the operation of control and smoke. At the minimum frequency
and measuring devices.
the manometer must show an oil
pressure of at least 100 kPa

(1.0 kgf/cm2 ).
6. Check the operation of the devices
outdoor lighting and traffic signals.
Check the situation
32-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

No Used instrument
Title of work Technical requirements and
and accessories
instructions for their implementation
covers of light masking devices
of headlights and rear lights. 7.
Check the air pressure in the air The air pressure in the air cylinder
cylinder and the performance of should be no lower than 600 kPa
the parking brake system. (6.0 kgf/cm2 ). make sure
that the handle of the brake valve
is in the fixed "PARK" position
and the warning lamp of the lack
of air in the energy accumulators
flashes on the driver's instrument
panel. Alternately open the taps of
8. Check the air pressure in the tires the block of tire taps. Tire pressure
of the wheels and, if necessary, should be (depending on driving
adjust it to the level required by conditions) 150...520 kPa (1.5...5.2
driving conditions. Leave the air kgf/cm2 ). If necessary, pump up,
wheel cranes in the open position for which close all the taps, you
use the regulator to set the required
she pressure on the standard
manometer. Inflate the tires by
opening the valves.

9. Check whether they are wrapped

plugs in the bottom of the machine
and behind the cover of the water
drain valve from the body. 10. Will
check the visibility through Devices must be provided
observation devices, their clear visibility of the area and local objects
condition and mounting. 11. Turn
on negotiation
device and make sure that there is
a connection between subscribers.
12. Verify the correctness of the electrical system When the battery and automatic
trich circuits to pyrotechnics of air defense switches are turned on,
anti-aircraft balloons and signals the indicators of cylinder 1 and
pressure congestion. cylinder 2 on the air defense control
unit should light up. When you
13. Check the correctness of the light press the LAMP CONTROL button
signaling on the board located on the driver's dashboard,
the child the warning light should light up.

14. Check the operability of the

generator set.
15. Believe correctness Including batteries.
signal lamps:

OIL PRESSURE IN BRIDGES

16. Check the working capacity of
each generator of the installation
separately.

32-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

No Used instrument
Title of work Technical requirements and
and accessories
instructions for their implementation

17. Make sure that the "N" indicator on

the drive mode selector is lit.

18. Check the oil level in the The oil level should be between Key 14×17, tank with
transmission oil tank visually the marks on the sight glass oil, device
through the viewing window from the window laine for pouring
the commander's seat. Top up if oil in the transmission.
necessary. 19. Visually, through
the inspection window in the rear part The oil level should be between
of the transom, check the oil level the lines of the lower and upper
in the hydraulic tank. Refill if inspection windows.
necessary.

Panoramic television complex 2P (2P) Check the

20 Inspection of the movable part of the absence of mechanical damage to Napkin
2P standard complex (2P) the housing Key for the drying
and the state of silica gel in the water cartridge. Dryer cartridge.
gobbler Silica gel for lies should be
blue. If necessary, replace the pat

ron drying, for which use a key to unscrew

the cover, replace the cartridge and install
the cover on
place

Open the protective cover of the

television camera and check the
absence of mechanical damage to
the protective window, as well as dirt
and dust on it, if necessary, clean the
protective window with a dry napkin.
Check the absence of mechanical
21 Inspection of the drive mechanism of damage to the housing of the drive
the 2P complex (2P) mechanism.

Monitors of the operator and commander

22 Inspection of external surfaces Make sure that there is no
mechanical damage to the hull and
control bodies. Check the presence
23 Cleaning of protective glasses. of dust on the product by external Alcohol - 0.01 l.
inspection. If necessary, wipe the Napkin
protective glass with a napkin soaked
in rectified ethyl alcohol

Control system Make

24 External inspection of equipment, sure that there are no mechanically
checking the connection of the damaged housings, protective
thread connectors, the absence covers, control bodies, and electrical
of mechanical damage connections.

32-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

No Used instrument
Title of work Technical requirements and
and accessories
instructions for their implementation

PN-B guidance device (PN-B)

25 External inspection of the PN-B device Inspect the external condition Napkin, alcohol
(PN-B) of the device and its attachment ether mixture, acid
to the armored personnel carrier. point, screwdriver,
External surfaces must be clean, drying cartridge.
free of dents, chips, and cracks.
If necessary, check the protective
glasses for dust, dirt, and grease
stains, but wipe them with a napkin
soaked in an alcohol-ether mixture,
or clean them with a brush. Check
the condition of the silica gel in the
dryer cartridge. The color of silica
gel should be blue. If necessary,
replace the drying cartridge, for
which unscrew the cover with a
screwdriver, replace the drying
cartridge and install the cover on

place

Optical-electronic module OEM-B View

26 External inspection of OEM-B the external appearance of the A napkin, an
device and its attachment to the alcohol-ether mixture,
armored personnel carrier. a tap, a screwdriver,
External surfaces must be clean, a drying cartridge.
free of dents, chips, and cracks.
Check the protective glasses for
dust, dirt, and grease stains if
necessary - wipe with a napkin
soaked in an alcohol-ether mixture,
or clean with a brush.

Check the condition of the silica

gel in the dryer cartridge. The color
of silica gel should be blue. If
necessary, replace the drying
cartridge by unscrewing the cover
with a screwdriver, replace the
drying cartridge and install the cover.

Note: failed fuses are replaced by the crew.

Other malfunctions cannot be eliminated by the crew. The EMS is subject to repair
in the conditions of a repair workshop.

32-6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

32.2.2 Inspection at bus stops

Table 32.2
Used instrument
No
Title of work
Technical requirements and
and accessories
instructions for their implementation
1. Make sure there are no leaks from power
plant systems.

2. In anticipation of a water crossing: - Before turning on the water supply

check whether the corks are wrapped check the oil level in the tank on the
and the hatch in the bottom of the hull dipstick. If the oil level in the tank is
is closed, as well as whether the drain not sufficient, top up to the norm. The
valve for draining water from the hull check is performed with the engine
is closed; - remove the plates between running.
the 3m and 4m bridges and check the
readings of the vacuum meter on the
filter of the hydraulic system of the
water carrier, if the arrow is in the red
zone, replace the filter
element;
- check leaks in hydraulic pipelines; -
check by turning on the operation of the
water supply drive, the opening and
closing of the wave-reflecting shield that
pumps water

pump

3. In anticipation of the float: -

check whether the corks are wrapped
in the bottom of the machine and
whether the drain and bypass valves
are closed, as well as the hatch in the
bottom of the case; - check the
inclusion and operation of the water jet
engine, the opening and closing of the
wave reflection of the body shield, the
water pump
of the pump.

4. Inspect the details and subassemblies

scales, tires and external hoses.

5. Check the pressure in the tires and, if

necessary, bring it up to the level
required by the two conditions
wife

6. Check the presence of fuel in the fuel

tanks and switch the fuel tap to the
tank with more fuel.

32-7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

32.3 Daily technical maintenance (ETO), technical

maintenance No. 1 (TO-1) and technical maintenance No. 2 (TO-2)

Note: Marks in columns 3, 4 and 5 indicate that the work is being carried out:

"+" - at each regular maintenance.

"++" - through one maintenance,

mark "(+)" in column 4 - work is performed only after the first 2000 km of mileage

Table 32.3

species Uses a
No technical
Technical requirements
washing tool
Title of work and instructions on them
servicing ETO and
execution
TO-1 TO-2 competencies

32.3.1 Priority works 1. Refuel the car

+ + + See item 12.3.14.1. Square key
fuel 10mm, key
- + +
Drain the sediment from the 434.90.002sb, socket
top coarse filter wrench 27x41, fuel
lion

gas station co
tank or top

refueler
or capacity for
fuel, funnel, sleeve
Ø25mm, spanner
10x12mm Spanner
12x14mm, tanks with
2. Top up the car with oil up to the + + + See section 15 oil, with the ability to
upper line on the dipstick and to Hydraulic control system
the upper line on the sight glass oil, lubricants and cooling of
(for the transmission oil tank). 3. the transmission.
Clean (wash in summer) the oil filling,
outside and inside of the car key

from mud and dust (in winter 434.90.002sb

from snow) + + + When washing the machine, Wrench 14x17mm,
all hatch covers of the torque wrench 12mm
body and the air vent
valves of the hoppers
must be closed. Will not allow
water does not fall
in order to avoid damage to
the instruments, headlights,
taillights, rear lights - If water
is found in the oil of the
crankcases of wheel
4. After swimming: + - Lever
gearboxes, eliminate the cause and
- lubricate the lower pivots plunger syringe,
of the rotary fists (4 spanner 12x14mm,
points), the outer hinges
of the steering trapezoidal rods replace oil

32-8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
No technical
Technical requirements
washing tool
Title of work and instructions on them
servicing ETO TO-1 and
execution
TO-2 competencies
tsii (8 points); - If the blades are found 13mm, 17mm,
check whether there is water in to be bent or bent, the 30mm socket
the brake drums and wheel detected defects will be wrenches, syringe
gearboxes; - check the condition of eliminated or the damaged for
propeller blades by external one will be replaced pouring oil

inspection; - in case of oil leakage screw

check the level and, if necessary,

top up the water-jet engine with oil

tel.

5. Check the correctness of the light + + + When pressing the LAMP

signaling CONTROL button, located on
on the driver's shield. the driver's shield, the light
signal should light up

analysis

32.3.2 Monitoring devices 1. Clean the

inlets and outlets + + + Devices must provide clear views Pure rags
output glasses of observation
devices most locality and place

of subjects
2. Check the heating of the device ÿ

+ +
TNPO-168V 32.3.3 Power
plant
1. Check for leaks + + + Leakage of fuel, oil and coolant is Spanners 10x12mm,
from top power supply systems not allowed. 14x17mm, 17x19mm,
oil, grease and coolant spanner 434.90.002sb,
marriage 27x41mm, spanners
14mm, 17x19mm,
flat jaws Spanners
14x17mm. 17x19mm.
Spanner 14x17mm,
17x19mm ve
- + +
2. Check the condition and tension of
the compressor belt of the air
conditioner. 3. Rinse
- + + Wash after 70 m/h of working time
air cleaner cassette
engine
that's it
- - Wrench 14x17mm,
4. Wash the cyclone device + Flushing should be done after 200
hours of engine operation or 17x19mm ot
when the cyclones are lubricated
Lathe, flat jaws
Wrench, clean the
5. Carry out an inspection for + + + If necessary mesh with a brush
shield nets of the air hose of the and 14x17mm, 17x19mm
boric device on blow compressed air

32-9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
Technical requirements and
No technical washing tool
Title of work instructions on them
servicing ETO TO-1 and
execution
TO-2 competencies
MTO cover 6. hom
- - Wrench 17x19mm
Replace the filter elements of the fine + Make a replacement
fuel filter 7. Wash the coarse fuel after 320 hours of work
filter 8. Replace the oil in the engine
- - + Spanner 12x14mm.
Socket wrench
- - 12×14mm, socket
+ Oil replacement prod
engine lubrication system drives after 300 hours of engine wrench 17, socket
and wash the oil centrifugal operation, MCF flushing - after wrench 27mm, wrench
filter. 250 hours. 434.90.002sb, socket
wrench 457.94.040-1,
wrench for nuts

fastening of
the rotor cover MCF
459.94.003sb, device

for draining oil

from the
engine, dipstick
+ The drives must ensure the movement Wrenches
– +
9. Check the work at
fuel supply water and of the control levers within the 10x12mm,
drive mechanisms specified limits smoothly without 14x12mm, flat
engine stop jamming jaws, screwdriver

– – +
10. Check the condition and degree of
contamination of the water radiator
and, if necessary, blow with
compressed air 10a Wash the flow

+ + + Perform flushing after (25...30) Statutory

part of the compressor above hours of engine operation, furrows on the shield
the engine blower combining with the next ETO, mechanics

in the following sequence driver, napkin

say:

- install an armored personnel

carrier on an open platform in
such a way as to exclude the
influence of objects that interfere
with the free release of exhaust
gases; - without load, at idle
speed, at engine crankshaft
speed

(2400...2600) min-1 and tem

32-10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
Technical requirements and
No technical washing tool and
Title of work instructions on them
servicing ETO TO-1
execution
TO-2 competencies
temperature of coolant and
0
oil (343...363) K [(70...90) for WITH]

10 minutes, turn on the dimmer.

After turning off the dimmer,
without reducing the frequency

of rotation of the HF, work for

(3...5) minutes, stop the engine
and, in accessible places, however,
wipe the ejector with a napkin

dust extraction

– –
11. Inspect the plugs of the filling nozzles + When pressed with a finger, the 10 mm quad
of the cooling system and check valves should move freely, rat key.
the operation of the steam-air valve without jamming
with finger pressure, check the
presence and correctness of the
sealing gaskets 12. Check the
fastening

– – Spanners 17x19mm.
+ Check external
pop the pipe and tighten the nuts if inspection and at work 14x17mm and

necessary moving engine 12x13mm, ring key

bridges 17x19mm.

32.3.4 Transmission 1.
- + + 12mm wheel
Check the oil level in the transmission
units (except bridges) and, if wrench,
necessary, top up to the norm. wrenches

When a leak is detected, find out its 10x12mm,

cause and direction 22x24mm, socket
wrenches 17mm,
24mm, square wrench
thread 10mm, OT screwdriver.
Spanners 12x14mm,
– – +
2. Check the tightness of the pain 22x24mm, flat pliers, socket wrenches 17mm, 19mm
bolts and nuts for
fastening the flanges of the
cardan shafts of the
transmission and, if necessary, tighten them

– – +
3. Check the tightening and They will check with keys
if necessary, tighten the bolts of by tightening the bolts to the point
the gearbox and once the kaza

transmission box

32-11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
Technical requirements and
No technical washing tool and
Title of work instructions on them
servicing ETO TO-1
execution
TO-2 competencies
– – ++
4 After one TO-2 (after every 12,000 km Square key 10mm,
of mileage), replace the oil in the key 434.90.002sb,
axle and wheel gearbox housings.
wrenches
22x24mm,
17x19mm, 12mm
torque wrench, right
hand syringe, oil,
dishes for

oils
– +
5 Check the status + Seals that have damage should No. 3 socket
rubber seals of the upper pins on be replaced with new ones wrench, 17mm
the rotary fists with a simultaneous spanner,
replacement of the lubricant, screwdriver,
and if there are backlashes jack, flat pliers
in the connection between
the ball head of the pivot
and the cover, adjust the
tension of the pivot
6 Lubricate the lower ones – –
+ Inject fresh lubricant through the end 30mm until the syringe
pivot knuckles appears. cuff of protective col

pack
– + Nut tightening torque 110-125Nm
7 Check the tightness and (+) End wrench
if necessary, tighten the nuts of (11-12.5 kgcm) force on the 19mm, spanner
the 3- and 4-speed reducers 17x19mm ring spanner. it should 17x19mm.

be, for example, 550N (55kgs) +

Forest on connecting roads The operation should be carried
axles of the suspension arms out with the wheels suspended.
The nut tightening torque is
– –
8. Check the tightening and 150-160 Nm (15-16 kgf.m.), the force on End wrench 22m,
If necessary, tighten the nuts of the 0.5 m long wrench should be rotary wrench 12mm,
the brake drum fasteners approximately 300 N (30 kgf). + hook wrench
Oil leakage is not allowed 12×14mm,
on driven pins
gears of wheel reducers
jack

9 Check for leaks + + Spanners 10x12mm,

from the system of hydraulic repents 14x17mm, 17x19mm,

control, lubrication and cooling key 434.90.002sb,
of the transmission pliers Spanners
24x30mm, socket
wrench 50mm,
10 Replace the oil in the system –
(+) + Hydraulic control system
me hydraulic control, oil, grease and coolant
lubrication and cooling drive transmission
transmission, replace the filter key

element 434.90.002sb,

32-12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
Technical requirements and
No technical washing tool
Title of work instructions on them
servicing ETO and
execution
TO-1 TO-2 oil filter thin competencies
adaptation
cleaning for pouring oil into
the tank
32.3.5 Steering and braking systems + Check by swinging the
1. Check the status + + steering wheel sharply from right to Line
external parts of the steering left during operation
control (tips of steering rods,
pendulum levers, etc.), free
movement (backlash) of the engine
steering wheel
wheel

2. Check the operation of the tor + + + See working and standing

brain systems of the machine. you are a night brake
Adjust if necessary. 3. Check Stems

the level
+ + + The liquid level in the tank should
liquid in the tank of the hydro not exceed the marks in the
system and, if necessary, top upper window and half
up while working at idle
hangs above the bottom

engine running. a window

4. Make sure that the working fluid is + + + The liquid level should be
not leaking from the pipelines and between the control marks
the connected hydraulic brake on the fuel tanks.
actuator by checking the level of
the working fluid in the reservoirs
of the main cylinders of the working
brake system. If necessary, top up
the working fluid to the norm,
eliminate the cause of its leakage
5. Check the fastening of the
crankcase of the steering
mechanism, if necessary, tighten
– + Spanners 10x12mm,
the bolts (+) Will check with the keys
17x19mm, rotary
wrench 12mm.
Syringe lever plunger
Ring wrench
6. – + +
Lubricate the hinged ones Stuff with a syringe to 17x19mm, spanner
wheel connections squeezing out the lubricant 12x14mm, flat pliers
steering drive rods 7. Make from the hinge
sure that there is no backlash in the – + +
brackets of the pendulum arms
by rocking (turning) the steered
wheels in place. If there is
backlash, tighten the bolts of the
brackets

32-13
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
Technical requirements and
No technical washing tool
Title of work instructions on them
servicing ETO and
execution
TO-1 TO-2 Accessories
– – + Spanners 13x17mm ,
8. Open the hatches of the brake drum
covers and make sure that there 12x14mm, 17x19mm ,
is no water and oil in the drum rotary wrench 12mm.
Socket wrench, ring
nah wrench 24×30mm,
pliers
–
9. Check and, if necessary, tighten (+) + Check with keys by tightening the nuts
the nuts of the ball fingers
and the caps of the ends of
the steering rods, the steering
bipod, the steering knuckle
levers, the bolts of the steering
gear levers 10. Lubricate the
hinged joints of the steering
rods inside the car 11. Check
whether leaks from the hydraulic
– – +
control system, lubrication and cooling Syringe
of the transmission

+ + + Oil leakage is not allowed Spanners 10x12mm,

repents 14x17mm 17x19mm,
spanners 14mm,
17x19mm, flat pliers

32.3.6 Chassis and pneumatic equipment + + + Damaged parts

1. Look at the details and nodes
suspensions, tires and repair or
external hoses 2. Check to replace

and if necessary + + + Pneumatic system

fume hoods will eliminate air
leakage from the system of
centralized air pressure regulation

tires
– + +
3. Drain the condensate from
the air cylinder. Check the
4. –
tightening of the nuts + + Check with a key for a heavy nut until End wrench
wheel fasteners, except for failure 24mm, L
the nuts in the area of the patka installation

water and air tube to the wheel naya

valve 5. Check the condition of

– + +
the tires. If large uneven wear of the
tire tread is detected, check
and, if necessary, adjust the
convergence of the

32-14
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
Technical requirements and
No technical washing tool and
Title of work instructions on them
servicing ETO TO-1
execution
TO-2 competencies
forest
– –
6. Tighten the crepe nut ++ Remove the tube to access the nut End wrench 24 mm,
lazy wheels in the zone installation
air supply tube to the wheel tap blade, spanner
12x14mm. End
wrench 19mm,
–
7. Check the fastening of the arm (+) + They will check with the keys spanner 22×24mm.
brackets and the adjustment clutch by tightening until failure Line

villages
– – +
8. Measure and if necessary
smoke adjust the ground
clearance of the machine
we

32.3.7 Water jet propulsion and water pumping devices 1. Clean the rectifiers + When
– + Mounting blade,
turning on the water
devices for water jets and grids the signal lamp must be lit on ruler, spanners
of receiving nozzles from mud, the panel of the hydraulic 14x17mm, 17x19mm.
raising and lowering the wave- distribution device.
reflecting shield, as well as switching
on and
turning off water fountains, etc
pumping pumps.

2. In the provision of preodo + + + Before turning on

water crossing line: - check income driver
whether the corks are closed check the oil level in the tank
and the hatch in the bottom of using the dipstick. If the oil level in
the housing is closed, as well as the tank is not sufficient, top up to
whether the drain valve for the norm. The check is performed
draining water from the housing while the engine is running
is closed; - remove the polys
between the 3rd and 4th bridges
and check the readings of the calf

manovacuum meter on the hydro filter

water supply system
mover, if the arrow is in the red
zone, replace the filter element; -
check for leaks in the pipes and
wires of the hydraulic system; -
check the inclusion and operation
of the water pipe of the resident,
the opening and closing of the
wave reflector

foot shield, water pumps

of the pumping pump.

32-15
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
No technical
Technical requirements
washing tool
Title of work and instructions on them
maintenance of execution
and
ETO TO-1 TO-2 competencies

32.3.8 Electroradio equipment and means of communication

1. Clean the headlights, front + + + The screwdriver is small,
and rear lights, wipe wrenches

them with a clean cloth 10x12mm,

and check the reliability 17x19mm, flat
of the fastening. 2. Check pliers, rag
the operation of the headlights, + + + Screwdriver
front and rear lights, signal
lights, lighting of the
commander's workplace,
illumination of the scale of
the air reducer and the block
of tire taps, switching of light
masking modes, turn signals.
Check the position (fixation
and fastening) of the covers
of the light mask of the roving
devices of the headlights,
front and rear lights. 3. Check
the reliability of the fastening
of the accumulator batteries, + + + Wheel spanner
remove dust and dirt from 12mm, spanner
them and service them 14×17mm, ve
according to the instructions
for the operation of the that's it

accumulator battery 12ÿÿ-85

4. When starting the engine, + + +

check the correctness of
the control and measuring
devices 5. Check the
operation of the generator set 6. + + +
Clean the generator,
– –
+ Cleaning should be carried Brush, rag
starter and relay-regulator out with a brush and
from dust and dirt 7. Check blowing with air. + To
reliability – + avoid damage Spanners
fastening of the tips of tension clamps 10x12mm,
power wires on the leads does not allow wires 14x17mm,
of accumulator batteries, that's it 17x19mm, ring
generator, starter, voltage wrench 17x19mm,
regulator, fuse panel, flat pliers
terminal circle

dock
– –
8. Visually check the electrical + Will be checked by Socket
condition external inspection; wrench
Vodka and puffs of all of it perform the tightening 10x12mm,
connections, make sure with the tool with the open mouth,
spline press available effort of one hand flat jaws

32-16
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
No technical
Technical requirements
washing tool
Title of work and instructions on them
servicing ETO execution
and
TO-1 TO-2 competencies
plug sockets. In the absence
of cotter pins, tighten the
nuts of the connectors by
hand and by hand
to splint

32.3.9 Fire-fighting equipment 1. Verify

+
correctness + When you turn on the electrical +
circuits to the battery switches and pyro
cartridges of the air defense automatics and alarms

the indicators of cylinder 1

pressure and cylinder 2 on the air
defense control unit should
light up
– + +
2. Check the correctness of the Check about
anti-aircraft system and the is derived
charging of the cylinders built-in control
by trolly weighing 32.3.10
Winch 1. After using the
winch, clean it of mud and lubricate + – –

the winch towing cable 2.

Lubricate the bearings

– – + No-plunger lever
guide rollers of the winch syringe, key
cable 14x17mm,
screwdriver No-
– – +
3. Lubricate the bearings of the plunger lever
winch shaft and drum 4. syringe Lubricant
– – +
Lubricate the splines of the sliding for liquid lubrication
clutch of the winch shutdown
32.3.11 Body 1. Check the
condition
+ + + Seals that have damage, for
rubber seals of manhole
covers 32.3.12 Air conditioner change

1. Clean the condenser

+ + + Source of fire
by blowing with compressed that air
air 2. Check the condition
and tension of the compressor + + + When applying a force of 4±0.2 Dynamometer,
drive belt kgf, applied perpendicularly ruler, 13 mm key
to the middle of the branch,
the deflection should be
16...20 mm

32.3.13 Panoramic television complex 2R (2R)

1 External inspection under the + + +
moving part and drive
complete mechanism

ksa 2P (2P), check

32-17
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
No technical
Technical requirements
washing tool
Title of work and instructions on them
servicing ETO and
execution
TO-1 TO-2 competencies
their reliability is strong
nia and connecting connectors
to them, that is the essence of
mechanical damage 2 Cleaning
of the protective window +
+ + Wipe dry rag
tosh

3 Inspection of electrical harnesses + + Check electrical harnesses and

and cables cables for mechanical damage.

32.3.14 Monitors of the operator and the commander

+
1 External inspection from the department + Make sure it is absent
mechanical elements

damaged hull and control

bodies. + Check the absence
2 Dust removal from + + of dust on the product by external Alcohol - 0.01 l.
the top of the product inspection. If necessary, Elderberry - 0.02 m2
however, wash the protective
glass with calico soaked in
rectified ethyl alcohol + In
accordance with clause 8.15

– +
3 Checking the performance of
monitors in the FCS system

32.3.15 Management system 1

External inspection of app + + +
rature, checking the
connection of connectors,
absence of mechanical
damage 2 Checking
– +
connecting cables + Check connections
body cables on
the essence of
mechanical damage. +
3 Functionality check
– + In accordance with clause 8.15
systems

management as a part of
the SAO (FCS) 32.3.16
PN-B guidance device (PN-B) 1 External
+
inspection + Inspect the external condition +of the device and its attachment to Napkin, alcohol-
the armored personnel glycerine mixture,
carrier. The outer brush - from the
surfaces must be clean, composition of ZIP.
free of dents, chips, and A screwdriver, a
nicks. drying cartridge
made of ZIP.
32-18
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

species Uses a
No technical
Technical requirements
washing tool
Title of work and instructions on them
servicing ETO and
execution
TO-1 TO-2 competencies
Check the protective glass
for the absence of dust, dirt,
grease stains, if necessary -
wipe it. Check the condition
of the silica gel in the dryer
cartridge. The color of silica
gel should be any color. If
necessary

bridges - replace pa

the throne of
– + drying. + In accordance
2 Operational check
properties of PN-B (PN-B) as with clause 8.15
part of the FCS

32.3.17 Armament stabilizer 1 External

inspection. + + + Inspect devices and cables, check
the reliability of their fastening
and the connection of
connectors to them, the
presence of mechanical
damage

2 Cleaning of the surface during + + + Wipe dry VetoshZIP single

drilling. Toshyu rubber for
shield caps on
PU control bodies, if
necessary, replace the cap
from a single ZIP stabilizer +
In accordance with p.p. 7.3.2
and 7.4.
3 Turning on the stabilizer and checking + +
its functioning. 4 Repainting of
places of damage to the coating of
instrument housings Enamel PF-115
seraya 100 g.

32.4 Maintenance of weapons

Gun maintenance is carried out according to the manual for the operation of the AAKYA.00.00.000 RE.

Maintenance of the machine gun is carried out according to the operating manual PO1.00.00.000 RE.

Maintenance of the grenade launcher is carried out according to the manual for the operation of the KBA.117 RE.

ATGM maintenance is carried out in accordance with clause 6.10.6. manuals for operation B1318E RE.

32-19
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

33 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

The machine is equipped with spare parts, tools and accessories

but Vedomosti ZIP, which contains a full list of spare parts, tools, etc
accessories with an indication of their storage locations on the car. Vedomosti ZIP is included in the set
operational documents of the machine.

The location of ZIP inside and outside the machine is shown in figures 33.1 and 33.2.

1 – tank for drinking water (3 pcs.); 2 – carbon dioxide fire extinguisher OU 1.4 (3 pcs.); 3 – bucket, watering can (in a
cover); 4 – a box with an instrument; 5 – tanks for oil and brake fluid; 6 – first-aid kit of the RBSH;
7 – lining of the jack; 8 – jack; 9 – jack stand; 10 – box for ZIP; 11 – copper first aid kit
Tsinskaya (2 pcs.); 12 – spare device TNP-165A (in a case) (2 pcs.); 13 – rack for small ZIP;
14 – bag with documents; 15 – a box with a TVN-5 device; 16 – device TNPO-168B (in a case); 17 – suspension
inspection device; 18 – pin antenna in a cover
Figure 33.1 – Laying of ZIP inside the machine

33-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – engine air intake pipe; 2 – air intake pipe of the FVU; 3 – towing rope (2 pcs.); 4 – axe; 5 – sledgehammer; 6
– scrap; 7 – sapper shovel; 8 – two-handed saw; 9 – pulley block

Figure 33.2 – Laying of ZIP outside the machine

33.1 Jack

For use during undercarriage maintenance and machine hanging

For storage, there is a five-ton hydraulic double-plunger in the spare parts kit of the machine
new telescopic jack (Figure 33.3).
When using a jack, it is necessary to use a wooden stand, and in case
on weak soil, put an additional lining or a strong board under the stand.
The stand and gasket are included in the ZIP machine kit.
To lift a load, you need:
- turn screw 2 by hand up to the stop into the lifted load;
- wrap the locking needle 7 with a mounting spatula (included in the set of ZIP machines).
refusal;

- insert the mounting blade into the lever 5 of the injection plunger and swing the lever
lift the load to the required height.
To lower the load, slowly open the locking needle by 1...2 turns.
33-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

If the load does not rise, it is necessary to open needle 7 and make several intensive ones
rocking lever to remove air that could get into the working cavity of the jack.

1 – screw tip; 2 – screw; 3 – internal plunger; 4 – external plunger; 5 – lever; 6 – injection plunger; 7 –
locking needle; 8 – lining of the jack; 9 – filler plug; 10 – air outlet plug. Figure 33.3 – Jack

When operating the jack, observe the following rules:

- do not climb under a car hung on a jack. In this case, preliminary
puts strong and stable trestles under the car body;
- when storing the jack, screw 2 must be screwed in, plungers 3 and 6 lowered, and needle 7
opened by 1...2 turns.
Oil seepage in the plungers and shut-off needle is eliminated by tightening the grease nuts
nick Leakage of oil in the joints of the body parts is eliminated by pulling the head
of the body When the oil seals are worn, they should be replaced.

Removal of air from the working cavity of the jack should be done by unscrewing the plug
10 release of air after each lifting of the plungers.
A sign of the presence of air in the working cavity is failure or slow operation
cargo lifting

In order to prevent air from entering the working cavity of the jack, it is forbidden to lift the jack
side plungers by hand when the needle is closed.

Incomplete lifting of the jack's working plungers occurs due to a lack of oil. Cheers
The oil line should reach the filling hole closed by plug 9.

33-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Failure to work can also be caused by dirt getting inside the jack. For cleaning
from mud, it is necessary to open the head of the housing, drain the oil, fill the base of the housing or
of kerosene, bleed the jack with the shut-off needle open, remove the kerosene and
pour clean filtered oil.
For the jack, you can use MGE 10A oil or standard MVP according to GOST 1805-76.

33.2 Lever-plunger syringe

The lever-plunger syringe (Figure 33.4) is intended for manual lubrication under pressure
of machine units equipped with press-lubricators.
Refill the syringe as follows:
- open cover 3 from housing 8;
1
- pull in 10 pistons 7 by the handle /3 walk inside the building 8;

- use a wooden spatula to fill the housing cavity with lubricant, then pull it in
1
the piston is still on /3 and again fill the cavity with lubricant, the third time move the piston to
failure and fill the housing cavity with grease. The syringe holds 340 cm3 of lubricant. When filling
The needle of the syringe ensures that no air remains in the cavity, which is why it is easy to fill
knock the end of the syringe case on any wooden object (do not crush the syringe).
Air entering cavity B disrupts the operation of the syringe;
- screw cover 3 onto body 8.
To work with a syringe, it is necessary to insert the pin 11 into the slot of the piston 7 and turn ru
pin 10 counterclockwise, then, pressing the handle with your hand, put on the tip 1 of the spike
tsa on the oil pan of the lubricated unit. At the same time, lubricant from cavity B of the syringe through hole A

fed to the plunger cavity. When swinging the lever 6, the plunger 4 receives back
progressive movement

When the plunger moves up, the lubricant through hole A fills the space below
plunger When the plunger moves down, the pressure created by the plunger opens
ball valve 2, and the oil flows through the tube into the tip 1. With the help of a large crowbar
ha 6 and a small area of the plunger in the syringe creates a pressure of about 35 MPa (350 kgf/cm2 ),
which ensures the passage of lubricant to all lubricated surfaces of the unit.
For lubrication of cardan joints of the winch drive, an additional one is attached to the syringe
tip 13, which is put on the main tip 1.

33-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

1 – main tip; 2 – ball valve; 3 – cover; 4 – plunger; 5 – gasket; 6 – ry chag; 7 – piston; 8 – body; 9 – rod; 10
– handle; 11 – pin; 12 – spring; 13 – additional tip; A – hole; B - cavity.

Figure 33.4 – Lever-plunger syringe

33.3 Syringe for oil filling

There is a syringe (Figure 33.5) in the spare parts kit for filling the machine units with oil.

Figure 33.5 – Oil filling syringe.

33-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

34 SEALING

34.1 Classification of types of sealing of units, aggregates and devices

Nodes, aggregates and devices have sealing of the following categories:

I category - it is PROHIBITED to remove the seal in operating organizations . They are
they are filmed only at manufacturing enterprises;

II category – removal and restoration of the seal before the expiration of the warranty period
(unit, unit, device) is allowed only in the presence of a company representative
manufacturer After the warranty expires, the need to remove the seals is established by operation
disruptive organization;
III category – removal and restoration of seals is carried out at the decision of the operator
of the organization and in emergency cases with a mark in the form;
Category IV – seals are installed for the period of delivery to operating organizations
nizations The need to remove and install seals is established by the operating authority
zaciei

34.2 List of sealable units, aggregates and devices

Table 34-1

Number Sealing
Names of sealable units, aggregates and devices of seals category
Commander's hatch cover IV
Driver's hatch cover 11 IV
Combat compartment hatch covers 2 IV
Brake cylinder access hatch cover Winch access 1 IV
hatch cover Front left door Front right door Rear 2 IV
left door Rear right door Power lever adjustment 1 IV
screw Regulator stops: "PLANE" - position P IV
(height above level sea level less than 1000 m) 11 IV
and "HIGH ALTITUDE" - position 1 (from 1000 to IV
2000 m); position 2 (from 2000 to 3000 m) Stops 11 I
of the regulator control lever "STOP" and "MAX. ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ»
Cover of the regulator Reduction valve of the injection oil pump 2 II
Reduction valve of the fuel injection pump Speed meter ÿÿÿ-3ÿ Cover
of the position sensor of the fuel pump rails on the regulator Adjusting 2 II
screws of the fuel pump control shaft lever on the regulator AFP system
heater II
11 II
1 II
1 II
1 II
1 II
1 II

34-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Number Sealing
Names of sealable units, aggregates and devices of seals category
Adjusting screw of the multi-fuel lever (on the regulator) Fuel valve 1 III
of the heater Electric motor of the pump unit of the heater Plug of 1 III
the drain valve of the heater Bypass valve of the engine lubrication 1 I
system (on the ejector box) Flange of the coarse fuel filter Plugs of 1 IV
the filling ports of the external fuel tanks Plugs of the drain valves of 1 II
the external fuel tanks Drain valve plug Drive reducer High-pressure
spool screw of the valve device Adjusting screw of the valve device on 1 IV
the make-up of the hydro transformer Screw of adjusting the pressure 4 IV
of the lubrication of the lubricating valve Bypass valve of the filter of 4 IV
the pumping line Plug of the filling neck of the transmission tank Plug 1 IV
of the drain valve of the transmission tank Filling neck of the hydraulic 1 II
tank Plug of the drain valve of the hydraulic tank Adjusting screws of 1 II
the throttles of the hydropanel shield Adjusting screws for pressure
valves of hydropanels for winch control Elnogo valve of the hydraulic II
system Adjustment screw for regulating the flow of the safety valve of 11 II
the hydraulic system Rotating contact device Block-control unit of air 1 IV
defense system Boxes with ZIP Operator's control unit Commander's 1 IV
control unit Control unit for the mechanisms of the fire control system IV
Optical-electronic module Stabilizer control unit BU-1022-04 Block IV
UDD4-02 Control unit PU 03 -05 Gyrotachometer GT 46 Gyrotachometer 2 II
GT 46-01 Transducer SP10-01 Air defense cylinder Nut with contact 2 II
on air defense cylinder
1 II

1 II
2 II
2 IV
2 IV
2 II
2 II
1 II
2 II
2 II
2 II
4 II
2 II
2 II
6 II
2 IV
2 IV
Dose power meter DRG-T 1 II

34-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

35 DISPOSAL

At the end of the service life, the machine must be written off in accordance with the established procedure

and disposal. Recycling is carried out by completely disassembling the machine, at the same time, the nodes and where

plates are defective. Suitable units and parts are delivered to warehouses for the storage of spare parts

but of the established category, and those unsuitable for further exploitation will be disposed of

or together with the hull and tower after their cutting, are sold for scrap metal according to the contracts

with enterprises processing scrap metal.

35-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

This instruction manual is intended for studying the armor device

transporter, rules for its operation and maintenance in constant readiness for use
niyu by appointment.

The description of the armored personnel carrier units is given in the volume necessary for understanding the principles

of their operation and ensuring proper operation and maintenance.

For a more in-depth study of the device and rules of operation of the components of the bro

non-transporter, it is necessary to additionally use the following documentation, entering

I enclose a set of operational documents:

AAKYA.00.00.000 RE. Automatic cannon caliber 30 mm ZTM1. Explo manual

attacks

ÿÿÿÿ.00.00.000 PR Automatic cannon caliber 30 mm ZTM1. Calculation memo.

KBA.117 RE. 30-mm automatic grenade launcher. Operating manual.

P01.00.00.000 KE. Tank machine gun caliber 7.62 mm KT-7.62. Operation manual.

APMA.461513.014 RE. Navigation equipment of consumers of satellite navigation systems

stem GLONASS and GPS CH-3003E. Instructions for use.

DUYU1.100.004 TO. Internal communication and switching equipment. Technical description and

operating instructions.

VIST.412129.017 RTE. DRG-T radiation reconnaissance device. Instructions for use.

23ADH100 ATCS Operator's Manuals.

23ADH102 ATCS Operator's Pocket Guide.

23ADH112 ATCS Operator's Card.

ÿ1318ÿ ÿ3 Instructions for setting up automatic control equipment (in group ZIP)
Machine Translated by Google
REGISTRATION LETTER CHANGED
Numbers of sheets (pages)
In total Incoming escort
Amendment
No
changed replaced leaves number
new annuls Signature Date
document body
nyh nyh rowan (pages)
nyh in the document document and date

Deputy
date
and

duplicate
number
Acting
Inv.
No.
inv.

Deputy
date
and

ext.
Inv.
no
Letter

84 B1318E RE
Amendment Letter No. document. Deputy Date
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

APPENDIX A

Refueling containers

No Name of the system, gas station Names and designations of fuel oil brands

n/p node, aggregate capacity, l main Duplicating diesel

1 Fuel supply system 585 liters Diesel fuel fuel

vom GOST 303-82 DSTU 3868-99

2 Cooling system 90 liters Low freezing Antifreeze Antifreeze

40 brand liquid A40 Antifreeze

Low freezing Tosol-A65

65 brand liquid low freezing

liquid

OJ-40 "Lena" bottom

freezing cold

liquid

OJ-65 "Lena"

3 Engine lubrication system 85 liters Oil AZMOL GA Oil M-16ÿÿ-3

RANT M4042VT Oil M-8V2S

Butter

GALOL M-4042TD

4 Hydraulic control system 70 liters Oil ARIAN EMT-8 Oil MT-8p

nia, lubrication and cooling

transmission

5 Hydraulic system 22 liters "R" brand oil TELLUS 22 oil

6 Carter steering control 1 liter "R" brand oil Butter

nia Mobil Fluid 93 or

Shell Tellus T

7 Carter: 28 liters Oil TAD-17y Oil MT-16p

1st and 4th bridges 6x2 TSz-9hyp oil

2nd and 3rd bridges 8x2

8 Wheel gearboxes 6 l (0.75x8) TAD-17y oil Oil MT-16p

TSz-9hyp oil

9 Shock absorbers 9 l (0.75x12) AMG-10 oil Butter

Aeroshell Fluid 41.4

A-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

No Name of the system, gas station Names and designations of fuel oil brands
n/p node, aggregate capacity, l main duplicate Oil
10 Hydraulic drive of water supply 90 liters Shell Tellus Oils T68 Cyclon hy
mover Mobil DTE-18M oil hydraulic special 100
Mobil DTE-19M oil

11 Pumps drive water supply 2.35 liters Butter Oil M-16ÿÿ-3

foot of the mover GALOL M-4042TD Oil M-8V2S

Oil AZMOL GA
RANT M4042VT

12 Winch 0.75 l Butter Oil M-16ÿÿ-3

GALOL M-4042TD Oil M-8V2S

Oil AZMOL GA
RANT M4042VT

13 Drive reducer 1.2 liters Butter Oil M-16ÿÿ-3

GALOL M-4042TD Oil M-8V2S

Oil AZMOL GA
RANT M4042VT

14 Slave control drive 2.5 liters Brake fluid liquid

what brakes Ros Super DOT4 Bruke Fluid DOT 4

15 Windshield washer tank 2 liters Water

Liquid "Organic"

16 Air conditioner 1.5 kg Refrigerant R134a

17 Fire extinguisher cylinders 4 kg Khladon 13B1 Khladon 114V2

ore

A-2
Machine Translated by Google

Appendix B

Map of fuel and lubricants

Figure B.1 shows the lubrication points of the machine.

Figure B.1 - Lubrication points of the machine

B1318
RE
E
Machine Translated by Google
B1318
RE
E
Periodicity of lubrication
Name of materials and (TU)
Name of the node, mechanism, etc Application method
ETO
number of lubrication points lubricants
Maintenance
-1 TO
-2

positions
specified
Figure
B.1
No.
on
of

assembling
operation
repairing
nodes
When
or

The main ones 20,000

years
After
km
or
5

Oil TAD-17y GOST 23652-79 - all-season, at a

B temperature of up to 243 K (minus 30°ÿ). Oil
MT-16p GOST 6360-83 or TU38.00117-90 - all-
season, at a temperature of up to 243 K (minus
Carters Check the level and refill.
30°C). Oil TSZ-9 GIP OST 38.01158-78 - in winter, – – –
1 mostov Change the oil. H Kh
at a temperature of up to 223 K (minus 50°C). – – – –
(4 points) XX
Machine Translated by Google

Periodicity of lubrication
Name of materials and (TU)
Name of the node, mechanism, etc Application method
number of lubrication points lubricants ETO Maintenance
-1 TO
-2

positions
specified
Figure
B.1
No.
on
of

The main ones

assembling
operation
repairing
nodes
When
or

20,000
years
After
km
or
5

Oil TAD-17y GOST 23652-79 - all-season, at a

temperature of up to 243 K (minus 30°ÿ). Oil MT-16p
GOST 6360-83 or TU38.00117-90 - all-season, at a – – –
Carters Check the level and refill. H Kh
temperature of up to 243 K (minus 30°ÿ). Oil TSZ-9
wheeled
2 GIP OST 38.01158-78 - in winter, at a temperature of
reducers (8
up to 223 K (minus 50°C). – – – –
points) Replace the oil. XX

Cardan spline
joints
Lubricant Litol-24 GOST
3 Lubricate – – – -H
Valov 21150–87.

transmissions (12
points) Pins of
rotary knuckles
Inject until fresh lubricant appears
– – H – –
through the protective cuff
Lubricant Litol-24 GOST
4 lower and their
21150–87. cap
Thrust – – – –
To inject after being in water. Kh
bearings (4 points)
Pivots of upper

rotary fists (4
points)
Lubricant Litol-24 GOST
Replace the lubricant.
B1318
RE
E
5 The amount of new lubricant should – –

–X–
21150–87.
be 80–100 g.
Machine Translated by Google
B1318
RE
E Periodicity of lubrication
Name of materials and (TU)
Name of the node, mechanism, etc Application method
number of lubrication points
ETO
lubricants Maintenance
-1 TO
-2

positions
specified
Figure
B.1
No.
on
of

assembling
operation
repairing
nodes
When
or

The main ones 20,000

years
After
km
or
5

Bearings of cardan
joints of the
transmission and
drive
Grease No. 158 TU 38.101320–77 or AZMOL
6 water supply grease No. 158 TU–U00152365.118–2000ÿ. Apply lubricant.
– – – -H

drive (28 hinges

with four

bearings
B in each)

Sealing

receiving rod
Lubricant Litol-24
7 Apply lubricant.
– – – -H
wheeled GOST 21150–87.
reducers (8 points)

Ball support of
the expansion fork Lubricant Litol-24
8 parking lot – – – -H
Apply lubricant.
GOST 21150–87.
Tromzov
(2 points)
Machine Translated by Google

Periodicity of lubrication
Name of materials and (TU)
Name of the node, mechanism, etc Application method
number of lubrication points lubricants
ETO Maintenance
-1 TO
-2

positions
specified
Figure
B.1
No.
on
of

assembling
operation
repairing
nodes
When
or

The main ones 20,000

years
After
km
or
5

Check the level and refill

– H H – –
(inject
Steering
before the appearance of grease from
crankcase Oil "R" TU
9 filling hole,
mechanism 38.101179-71 - all-season.
which is at the same time
(1 point)
control). Replace
the oil. – – – H H
B
Bearings of
cardan joints
Syringe until fresh lubricant appears
and cardan shaft Lubricant Litol-24
10 from the pod - - -X-
of the steering column GOST 21150–87.
oil seals
(6 points)

Slotted
connection
Lubricant Litol-24
11 Lubricate - - - -H
cardan shaft of GOST 21150–87.
the steering
column (2 points)

12
Hinges
wheel traction

outer Lubricant Litol-24

Syringe to
squeezing out the lubricant.
B1318
RE
E
- H H - -

steering GOST 21150–87.

to inject Kh - - - -
trapezoid (8
after swimming
points)
Machine Translated by Google

B1318
RE
E Periodicity of lubrication
Name of materials and (TU)
Name of the node, mechanism, etc Application method
number of lubrication points lubricants ETO Maintenance
-1 TO
-2

positions
specified
Figure
B.1
No.
on
of

The main ones assembling

operation
repairing
nodes
When
or

20,000
years
After
km
or
5

The hinges of the

steering
Lubricant Litol-24 Syringe to - -X- -
thirteen
trapezoid rod are inside
GOST 21150–87. squeezing out the lubricant.
cars
(8 points)

Brackets
Pendulum Lubricant Litol-24
B 14 - - - - Kh
Apply lubricant.
levers (4 GOST 21150–87.
points)

Hydraulic drive of the

Check the level, refill. - Kh Kh - Kh
working brake Brake fluid Ros Super
Replace the brake
15 DOT4 TU
systems U24.6-14215951.002-2002. - - - Kh Kh
liquid
(1 point)

System
Kh Kh Kh - -
hydraulic control, Check the oil level.
Oil ARIAN EMT-8 TU U.23.2–
16 lubricants and
20574128.004–2001.
cooling Replace the oil. - - - Kh -

transmission
Machine Translated by Google

Periodicity of lubrication
Name of materials and (TU)
Name of the node, mechanism, etc Application method
number of lubrication points lubricants ETO Maintenance
-1 TO
-2

positions
specified
Figure
B.1
No.
on
of

The main ones

assembling
operation
repairing
nodes
When
or

20,000
years
After
km
or
5

Kh Kh Kh - -
Check the oil level.
Hydraulic Oil "R" TU
17
system 38.101179-71 - all-season.
Replace the oil. - - - Kh Kh

B
Note: Lubrication operations performed during this type of maintenance are marked with an "X" in the "Lubrication frequency" column.

with the sign "XX" - lubrication operations performed through one maintenance, the sign "–" means that with this type of maintenance

lubrication operations are not carried out.

B1318
RE
E
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

APPENDIX B

Fuel, lubricants and coolants,

authorized for use and their international equivalents

Applicable
Corresponding international equivalent
products
Brand Brand, Specification, Country,
GOST, TU name classification of manufacturing company
FUEL
Diesel fuel Shell Diesel Shell company,
summer Motorgasoline Gulf company,
GOST 305-82 Mobil Diesel Mobi1 company,
DSTU 3868-99 Motorgasoline Chevron company,
BP Autodiesel BP company, Exxon
Esso Auto Diesel company, Teboil
Teboil 1 kasa company, Texas
Diesel Fuel 2 company
LH -02/L, LH-02/PE BDS 8884-82
DG-02/L DG-02PE BDS 8884-82 Bulgaria
DS, DZS-30 ÿÿ ÿ 0210196-87
ONORMC 1104 Austria
DIN 51601 DIN
51603 TL
9140-001 TL Germany
9140-003 PN-67/
ILS, IDS C-96048 BS Poland
Cl, C2 2869-83 DEF
STAN 91-9/3 DEF Great Britain
Dieso military
Dieso F-76 STAN 91-4 /5 VV-
Grade DF-2 F-800D Norway
SIS155432 SIS
Sweden
155403
Motorina-15
Motorina pentru STAS 240-80
CS 157-87 Romania
tehnika speciala de
marina
2D MIL-F-16884 H USA
DCEA105
DF-2
DF-2 STM 7120A France

CAN 2-3.6M85 3-
Type B GP-15-Ma 3- Canada
ÿÿ-13-ÿÿ IS:1460
VV-F-800C India

Grade DF-2 Turkey

MIL-F-16884G

No. 1, No. 2 JIS K 2204 Japan

B-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Applicable
Corresponding international equivalent
products
Brand GOST, Brand, Specification, Country,
TU Diesel fuel name classification manufacturing company
Diesel Chief L
winter Diesel Chief Arctic Texas company
GOST 305-82 Grade DF-A VV-F-800D
USA
DSTU 3868-99 Grade DF-1 VV-F-800
Special No. 3 JIS K-2204 Japan
Type A CAN 2-3.6M85
Canada
Type AA CAN 2-3.6M85
NM-35A TPD 33-150-83 Czech Republic, Slovakia
DS3-30 ÿÿ ÿ 02 10196-87
Bulgaria
DG-02/3 ÿÿÿ 8884-82
DZ-K-30 Hungary
IZ-35 PN-67/C-96048
Poland
IZ-40 ZN 82/MPChiL/NF-156
Motorina-35 STAS 240-80 Romania,
Arctic diesel fuel GOST Diesel Chief Arctic Texaso, Canada,
305-82 Type AA CAN 2-3.6M85 USA, Poland,
Grade DF-A VV-F-800D ZN Canada,
IZ-40 82/MPChiL/NF-156 CAN Romania, Italy,
Gasoline A-72 2-3.5-79 STAS 176-80 Japan, Texaso,
GOST 2084-77 Normala BP, Mobil,
Benzina normale Bulgaria, Austria,
Type 2 JIKS 2202 Poland, Romania,
Gasoline A-76 Lead free Texaco USA, Italy,
GOST 2084-77 Regular Gasoline Japan, Canada,
Gasoline A-76. A-80 Gasoline Regular Agip SpA, BP,
DSTU 4063-2001 A-86 BDS 8638-82 Chevron
Normal ONORM C 1103
Ethylina 78 PN-86/ÿ-96025/05
Regular (CO/R-87) STAS 176-80 MIL-
Type 2 G-3056C NC
Normale 623-01 JIS K
Type 2 2202 CAN
2-3.5-79
Fuel for Jet A-1
jet engines Jet A-1
TS-1, T-2 GOST Jet Fuel A-1
10227-86; TS-1 GSTU Jet Fuel Grade Jp-8
320.00149943. 011-99 Jet Fuel Grade Jet A-1 Mobil company
Jet A-1 Shell company
Avjet A-1 Texaco company
Jet A-1 Total company
Turbo Fuel A-1+AL 38
Turbo Fuel A-1 Exxon company
TC-1 BDS 5075-82 Bulgaria
DEF(Aust)5240A
Australia
DEF(Aust)5208 A
BA-PF-7B Belgium
MIL-ÿ-83133C USA, Greece, Norway
F-34 AIR 3405/D France

B-2
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Applicable
Corresponding international equivalent
products
Brand GOST, Brand, Specification, Country,
TU Fuel for name classification manufacturing company
F-35 AIR 3405/D Portugal Great
jet engines Britain, Germany,
DERD 2494
TS-1, T-2 GOST Denmark, Netherlands
DERD 2453
10227-86; TS-1 GSTU
320.00149943. 011-99 CAN 2-3.23-M80
F-34 CA/CG SB-3-23M86 Canada
F-35 CA/CG SB-3-23M86
PSM-2 PN-86/C-96-26 TWT
Poland
Jet A-1 3/89 STAS
T-1 5639-88 Romanian
Fuel for Jet A-1 company Agip
jet engines Turbo Fuel Al + AL
38 Turbo Fuel A-1 Exxon company
RT GOST
10227-86; GSTU Jet A-1 Total company,
320.00149943. 007-97 Avjet A-1 Texaco company,
Jet A-1 BP company,
Jet A-1 Shell company,
Jet Fuel A-1 Chevron company
Jet Al
Jet Fuel Grade JP-8 Mobil company
Jet Fuel Avtur
PT BDS 5075-82 Bulgaria,
Jet A-1 ASTM D 1655-85 Hungary,
DERD 2453 Germany, Denmark,
DERD 2494 the Netherlands,
Great Britain,
DEF(Aust)5240A Australia, India
ATF IS:1571
Fuel for F-34 AER-MC-141c
Italy
jet engines F-35 AER-MC-141c
RT GOST MIL-T-83I33 C USA, Greece, Norway
10227-86; GSTU F-34 CA/CG SB-3-23M-86
320.00149943. 007-97 Canada
F-35 CA/CG SB-3-23M-86
F-34 AIR 3405/D
F-35 AIR 3405/D France
PL-RT CSN 656520
Jet A-1 JIS K 2209 Japan
CMATCHES
VNII NP-232 Antiseize
GOST 14068-79 Ekhop company
Compound DTD 392
Nycogrease GN 932 Nyco company
Mobilux EP O Mobil company
Compound S 4768
Shell company
Compound S 5488
MoS2-Olpaste TGL 10596/03 Germany
Molipas 60N TWT Naftochem 117/79 Poland

B-3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

GOST Brand, Specification, Country,

brand, TU name classification MIL- manufacturing company
TSIATIM-221 Aeroshell 15, 15A G-25013D, E Shell
GOST 9433-80 Mobil grease HP 222
Mobillith SHC 220 Mobil company
Mobiltemp SHC 100
Nyco grease GN 130 Nyco company
STS 113; STS 123M M 31022 Germany
Syntex 2 Multis TWT Naftochem 96/78 Poland Total
Litol-24 L3 Alvania EP2 company
GOST 21150-87 Alvania R3 Retinax
A Mobilux 2EP2 Shell company
Mobilux 3EP3
Energrease S3
Energrease L2 Mobil company

Multipurpose LS3
Spheerol AP3 BP company
Energrease L2 Beacon
3 Agip F.1CR FC3
company Castrol
Agip F.1CR MU3
Gulferown 3 Exxon company
Multifak 2 Nyco grease
Agip company
GN110 LZS-2,3
XG-279 SWA 532, Gulf company,
542 SWB 423 Texaco company,
LT-4S3 MIL-G-10924D Nyco company,
Graphited No 3 MSZ 11710/4 Hungary, Great
Mobiltac 81 DEF STAN 91-27/1 Britain
Mobiltac 80 Barbatia
TGL 14819/02 Germany
2,4 Energrease
C3-G, GP-2-G, BN-73/0536-15 Poland,
GP3-G Van Estan 3 USA, Turkey
Graphite grease GOST Spheerol LG 904
3333-80 Grease Agip Fl GR 078.01 Mobil company
NG 3 Grease XG2
Real fnd Flangt VV-G 671d Shell company
Lubricant Graphite
VR company
Grease No 3 Nyco
Grease GN917 Ekhon company,
Castrol company,
Texas company,
Agip company,
Caltex company

Chevron company

firm Gulf firm

Nyco Bulgaria
BDS 6743-76 Hungary
KSZ-3G MSZ 11710/2 Poland USA
Grafitowany PN-59/C-96153
VV-G-671f

B-4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

Brand Brand, Specification, Country,

GOST, TU name classification manufacturing company
COOLANTS Agip F.1 Antifreeze BP
Antifreeze 40 Antifrost Castrol Antifreeze Esso Antifreeze Agip company,
GOST 28084-89 Atlas Perma-Guard Gulf Antifreeze and VR company,
Tosol-A40 M; TU Cooland Glycoshell Plus Texaco Antifreeze Castrol company
6-57-48-91 and Summer Cooland Teboil Fresto Mobil
Permazone Ekhon company

Gulf company

Shell company

Texas company

Teboil company
Mobil company
BA-PS-606A Belgium
BDS 10126-82 Bulgaria Italy
E/L-1415B
FS 6850-0951 Norway
MIL-A-46153B USA France
DSEA 615

B-5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

APPENDIX G

THE LIST OF CONDITIONS IS REDUCED

Gas station - network protection machine

AKC, AKMS - Kalashnikov assault rifle

AKP - automatic transmission
BZA - battery protection unit
TDC - top dead center
VPHR is a military chemical reconnaissance device
VR - input reducer
ETO - daily maintenance
ZIP - spare parts, tools and accessories
KO - control inspection
NMT - bottom dead center
KNIFE - low-freezing coolant
PAZ - anti-nuclear protection
PPO - fire equipment
RK - distribution box
SMU - light masking device
TDP - tank degassing kit
TNVD - high-pressure fuel pump
TNND - low pressure fuel pump
TO - technical maintenance
FVU - filter ventilation unit
FPT - filter-absorber

G-1
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

CONTENT

INTRODUCTION................................................... ................................................ ................................

1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS................................................... .................................1-1

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................... ................................................ ............2-1

2.1 Department of management................................................... ................................................ ...........2-4

2.2 Combat department................................................... ................................................ ....................2-8

2.3 Motor and transmission department............................................... .....................................2-11

3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................................... ..............................3-1

4 BODY ................................................... ................................................ ...................................4-1

4.1 Hatches and doors of the hull .................................................... ................................................ .............4-3

4.1.1 Covers of the driver's and commander's hatches.......................................... .....................................4-3

4.1.2 Viewing hatches of the driver and commander................................................ ...................................4-5

4.1.3 Upper hatches of the fighting compartment ........................................... ..........................................4-6

4.1.4 Winch cable delivery hatch................................................. ................................................ .....4-7

4.1.5 Winch hatch................................................... ................................................ ..........................4-7

4.1.6 Battery compartment................................................... ..............................................4-8

4.1.7 Commander's and driver's doors ......................................... ................................................ .4-8

4.1.8 Additional protection of the window openings of the front doors............................................ .4-8

4.1.9 Rear doors ............................................. ................................................ ..........................4-10

4.1.10 Loopholes for shooting from automatic weapons.......................................... ......................................4-10

4.2 The roof of the motor-transmission compartment................................................. ........................4-12

4.2.1 The device of the roof of the motor-transmission compartment ......................................... ...4-12

4.2.2 Opening the roof of the motor-transmission compartment ......................................... ..4-13

4.3 Glazing of the housing .............................................. ................................................ ...............4-16

4.4 Internal structure of the body, partitions of the motor-transmission compartment..4-16

4.5 Seats ................................................ ................................................ ...................................4-16

4.5.1 Seats of the driver, commander and operator ......................................... ..............................4-16

4.5.2 Paratrooper seats ............................................. ................................................ ....................4-17

4.6 Installation of additional protection (lattice screens).......................................... .....4-19

4.7 Traction-coupling device................................................. ................................................ .....4-22

5 TOWER................................................... ................................................ ....................................5-1

5.1 Epaulette of the tower................................................... ................................................ ..........................5-2

5.2 Stopper of the tower .................................................... ................................................ .........................5-2

6 WEAPONS BLOCK ............................................... ................................................ ..........6-1

6.1 General information................................................... ................................................ ......................6-1

3
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.2 Safety requirements when working with weapons............................................ ..............6-1

6.2.1 Safety requirements when working with an automatic gun,

automatic grenade launcher and machine gun .............................................. ......................6-1

6.2.2 Safety requirements when working with an ATGM launcher...............................6-3

6.3 Transferring weapons from a combat position to a combat position ........................................... ..........6-4

6.4 Transfer of weapons from the combat position to the marching position ........................................... ..........6-4

6.5 Locking mechanism of the armament block................................................. ................................6-5

6.6 Automatic cannon................................................... ................................................ .......6-6

6.6.1 Purpose................................................... ................................................ ............................6-6

6.6.2 Installing the cannon................................................ ................................................ ...................6-6

6.6.3 Bringing the cannon to normal combat ........................................... ...................................6-7

6.6.4 Gun ammunition system ............................................. ................................................ ..6-11

6.6.5 Preparing the gun for firing................................................. ................................................ 6-16

6.6.6 Checking the operation of the gun’s electric trigger ........................................... ................................6-16

6.6.7 Loading the gun ............................................. ................................................ ...................6-16

6.6.8 Manual and electromechanical reloading of the cannon.......................................... ..........6-17

6.6.9 Opening and shooting ........................................... .................................................6 -18

6.6.10 Discharging the cannon................................................. ................................................ ...............6-20

6.6.11 Cannon maintenance ............................................... ......................................6-21

6.6.12 Possible malfunctions and their elimination.......................................... .........................6-21

6.7 Paired machine gun................................................... ................................................ .............6-22

6.7.1 Appointment................................................... ................................................ ............................6-22

6.7.2 Installation of a machine gun ............................................... ................................................ ..............6-23

6.7.3 Bringing the machine gun to normal combat............................................ ..............................6-25

6.7.4 Preparing the machine gun for shooting ........................................... ............................................6-28

6.7.5 Loading the machine gun................................................. ................................................ ..............6-28

6.7.6 Checking the operation of the electric trigger of the machine gun ........................................... .............................6-29

6.7.7 Shooting from a machine gun............................................ ................................................ .............6-29

6.7.8 Discharging the machine gun ............................................. ................................................ ............6-30

6.7.9 Machine gun maintenance................................................. ....................................6-30

6.7.10 Possible malfunctions ............................................. ................................................ 6-32

6.8 Automatic grenade launcher .............................................. ..............................................6-33

6.8.1 Purpose................................................... ................................................ ............................6-33

6.8.2 Installation of a grenade launcher ............................................. ................................................ .........6-33

6.8.3 Removal and installation of a grenade launcher ........................................... ............................................6-35

6.8.4 Calibration of the grenade launcher ............................................. ................................................ ............6-35

4
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

6.8.5 Preparation of the grenade launcher for shooting ........................................... ........................................6-36

6.8.6 Loading a grenade launcher............................................ ................................................ .........6-37

6.8.7 Bringing the grenade launcher to normal combat ........................................... ........................6-37

6.8.8 Discharging a grenade launcher................................................. ................................................ .......6-40

6.8.9 Maintenance of the grenade launcher after firing ........................................... .....6-40

6.9 Anti-tank missile complex................................................... ..............................6-41

6.9.1 Composition of the anti-tank missile complex ........................................... ....................6-41

6.9.2 Safety measures when working with anti-tank missiles ......................................... ...................................6-42

6.9.3 Preparation of ATGMs for firing, installation and removal of ATGMs...................................... ..........6-42

6.9.4 Firing from ATGMs............................................ ................................................ ...................6-45

6.9.5 Maintenance of ATGM after firing............................................ .....................................6-45

6.10 Armament calibrations ............................................... ................................................ ...........6-45

6.11 Balancing mechanism................................................... .................................................6 -47

6.11.1 Operation of the balancing mechanism................................................. ....................................6-47

6.11.2 Replacement of the cable in the balancing mechanism........................................... ........................6-47

6.12 Protective shields ............................................... ................................................ ...................6-50

7 WEAPON STABILIZER ............................................... ......................................7-1

7.1 General information................................................... ................................................ ......................7-1

7.2 The composition of the weapons stabilizer .............................................. ........................................7-1

7.2.1 Control panel................................................... ................................................ ...................7-1

7.2.2 Digital stabilizer control unit ........................................... ........................7-3

7.2.3 Gyrotachometers............................................... ................................................ .....................7-3

7.2.4 Three-phase converter ............................................. ................................................7- 4

7.2.5 Vertical and horizontal guidance amplifiers.......................................... .......7-4

7.2.6 Electric motors................................................... ................................................ .................7-4

7.3 Preparing the stabilizer for work, turning it on and off,

operation procedure of the stabilizer .................................................... ..............................................7-4

7.3.1 Stabilizer preparation for work ........................................... ........................................7-5

7.3.2 Turning on the stabilizer................................................... ................................................ ....7-5

7.3.3 Stabilizer operation procedure ............................................. ..............................................7-6

7.3.4 Operation of the stabilizer................................................... ................................................ ............7-8

7.3.5 Turning off the stabilizer ............................................. ................................................ .7-8

7.4 Stabilizer storage................................................... ................................................ ........7-9

7.4.1 Short-term storage............................................... ................................................ ..7-9

7.4.2 Long-term storage ............................................. ................................................ ............7-9

7.5 Possible malfunctions of the armament stabilizer ............................................. ........7-9

5
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

8 FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................... .....................................8-1

8.1 Designation, composition and placement of components of the EMS............................................. ........8-1

8.1.1 Functions of the "Arkan" management system ......................................... ...................................

8.1.2 Composition of the "Arkan" control system ......................................... ......................................

8.1.3 Optical-electronic module OEM-B............................................. ........................................

9 AMMUNITION SET ................................................ ................................................ ...................9-1

9.1 Preparation of gun ammunition................................................. ............................................9-1

9.1.1 Cartridges for the cannon................................................ ................................................ ....................9-2

9.1.2 Marking of ammunition and their elements ........................................... ..............................9-5

9.2 Preparation of machine gun ammunition................................................. ........................................9-6

9.3 Preparing grenade launcher ammunition ............................................... ...................................9-6

9.4 Preparation of ATGM ammunition.............................................. ............................................9-7

10 ARMAMENT OF THE CREW AND LANDING GROUNDS................................................. ..........................10-1

10.1 Safety measures when working with weapons................................................. ......................10-1

10.2 Placement of weapons and ammunition of the crew and landing party in the car.............................................. 10-1

11 OBSERVATION INSTRUMENTS .................................................... ................................................11- 1

11.1 Driver monitoring devices................................................... ............................................11-1

11.2 The TNPO-168V driver monitoring device............................................ .......11-2

11.3 TVN-5 night driver monitoring device.......................................... ..........................11-3

11.3.1 Possible malfunctions of the TVN-5 device and methods of their elimination............................11-5

11.4 Commander's observation devices................................................. ........................................11-6

11.5 Airborne observation devices ............................................... ...............................................11-6

11.6 Rear-view mirror................................................... ................................................ .............11-6

11.7 Glass cleaning system of windshields of observation hatches................................................. .11-7

11.7.1 Wiper .......................................................... ................................................ ...............11-7

11.7.2 Windshield washer............................................... ................................................ ................11-9

12 POWER PLANT ............................................... ................................................ ...12-1

12.1 Safety measures................................................... ................................................ ..............12-1

12.2 Engine ................................................ ................................................ .............................12-1

12.2.1 Engine operation control .............................................. ................................................ 12-3

12.3 Fuel system ............................................... ................................................ ...............12-4

12.3.1 General information................................................... ................................................ ...................12-4

12.3.2 Fuel tanks............................................... ................................................ ...................12-7

12.3.3 Fuel distribution valve............................................... ........................................12-7

12.3.4 Fuel filters................................................. ................................................ ............12-8

12.3.5 Fuel gauges .............................................. ................................................ ......................12-9

6
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.3.6 Fuel pumping pumps ............................................. ........................................12-9

12.3.7 Air separation tank and check valve ........................................... ...................12-10

12.3.8 Drain valve................................................. ................................................ ..............12-10

12.3.9 High-pressure fuel equipment............................................. ..........................12-11

12.3 10 Fuel lines............................................... ................................................ ..............12-11

12.3.11 Fuel supply control drive............................................ ...................................12-11

12.3.12 Operation of the fuel system............................................ ................................................ 12-13

12.3.13 Refueling and draining fuel............................................ ................................................ .....12-13

12.3.14 Servicing the coarse fuel filter ........................................... ..............12-15

12.3.15 Maintenance of the fine filter................................................. ............................12-16

12.3.16 Adjustment of fuel equipment ............................................. ...................................12-17

12.3.17 Servicing the fuel system............................................ ...................................12-17

12.4 Air supply system .............................................. ................................................ ..12-18

12.4.1 Air intake device ............................................. ..............................................12-19

12.4.2 Operation of the air supply system............................................ ..........................12-20

12.4.3 Maintenance of the air supply system ........................................... ..........................12-20

12.4.4 Exhaust gas release system ........................................... ...................................12-22

12.5 Heating system ................................................... ................................................ ...............12-24

12.5.1 Heater................................................... ................................................ .....................12-24

12.5.2 Fuel tap ............................................. ................................................ ...................12-28

12.5.3 Operation of the heater................................................. ................................................ ..........12-29

12.5.4 Maintenance of the heater................................................. ..............................................12-29

12.6 Lubrication system................................................... ................................................ .....................12-30

12.6.1 Oil tank ............................................. ................................................ ......................12-31

12.6.2 Oil injection pump ............................................. ................................................ 12-33

12.6.3 Drain pump................................................. ................................................ ..........12-33

12.6.4 Oil centrifugal filter ............................................. ........................................12-33

12.6.5 Oil radiator ............................................. ................................................ ............12.34

12.6.6 Operation of the engine lubrication system ........................................... ........................................12-34

12.6.7 Washing the engine oil filters ........................................... ...................................12-35

12.6.8 Refueling (top-up) and oil level control ......................................... .....................12-36

12.6.9 Draining oil ............................................. ................................................ ..........................12-37

12.6.10 Changing the oil ............................................... ................................................ ......................12-37

12.6.11 Driver's actions when the minimum pressure alarm is triggered

oils................................................... ................................................ ..............................12-38

12.6.12 Maintenance of the lubrication system ............................................. ..........................................12-38

7
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

12.7 Cooling system................................................... ................................................ ............12-38

12.7.1 Radiator .............................................. ................................................ ..............................12-40

12.7.2 Steam-air valve................................................. ................................................ ......12-41

12.7.3 Compensation tank ............................................... ................................................ ........12-41

12.7.4 Water pump................................................. ................................................ ......................12-42

12.7.5 Thermostats .............................................. ................................................ .........................12-42

12.7.6 Injector................................................... ................................................ .............................12-43

12.7.7 Operation of the cooling system ............................................. ................................................12- 44

12.7.8 Filling the cooling system................................................. ..............................................12-45

12.8 Possible malfunctions of the engine, support systems, their causes

and methods of elimination................................................... ................................................ .........12-47

13 TRANSMISSION ................................................ ................................................ .................13-1

13.1 General description ................................................... ................................................ ...................13-1

13.2 Input gearbox ............................................... ................................................ ................13-1

13.2.1 Device and operation of the input reducer ........................................... .............................13-1

13.2.2 Maintenance of the input reducer................................................. ......................................13-3

13.3 Gear box................................................... ................................................ ...................13-3

13.3.1 Gearbox device .............................................. ................................................thirteen- 4

13.3.2 Control panel for selecting the driving mode ........................................... ..........................................13-4

13.3.3 Operation of the gearbox................................................ ................................................ .......13-6

13.3.4 Servicing the gearbox................................................ ..........................................13-6

13.4 Distribution box .............................................. ................................................ ............13-6

13.4.1 Transfer box device................................................. ........................................13-6

13.4.2 Device and operation of transfer case control drives .............................13-8

13.4.3 Servicing the transfer case ............................................... ...................................13-8

13.5 Cardan transmissions .............................................. ................................................ ............13-8

13.5.1 Servicing cardan transmission................................................ .....................................13-10

13.6 Bridges................................................... ................................................ ...................................13-11

13.6.1 Maintenance of bridges................................................. ................................................ .........13-14

13.7 Wheel gearboxes................................................... ................................................ ............13-14

13.7.1 Device of wheel reducers .............................................. ........................................13-14

13.7.2 Maintenance of wheel reducers............................................ ...................................13-18

13.8 Possible transmission malfunctions ............................................... ............................13-19

14 STEERING ................................................... ................................................ ..14-1

14.1 Steering column................................................... ................................................ ....................14-1

14.2 Steering mechanism ............................................... ................................................ ................14-2

8
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

14.3 Cardan shaft of the steering column................................................. ............................................14-4

14.4 Steering drive................................................... ................................................ .....................14-5

14.5 Hydraulic amplifier of the steering drive ............................................. ......................14-8

14.6 Operation of the hydraulic power steering drive............................................... .............................14-9

15 HYDROSYSTEM................................................... ................................................ ...............15-1

15.1 Hydraulic system of the machine................................................... ................................................ .........15-1

15.2 Operation of the hydraulic system of the machine............................................... ...............................................15-6

15.3 System of hydraulic control, lubrication and cooling of the transmission.......................................15-7

15.4 Operation of the hydraulic control, lubrication and transmission cooling system ..........................15-18

15.5 Maintenance of the machine's hydraulic system............................................ ............................................15-20

15.6 Possible malfunctions of the hydraulic system............................................... ..........................15-21

16 BRAKING SYSTEMS ................................................... ................................................ .16-1

16.1 Working brake system .............................................. ................................................ ..16-1

16.1.1 Actuator of the service brake system............................................ .....................................16-1

16.1.2 Master brake cylinder ............................................. ................................................16- 3

16.1.3 Brake mechanisms............................................... ................................................ ........16-4

16.1.4 Two-section brake valve ............................................. ........................................16-5

16.1.5 Equalizer of the brake drive ............................................. ..........................................16-5

16.1.6 Operation of the brake drive................................................. ................................................ .16-6

16.1.7 Adjustment of the drive of the service brake system............................................. ..............16-6

16.1.8 Procedure for checking and eliminating the presence of water, oil and working fluid

in brake mechanisms .............................................. ................................................ .16-7

16.1.9 Adjustment of brake mechanisms of the working brake system...............................16-8

16.1.10 Filling the hydraulic brake actuator with working fluid,

pumping the drive and replacing the fluid................................................. .............................16-8

16.2 Parking brake system............................................... ..............................................16-10

16.3 Possible malfunctions of brake systems............................................ .....................16-13 17 WATER ENGINE AND

WAVE-REFLECTOR SHIELD .............17-1

17.1 Water-borne propulsion................................................... ................................................ .......17-1

17.1.1 Hydraulic drive of the water-flow mover ............................................. .................................17-2

17.1.2 The reducer of the pumps of the drive of the water supply drive ........................................... ............17-3

17.1.3 Possible malfunctions of the reducer of the pump of the drive of the water supply drive........17-4

17.1.4 Operation of the hydraulic drive of the water-flow mover ........................................... ....................17-4

17.1.5 Electronic control system of a water-powered engine with a hydraulic drive ..........17-5

17.2 Wave-reflecting shield and shield control drive ........................................... .17-7

17.3 Possible malfunctions of the waterline drive and wave-reflecting shield ...17-9

9
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

18 WATER PUMPING AGENTS ............................................... .............................18-1

18.1 General information................................................... ................................................ ....................18-1

18.2 Possible malfunctions of water pumping devices................................................. .....18-3

19 UNDERcarriage ................................................... ................................................ ................19-1
19.1 Suspension................................................... ................................................ ...............................19-1

19.1.1 Suspension levers................................................. ................................................ ...................19-1

19.1.2 Torsion shafts ............................................. ................................................ ................19-3

19.1.3 Buffers................................................... ................................................ .................................19-5

19.1.4 Shock absorbers............................................... ................................................ .....................19-5

19.1.5 Suspension maintenance................................................... ................................................ .....19-6

19.2 Car wheels................................................... ................................................ .....................19-9

19.2.1 Rules for the use of wheels and tires ........................................... ........................................19-9

19.2.2 Maintenance of wheels and tires............................................ ................................................ ..19-11

19.3 Possible undercarriage malfunctions................................................. ............................19-12

20 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM............................................... ......................................20-1

20.1 Purpose and composition of the pneumatic system............................................ ......................20-1

20.2 System of centralized regulation of air pressure in tires ........................20-5

20.3 Operation of the centralized tire pressure regulation system............20-8

20.4 Maintenance of the pneumatic system .............................................. .............................20-9

20.5 Possible malfunctions of the pneumatic system............................................ .........20-10

21 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT................................................... ..............................................21-1

21.1 Sources of electrical energy............................................... ........................................21-3

21.1.1 Accumulator batteries ............................................. ................................................ ...21-3

21.1.2 Generator set................................................... ................................................ ......21-3

21.1.3 Maintenance of sources of electrical energy ........................................... ............21-4

21.2 Electricity consumers................................................... ................................................21- 7

21.2.1 Starter .............................................. ................................................ ................................21-7

21.3 Auxiliary and switching equipment ............................................. .................21-7

21.3.1 Protection and switching unit............................................ ................................................ ..21-7

21.3.2 Control panel................................................. ................................................ ................21-7

21.3.3 Automatic gearbox control unit ........................................... ...........21-9

21.3.4 Control unit for water-borne propulsion systems ........................................... .....................21-10

21.3.5 Driver's shield................................................. ................................................ .......................21-10

21.3.6 Lighting and signaling devices ........................................... ...................................21-15

21.3.7 Socket for starting the engine from an external source of electricity.........................21-18

21.3.8 Emergency socket ............................................. ................................................ ...............21-18

10
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

21.3.9 Fuses .............................................. ................................................ .................21-18

21.3.10 Rotating contact device ............................................. ...............................21-19

21.4 Electrical network of the machine................................................... ................................................ 21-20

21.4.1 Maintenance of the electrical network of the machine............................................ ........................21-22

21.4.2 Methods of detecting malfunctions in electrical circuits...................................21-33

21.4.3 Possible malfunctions of electrical equipment ............................................. .............21-23

22 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF THE COMBAT MODULE............................................ ........22-1

23 MEANS OF COMMUNICATION .............................................. ................................................ ..............23-1

23.1 General information................................................... ................................................ ....................23-1

23.2 Internal communication and switching equipment............................................ .........................23-1

23.2.1 Possible malfunctions of internal communication and switching equipment ....................23-4

23.3 Means of external communication .............................................. ................................................ .......23-6

24 RADIO NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT............................................... ...................24-1 25 COLLECTIVE PROTECTION

SYSTEM............................ ..............................................25-1

25.1 Filter ventilation installation. ................................................ ................................25-1

25.1.1 Purpose and device of the filter ventilation installation............................................25-1

25.1.2 Work of the FVU............................................... ................................................ ..........................25-5

25.1.3 Operation of the FVU................................................. ................................................ ...25-6

25.1.4 Possible malfunctions of the FVU and methods of their elimination................................................. ..25-7

25.1.5 Replacing the filter-absorber ........................................... .................................................25 -8

25.1.6 Actions of the crew in the conditions of the use of weapons of mass destruction.................25-8

25.2 Radiation reconnaissance device DRG-T ........................................... ...................................25-9

25.3 Fire-fighting equipment................................................... ..........................................25-11

25.3.1 Designation of fire-fighting equipment............................................ ....................25-11

25.3.2 Composition of the air defense system................................................ ................................................ ...........25-11

25.3.3 Operation of the air defense system ............................................. ................................................ ...........25-12

25.3.4 Actions of the crew in the event of a fire................................................. ..............................................25-14

25.3.5 Replacement of cylinders and pyro cartridges of the air defense system............................................ ...................25-14

25.3.6 Possible malfunctions of the air defense system and ways to eliminate them ..........................25-15

26 CAMOUFLAGE MEANS ............................................... ................................................26- 1

26.1 The curtain setting system ............................................... ................................................ .26-1

26.1.1 Device and placement of the curtain installation system................................................. ........26-1

26.1.2 System operation................................................... ................................................ ....................26-2

26.1.3 Security requirements................................................. ................................................ ...26-2

26.1.4 Preparing the system for work ........................................... ................................................26- 3

26.1.5 Installation of smoke screens ............................................. ................................................ .26-3

11
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

26.1.6 System maintenance ............................................. ...................................26-4

26.1.7 Storage of the curtain setting system............................................ ...................................26-6

26.1.8 Possible system malfunctions............................................ ....................................26-7

26.2 Thermal smoke equipment ............................................... ................................................ ..26-7

26.2.1 Work of TDA ............................................. ................................................ ..........................26-7

26.3 Deformable coating ............................................... ................................................ .26-9

27 WINCH ................................................... ................................................ ..............................27-1

27.1 Safety measures when working with a winch................................................. .............................27-1

27.2 Purpose and installation of the winch................................................. ............................................27-1

27.3 Winch device ............................................... ................................................ .............27-1

27.4 Winch block................................................... ................................................ .........................27-4

27.5 Care of the winch............................................... ................................................ ...................27-5

27.5.1 Changing the oil in the winch................................................. ................................................ .........27-5

27.6 Possible malfunctions of the winch............................................... ......................................27-5

28 LIVING SECURITY SYSTEM .............................................. ...............28-1

28.1 Heating system................................................... ................................................ ...............28-1

28.1.1 Composition of the heating system................................................ ................................................ ..28-1

28.1.2 Design and operation of the heating system ........................................... ..............................28-1

28.2 Air conditioner................................................... ................................................ ........................28-3

28.2.1 Purpose of the air conditioner................................................. ................................................ ..28-3

28.2.2 Composition and placement of the air conditioner ........................................... .....................................28-3

28.2.3 Operation of the air conditioner................................................. ............................................28-7

28.2.4 Operation of the air conditioner ............................................. .....................................28-7

28.2.5 Refueling the air conditioner ............................................. ................................................ ......28-9

28.3 Ventilation system................................................... ................................................ .............28-14

28.3.1 Composition and placement of the ventilation system............................................ ..........................28-14

28.3.2 Device and operation of the ventilation system ........................................... ............................28-15

28.8.3 Possible malfunctions of the ventilation system and methods of their elimination.................28-16

28.4 Thermal insulation................................................... ................................................ .....................28-17

29 DRIVING THE MACHINE ................................................... ................................................ .....29-1

29.1 Safety measures when driving a car ............................................. ..........................29-1

29.2 Preparing the machine for movement................................................. ..........................................29-2

29.3 Preparing the engine for starting ............................................... ................................................29- 2

29.3.1 Preparing the engine for starting at ambient air temperature

higher than 278 K (5°C)................................................. ................................................ ...................29-2

29.3.2 Preparing the engine for starting at ambient air temperature

12
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

below 278 K (5°C)............................................. ................................................ ....................29-2

29.4 Starting the engine using the starter (electric start)................................................ .....29-5

29.5 Starting the engine using a starter and an external air device

(combined launch) .............................................. ................................................ ....29-6

29.6 Warming up the engine................................................... ................................................ ................29-7

29.7 Stopping the engine .............................................. ................................................ ............29-8

29.8 Control of the operation of the engine and its systems................................................. ................................29-9

29.9 Driving the machine on land ............................................. ................................................29- 10

29.9.1 Machine control in automatic mode ........................................... .................29-10

29.9.2 Controlling the machine in manual mode ........................................... ................................29-12

29.9.3 Controlling the machine in emergency mode ........................................... ..........................29-12

29.9.4 Basic rules for driving a car on land................................................. .................29-13

29.9.5 Shifting gears in the transfer case ........................................... ....................29-15

29.9.6 Driving a car in difficult road conditions............................................ ..............29-16

29.10 Rules for driving a car afloat ............................................. ..............................29-21

29.10.1 Actions of the driver when preparing the car to float................................................. ...........29-21

29.10.2 Rules for driving a car on water ........................................... ................................29-23

29.10.3 Actions of the driver when the car leaves the water............................................. .................29-24

29.11 Car towing................................................... ................................................ ...........29-25

29.11.1 Towing a car on land ........................................... ..............................................29-25

29.11.2 Towing a car afloat............................................ ..............................................29-27

29.11.3 Self-extraction of the machine or extraction of the same type of machine with help

winches ................................................... ................................................ ....................29-29

29.11.4 Pulling out a stuck machine with the help of the same type of machine ......................29-30
30 TRANSPORTATION ................................................ ................................................ .30-1

30.1 Transportation of cars by railway transport ..........................................30-1

30.1.1 Safety measures during loading and unloading operations...................................30-1

30.1.2 Preparation of machines for loading ......................................... ..............................................30-2

30.1.3 Loading and fastening machines on the platform ......................................... ..........................30-2

30.1.4 Unloading machines from platforms............................................ .................................................30 -5

30.2 Transportation of machines by air transport................................................. ..........30-5

30.3 Transportation of cars by water transport................................................. ................30-8

31 STORAGE ................................................... ................................................ ..........................31-1

31.1 The procedure for storing the machine and putting it into operation at the place of operation...................31-1

31.1.1 Procedure for storing the machine................................................. ................................................ .31-2

31.1.2 Preparing the machine for use after storage............................................ ........31-4

thirteen
Machine Translated by Google
B1318E RE

31.1.3 The procedure for putting the machine into operation at the place of operation ....................................... ...31-6

31.2 Information on the qualification and number of service personnel............................31-7

32 MAINTENANCE................................................... ................................32-1

32.1 Types and periodicity of maintenance ............................................. ............32-1

32.2 Safety measures when servicing the machine................................................. ...................32-1
32.3 Inspections................................................... ................................................ .........32-3
32.3.1 Control inspection before leaving the car ........................................... .....................32-3
32.3.2 Control inspection at bus stops................................................. ......................................32-6
32.4 Daily maintenance (ETO), maintenance
Maintenance No. 1 (TO-1) and Maintenance No. 2 (TO-2) ................................ ................32-7
32.5 Maintenance of weapons ............................................... ..............................32-19
33 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES ..............................33-1
33.1 Jack ................................................... ................................................ ................................33-2
33.2 Lever-plunger syringe............................................... .................................................33 -4
33.3 Syringe for filling oil ............................................... ................................................ ...33-5
34 SEALING................................................... ................................................ ...........34-1

34.1 Qualification of types of sealing of units, aggregates and devices ....................................34-1

34.2 List of sealable units, units and devices.......................................... ...........34-1
35 DISPOSAL................................................... ................................................ .....................35-1
Appendix A Refueling containers................................................... ........................................A-1
Appendix B Map of fuels and lubricants ........................................... ...................B-1
Appendix B Fuels, lubricants and cooling liquids authorized for use
and their international equivalents .............................................. ......................B-1
Appendix D List of conditional abbreviated................................................... ........................G-1

14